2021 Ford Bronco

2021 FORD BRONCO Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2021
All rights reserved.

Part Number: 202101 20210412183626
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and

maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle
in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and

related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Table of Contents
Contacting Us Rear Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With:

Hard Top .......................................................38
Contacting Us ..................................................15
Rear Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With:
Soft Top ........................................................39
Introduction
About This Publication .................................17 Child Safety
Using This Publication .................................18 Child Safety Precautions ...........................40
Child Restraint Anchor Points ...................41
Symbols Glossary Child Restraints ..............................................42
Symbols Used on Your Vehicle .................19 Installing Child Restraints ..........................44
Booster Seats .................................................48
Data Privacy Child Safety Locks ........................................50
Data Privacy .....................................................22
Service Data ....................................................23 Seatbelts
Event Data ........................................................23 Seatbelt Precautions ...................................52
Settings Data ..................................................24 Fastening and Unfastening the Seatbelts
Connected Vehicle Data .............................24 ...........................................................................53
Mobile Device Data .......................................25 Sensitive Locking Mode ..............................53
Emergency Call System Data ...................25 Automatic Locking Mode ...........................54
Adjusting the Seatbelts During
Visual Search Pregnancy ....................................................54
Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Cruise Seatbelt Reminder .......................................54
Control, Vehicles Without: Lane Checking the Seatbelts ..............................56
Keeping Aid .................................................26 Seatbelt Extensions ......................................57
Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control .............................................27
Personal Safety System™
Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control/Lane Keeping Aid .....................28 What Is the Personal Safety System
..........................................................................58
Instrument Panel ..........................................29
How Does the Personal Safety System
Center Console - Manual Transmission Work ...............................................................58
..........................................................................30
Personal Safety System Components
Center Console - Automatic ..........................................................................58
Transmission ................................................31
Vehicle Interior - 2-Door ..............................32
Airbags
Vehicle Interior - 4-Door .............................33
How Do the Front Airbags Work ..............59
Front Exterior - 2-Door ................................34
How Do the Side Airbags Work ...............59
Front Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With:
Hard Top .......................................................35 How Does the Safety Canopy™ Work
..........................................................................60
Front Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With:
Soft Top ........................................................36 Airbag Precautions ........................................61
Rear Exterior - 2-Door ..................................37 Properly Adjusting the Driver and Front
Passenger Seats ........................................62
Children and Airbags ...................................62
2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Front Passenger Sensing System ...........63 Mislock ...............................................................79

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ......66 Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting
Disposing of Airbags ....................................67 ...........................................................................79
911 Assist Keyless Entry

What Is 911 Assist .........................................68 Keyless Entry Limitations ...........................82
Emergency Call Requirements ................68 Keyless Entry Settings .................................82
Emergency Call Limitations ......................68 Using Keyless Entry ......................................82
Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting ............83
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Control Limitations .....................69 Tailgate
Using the Remote Control .........................69 Opening the Tailgate ...................................84
Removing the Key Blade ............................70 Closing the Tailgate .....................................84
Sounding the Panic Alarm .........................70 Locking and Unlocking the Tailgate .......84
Locating Your Vehicle ..................................70 Tailgate – Troubleshooting .......................86
Changing the Remote Control Battery
...........................................................................70 Security
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control Passive Anti-Theft System ........................87
............................................................................71 Security – Troubleshooting .......................87
Programming the Remote Control .........72
Keys and Remote Controls – Steering Wheel
Troubleshooting .........................................73
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ..................89
Horn ...................................................................89
MyKey™
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
What Is MyKey ................................................74 On and Off ..................................................89
MyKey Settings ...............................................74
Creating a MyKey ...........................................75 Wipers and Washers
Programming a MyKey ................................75 Wipers ...............................................................90
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................75 Switching the Rear Window Wiper On
Checking MyKey System Status ..............76 and Off .........................................................90
Using MyKey With Remote Start Reverse Wipe .................................................90
Systems ........................................................76 Checking the Wiper Blades ........................91
MyKey – Troubleshooting ..........................76 Replacing the Front Wiper Blades ...........91
Replacing the Rear Wiper Blades ...........92
Doors and Locks Washers ............................................................92
Operating the Doors From Outside Your Wipers and Washers – Troubleshooting
Vehicle ...........................................................78 ..........................................................................9 3
Operating the Doors From Inside Your
Vehicle ...........................................................78
Exterior Lighting
Autounlock .......................................................78
Exterior Lighting Control ............................94
Autolock ............................................................79
Table of Contents
Headlamps ......................................................94 Fuel Gauge .....................................................106

Headlamps – Troubleshooting ................94 What Is the Engine Coolant Temperature
Autolamps .......................................................95 Gauge ...........................................................107
Exterior Lamps ...............................................95 What Is the Transmission Fluid
Temperature Gauge ................................107
Exterior Zone Lighting ..................................97
What Is the Turbo Boost Gauge - 2.3L
Automatic High Beam Control ................98 EcoBoost™ ................................................107
Automatic High Beam Control – What Is the Information Bar ....................107
Troubleshooting ......................................100
What Are the Instrument Cluster
Warning Lamps ........................................107
Interior Lighting Instrument Cluster Warning Lamps .....108
Switching All of the Interior Lamps On What Are the Instrument Cluster
and Off .........................................................101 Indicators ...................................................109
Switching the Front Interior Lamps On Instrument Cluster Indicators ................109
and Off .........................................................101
Switching the Rear Interior Lamps On
and Off .........................................................101 Instrument Cluster Display
Interior Lamp Function ...............................101 Using the Instrument Cluster Display
Controls ........................................................112
Adjusting the Instrument Panel Lighting
Brightness ..................................................102 Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu
..........................................................................112
Ambient Lighting .........................................102
Trip Computer ................................................113
Interior Lighting – Troubleshooting ......102
Personalized Settings .................................113
Windows
Remote Start
Opening and Closing the Windows ......103
What Is Remote Start .................................114
Window Bounce-Back ..............................103
Remote Start Precautions ........................114
Locking the Rear Window Controls ......103
Remote Start Limitations ..........................114
Enabling Remote Start ...............................114
Interior Mirror
Remotely Starting and Stopping the
Interior Mirror Precautions .......................104 Vehicle ..........................................................114
Manually Dimming the Interior Mirror Remote Start Remote Control Indicators
........................................................................104 ..........................................................................115
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror .................104 Remote Start Settings ................................115
Exterior Mirrors Climate Control - Vehicles

Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors .................105 With: Automatic
Folding the Exterior Mirrors .....................105 Temperature Control
Identifying the Climate Control Unit ......117
Instrument Cluster Switching Climate Control On and Off
Instrument Cluster Overview .................106 ..........................................................................117
What Is the Tachometer ...........................106 Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
..........................................................................117
What Is the Speedometer .......................106
Table of Contents
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off Front Seats

..........................................................................117
Front Seat Precautions .............................126
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
..........................................................................117 Sitting in the Correct Position .................126
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off Manual Seats .................................................127
..........................................................................117 Power Seats ...................................................129
Switching the Heated Rear Window On Heated Seats .................................................132
and Off .........................................................118
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off Rear Seats
..........................................................................118
Manual Seats ................................................133
Setting the Blower Motor Speed ............118
Setting the Temperature ...........................118
Rear Occupant Alert System
Directing the Flow of Air .............................118
Auto Mode .......................................................119 What is the Rear Occupant Alert System
Climate Control Hints ................................120 .........................................................................136
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
Climate Control - Vehicles System Work .............................................136
With: Manual Temperature Rear Occupant Alert System Precautions
Control .........................................................................136
Identifying the Climate Control Unit ......122 Rear Occupant Alert System Limitations
.........................................................................136
Switching Climate Control On and Off
.........................................................................122 Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
On and Off .................................................136
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
.........................................................................122 Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators
.........................................................................137
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off
.........................................................................122 Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Warnings .....................................................137
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
.........................................................................122
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off Garage Door Opener
.........................................................................122 What Is the Garage Door Opener ..........138
Switching the Heated Rear Window On How Does the Garage Door Opener Work
and Off .........................................................122 .........................................................................138
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off Garage Door Opener Precautions .........138
.........................................................................123 Garage Door Opener Limitations ..........138
Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........123 Programming the Garage Door Opener
Setting the Temperature ...........................123 to Your Hand-Held Transmitter .........139
Directing the Flow of Air ............................123 Programming the Garage Door Opener
Climate Control Hints ................................124 to Your Garage Door Opener Motor
.........................................................................139
Programming the Garage Door Opener
Interior Air Quality to Your Gate Opener Motor .................140
What Is the Cabin Air Filter ......................125 Clearing the Garage Door Opener ........140
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter ..................125
Table of Contents
Reprogramming the Garage Door Opener Starting and Stopping the

..........................................................................141 Engine
Garage Door Opener Radio Frequencies Starting and Stopping the Engine –
..........................................................................141 Precautions .................................................151
Push Button Ignition Switch .....................151
USB Ports Starting the Engine .....................................152
Locating the USB Ports .............................142 Engine Block Heater ...................................153
Playing Media Using the USB Port ........142 Stopping the Engine ...................................154
Charging a Device ........................................143 Automatic Engine Stop .............................155
Accessing the Passive Key Backup
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Position .......................................................156
120V Power Outlet Starting and Stopping the Engine –
What Is the Power Outlet .........................144 Troubleshooting .......................................156
Power Outlet Precautions ........................144
Locating the Power Outlet .......................144 Start in Gear - Manual
Power Outlet Indicators ............................144 Transmission
What Is Start in Gear ..................................159
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: Start in Gear Precautions .........................159
12V Power Outlet Start in Gear Limitations ..........................159
What Is the Power Outlet .........................146 Using Start in Gear ......................................159
Power Outlet Precautions ........................146 Start in Gear – Troubleshooting ............160
Locating the Power Outlet .......................146
Auto-Start-Stop
Wireless Accessory Charger What Is Auto-Start-Stop ...........................161
What Is the Wireless Accessory Charger Auto-Start-Stop Precautions - Manual
.........................................................................147 Transmission ..............................................161
Wireless Accessory Charger Precautions Auto-Start-Stop Precautions -
.........................................................................147 Automatic Transmission .......................161
Locating the Wireless Accessory Charger Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and Off
.........................................................................147 ..........................................................................161
Charging a Wireless Device .....................148 Stopping the Engine - Manual
Wireless Accessory Charger – Transmission ..............................................161
Troubleshooting ......................................148 Stopping the Engine - Automatic
Transmission .............................................162
Storage Restarting the Engine - Manual
Transmission .............................................162
Glove Compartment ..................................149
Restarting the Engine - Automatic
Center Console .............................................149 Transmission .............................................163
Under Floor Storage ...................................150 Auto-Start-Stop Indicators .....................163
Glasses Holder .............................................150 Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting
Map Pocket ....................................................150 .........................................................................163
Table of Contents
Fuel and Refueling Automatic Transmission Audible

Warnings ......................................................181
Fuel and Refueling Precautions ............166
Fuel Quality ....................................................167
Four-Wheel Drive
Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel ................167
How Does Four-Wheel Drive Work - 4x4
Running Out of Fuel ...................................168 with Part Time Engagement ...............182
Refueling ........................................................169 How Does Four-Wheel Drive Work -
Fuel Tank Capacity .......................................171 Advanced 4x4 with 4A Mode .............182
Fuel and Refueling – Troubleshooting Four-Wheel Drive Precautions ...............182
..........................................................................171 Four-Wheel Drive Limitations .................183
Switching Four-Wheel Drive On and Off
Catalytic Converter .........................................................................184
What Is the Catalytic Converter .............173 Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode - 4x4
Catalytic Converter Precautions ............173 with Part Time Engagement ...............185
Catalytic Converter – Troubleshooting Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode -
.........................................................................173 Advanced 4x4 with 4A Mode .............186
Four-Wheel Drive Modes .........................186
Manual Transmission Four-Wheel Drive Indicators ....................187
Manual Transmission Precautions ........174 Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and
Specification .............................................187
Shifting Into Reverse ...................................174
Four-Wheel Drive – Troubleshooting
Crawler Gear ..................................................174 .........................................................................187
Recommended Shift Speeds ..................175
Checking the Manual Transmission Fluid Electronic Locking Differential
Level ..............................................................176
Checking the Clutch Fluid Level .............176
What Is the Electronic Locking
Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity and Differential .................................................190
Specification .............................................176
Switching the Electronic Locking
Clutch Fluid Capacity and Specification Differential On and Off .........................190
.........................................................................176
Electronic Locking Differential Indicators
Manual Transmission – Troubleshooting ..........................................................................191
..........................................................................177
Electronic Locking Differential –
Troubleshooting .......................................192
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission Precautions Brakes
.........................................................................178
Brake Precautions .......................................194
Automatic Transmission Positions .......178
Anti-Lock Braking System .......................194
Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear ...............179
Brake Over Accelerator .............................194
Automatic Transmission Position
Indicators ....................................................179 Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir - 2.3L
EcoBoost™ ...............................................194
Manually Shifting Gears ...........................180
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir - 2.7L
Brake Shift Interlock ..................................180 EcoBoost™ ...............................................194
Checking the Brake Fluid ..........................194
Table of Contents
Brake Fluid Specification ..........................195 Stability Control Indicator .......................206

Brakes – Troubleshooting ........................195
Trail Control
Electric Parking Brake What Is Trail Control ..................................207
What Is the Electric Parking Brake .......198 Trail Control Limitations ...........................207
Applying the Electric Parking Brake ......198 Switching Trail Control On and Off ......207
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an Setting the Trail Control Speed .............207
Emergency .................................................198 Canceling the Set Speed ........................208
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking Trail Control Indicators .............................208
Brake ............................................................198
Trail One Pedal Drive ................................208
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake ............................................198 Trail One Pedal Drive – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................210
Electric Parking Brake Audible Warning
........................................................................199 Trail Control – Troubleshooting ..............211
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if
the Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of Trail Turn Assist
Charge .........................................................199 What Is Trail Turn Assist ............................212
Electric Parking Brake – Troubleshooting Trail Turn Assist Precautions ...................212
........................................................................199
Trail Turn Assist Limitations .....................212
Switching Trail Turn Assist On and Off
Hill Start Assist .........................................................................212
What Is Hill Start Assist ............................201 Trail Turn Assist Indicators .......................212
How Does Hill Start Assist Work ...........201 Trail Turn Assist – Troubleshooting ......213
Hill Start Assist Precautions ...................201
Switching Hill Start Assist On and Off - Stabilizer Bar Disconnect
Manual Transmission ............................201
What Is the Stabilizer Bar Disconnect
Switching Hill Start Assist On and Off - .........................................................................214
Automatic Transmission ......................201
Stabilizer Bar Disconnect Precautions
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting .......201 .........................................................................214
Switching the Stabilizer Bar Disconnect
Traction Control On and Off .................................................214
What Is Traction Control ..........................202 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect Indicators
How Does Traction Control Work .........202 .........................................................................215
Switching Traction Control On and Off Stabilizer Bar Disconnect –
........................................................................202 Troubleshooting .......................................215
Traction Control Indicator .......................202
Traction Control – Troubleshooting .....203 Hill Descent Control - Manual
Transmission
Stability Control What Is Hill Descent Control ....................217
How Does Stability Control Work ........204 How Does Hill Descent Control Work
..........................................................................217
Switching Stability Control On and Off
........................................................................205 Hill Descent Control Precautions ...........217
Table of Contents
Switching Hill Descent Control On and Switching Cruise Control On and Off
Off ..................................................................217 ........................................................................232
Setting the Hill Descent Speed ...............217 Setting the Cruise Control Speed .........232
Hill Descent Control Indicator .................217 Canceling the Set Speed .........................233
Hill Descent Control – Troubleshooting Resuming the Set Speed .........................233
.........................................................................218 Cruise Control Indicators ..........................233
Steering Adaptive Cruise Control

Electric Power Steering .............................219 How Does Adaptive Cruise Control Work
Steering – Troubleshooting ....................220 ........................................................................234
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions
Parking Aids ........................................................................234
Parking Aid Precautions ...........................222 Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations
........................................................................235
Switching Parking Aid On and Off ........222
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................223 and Off ........................................................237
Front Parking Aid .........................................223 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Parking Aid Indicators ...............................225 Speed ..........................................................237
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting ............225 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap
........................................................................238
Rear View Camera Canceling the Set Speed .........................239
What Is the Rear View Camera .............226 Resuming the Set Speed .........................239
Rear View Camera Precautions ............226 Overriding the Set Speed ........................239
Locating the Rear View Camera ...........226 Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators ......240
Rear View Camera Guide Lines .............226 Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
to Cruise Control ....................................240
Rear View Camera Object Distance
Indicators ....................................................227 Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting .....................................240
Rear View Camera Settings ....................227
G.O.A.T. Mode Control
360 Degree Camera
What Is G.O.A.T. Mode Control ..............242
What Is the 360 Degree Camera ..........229
How Does G.O.A.T. Mode Control Work
How Does the 360 Degree Camera Work ........................................................................242
........................................................................229
Selecting a G.O.A.T. Mode ........................242
360 Degree Camera Precautions .........229
G.O.A.T. Modes .............................................243
360 Degree Camera Limitations ..........229
G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Troubleshooting
Locating the 360 Degree Cameras ......230 ........................................................................246
360 Degree Camera Guide Lines .........230
360 Degree Camera Settings .................231 Lane Keeping System
What Is the Lane Keeping System .......249
Cruise Control How Does the Lane Keeping System
What Is Cruise Control ..............................232 Work ............................................................249
Table of Contents
Lane Keeping System Precautions ......249 Switching Cross Traffic Alert On and Off
Lane Keeping System Limitations .......249 ........................................................................259
Switching the Lane Keeping System On Locating the Cross Traffic Alert Sensors
and Off .......................................................250 .......................................................................260
Switching the Lane Keeping System Cross Traffic Alert Indicators .................260
Mode ...........................................................250 Cross Traffic Alert – Troubleshooting
Alert Mode ....................................................250 .........................................................................261
Aid Mode .........................................................251
Alert and Aid Mode .....................................251 Pre-Collision Assist
Lane Keeping System Indicators ...........252 What Is Pre-Collision Assist ...................262
Lane Keeping System – Troubleshooting How Does Pre-Collision Assist Work
........................................................................253 ........................................................................262
Pre-Collision Assist Precautions ...........262
Blind Spot Information Pre-Collision Assist Limitations ............263
System Switching Pre-Collision Assist On and
Off ................................................................264
What Is Blind Spot Information System
........................................................................256 Locating the Pre-Collision Assist Sensors
........................................................................264
How Does Blind Spot Information
System Work ............................................256 Distance Indication ....................................264
Blind Spot Information System Automatic Emergency Braking .............266
Precautions ...............................................256 Evasive Steering Assist ............................266
Blind Spot Information System Pre-Collision Assist – Troubleshooting
Limitations ................................................256 ........................................................................267
Blind Spot Information System
Requirements - Manual Transmission Driver Alert
........................................................................256
What Is Driver Alert ....................................269
Blind Spot Information System
Requirements - Automatic How Does Driver Alert Work ...................269
Transmission ............................................257 Driver Alert Precautions ...........................269
Switching Blind Spot Information Driver Alert Limitations ............................269
System On and Off ................................257
Switching Driver Alert On and Off ........270
Locating the Blind Spot Information
System Sensors .......................................257 Driver Alert Indicators ................................270
Blind Spot Information System Driver Alert – Troubleshooting ...............270
Indicators ...................................................258
Blind Spot Information System – Load Carrying
Troubleshooting ......................................258 Load Carrying Precautions .......................271
Locating the Safety Compliance
Cross Traffic Alert Certification Labels ................................272
What Is Cross Traffic Alert ......................259 What Is the Gross Axle Weight Rating
How Does Cross Traffic Alert Work ......259 .........................................................................272
Cross Traffic Alert Precautions ..............259 What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.........................................................................272
Cross Traffic Alert Limitations ...............259
Table of Contents
What Is the Maximum Loaded Trailer Floor Mats .....................................................298

Weight .........................................................272
What Is the Gross Combined Weight Crash and Breakdown
Rating ..........................................................272 Information
Calculating Payload ...................................274
Roadside Assistance .................................299
Calculating the Load Limit ......................274
Switching the Hazard Flashers On and
Roof Rack .......................................................276 Off ...............................................................300
Fender Anchor Points ................................279 Jump Starting the Vehicle ......................300
Post-Crash Alert System .........................302
Rear Cargo Area Automatic Crash Shutoff ........................302
Rear Cargo Area Anchor Points ............280 Recovery Towing .........................................303
Transporting the Vehicle .........................305
Connecting a Trailer
Connecting a Trailer Precautions ..........281 Towing Your Vehicle
Connecting a Trailer ....................................281 Towing Your Vehicle Precautions .........306
Connecting a Trailer – Troubleshooting Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle -
........................................................................282 Manual Transmission ...........................306
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle -
Towing a Trailer Automatic Transmission ......................307
Towing a Trailer Precautions ..................283 Emergency Towing ....................................309
Trailer Brake Precautions .........................283 Towing Your Vehicle – Troubleshooting
Towing a Trailer Limitations ...................284 .......................................................................309
Loading Your Trailer ...................................284
Trailer Towing Hints ...................................284
Fuses
Fuse Precautions .........................................310
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft ..............................285 Under Hood Fuse Box ................................310
Towing Weights and Dimensions .........286 Body Control Module Fuse Box ..............314
Towing a Trailer – Troubleshooting ......287 Identifying Fuse Types ...............................317
Fuses – Troubleshooting ...........................317
Trailer Sway Control
How Does Trailer Sway Control Work Maintenance
........................................................................288 Maintenance Precautions ........................318
Trailer Sway Control Precautions .........288 Opening and Closing the Hood ..............318
Switching Trailer Sway Control On and Under Hood Overview - 2.3L EcoBoost™
Off ................................................................288 .........................................................................319
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L EcoBoost™
Driving Hints ........................................................................320
Off-Road Driving ........................................289 Engine Oil ........................................................321
Cold Weather Precautions ......................297 Checking the Coolant ................................322
Breaking-In ....................................................297 Changing the Engine Air Filter ...............326
Driving Economically .................................297 Changing the Fuel Filter ...........................326
10
Table of Contents
Changing the 12V Battery ........................326 Tire Care

Adjusting the Headlamps ........................329 Checking the Tire Pressures ...................379
Exterior Bulbs ...............................................330 Inflating the Tires ........................................379
Interior Bulbs ................................................332 Inspecting the Tire for Wear ...................380
Drive Belt Routing - 2.3L EcoBoost™ Inspecting the Tire for Damage ............380
........................................................................332
Inspecting the Wheel Valve Stems .......381
Drive Belt Routing - 2.7L EcoBoost™
........................................................................333 Tire Rotation ..................................................381
Removable Vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring

Components System
Removable Windows ................................334 What Is the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .......................................................383
Removable Doors .......................................339
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Removable Roof Panels ..........................343 Overview ....................................................383
Removable Hard Top .................................347 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Removable Soft Top .................................348 Precautions ..............................................384
Removable Fenders ....................................351 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Storing the Doors and the Roof Panels - Limitations ................................................384
4-Door .........................................................352 Viewing the Tire Pressures ......................385
Storing the Roof Panels - 2-Door .........359 Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Troubleshooting .....................................385
Vehicle Care
Cleaning Products .....................................360
Changing a Road Wheel
Cleaning the Exterior ................................360 Changing a Flat Tire ...................................387
Cleaning the Interior ..................................362 Wheel Nuts ...................................................392
Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............364
Waxing Your Vehicle ..................................364
Capacities and Specifications
Storing Your Vehicle Engine Specifications - 2.3L EcoBoost™

........................................................................393
Preparing Your Vehicle for Storage ......366 Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™
Removing Your Vehicle From Storage ........................................................................394
........................................................................367 Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....395
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™ .....396
Wheel and Tire Information Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
Locating the Tire label ..............................368 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....................................397
Department of Transportation Uniform Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
Tire Quality Grades ................................368 2.7L EcoBoost™ .....................................398
Information on the Tire Sidewall .........369 Cooling System Capacity and
Glossary of Tire Terminology ..................374 Specification - 2.3L EcoBoost™ ......400
Tire Replacement Requirements ..........375 Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 2.7L EcoBoost™ ........401
Using Snow Chains .....................................377
11
Table of Contents
Fuel Tank Capacity .....................................401 Playing or Pausing the Audio Source

Air Conditioning System Capacity and .........................................................................414
Specification ............................................402 Adjusting the Volume ................................414
Washer Fluid Specification .....................402 Switching Shuffle Mode On and Off
Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity and .........................................................................415
Specification ............................................403 Switching Repeat Mode On and Off
Clutch Fluid Capacity and Specification .........................................................................415
.......................................................................403 Setting a Memory Preset ..........................415
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity Muting the Audio .........................................415
and Specification ...................................403 Adjusting the Sound Settings .................415
Brake Fluid Specification ........................404 Setting the Clock and Date ......................415
Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and AM/FM Radio ................................................416
Specification ............................................405
Switching the Display On and Off .........417
Front Axle Fluid Capacity and
Specification ............................................405 Digital Radio ...................................................417
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and Satellite Radio ..............................................418
Specification ...........................................406 Audio System – Troubleshooting ..........421
Identifying the Audio Unit .......................424
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number ..............408 Center Display Overview
Center Display Precautions ....................425
Connected Vehicle Center Display Limitations ......................425
What Is a Connected Vehicle ................409 Status Bar ......................................................425
Connected Vehicle Requirements .......409 Feature Bar ...................................................426
Connected Vehicle Limitations ............409 Information On Demand Screen -
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Screen .........427
Network .....................................................409
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Voice Interaction
Network .....................................................409 What is Voice Interaction ........................428
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting Setting the Wake Word ............................428
........................................................................410
Beginning a Voice Interaction ................428
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Voice Interaction Examples ....................428
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot ..........412
Phone
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password .................................412 Phone Precautions ......................................431
Connecting Your Phone ............................431
Audio System Phone Menu ..................................................431
Audio System Precautions ......................414 Making and Receiving a Phone Call .....433
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off Sending and Receiving a Text Message
.........................................................................414 ........................................................................434
Selecting the Audio Source .....................414 Switching Text Message Notification On
and Off .......................................................435
12
Table of Contents
Bluetooth® Ford Protect

Connecting a Bluetooth® Device .........436 What Is Ford Protect .................................450
Playing Media Using Bluetooth® .........436
Scheduled Maintenance
Apps General Maintenance Information .......452
App Precautions ..........................................437 Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........455
App Requirements .....................................437 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Accessing Apps ...........................................437 Maintenance .............................................457
Enabling Apps on an iOS Device ...........437
Enabling Apps on an Android Device Customer Information
........................................................................437 Rollover Warning .........................................461
Switching Apple CarPlay On and Off Our Sustainability Report .........................461
........................................................................438 The Better Business Bureau Auto Line
Switching Android Auto On and Off ....438 Program - United States of America
.........................................................................461
Navigation The Mediation and Arbitration Program
- Canada ....................................................462
Accessing Navigation ...............................440
Ordering a Canadian French Owner's
Navigation Map Updates ........................440 Manual .......................................................462
Adjusting the Map .....................................440 Reporting Safety Defects in the United
Live Traffic ....................................................440 States .........................................................463
Setting a Destination ................................440 Reporting Safety Defects in Canada
Waypoints ......................................................441 ........................................................................463
Route Guidance ...........................................441 Radio Frequency Certification Labels
.......................................................................464
California Proposition 65 - United States
Vehicle System Updates of America ................................................494
Updating the Vehicle Systems Wirelessly Perchlorate ...................................................495
........................................................................443
Replacement Parts Recommendation
Performing a Master Reset .....................444 .......................................................................495
Mobile Communications Equipment
Accessories .......................................................................496
Accessories ...................................................445 End User License Agreement ................496
Emission Law ................................................521
Auxiliary Switches Export Unique Options .............................522
What Are the Auxiliary Switches ..........447
Locating the Auxiliary Switches ............447 Appendices
Locating the Auxiliary Switch Wiring Electromagnetic Compatibility .............524
........................................................................447
Identifying the Auxiliary Switch Wiring
.......................................................................449
13
14
Contacting Us
If you require assistance or clarification on China - Imported Vehicle

policies or procedures, please contact the
customer relationship center. Customer Relationship Center
Telephone: 400-690-1886
United States Website: https://www.ford.com.cn/
Ford Motor Company China - Chang’An Ford
Customer Relationship Center
PO Box 6248 Customer Relationship Center
Dearborn, MI 48126 Telephone: 800-810-8168
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) Mobile: 400-887-7766
(TDD for the hearing impaired: Website: https://www.ford.com.cn/
1-888-658-6805
www.ford.com/help/contact/ Asia Pacific
E-mail: [email protected]
Canada
Customer Relationship Center Caribbean, Central America and
Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Israel
P.O. Box 2000 Ford Motor Company
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 Ford Export Operations
1-800-565-3673 (FORD) Attention: Owner Relations
www.ford.ca 1555 Fairlane Drive
Facebook: FordServiceCA (English), Fairlane Business Park #3
FordServiceQC (Francais) Allen Park, MI 48101
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Europe Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Telephone: 02035644444 E-mail: [email protected]
Twitter: @forduk U.S. Virgin Islands and Puerto Rico
Ford Motor Company
Australia Ford Export Operations
Ford Motor Company Attention: Owner Relations
Attention: Customer Relationship Centre 1555 Fairlane Drive
Private Mail Bag 5 Fairlane Business Park #3
Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, MI 48101
Campbellfield, Victoria, 3061 Telephone: (800) 841-3673
Telephone: 13 3673 (FORD) E-mail: [email protected]
Argentina
New Zealand Telephone: 0800-888-3673
Ford Motor Company
Attention: Customer Relationship Centre Brazil
Private Bag 76912 www.ford.com.br
Manukau City 2241
Telephone: 0800 367 369 (FORDNZ)
15
Contacting Us
North Africa For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for

more information about Ford Credit and
E-mail: [email protected] access to an account manager, visit
www.ford.com/finance.
Sub-Saharan Africa
Puerto Rico
Ford International Business Development,
Inc.
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, PR 00922-1957
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
Fax: (313) 390-0804
www.ford.com.pr
Middle East
Ford Middle East Customer Relationship
Center
P.O. Box 21740
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: 80004441066
Toll-free number for the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell phone users in Saudi
Arabia: 800850078
Kuwait: 22280384
Local telephone number for Kuwait: +965
1 898900
Fax: +971 4 3327266
www.me.ford.com
South Korea
Telephone: +82-02-1600-6003
Ford Credit - US Only

Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
16
Introduction
ABOUT THIS PUBLICATION Our digital resources include a

comprehensive digital Owner’s Manual
dynamically created according to the
features on your vehicle by using the
WARNING: Driving while distracted vehicle identification number. See
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash Locating the Vehicle Identification
and injury. We strongly recommend that Number (page 408). The digital Owner’s
you use extreme caution when using any Manual includes visual and full text search
device that may take your focus off the functions so that you can quickly locate
road. Your primary responsibility is the the information you are looking for. It also
safe operation of your vehicle. We includes links to a number of how-to
recommend against the use of any videos created to help you understand
hand-held device while driving and some of the advanced technologies on
encourage the use of voice-operated your vehicle.
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws Features and Options
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving. This publication describes product features
and options available throughout the range
WARNING: You risk death, fire, or of available models, sometimes even
serious injury to yourself and others if you before they are generally available. It could
do not follow the instruction highlighted describe options that are not available on
by the warning symbol. the vehicle you have purchased.
Thank you for choosing Ford. We Illustrations

recommend that you take some time to Some of the illustrations in this publication
get to know your vehicle in order to benefit could show features as used in different
from greater safety and pleasure from models, so they could appear different to
driving it. Use this publication to familiarize you on your vehicle.
yourself with the basics and then read the
digital version, that is available in your Location of Components
vehicle. You can also view the
comprehensive manual through the This manual may qualify the location of a
FordPass app and through the local Ford component as left-hand side or right-hand
website. side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
Note: To download the FordPass app, visit
your device's app store.
Note: To find the local Ford website, visit
https://corporate.ford.com/operations/
locations/global-links.html.
Note: Use and operate your vehicle in line
with all applicable laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on all printed owner’s
information when selling this vehicle.
17
Introduction
E154903
A Right-hand side.
B Left-hand side.
USING THIS PUBLICATION

To quickly locate information about your
vehicle, use the word search within the
Owner's Manual application.
18
Symbols Glossary
SYMBOLS USED ON YOUR Child seat tether anchor

E141128
VEHICLE
Cruise control
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle. E332905
Air conditioning system Do not open when hot

E162384
Air conditioning system lubricant Electric Parking brake

E231157 type
Anti-lock braking system Engine air filter
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Engine coolant
Battery
Engine coolant temperature
Battery acid Engine oil
Brake fluid - non petroleum Explosive gas

based
Brake system Fan warning
Brake system Fasten seatbelt

E270480
E71880
Cabin air filter Flammable
E139223
E231160
Check fuel cap Airbag

E67017
Child safety door lock or unlock Front fog lamps
Child seat lower anchor Fuel pump reset
19
Symbols Glossary
Fuse compartment Passenger airbag deactivated

E270850
Hazard flashers Power steering fluid
Heated rear window Power windows front/rear
Windshield defrosting system Power window lockout
Interior luggage compartment Requires registered technician

release E231159
Jack Safety alert

E65963
Keep out of reach of children See Owner's Manual
E161353
Lighting control See Service Manual

E231158
Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Low tire pressure warning
(MIL)
Side airbag
Maintain correct fluid level
Shield the eyes

Note operating instructions
E167012
Stability control
Horn control
E138639
E270945
Hill descent control
Panic alarm
E163171
Trail control
Parking aid
E332910
E139213
Windshield wiping system
Passenger airbag activated
E270969
E270849
20
Symbols Glossary
Windshield wash and wipe

E132353
21
Data Privacy
• Events or errors in essential systems,

WARNING: Do not connect for example headlamps and brakes.
wireless plug-in devices to the data link • System responses to driving situations,
connector. Unauthorized third parties for example airbag deployment and
could gain access to vehicle data and stability control.
impair the performance of safety related • Environmental conditions, for example
systems. Only allow repair facilities that temperature.
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data Some of this data, when used in
link connector. combination with other information, for
example an accident report, damage to a
We respect your privacy and are vehicle or eyewitness statements, could
committed to protecting it. The be associated with a specific person.
information contained in this manual was
Services That We Provide
correct at the time of publication, but as
technology rapidly changes, we If you use our services, we collect and use
recommend that you visit the local Ford data, for example account information,
website for the latest information. vehicle location and driving characteristics,
Your vehicle has electronic control units that could identify you. We transmit this
that have data recording functionality and data through a dedicated, protected
the ability to permanently or temporarily connection. We only collect and use data
store data. This data could include to enable your use of our services to which
information on the condition and status of you have subscribed, with your consent or
your vehicle, vehicle maintenance where permitted by law. For additional
requirements, events and malfunctions. information, see the terms and conditions
The types of data that can be recorded are of the services to which you have
described in this section. Some of the data subscribed.
recorded is stored in event logs or error For additional information about our
logs. privacy policy, refer to the local Ford
Note: Error logs are reset following a service website.
or repair.
Services That Third Parties
Note: We may provide information in Provide
response to requests from law enforcement,
other government authorities and third We recommend that you review the terms
parties acting with lawful authority or and conditions and data privacy
through a legal process. Such information information for any services equipped with
could be used by them in legal proceedings. your vehicle or to which you subscribe. We
take no responsibility for services that third
Data recorded includes, for example: parties provide.
• Operating states of system
components, for example fuel level,
tire pressure and battery charge level.
• Vehicle and component status, for
example wheel speed, deceleration,
lateral acceleration and seatbelt
status.
22
Data Privacy
SERVICE DATA you, where permitted by law. For Canada

only, for more information, please review
Service data recorders in your vehicle are the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
capable of collecting and storing www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
diagnostic information about your vehicle. storage and use of service providers in
This potentially includes information about other jurisdictions who may be subject to
the performance or status of various legal requirements in Canada, the United
systems and modules in the vehicle, such States and other countries applicable to
as engine, throttle, steering or brake them, for example, lawful requirements to
systems. In order to properly diagnose and disclose personal information to
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company governmental authorities in those
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service countries.
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic EVENT DATA
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when This vehicle is equipped with an event data
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. recorder. The main purpose of an event
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford data recorder is to record, in certain crash
of Canada, in Canada) may, where or near crash-like situations, such as an
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic airbag deployment or hitting a road
information for vehicle improvement or obstacle; this data will assist in
with other information we may have about understanding how a vehicle’s systems
you, for example, your contact information, performed. The event data recorder is
to offer you products or services that may designed to record data related to vehicle
interest you. Data may be provided to our dynamics and safety systems for a short
service providers such as part suppliers period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
who are similarly obligated to protect data. The event data recorder in this vehicle is
We retain this data only as long as designed to record such data as:
necessary to perform these functions or to • How various systems in your vehicle
comply with law. We may provide were operating.
information where required in response to
• Whether or not the driver and
official requests to law enforcement or
passenger seatbelts were
other government authorities or third
buckled/fastened.
parties acting with lawful authority or court
order, and such information may be used • How far (if at all) the driver was
in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if depressing the accelerator and/or the
equipped), if you choose to use connected brake pedal.
apps and services, you consent that certain • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
diagnostic information may also be • Where the driver was positioning the
accessed electronically by Ford Motor steering wheel.
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic This data can help provide a better
information may be used to provide understanding of the circumstances in
services to you, personalizing your which crashes and injuries occur.
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
23
Data Privacy
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded Entertainment Data

by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the Data recorded includes, for example:
event data recorder under normal driving • Music, videos or album art.
conditions and no personal data or • Contacts and corresponding address
information (for example name, gender, book entries.
age, and crash location) is recorded.
However, parties, such as law enforcement, • Navigation destinations.
could combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying data CONNECTED VEHICLE DATA
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation. The modem has a SIM. The
To read data recorded by an event data modem was enabled when your
recorder, special equipment is required, vehicle was built and periodically
and access to the vehicle or the event data sends messages to stay connected to the
recorder is needed. In addition to the cell phone network, receive automatic
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such software updates and send vehicle-related
as law enforcement, that have such special information to us, for example diagnostic
equipment, can read the information if they information. These messages could
have access to the vehicle or the event include information that identifies your
data recorder. vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial
number of the modem. Cell phone network
service providers could have access to
SETTINGS DATA additional information, for example cell
phone network tower identification. For
Your vehicle has electronic control units additional information about our privacy
that have the ability to store data based policy, visit www.FordConnected.com or
on your personalized settings. The data is refer to your local Ford website.
stored locally in the vehicle or on devices
that you connect to it, for example, a USB Note: The modem continues to send this
drive or digital music player. You can delete information unless you disable the modem
some of this data and also choose whether or stop the modem from sharing vehicle
to share it through the services to which data by changing the modem settings. See
you subscribe. Connected Vehicle (page 409).
Note: The service can be unavailable or
Comfort and Convenience Data interrupted for a number of reasons, for
Data recorded includes, for example: example environmental or topographical
conditions and data plan coverage.
• Seat and steering wheel position.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
• Climate control settings. modem, visit www.FordConnected.com.
• Radio presets.
24
Data Privacy
MOBILE DEVICE DATA The cell phone profile, media device index
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
If you connect a mobile device to your unless you delete them and are generally
vehicle, you can display data from your accessible only in your vehicle when you
device on the touchscreen for example, connect your cell phone or media device.
music and album art. You can share your If you no longer plan to use the system or
vehicle data with mobile apps on your your vehicle, we recommend you use the
device through the system. See App master reset function to erase the stored
Requirements (page 437). information. See Performing a Master
Reset (page 444).
The mobile apps function operates by your
connected device sending data to us in the System data cannot be accessed without
United States. The data is encrypted and special equipment and access to your
includes, for example, the vehicle vehicle's module.
identification number of your vehicle, the For additional information about our
SYNC module serial number, odometer, privacy policy, refer to the local Ford
enabled apps, usage statistics and website.
debugging information. We retain it only
as long as necessary to provide the service, Note: To find out if your vehicle has
to troubleshoot, for continuous connectivity technology, visit
improvement and to offer you products www.FordConnected.com.
and services that may be of interest to you
according to your preferences and where EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
allowed by law.
DATA
If you connect a cell phone to the system,
the system creates a profile that links to When the emergency call system is active,
that cell phone. The cell phone profile it may disclose to emergency services that
enables more mobile features and efficient your vehicle has been in a crash involving
operation. The profile contains, for the deployment of an airbag or activation
example data from your phonebook, read of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions
and unread text messages and call history, or updates to the emergency call system
including history of calls when your cell may also be capable of electronically or
phone was not connected to the system. verbally disclosing to emergency services
If you connect a media device, the system operators your vehicle location or other
creates and retains a media device index details about your vehicle or crash to assist
of supported media content. The system emergency services operators to provide
also records a short diagnostic log of the most appropriate emergency services.
approximately 10 minutes of all recent If you do not want to disclose this
system activity. information, do not activate the emergency
call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency
call systems that are required by law.
25
Visual Search
STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: CRUISE CONTROL,

VEHICLES WITHOUT: LANE KEEPING AID
A B C D E
H G F
E331277
A See Setting the Cruise Control Speed (page 232).

B See Switching Cruise Control On and Off (page 232).
C See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 112).
D See What is Voice Interaction (page 428).
E See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 112).
F See Playing or Pausing the Audio Source (page 414).
G See Adjusting the Volume (page 414).
H See Resuming the Set Speed (page 233).
26
Visual Search
STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE

CONTROL
A B C D E F
I H G
E347990
A See Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Speed (page 237).

B See Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap (page 238).
C See Switching the Lane Keeping System On and Off (page 250).
D See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 112).
E See What is Voice Interaction (page 428).
F See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 112).
G See Playing or Pausing the Audio Source (page 414).
H See Adjusting the Volume (page 414).
I See Resuming the Set Speed (page 239).
27
Visual Search
STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: CRUISE CONTROL/LANE

KEEPING AID
A B C D E F
I H G
E347991
A See Setting the Cruise Control Speed (page 232).

B See Switching Cruise Control On and Off (page 232).
C See Switching the Lane Keeping System On and Off (page 250).
D See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 112).
E See What is Voice Interaction (page 428).
F See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 112).
G See Playing or Pausing the Audio Source (page 414).
H See Adjusting the Volume (page 414).
I See Resuming the Set Speed (page 233).
28
Visual Search
INSTRUMENT PANEL
A C E F
B
D
I H G
E331278
A See Exterior Lighting Control (page 94).

B See Instrument Cluster Overview (page 106).
C See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 152). See Starting a Gasoline Engine
(page 152).
D See Feature Bar (page 426).
E See Switching the Audio Unit On and Off (page 414).
F See Opening the Glove Compartment (page 149).
G See Identifying the Climate Control Unit (page 117).
H See Applying the Electric Parking Brake (page 198).
I See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 318).
29
Visual Search
CENTER CONSOLE - MANUAL TRANSMISSION
A B C D E
E341673
A See Locating the Power Outlet (page 146).

B See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode (page 185).
C See Shifting Into Reverse (page 174).
D See Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors (page 105).
E See Opening and Closing the Windows (page 103).
30
Visual Search
CENTER CONSOLE - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
A B C D E
E331506
A See Locating the Power Outlet (page 146).

B See Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear (page 179).
C See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode (page 185).
E See Opening and Closing the Windows (page 103).
31
Visual Search
VEHICLE INTERIOR - 2-DOOR
A B
C
E331279
A See Moving the Seat Backward and Forward (page 128).

B See Folding the Seats (page 134).
C See Locating the Rear Cargo Area Anchor Points (page 280).
32
Visual Search
VEHICLE INTERIOR - 4-DOOR
A B
C
E341609
A See Moving the Seat Backward and Forward (page 128).

B See Adjusting the Seat Backrest (page 134).
C See Locating the Rear Cargo Area Anchor Points (page 280).
33
Visual Search
FRONT EXTERIOR - 2-DOOR
A B
E D C
E331280
A See Locating the 360 Degree Cameras (page 230).

B See Removing and Installing the Front Roof Panel (page 343).
C See Removing and Installing the Doors (page 339).
D See Removing the Fender Flares (page 351).
E See Accessing the Front Towing Point (page 303).
34
Visual Search
FRONT EXTERIOR - 4-DOOR, VEHICLES WITH: HARD TOP
A B
E D C
E341196

B See Removing and Installing the Front Roof Panel (page 343).
35
Visual Search
FRONT EXTERIOR - 4-DOOR, VEHICLES WITH: SOFT TOP
A B
E D C
E341712

B See Opening and Closing the Soft Top (page 348).
36
Visual Search
REAR EXTERIOR - 2-DOOR
A B C
E D
E331281
A See Changing a Flat Tire (page 387).

B See Removing and Installing the Rear Roof Panel (page 344).
C See Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors (page 105).
D See Storing the Roof Panels (page 359).
E See Recommended Towing Weights (page 286).
37
Visual Search
REAR EXTERIOR - 4-DOOR, VEHICLES WITH: HARD TOP
A B C
E D
E341633

B See Removing and Installing the Rear Roof Panel (page 346).
C See Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors (page 105).
D See Storing the Doors and the Roof Panels (page 352).
E See Recommended Towing Weights (page 286).
38
Visual Search
REAR EXTERIOR - 4-DOOR, VEHICLES WITH: SOFT TOP
A B C D
F E
E341713

B See Removing and Installing the Rear Window (page 337).
C See Removing and Installing the Soft Top (page 350).
E See Storing the Doors and the Roof Panels (page 352).
F See Recommended Towing Weights (page 286).
39
Child Safety
CHILD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
WARNING: Always make sure your very quickly. Exposure of people or
child is secured properly in a device that animals to these high temperatures for
is appropriate for their height, age and even a short time can cause death or
weight. Child safety restraints must be serious heat related injuries, including
bought separately from your vehicle. brain damage. Small children are
Failure to follow these instructions and particularly at risk.
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child. WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
WARNING: All children are shaped an active airbag. Failure to follow this
differently. The National Highway Traffic instruction could result in personal injury
Safety Administration and other safety or death.
organizations, base their
recommendations for child restraints on WARNING: Properly secure
probable child height, age and weight children 12 years old and under in a rear
thresholds, or on the minimum seating position whenever possible. If
requirements of the law. We recommend you are unable to properly secure all
that you check with a NHTSA Certified children in a rear seating position,
Child Passenger Safety Technician properly secure the largest child on the
(CPST) to make sure that you properly front seat. If you must use a forward
install the child restraint in your vehicle facing child restraint on the front seat,
and that you consult your pediatrician to move the seat as far back as possible.
make sure you have a child restraint Failure to follow these instructions could
appropriate for your child. To locate a result in personal injury or death.
child restraint fitting station and CPST,
contact NHTSA toll free at WARNING: Always carefully follow
1-888-327-4236 or go to the instructions and warnings provided
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact by the manufacturer of any child
Transport Canada toll free at restraint to determine if the restraint
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca device is appropriate for your child's size,
to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your height, weight, or age. Follow the child
area. Failure to properly restrain children restraint manufacturer's instructions and
in child restraints made especially for warnings provided for installation and
their height, age and weight, may result use in conjunction with the instructions
in an increased risk of serious injury or and warnings provided by your vehicle
death to your child. manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the
child may increase the risk of serious
injury or death.
40
Child Safety
• Keep the buckle release button

WARNING: Do not allow a pointing up and away from the child
passenger to hold a child on their lap restraint, with the tongue between the
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to child restraint and the release button,
follow this instruction could result in to prevent accidental unbuckling.
personal injury or death in the event of a • Put the seatbelt in the automatic
sudden stop or crash. locking mode.
WARNING: Do not use pillows,

books or towels to boost your child's
CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHOR
height. Failure to follow this instruction POINTS
could result in personal injury or death.
WHAT ARE THE CHILD RESTRAINT
WARNING: Properly secure child ANCHOR POINTS
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles Anchor points allow you to quickly and
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to safely install a child restraint.
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
LOCATING THE CHILD RESTRAINT
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder LOWER ANCHOR POINTS
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the 2-Door
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children

or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
When installing a child restraint with

seatbelts:
• Place the vehicle seat in the upright
position before you install the child E328020
restraint.
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the buckle.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
41
Child Safety
4-Door 4-Door
E323300 E323301
LOCATING THE CHILD RESTRAINT CHILD RESTRAINTS

TOP TETHER ANCHOR POINTS
2-Door CHILD RESTRAINT POSITION
INFORMATION
Install the child restraint tightly against the
vehicle seat. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint.
E328021
Rear Facing Child Restraints

Combined Weight of Child LATCH (Lower Anchors
Seatbelt Only
and Child Restraint Only)
Up to 65 lb (29 kg) X X
Over 65 lb (29 kg) X
42
Child Safety
Forward Facing Child Restraints

Combined Weight of LATCH (Lower Seatbelt and Top Seatbelt and LATCH
Child and Child Anchors and Top Tether Anchor (Lower Anchors and
Restraint Tether Anchor) Top Tether Anchor)
Up to 65 lb (29 kg) X X X
Over 65 lb (29 kg) X X
43
Child Safety
CHILD RESTRAINTS RECOMMENDATION
Child Size, Height, Weight, or Age Recommended Restraint Type
Use a child restraint (sometimes

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally
called an infant carrier, convertible
age four or younger).
seat, or toddler seat).
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly
fit in a child restraint (generally children who are
less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age Use a belt-positioning booster
four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) seat.
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly Use a vehicle seatbelt having the
fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally chil- lap belt snug and low across the
dren who are at least 57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater hips, shoulder belt centered across
than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended the shoulder and chest, and seat
by child restraint manufacturer). backrest upright.
You are required by law to properly use

child restraints for infants and toddlers in INSTALLING CHILD
the United States, Canada and Mexico. RESTRAINTS
Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster seats USING SEATBELTS
until they reach age eight, a height of 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your
local and state or provincial laws for WARNING: Depending on where
specific requirements about the safety of you secure a child restraint, and
children in your vehicle. depending on the child restraint design,
When possible, properly restrain children you may block access to certain seatbelt
12 years of age and under in a rear seating buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
position of your vehicle. Accident statistics anchors, rendering those features
suggest that children are safer when potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
properly restrained in the rear seating injury, make sure occupants only use
positions than in a front seating position. seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
When installing a rear facing child restraint,
adjust the vehicle seats to avoid
interference between the child restraint Note: Although the child restraint
and the vehicle seat in front of the child illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
restraint. the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.
Perform the following steps when
installing a child restraint with seatbelts.
44
Child Safety
1. Position the child restraint in a seat

with a seatbelt.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

E142529 buckle for that seating position until
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and the latch engages. Make sure the
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap tongue is latched securely by pulling
belt together. on it.
E142875
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt 5. To put the retractor in the automatic
portions together, route the tongue locking mode, grasp the shoulder
through the child restraint according portion of the belt and pull downward
to the child restraint manufacturer's until you pull all of the seatbelt out.
instructions. Make sure you did not Note: The automatic locking mode is
twist the belt webbing. available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The seatbelt clicks as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
45
Child Safety
7. Pull the seatbelt out of the retractor to

make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. You should
not be able to pull more belt out. If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,

forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place.
E142533
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. forward and back. There should be no
Force the seat down with extra weight, more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement.
for example, by pressing down or
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
kneeling on the child restraint while
Certified Child Passenger Safety
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
Technician to make certain the child
to force slack from the belt. This is
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
necessary to remove the remaining
check with Transport Canada for referral
slack that exists once you add the extra
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your USING LOWER ANCHORS AND
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean TETHERS FOR CHILDREN
toward the buckle helps to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. If the child restraint has a tether strap, WARNING: Do not attach two child
attach it. safety restraints to the same anchor. In
a crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
46
Child Safety
INSTALLING A CHILD RESTRAINT

WARNING: Depending on where IN A CENTER SEAT
you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt WARNING: The standardized
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
anchors, rendering those features (280 mm) center to center. Do not use
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of LATCH lower anchors for the center
injury, make sure occupants only use seating position unless the child restraint
seating positions where they are able to manufacturer's instructions permit and
be properly restrained. specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) system has three You cannot install a child restraint with
vehicle anchor points: rigid LATCH attachments at the center
seating position. You can only use LATCH
• Two lower anchors where the vehicle
compatible child restraints, with
seat backrest and seat cushion meet,
attachments on belt webbing, at this
called the seat bight.
seating position provided that the child
• One top tether anchor behind that restraint manufacturer's instructions
seating position. permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
LATCH compatible child restraints have Do not attach a child restraint to any lower
two rigid or webbing mounted anchor if another child restraint is attached
attachments. These attachments connect to that anchor.
to the two lower anchors at the LATCH Each time you use the child restraint, check
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. that the seat is properly attached to the
This type of attachment method lower anchors and tether anchor, if
eliminates the need to use seatbelts to applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
attach the child restraint. to side and forward and back where it is
However, you can still use the seatbelt to secured to the vehicle. The seat should
attach the child restraint if the lower move less than 1 in (2.5 cm).
anchors are not used. For forward facing If you did not properly anchor the child
child restraints, you must also attach the restraint, the risk of a child being injured in
top tether strap to the proper top tether a crash greatly increases.
anchor if a top tether strap has been
provided with your child restraint.
COMBINING THE SEATBELT AND
Follow the instructions later in this chapter LOWER ANCHORS FOR
on attaching child restraints with tether ATTACHING CHILD RESTRAINTS
straps.
When used in combination, you may attach
the seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors
first, provided a proper installation is
achieved. Attach the tether strap
afterward, if it is included with the child
restraint.
47
Child Safety
USING TETHER STRAPS

Many forward-facing child restraints
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child restraint and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older child restraints.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your child E193589
restraint does not reach the appropriate
top tether anchor in your vehicle. 2. Locate the correct anchor behind the
gap cover for the selected seating
Attach the tether strap only to the
position.
appropriate tether anchor. The tether strap
may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether
anchor.
Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off the vehicle seat cushion when the child
is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash. E142539
Once you have installed the child restraint 3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors shown.
of the LATCH system, or both, you can
attach the top tether strap. 4. Tighten the child restraint tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
1. Route the child restraint tether strap instructions.
over the back of the seat. For the
outermost seating positions, route the If your child restraint system has a tether
tether strap under the head restraint strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
and between the head restraint posts. recommends its use, we also recommend
For vehicles with a center seating its use.
position, route the tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. If needed, you BOOSTER SEATS
can also remove the head restraints.
Note: The head restraints are not Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
removable on 2-door vehicles. children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child restraint and meet
the following criteria.
48
Child Safety
• Generally children who are less than Types of Booster Seats

57 in (1.45 m) tall.
• Are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12).
• Are between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg).
Many state and provincial laws require that
children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight, a height of 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer yes to all of these questions when
seated without a booster seat: E68924
• Backless booster seats

If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head,
as measured at the tops of the ears, above
the top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating
position with a higher seat backrest or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
E142595 or consider using a high-back booster seat.
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
E70710
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt. • High-back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high-back
booster seat would be a better choice.
49
Child Safety
Children and booster seats vary in size and The following drawings compare the ideal
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the fit to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close
lap belt low and snug across the hips, to the neck and a shoulder belt that could
never up across the stomach, and lets you slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest show how the lap belt should be low and
and rest snugly near the center of the snug across the child's hips.
shoulder.
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle

seat upon which it is being used, placing a CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (IF
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet EQUIPPED)
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not use any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check
with the booster seat manufacturer's WARNING: You cannot open the
instructions. rear doors from inside if you have put the
child safety locks on.
50
Child Safety
E238364
A child safety lock is on the rear edge of

each rear door. Switch the child safety lock
separately on each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn the key clockwise to switch the child
lock on and counterclockwise to switch it
off.
Right-Hand Side
Turn the key counterclockwise to switch
the child lock on and clockwise to switch
it off.
51
Seatbelts
SEATBELT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
WARNING: Always drive and ride assembly made up of one buckle and
with your seatback upright and the lap one tongue designed to be used as a pair.
belt snug and low across the hips. Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder
WARNING: Children must always belt under the arm. Never use a single
be properly restrained. seatbelt for more than one person.
WARNING: Do not allow a WARNING: Even with advanced

passenger to hold a child on their lap restraints systems, properly restrain
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to children 12 and under in a rear seating
follow this instruction could result in position. Failure to follow this could
personal injury or death in the event of a seriously increase the risk of injury or
sudden stop or crash. death.
WARNING: All occupants of your WARNING: Seatbelts and seats

vehicle, including the driver, should may be hot in a vehicle that is in the
always properly wear their seatbelts, sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may
even when an airbag supplemental burn a small child. Check seat covers and
restraint system is provided. Failure to buckles before you place a child
properly wear your seatbelt could anywhere near them.
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death. WARNING: If your vehicle is
involved in a crash, have the seatbelts
WARNING: It is extremely and associated components inspected
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside as soon as possible. Failure to follow this
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people instruction could result in personal injury
riding in these areas are more likely to be or death.
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle All seating positions in this vehicle have
that is not equipped with seats and lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your of the vehicle should properly wear their
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a seatbelts, even when an airbag
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning supplemental restraint system is provided.
could result in serious personal injury or The seatbelt system consists of:
death.
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an • A shoulder seatbelt with automatic
unbelted person is significantly more locking mode, except driver seatbelt.
likely to die than a person wearing a • Seatbelt pretensioners at the front
seatbelt. outermost and rear outermost seating
positions.
·A seatbelt warning light and
chime.
E71880
52
Seatbelts
· Crash sensors and monitoring Note: It may lock if you pull it sharply or if
system with readiness indicator. the vehicle is on a slope.
E67017
2. Insert the tongue into the buckle.
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In 3. Pull the seatbelt tight to remove any
frontal and near-frontal crashes, the slack.
seatbelt pretensioners may be activated Unfastening the Seatbelts
alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags. In side 1. Press the red button on the buckle to
crashes and rollovers, the pretensioners release the seatbelt.
will be activated when the Safety Canopy
2. Hold the seatbelt tongue and let it
is activated.
retract completely and smoothly to its
stowed position.
FASTENING AND
UNFASTENING THE SENSITIVE LOCKING MODE
SEATBELTS
WHAT IS SENSITIVE LOCKING
All seatbelts in your vehicle are a MODE
three-point combination lap and shoulder
seatbelt. Sensitive locking mode is a seatbelt
retractor feature that allows shoulder belt
length adjustment according to your
movements and locking in response to
vehicle movement.
HOW DOES SENSITIVE LOCKING

MODE WORK
If the driver suddenly brakes, turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact
of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
A
In addition, the seatbelt retractor locks if
B you pull the seatbelt webbing out too
quickly. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a
small length of webbing back toward the
E338014 stowed position.
Note: When driving off-road or at a severe
A Seatbelt tongue. angle, the seatbelt mechanism locks. It does
B Seatbelt buckle. not allow you to pull the seatbelt webbing
out until your vehicle is on nearly level
1. Pull the seatbelt out steadily. ground.
53
Seatbelts
AUTOMATIC LOCKING MODE ADJUSTING THE SEATBELTS

DURING PREGNANCY
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC LOCKING
MODE
WARNING: Always ride and drive
This is a safety feature built into the with your seatback upright and properly
seatbelt retractors that keeps the fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion
seatbelts pre-locked. of the seatbelt snugly and low across
the hips. Position the shoulder portion of
ENGAGING AUTOMATIC LOCKING the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
MODE women must follow this practice. See
the following figure.
E142591
E142590
1. Fasten the combination lap and
shoulder belt. Pregnant women should always wear their
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
downward until you pull the entire belt combination lap and shoulder belt low
out. across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. shoulder and the center of the chest.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
SEATBELT REMINDER
DISENGAGING AUTOMATIC
LOCKING MODE HOW DOES THE SEATBELT
REMINDER WORK
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle WARNING: The system will only
sensitive locking mode. provide protection when you use the
seatbelt correctly.
54
Seatbelts
This system monitors all seating positions

and provides audio and graphic feedback.
SEATBELT REMINDER
INDICATORS
This lamp illuminates if you do
not fasten your seatbelt when
E71880 you switch the ignition on. The
lamp switches off when you fasten your
seatbelt or about one minute has elapsed.
E352170
When the initial warning expires for the
driver, more warnings are provided for the This warning displays if an occupant
driver and front passenger. This lamp unfastens the rear seatbelt buckle or it
illuminates if you or your front passenger becomes unfastened.
do not fasten the seatbelt buckle and the
Note: Seatbelt reminder indicators may
vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (9.7 km/h).
vary between 2-door and 4-door vehicles.
Note: To avoid inadvertent warnings, do Vehicle system updates could change the
not place large objects on the seat. functionality.
Note: If a rear seat is unoccupied, or an
occupant never fastens the seatbelt buckle
to begin with, the warning will not display.
Note: Front seating positions appear in this
warning display. Warnings for unfastened
front seatbelt buckles appear in the initial
warning lamp.
Note: Vehicles with two doors do not have
a rear center seating position.
Seatbelt Status
E352172
To view the seatbelt status, use the
This lamp illuminates when you switch the information display controls on the
ignition on, identifying the number of steering wheel.
seating positions with fastened buckles. It
illuminates again when a seating position
changes from unfastened to fastened.
55
Seatbelts
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot

disable the seatbelt reminder. Also, if the
seatbelt reminder has been previously
disabled, it will be re-enabled during the use
of MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 74).
Read Steps 1 - 4 before proceeding with
the programming procedure.
Make sure that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
E352171
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger
seatbelts are unfastened.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. After Step 1, wait an additional five
seconds before proceeding with Step
3. Once you start Step 3, you must
complete the procedure within 30
E274703
seconds.
A Seatbelt fastened. 3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
B Seatbelt not fastened. seatbelt four times at a moderate
C Seatbelt recently unfastened. speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the seatbelt warning light
D Fault. switches on.
4. When the seatbelt warning light is on,
SWITCHING THE SEATBELT buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
REMINDER ON AND OFF After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
This switches the feature off for that
WARNING: While the system seating position if it is currently on.
allows you to deactivate it, this system This switches the feature on for that
is designed to improve your chances of seating position if it is currently off.
being safely belted and surviving an
accident. We recommend you leave the
system activated for yourself and others CHECKING THE SEATBELTS
who may use the vehicle.
Check the seatbelts and child restraints
Note: The driver and front passenger periodically to make sure they work
warnings switch off independently. When properly and are not damaged. Make sure
you perform this procedure for one seating there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
position, do not buckle the other position as necessary.
this cancels the process.
56
Seatbelts
Check all of the following seatbelt

assemblies after a crash. WARNING: Only use extensions
• Retractors. provided free of charge by our dealers.
• Buckles. The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle,
• Front seatbelt buckle assemblies. model year and seating position. The use
• Buckle support assemblies. of an extension intended for another
• Child restraint LATCH and tether vehicle, model year or seating position
anchors. may not offer you the full protection of
your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
• Attaching hardware.
Read the child restraint manufacturer's WARNING: Never use seatbelt
instructions for additional inspection and extensions to install child restraints.
maintenance information specific to the
child restraint. WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the way the seatbelt fits
We recommend that all seatbelt across the torso, over the lap or to make
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
If, because of body size or driving position,
that the belts do not show damage and
it is not possible to properly fasten the
continue to operate properly, they do not
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
extension that is compatible with the
not in use during a crash should also be
seatbelts is available free of charge from
checked and replaced if either damage or
our dealers. Only use our seatbelt
improper operation is noted.
extensions made by the original equipment
Properly care for seatbelts. See Cleaning seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.
the Interior (page 364). Ask your authorized dealer if your extension
is compatible with your vehicle restraint
system.
SEATBELT EXTENSIONS
WARNING: Persons who fit into

the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of
a crash.
57
Personal Safety System™
WHAT IS THE PERSONAL • Restraint system warning light and

tone.
SAFETY SYSTEM
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
An advanced safety system that protects crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,
occupants in frontal crashes. front seatbelt usage sensors, front
passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
HOW DOES THE PERSONAL
SAFETY SYSTEM WORK
This system provides an improved level of
frontal crash protection to front seat
occupants and is designed to reduce the
risk of airbag-related injuries. The system
analyzes occupant conditions and crash
severity before activating the appropriate
safety devices. During a crash, the
restraints control module may deploy the
seatbelt pretensioners, and one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbags based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM

COMPONENTS
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Passenger seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
58
Airbags
HOW DO THE FRONT AIRBAGS compounds (for example, baking soda)

that result from the combustion process
WORK that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
Contact with a deploying airbag may cause
abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing
loss is also a possibility as a result of the
noise associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
E151127 particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
The driver and front passenger airbags position at the time of airbag deployment.
deploy during significant frontal and near Thus, it is extremely important that
frontal crashes. occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
The driver and passenger front airbag
while maintaining vehicle control.
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules. Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash HOW DO THE SIDE AIRBAGS
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page WORK
66).
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the WARNING: Do not place objects
seatbelts to help protect the driver and or mount equipment on or near the
right front passenger from certain upper airbag cover, on the side of the front seat
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; backrests, or in areas that may come into
there is a risk of injury from a deploying contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
airbag. to follow this instruction could result in
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
WARNING: Accessory seat covers
airbag deploys. This is normal.
not released by Ford Motor Company
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly could prevent the deployment of the
upon activation. After airbag deployment, airbags and increase the risk of injuries
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery in a crash.
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
59
Airbags
HOW DOES THE SAFETY

WARNING: Do not lean your head CANOPY™ WORK
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
The side airbags are on the outermost side on the door. The curtain airbag could
of the seat backrests of the front seats. In injure you as it deploys from the side rail
certain sideways crashes or rollovers, the trim or A-pillar. Failure to follow this
airbags will be inflated. The airbag was instruction could result in personal injury
designed to inflate between the door panel or death.
and occupant to further enhance the
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
protection provided to occupants in side
do not obstruct or place objects in the
impact crashes.
deployment path of the airbag.
The Safety Canopy deploys during

significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal,
behind the side rail trim, above each row
of seats. In certain sideways crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be
activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy inflates
E152533
between the side window area and
occupants to further enhance protection
The system consists of the following: provided in side impact crashes and
rollover events.
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
• Side airbags inside the driver and front
passenger seat backrests.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
66).
E75004
60
Airbags
The system consists of the following: 2-Door

• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the side rail trim or the
roof-pillar trim.
• Side rail trim which opens above the
side doors to allow air curtain E339112
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring AIRBAG PRECAUTIONS
system with a readiness
E67017 indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 66).
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
Properly restrain children 12 years old and slowly or gently, and the risk of injury
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy from a deploying airbag is the greatest
will not interfere with children restrained close to the trim covering the airbag
using a properly installed child or booster module.
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the side rail trim above WARNING: All occupants of your
the doors along the side window opening. vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
WARNING: Do not place objects restraint system is provided. Failure to
or mount equipment on or near the side properly wear your seatbelt could
rail trim or A-pillar that may come into seriously increase the risk of injury or
contact with a deploying curtain airbag. death.
result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
4-Door seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
E339113
WARNING: Do not place your arms

on the airbag cover or through the
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
61
Airbags
PROPERLY ADJUSTING THE

WARNING: Keep the areas in front DRIVER AND FRONT
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag PASSENGER SEATS
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in WARNING: National Highway
personal injury or death. Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, least 10 in (25 cm) between an
do not obstruct or place objects in the occupant's chest and the driver airbag
deployment path of the airbag. module.
WARNING: Do not place a To properly position yourself away from

rearward facing child restraint in front of the airbag:
an active airbag. Failure to follow this • Move your seat to the rear as far as you
instruction could result in personal injury can while still reaching the pedals
or death. comfortably.
WARNING: Do not attempt to • Recline the seat slightly one or two
service, repair, or modify the degrees from the upright position.
supplementary restraint system or After all occupants have adjusted their
associated components. Failure to seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
follow this instruction could result in important that they continue to sit
personal injury or death. properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat backrest, and
WARNING: Several airbag system center themselves on the seat cushion,
components get hot after inflation. To with their feet comfortably extended on
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
them after inflation. the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
WARNING: If a supplementary down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
restraint system component has forward or sideways, or puts one or both
deployed, it will not function again. Have feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
the system and associated components greatly increases.
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
personal injury or death. CHILDREN AND AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place a

rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
62
Airbags
E181984
The indicator lamps are in the center stack

of the instrument panel.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable the front passenger
frontal airbag under these conditions:
E142846
• The front passenger seat is
Children must always be properly unoccupied.
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that • The system determines an infant is
children are safer when properly restrained present in a child restraint.
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow • A passenger takes their weight off of
these instructions may increase the risk of the seat for a period of time.
injury in a crash. • If there is a problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing
system.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
Even with this technology, parents are
SYSTEM strongly encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat.
WHAT IS THE FRONT PASSENGER • When the front passenger sensing
SENSING SYSTEM system disables the front passenger
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag
This system detects a properly seated status indicator illuminates the off
occupant and determines if the front lamp.
passenger airbag should be enabled.
• If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status
HOW DOES THE FRONT indicator illuminates the on lamp,
PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM switch your vehicle off, remove the
WORK child restraint from your vehicle and
reinstall the restraint following the
The system uses a passenger airbag status child restraint manufacturer's
indicator which illuminates indicating that instructions.
the front passenger frontal airbag is either
enabled or disabled. The front passenger sensing system works
with sensors that are part of the front
Note: When you first switch the ignition on, passenger seat and seatbelt. The sensors
the passenger airbag status indicator off are designed to detect the presence of a
and on lamps illuminate for a short period properly seated occupant and determine
to confirm they are functional. if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled.
63
Airbags
• When the front passenger sensing • Objects hanging off the seat backrest.
system enables the front passenger • Objects stowed in the seat backrest
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag map pocket.
status indicator illuminates the on
lamp. • Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag • Other passengers pushing or pulling on
status indicator off lamp is illuminated, it the seat.
is possible that the person is not sitting • Rear passenger feet and knees resting
properly in the seat. If this happens: or pushing on the seat.
• Switch your vehicle off and ask the The listed conditions could cause the
person to place the seat backrest in an weight of a properly seated occupant to
upright position. be incorrectly interpreted by the front
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, passenger sensing system. The person in
centered on the seat cushion, with the the front passenger seat could appear
person's legs comfortably extended. heavier or lighter due to the conditions
• Restart your vehicle and have the listed.
person remain in this position for about Make sure the front passenger
two minutes. This allows the system sensing system is operating
to detect that person and enable the E67017 properly. See Crash Sensors
passenger frontal airbag. and Airbag Indicator (page 66).
• If the indicator off lamp remains
illuminated even after this, you should If the airbag readiness light is on, do the
advise the person to ride in the rear following:
seat. • Pull your vehicle over.
After all occupants have adjusted their • Switch your vehicle off.
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very • Check for any objects lodged
important that they continue to sit upright, underneath the front passenger seat
leaning against the seat backrest, and or cargo interfering with the seat.
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor. • Remove the obstruction if found.
• Restart your vehicle.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if • Wait at least two minutes and verify
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns that the airbag readiness light in the
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or instrument cluster is no longer
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the illuminated.
chance of injury during a crash greatly • If the airbag readiness light in the
increases. instrument cluster remains illuminated,
If you think that the state of the passenger there may be a problem due to the
airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect, front passenger sensing system.
check for the following: Do not attempt to repair or service the
• Objects lodged underneath the seat. system. Take your vehicle in for service
immediately.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
64
Airbags
If it is necessary to modify an advanced

front airbag system to accommodate a WARNING: Any alteration or
person with disabilities, contact your modification to the front passenger seat
Customer Relationship Center. See may affect the performance of the front
Contacting Us (page 15). passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING death.
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out

of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM INDICATORS
Occupant Passenger Airbag Status Passenger Airbag

Indicator
Empty OFF: Illuminated Disabled

ON: Not Illuminated
Child OFF: Illuminated Disabled
ON: Not Illuminated
Adult OFF: Not Illuminated Enabled
ON: Illuminated
65
Airbags
CRASH SENSORS AND • The readiness light either flashes or

stays on.
AIRBAG INDICATOR
• You hear a series of five tones. The
tone pattern repeats periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
WARNING: Modifying or adding repaired.
equipment to the front end of your
vehicle (including hood, bumper system, If any of these things happen, even
frame, front end body structure, tow intermittently, have the supplemental
hooks and hood pins) may affect the restraint system serviced immediately.
performance of the airbag system, Unless serviced, the system may not
increasing the risk of injury. Do not function properly in the event of a crash.
modify or add equipment to the front The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners
end of your vehicle. or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and mean that something is wrong with the
occupant sensors. These sensors provide system. Rather, it means the restraints
information to the restraints control control module determined the accident
module which activates the following: conditions (crash severity, seatbelt usage)
• Front and rear seatbelt pretensioners. were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• Driver airbag.
• The front airbags activate only in
• Passenger airbag. frontal and near-frontal crashes. Front
• Seat mounted side airbags. airbags may activate in rollovers, side
• Safety Canopy. impacts or rear impacts if the crash
causes sufficient frontal deceleration.
Based on the type of crash, the restraints
• The seatbelt pretensioners activate in
control module deploys the appropriate
frontal, near-frontal and side crashes,
safety devices.
and in rollovers.
The restraints control module also • The side airbags inflate in certain side
monitors the readiness of the above safety impact crashes or rollover events. Side
devices plus the crash and occupant airbags may activate in other types of
sensors. The readiness of the safety crashes if the vehicle experiences
system is indicated by a warning indicator sufficient sideways motion or
light in the instrument cluster or by a deformation.
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the • The Safety Canopy inflates in certain
airbag is not required. side impact crashes or rollover events.
The Safety Canopy may activate in
A difficulty with the system is indicated by other types of crashes if the vehicle
one or more of the following: experiences sufficient sideways motion
The readiness light will not or deformation, or a certain likelihood
illuminate immediately after you of rollover.
E67017 switch the ignition on.
66
Airbags
DISPOSING OF AIRBAGS
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
67
911 Assist
WHAT IS 911 ASSIST • A connected Bluetooth® enabled

phone must have the ability to make
911 Assist is a SYNC system feature that and maintain an outgoing call at the
can call for help. time of the incident.
For more information, visit • A connected Bluetooth® enabled
www.owner.ford.com . phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal
strength.
EMERGENCY CALL • The vehicle must have battery power
REQUIREMENTS and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
Assist to make an emergency call if you that setting applies for all paired phones. If
can do it yourself. Dial emergency 911 Assist is off and the phone connected
services immediately to avoid delayed to SYNC, an icon displays on the status bar.
response time which could increase the Note: Every phone operates differently.
risk of serious injury or death after a While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within cellular phones, some may have trouble
five seconds of the crash, the system or using this feature.
phone may be damaged or
non-functional.
EMERGENCY CALL
WARNING: Always place your LIMITATIONS
phone in a secure location in your vehicle
so it does not become a projectile or get The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which
cause serious injury to someone or 911 is the emergency number. The following
damage the phone which could prevent are limitations of this feature:
911 Assist from working properly.
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash.
setting is set on before a crash, the • The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system will not dial for help which could system has no power.
delay response time, potentially
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
increasing the risk of serious injury or
are the ones paired and connected to
death after a crash.
the system.
• SYNC is powered and working properly
at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth® enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
68
REMOTE CONTROL Unlock

LIMITATIONS Press the button to unlock all
doors. See Unlocking and
E138629 Locking the Doors Using the
WARNING: Changes or Remote Control (page 78).
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance Lock
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the Press the button to lock all
radio certification number only signifies doors. See Unlocking and
that Industry Canada technical
E138623 Locking the Doors Using the
specifications were met. Remote Control (page 78).
This device complies with Part 15 of the Remote Start (If Equipped)
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Press the button to remote start.
Operation is subject to the following two See Remotely Starting and
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
E138625 Stopping the Vehicle (page
harmful interference, and (2) This device 114).
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause Panic Alarm (If Equipped)
undesired operation.
Press the button to sound the
Make sure a valid remote control is within panic alarm. See Sounding the
5 ft (1.5 m) from the front door handles E138624 Panic Alarm (page 70).
and rear of vehicle.
The system may not function if:
• The remote control remains stationary
for about a minute.
• The vehicle battery has no charge.
• The remote control battery has no
charge.
• There is interference causing issues
with the remote control frequencies.
• The remote control is too close to
metal objects or electronic devices, for
example keys or a cell phone.
USING THE REMOTE CONTROL

Use your remote control to access various
vehicle systems.
Note: The buttons on your remote may vary
depending on the vehicle region or options.
69
REMOVING THE KEY BLADE CHANGING THE REMOTE

CONTROL BATTERY
WARNING: Keep batteries away

from children to prevent ingestion.
result in personal injury or death. If
ingested, immediately seek medical
attention.
WARNING: If the battery

compartment does not securely close,
stop using the remote control and
replace it as soon as possible. In the
meantime, keep the remote control away
from children. Failure to follow this
or death.
E322866
The remote control uses one coin-type
Push the release button on your passive 3-volt lithium battery CR2450 or
key and pull the key blade out. equivalent.
SOUNDING THE PANIC ALARM

Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
E138624 again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
LOCATING YOUR VEHICLE

Press the lock button twice
within three seconds. The turn
E138623 signal lamps flash. We
recommend you use this method to locate
your vehicle.
E322866
1. Push the release button and pull the

key blade out.
70
E218402
3. Insert a screwdriver, and carefully

remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
E303824 5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter and install the key
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden blade.
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover. Dispose of old batteries in an
environmentally friendly way.
E107998 Seek advice from your local
authority about recycling old batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
remote control should operate normally.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR

REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement keys or
remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle.
71
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE Programming Backup Location

CONTROL
You must have two previously
programmed remote controls inside your
vehicle and the new, unprogrammed
remote controls readily accessible. Contact
an authorized dealer to have the spare
remote control programmed if two
previously programmed remote controls
are not available. Make sure that your
vehicle is off before beginning this
procedure.
Make sure that you close all the doors
before beginning and that they remain
closed throughout the procedure. Perform
all steps within 30 seconds of starting the
sequence. Stop and wait for at least one
minute before starting again if you perform E327286
any steps out of sequence.
1. Place the first programmed remote in
Note: You can program a maximum of four
the backup slot inside the center
remote controls to your vehicle.
console. With your foot off the brake
Note: If your programmed remote controls pedal, press and release the push
get lost or stolen and you do not have an button ignition switch.
extra coded remote, you need to have your 2. Wait five seconds and then press and
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. Store release the push button ignition switch
an extra programmed remote away from again.
your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconvenience. Contact an authorized 3. Remove the remote control.
dealer to purchase additional spare or 4. Within 10 seconds, place a second
replacement remote controls. programmed remote control in the
Read and understand the entire procedure backup slot. Press and release the
before you begin. push button ignition switch.
5. Wait five seconds and then press and
release the push button ignition switch
again. Keep the ignition on for at least
3 seconds, but no more than 10
seconds.
6. Remove the remote control.
7. Place the unprogrammed remote
control in the backup slot and press
and release the push button ignition
switch.
72
Programming is now complete. With your If programming was not successful, wait
foot on the brake pedal, press the push 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7.
button ignition switch to verify the remote If you are still unsuccessful, take your
control functions operate and your vehicle vehicle to an authorized dealer.
starts with the new remote control.
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS – TROUBLESHOOTING
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Key Battery Low Replace Displays when the remote control battery requires replacing.
Soon
73
MyKey™
WHAT IS MYKEY Note: MyKey drivers may be able to switch

the lane departure warning feature off, but
MyKey allows you to program keys with this feature turns back on automatically
restricted driving modes to promote good with every new key cycle.
driving habits.
CONFIGURABLE MYKEY
MYKEY SETTINGS SETTINGS
You can configure the following settings
NON-CONFIGURABLE MYKEY after creating a MyKey. See Creating a
SETTINGS MyKey (page 75).
Seatbelt Reminder or Belt- Speed Limit

Minder™
MyKey mutes the audio system until the WARNING: Do not set MyKey
front seat passengers buckle the front seat maximum speed limit to a limit that will
belts. prevent the driver from maintaining a
Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM safe speed considering posted speed
radio or a very basic audio system, then the limits and prevailing road conditions. The
radio may not mute. driver is always responsible to drive in
accordance with local laws and
Satellite Radio (If Equipped) prevailing conditions. Failure to do so
could result in accident or injury.
Some Satellite radio channels have
restricted access to adult radio content. You can set a speed limit for your vehicle.
Warning messages appear in the
Early Low Fuel information display and a tone sounds if
The low fuel level warning lamp turns on your vehicle reaches the set speed. You
earlier. cannot override the set speed when using
a MyKey.
Driving and Parking Aids
Speed Minder
You cannot configure settings for parking
aids, blind spot information system, and You can set a speed reminder for your
cross traffic alert. These systems turn on vehicle. Warning messages appear in the
when the vehicle turns on, and you cannot information display and a tone sounds if
switch them off with a MyKey. your vehicle exceeds the set speed.
You cannot configure settings for Audio System Volume Limit

pre-collision assist and lane keeping. These
systems turn on when the vehicle turns on, The audio system maximum volume
but you can switch them off with a MyKey. reduces. A message appears in the
information display if you attempt to
A new destination in the navigation system exceed the volume limit. Automatic
can only be set using voice commands volume control turns off.
when using a MyKey, and with your vehicle
moving.
74
MyKey™
Emergency Assistance 2. Place the intelligent access key in the

position shown.
If you set emergency assistance to always
on, you cannot switch it off with a MyKey. 3. Switch the ignition on.
4. Using your touchscreen, press Menu.
Do Not Disturb 5. Press Settings.
If you set do not disturb to always on, you 6. Press Vehicle.
cannot switch it off with a MyKey.
7. Press MyKey.
Note: If a phone is connected using Apple 8. Press Create MyKey.
CarPlay or Android Auto while driving with
a MyKey, the driver can receive phone calls 9. Press Yes if you want to create the key
and text messages even if the do not disturb as a MyKey. A confirmation message
restriction is on, and if the vehicle comes appears on the screen.
with satellite radio, there is no restriction on 10. Switch the ignition off.
the adult content.
Note: We recommend that you label this
Traction and Stability Control key.
If you set traction control or stability

control to always on, you cannot switch it PROGRAMMING A MYKEY
off with a MyKey.
You can program any remote control to
become a restricted MyKey, but you must
CREATING A MYKEY leave one unmodified as an admin key.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
3. Press Vehicle Settings.
4. Press MyKey.
5. Select a setting and press the OK
button.
6. Configure the setting
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS

When you clear all MyKeys, you remove all
restrictions and return all MyKeys to their
original admin key status.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
E327286 2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
1. Raise the console storage 3. Press Vehicle Settings.
compartment lid. 4. Press MyKey.
75
MyKey™
5. Press Clear All MyKeys. 3. Press Vehicle Settings.

6. Press Yes. 4. Press MyKey.
5. Press MyKey Information.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
You can find information about the
distance traveled using a MyKey, and the MyKey is not compatible with unapproved,
number of admin keys and MyKeys created aftermarket remote start systems. If you
for your vehicle. choose to install a remote start system,
1. Switch the ignition on. see an authorized dealer for an approved
remote start system.
MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING
MYKEY – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Description
Place Key in Backup Displays when trying to create a MyKey and the admin key is
Location not placed in the backup position. See Creating a MyKey
(page 75).
Key is Already a MyKey Displays when trying to create a MyKey with a key already
designated as a MyKey.
This Key restricted at Displays to confirm that the key is restricted after you switch
Next Key Cycle. Label the ignition off.
Key as MyKey
76
MyKey™
MYKEY – FREQUENTLY ASKED Why am I not able to start the engine

QUESTIONS with a MyKey?
An admin key and a MyKey are inside
What is an admin key?
your vehicle. The system recognizes
An admin key is a key that you have only the admin key when both are
not created as a MyKey. See Creating present.
a MyKey (page 75).
Why am I not able to create a MyKey?
You have not placed the admin key in
the backup position. See Creating a
MyKey (page 75). The key used to
switch the ignition on is not an admin
key. The key used to switch the ignition
on is the only admin key. There has to
be at least one admin key. You did not
switch the ignition off after creating
the last MyKey.
Why am I not able to program a MyKey?
The admin key is not inside your
vehicle. The key used to switch the
ignition on is not an admin key. You
have not created any MyKeys. See
Creating a MyKey (page 75).
Why am I not able to clear the MyKeys?
The admin key is not inside your
vehicle. The key used to switch the
ignition on is not an admin key. You
have not created any MyKeys. See
Creating a MyKey (page 75).
Why is the MyKey distance not
accumulating?
The key used to start the engine is an
admin key. An admin key and a MyKey
are inside your vehicle. You have not
created any MyKeys. See Creating a
MyKey (page 75). You have cleared
the MyKeys. See Clearing All
MyKeys (page 75).
77
Doors and Locks
OPERATING THE DOORS INDIVIDUALLY UNLOCKING AND

LOCKING THE DOORS USING THE
FROM OUTSIDE YOUR LOCKING BUTTON
VEHICLE
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
UNLOCKING AND LOCKING THE
DOORS USING THE REMOTE
CONTROL
You can only use the remote control when
your vehicle is stationary.
Unlocking the Doors

Press the button to unlock all
E267112 E138628
doors.
A Unlock.
Locking the Doors
B Lock.
Press the button to lock all
E267111 doors. One short flash of the
turn signal lamps confirms that AUTOUNLOCK
your vehicle has locked.
Note: For more information on operating WHAT IS AUTOUNLOCK
the doors from outside your vehicle See
Keyless Entry (page 82). Autounlock is an unlocking feature that
unlocks the vehicle doors when your
vehicle comes to a stop.
OPERATING THE DOORS
FROM INSIDE YOUR VEHICLE AUTOUNLOCK REQUIREMENTS
UNLOCKING AND LOCKING THE Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all
DOORS USING THE CENTRAL of the following occur:
LOCKING • The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed and your vehicle is moving at a
The power door lock control is on the driver speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
door.
• Your vehicle comes to a stop.
Press the button to unlock all
E267112 • You open the driver door within 10
doors.
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to the accessory position.
Press the button to lock all
E267111 doors.
Note: The central locking only operates if
the front doors are fully closed.
78
Doors and Locks
SWITCHING AUTOUNLOCK ON MISLOCK LIMITATIONS

AND OFF
When you press the lock button once, the
1. Press the menu button on the steering direction indicators do not flash if:
wheel to enter the information display • Any door or the tailgate is open.
main menu.
• The hood is open.
2. Select Settings.
If you switch mislock off, the horn does not
3. Select Vehicle. sound if you press the lock button on the
4. Select Locks. remote control when a door is open.
5. Switch Autounlock on or off.
SWITCHING MISLOCK ON AND
OFF
AUTOLOCK
1. Press the menu button on the steering
WHAT IS AUTOLOCK wheel to enter the information display
main menu.
Autolock is a locking feature that locks 2. Select Settings.
your vehicle doors when you start driving.
3. Select Vehicle.
AUTOLOCK REQUIREMENTS 4. Select Locks.
5. Switch Mislock Chirp on or off.
Autolock locks all the doors when all of the
following occur:
DOORS AND LOCKS –
• All doors are closed.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The ignition is on.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h). DOORS AND LOCKS – WARNING
LAMPS
MISLOCK Door Ajar Warning Lamp
It illuminates when you switch
WHAT IS MISLOCK the ignition on and remains on if
E249859
any door or the hood is open.
Mislock is a locking feature that warns you
if your vehicle has not locked.
79
Doors and Locks
DOORS AND LOCKS – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Driver Door Ajar Displays if a door is open. Fully close the door.
Passenger Door Ajar
Rear Left Door Ajar
Rear Right Door Ajar
80
Doors and Locks
DOORS AND LOCKS –

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Can accessories such as steps or
handles be used with the latch
assembly?
Do not use the door latch assembly to
attach any accessory, such as handles
or steps, as this can cause damage to
your vehicle.
81
Keyless Entry
KEYLESS ENTRY LIMITATIONS If you program the unlocking function so

that only the driver door unlocks, you can
Make sure your remote control is within 3 ft unlock all of the other doors from inside
(1 m) from the front door handles and the your vehicle using the power door lock
tailgate. control. You can unlock individual doors
by pulling the interior door handles on
The system could not function if: those doors.
• The remote control remains stationary
for about a minute.
USING KEYLESS ENTRY
• The vehicle battery has no charge.
• The remote control battery has no Unlocking the Doors
charge.
• There is interference causing issues
with the remote control frequencies.
• The remote control is too close to
metal objects or electronic devices, for
example keys or a cell phone. E333747
With your passive key within 5 ft (1.5 m) of

KEYLESS ENTRY SETTINGS your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on
the back of the door handle for a brief
Switching Keyless Entry On and period and then pull on the door handle to
Off unlock, being careful not to touch the lock
sensor at the same time or pull on the door
1. Switch the ignition on using an original handle too quickly. The intelligent access
key that has not been created as a system requires a brief delay to
MyKey. authenticate your passive key.
Locking the Doors
4. Press Locks.
Reprogramming the Unlocking

Function
You can enable two-stage unlocking E333746
function allowing you to unlock only the
With your passive key within 3 ft (1 m) of
driver door when you touch the unlock
your vehicle, touch the outer door handle
sensor.
lock sensor for approximately one second
Press and hold both the lock and unlock to lock, being careful not to touch the
buttons on the remote control for four unlock sensor on the back of the door
seconds to disable or enable two-stage handle at the same time. After locking, you
unlocking. can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.
82
Keyless Entry
KEYLESS ENTRY –
TROUBLESHOOTING
KEYLESS ENTRY – FREQUENTLY

ASKED QUESTIONS
Why does the keyless entry system not
function?
If the system does not function it may
be limited. See Keyless Entry
Limitations (page 82). If the system
still does not function use the remote
control or the key blade to lock and
unlock your vehicle.
Why can I not lock my vehicle?
If you electronically lock your vehicle
with a rear door or the tailgate open,
the system searches for a passive key
inside your vehicle after you close the
last door. If the system detects a key,
all doors unlock indicating that a key
is inside. Your vehicle locks if another
passive key is within the detection
range after you close the last door.
Why does the passive key not work?
The system deactivates passive keys
left inside your vehicle when you lock
it. You cannot switch the ignition on
using a deactivated passive key. Press
the unlock button on the remote
control to reactivate a passive key.
83
Tailgate
OPENING THE TAILGATE CLOSING THE TAILGATE
OPENING THE TAILGATE FROM CLOSING THE TAILGATE FROM

OUTSIDE YOUR VEHICLE OUTSIDE YOUR VEHICLE
E323095
1. Unlock the vehicle with the remote

control or power door unlock control.
Note: If a passive key is within 3 ft (1 m) of
the tailgate, the tailgate unlocks when you
touch the inside of the tailgate handle.
E323153
2. Pull the handle to release the tailgate.
Push the tailgate until fully closed.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

THE TAILGATE
You can lock or unlock your vehicle with
the remote control or power door lock
control.
Locking
If a passive key is within 3 ft (1 m) of the
tailgate, touch the lock button on the
tailgate handle to lock.
84
Tailgate
E323094 E323096
Emergency Locking Emergency Unlocking

If there is a power door lock fault you can If there is a power door lock fault you can
use the key blade to lock the tailgate door. use the release lever to unlock the tailgate
door.
E342916
E342902
Unlocking
1. Remove the tailgate trim panel.
If a passive key is within 3 ft (1 m) of the 2. Remove the inside release lever cover.
tailgate, touch the back of the tailgate
handle to unlock. 3. Using a small tool, pull the release lever
to open the tailgate.
85
Tailgate
TAILGATE – TAILGATE – WARNING LAMPS

TROUBLESHOOTING Illuminates when the tailgate is
E340897 not completely closed.
TAILGATE – INFORMATION MESSAGES

Tailgate
Message Details
Tailgate Ajar The tailgate is not completely closed.
86
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT HOW DOES THE PASSIVE ANTI-

THEFT SYSTEM WORK
SYSTEM
The passive anti-theft system arms when
WHAT IS THE PASSIVE ANTI- you switch the ignition off.
THEFT SYSTEM It disarms when the ignition is switched on
with a correctly coded key.
The passive anti-theft system prevents
someone from starting the vehicle with an Note: The system is not compatible with
incorrectly coded key. non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take the keys and in your vehicle. Always take the keys and
lock all the doors when leaving your vehicle. lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
SECURITY – TROUBLESHOOTING
SECURITY – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
No Key Detected The system has not detected a correctly coded key.
Starting System Fault The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthor-
Alarm, Start Vehicle. ized entry.
Alarm Announcement
87
Security
SECURITY – FREQUENTLY ASKED

QUESTIONS
What should I do if there is any
potential alarm problem with my
vehicle?
Take all remote controls to an
authorized dealer if there is any
potential alarm problem with your
vehicle.
What should I do if the vehicle is unable
to start with a correctly coded key?
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
88
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING SWITCHING THE HEATED

WHEEL STEERING WHEEL ON AND OFF
(IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not adjust the To activate the heated steering

steering wheel when your vehicle is wheel, press the button on the
moving. climate control unit.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the On some vehicles, an indicator on the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct button illuminates when the heated
Position (page 126). steering wheel is on.
Note: A sensor regulates the temperature
of the steering wheel.
E261502
1. Unlock the steering column.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
position you prefer.
3. Lock the steering column.
HORN
Press on the center of the
steering wheel near the horn icon
E270945
to activate the horn.
89
Wipers and Washers
WIPERS SWITCHING THE REAR

WINDOW WIPER ON AND OFF
WIPER PRECAUTIONS
Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This could scratch the glass or
damage the wiper blades. Use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
E340280
Switch the windshield wipers off before
entering a car wash. Rotate the control away from you for a
long wipe interval.
SWITCHING WINDSHIELD WIPERS Rotate the control toward you for a short
ON AND OFF wipe interval.
REVERSE WIPE
WHAT IS REVERSE WIPE

Reverse wipe turns on the rear window
wiper when you shift into reverse (R) and
the windshield wipers are on.
REVERSE WIPE SETTINGS
E327739
A High-speed wipe. 3. Press Wipers.
B Intermittent wipe. 4. Switch Rear Wiper On (when in
C Off. Reverse) on or off.
Use the rotary control.

E270969
90
Wipers and Washers
CHECKING THE WIPER

BLADES
2
E142463 E327597
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of 2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip.
the blade to check for roughness.
REPLACING THE FRONT

WIPER BLADES
E327598
3. Press the wiper blade secondary

locking clip.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
E165804
not spring back against the glass when the
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away wiper blade is not attached.
from the glass. 5. To install, reverse the removal
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the procedure.
wiper arm. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
91
Wipers and Washers
REPLACING THE REAR WIPER WASHERS

BLADES
WASHER PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: If you operate your

vehicle in temperatures below 41°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid
with antifreeze protection in cold
weather could result in impaired
windshield vision and increase the risk
of injury or accident.
Do not operate the washers when the

washer reservoir is empty. This could cause
the washer pump to overheat.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
E271380 hit the windshield.
1. Lift the wiper arm. USING THE WINDSHIELD WASHER

Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
wiper arm.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
E311291
Press and hold the button at the

E270967
end of the lever to operate the
windshield washer.
Note: A courtesy wipe occurs a short time
after the wipers stop to clear any remaining
washer fluid when switched on. See
Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and Off
(page 93).
92
Wipers and Washers
SWITCHING THE COURTESY WIPE WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION

ON AND OFF
See Washer Fluid Specification (page
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 402).
3. Press Wipers. WIPERS AND WASHERS –
4. Switch Courtesy Wipe on or off. TROUBLESHOOTING
USING THE REAR WINDOW WIPERS AND WASHERS –

WASHER WARNING LAMPS
Illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
E132353
WIPERS AND WASHERS –

Why are there streaks and smears on
E340280 the windshield?
Rotate the control to the top or bottom The wiper blades could be dirty, worn
position and hold it to operate the rear or damaged. Check the wiper blades.
window washer. See Checking the Wiper Blades
(page 91). If the wiper blades are dirty,
Note: A courtesy wipe occurs a short time clean them with washer fluid or water
after the wipers stop to clear any remaining applied with a soft sponge or cloth. If
washer fluid when switched on. See the wiper blades are worn or damaged,
Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and Off install new ones. See Replacing the
(page 93). Front Wiper Blades (page 91).
ADDING WASHER FLUID
E340983
93
Exterior Lighting
EXTERIOR LIGHTING Slightly pull the lever toward you and

release it to flash the headlamps.
CONTROL
HEADLAMP INDICATORS
Lamps On
Illuminates when you switch the
low beam headlamps or the
parking lamps on.
E327629
Headlamp High Beam

A Lamps off.
B Parking lamps on. high beam headlamps on.
C Autolamps on.
D Headlamps on.
HEADLAMPS –
Rotate the control to make a selection.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps every time you switch your
vehicle on. HEADLAMPS – FREQUENTLY
ASKED QUESTIONS
HEADLAMPS Why is there condensation in the
headlamps?
USING THE HIGH BEAM Headlamps have vents to
HEADLAMPS accommodate normal changes in air
pressure. Condensation can be a
natural by-product of this design.
When moist air enters the lamp
assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can
occur when the temperature is cold.
When normal condensation occurs, a
fine mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The fine mist eventually clears
E327570
and exits through the vents during
normal operation.
Push the lever away from you to
How much condensation is
switch the high beam on.
acceptable?
The presence of a fine mist, for
Push the lever forward again or pull the
example no streaks, drip marks or
lever toward you to switch the high beams
large droplets. A fine mist covers less
off.
than 50% of the lens.
94
Exterior Lighting
How long may it take for the 4. Press Autolamp Delay.

acceptable condensation to be 5. Press a setting.
cleared?
Clearing time may take as long as 48
hours under dry weather conditions.
EXTERIOR LAMPS
How much condensation is
unacceptable? SWITCHING THE TURN SIGNAL
LAMPS ON AND OFF
A water puddle inside the lamp.
Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
What should I do if unacceptable
condensation is present?
possible.
Why do my headlamps turn off when I
have them switched on when I switch
my vehicle off?
The battery saver turns the headlamps
off after a short period of time after E311431
you switch your vehicle off.

Push the lever up or down to
switch the turn signal lamps on.
AUTOLAMPS
Set the lever to the middle position to
WHAT ARE AUTOLAMPS switch the turn signal lamps off.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
turn signal lamps flash three times.
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive SWITCHING THE DAYTIME
with due care and attention. You may RUNNING LAMPS ON AND OFF -
need to override the system if it does not VEHICLES WITH: CONFIGURABLE
turn the headlamps on in low visibility DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
conditions, for example daytime fog.
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low

light situations or when the windshield WARNING: The daytime running
wipers operate. lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
AUTOLAMP SETTINGS conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
2. Press Vehicle Settings. may result in a crash.
3. Press Lighting.
95
Exterior Lighting
2. Press Vehicle Settings. Press the button to switch the

3. Press Lighting. front fog lamps on or off.
4. Switch Daytime Running Lights on or Note: Only switch the front fog lamps on
off. during reduced visibility.
The daytime running lamps turn on when Note: The brightness of the daytime running
all of the following occur: lamps may decrease when the front fog
• You switch the system on. lamps are switched on.
• You switch your vehicle on. Note: When the lighting control is in the
• The transmission is not in park (P) for autolamps position, you cannot switch the
vehicles with automatic transmissions fog lamps on unless the headlamps are on.
or you release the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions. SWITCHING THE SPOT LAMPS ON
• The lighting control is in the autolamps AND OFF (If Equipped)
position.
• The headlamps are off. The spot lamp buttons are near the lighting
control.
Note: Other lighting control positions do
not turn on the daytime running lamps. E340436
Press the button to switch on the
left-hand spot lamp.
SWITCHING THE DAYTIME E340437 Press the button to switch on the

RUNNING LAMPS ON AND OFF - right-hand spot lamp.
VEHICLES WITH: DAYTIME
RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) Move the position of the exterior mirrors
to adjust the aim.
WARNING: The daytime running Note: The lighting control must be set to
lamps system does not activate the rear the parking lamp position.
lamps and may not provide adequate Note: The spot lamps illuminate the area
lighting during low visibility driving in front of and to the side of your vehicle.
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all EXTERIOR LAMP INDICATORS
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash. Front Fog Lamp
Daytime running lamps are always on It illuminates when you switch
unless you switch on the headlamps or the front fog lamps on.
your vehicle is in park (P).
Turn Signal Lamp
SWITCHING THE FRONT FOG
LAMPS ON AND OFF (If Equipped) It flashes when you switch the
turn signal lamps on.
The front fog lamp button is on the lighting
control. Note: An increase in the rate of flashing
warns of a failed turn signal lamp.
96
Exterior Lighting
EXTERIOR LAMP AUDIBLE D Individual zones on and off.

WARNING
E All zones on and off.
Exterior Lamps On
You can use zone lighting when your
Sounds when you open the driver door and vehicle is on or off. When it is off, the
the exterior lamps are on. lighting turns off after a certain period of
time.
EXTERIOR ZONE LIGHTING (IF You can also use individual zone controls
to switch on each zone.
EQUIPPED)
Note: Make sure to remove exterior lighting
covers when using zone lighting.
WHAT IS EXTERIOR ZONE
LIGHTING Note: When your vehicle is off and the timer
has one minute remaining, the turn signals
Exterior zone lighting divides the exterior flash six times.
lighting into zones and allows you to switch Note: Indicators on the touchscreen
them on and off to provide lighting around illuminate when the lights outside of the
the perimeter of your vehicle. zone lighting control are on.
Note: You can remotely control the zone
USING THE EXTERIOR ZONE lighting using the FordPass app.
LIGHTING
1. Press Features on the touchscreen. EXTERIOR ZONE LIGHTING
SETTINGS
2. Press Zone Lighting.
When you access zone lighting for the first
time, you can choose to allow zone lighting
to override the autolamps when zone
lighting is on.
You can change this setting at any time in
the zone lighting settings menu.
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Zone Lighting.
3. Press the settings menu in the upper
right-hand corner.
4. Press a setting.
E343474
A On and off button.

B Settings menu.
C Exterior lamp indicators.
97
Exterior Lighting
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM

CONTROL
HOW DOES AUTOMATIC HIGH

BEAM CONTROL WORK
Automatic high beam control turns the
high beams on if it is dark enough and no
other traffic is present. If it detects an
approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail
lamps, or street lighting ahead, the system
turns the high beams off.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.
E327596
A Without automatic high beam

control.
B With automatic high beam
control.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM

CONTROL PRECAUTIONS

relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the high beams on or off.
98
Exterior Lighting
• The system detects street lighting.

WARNING: Do not use the system • The camera has reduced visibility.
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy • The vehicle speed falls below
rain, spray or snow. approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
WARNING: You may need to
override the system when approaching SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH
other road users. BEAM CONTROL ON AND OFF
WARNING: You may need to 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.

override the system during inclement 2. Press Vehicle Settings.
weather. 3. Press Lighting.
4. Switch Auto Highbeam on or off.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL REQUIREMENTS AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL INDICATORS
The system turns the high beams on if all
of the following occur: Illuminates to confirm when the
• You switch the system on. system is ready to assist.
• You set the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
• The ambient light level is low enough OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC HIGH
that you require high beams. BEAM CONTROL
• There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (52 km/h).
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM

CONTROL LIMITATIONS
The system turns the high beams off if any
of the following occur:
• You switch the system off.
E308790
• You set the lighting control to any
position except autolamps. Push the lever away from you to switch
• The ambient light level is high enough the high beams on.
that you do not require high beams. Push the lever away from you again to
• The system detects an approaching switch the high beams off.
vehicle's headlamps or rear lamps.
Push the lever away from you for a third
• The system detects severe rain, snow time to switch automatic high beam
or fog. control back on.
99
Exterior Lighting
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Description
Front Camera Low Visib- The camera has reduced visibility. Clean the windshield. If
ility Clean Screen the message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked
Front Camera Tempor- The camera has malfunctioned. Wait a short period of time
arily Not Available for the camera to cool down. If the message continues to
appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc- The camera has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
tion Service Required as soon as possible.
100
Interior Lighting
SWITCHING ALL OF THE SWITCHING THE REAR

INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a button on the remote
control.
• You press the all lamps on button on
the overhead console.
Press to switch all interior lamps
on or off.
E281231
SWITCHING THE FRONT The rear interior lamps may be above the
INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF rear seat or above the rear windows.
Press to switch the lamps on or
off.
Note: If you switch the rear lamps on
through the overhead console, you cannot
switch them off with the rear lamp switch.
E281230
The front interior lamp switches are on the INTERIOR LAMP FUNCTION
overhead console.
Note: The position of each button on the WHAT IS THE INTERIOR LAMP
overhead console depends on your vehicle. FUNCTION
Individual Map Lamps The interior lamp function switches the
Press to switch the left-hand courtesy and door lamps on or off.
individual dome lamp on and off.
E262193
SWITCHING THE INTERIOR LAMP
Press to switch the right-hand FUNCTION ON AND OFF
individual dome lamp on and off.
Press to switch the interior lamp
function on and off.
Note: The indicator lamp illuminates amber
when the door function is off.
101
Interior Lighting
ADJUSTING THE INSTRUMENT

PANEL LIGHTING
BRIGHTNESS
The instrument lighting dimmer buttons
are on the lighting control.
Repeatedly press one of the
buttons to adjust the brightness.
E291299
E296433
AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)
SWITCHING AMBIENT LIGHTING

ON AND OFF
3. Press Ambient Light.
4. Switch Ambient Light on or off.
ADJUSTING AMBIENT LIGHTING

Drag the slider left or right.
INTERIOR LIGHTING –
TROUBLESHOOTING
INTERIOR LIGHTING –
Why do my courtesy lamps or interior
lamps turn off when I have them
switched on when I switch my vehicle
off?
The battery saver turns the courtesy
lamps and interior lamps off after a
short period of time after you switch
your vehicle off.
102
Windows
OPENING AND CLOSING THE WINDOW BOUNCE-BACK

WINDOWS
WHAT IS WINDOW BOUNCE-BACK
WARNING: Do not leave children The window stops and reverses if it detects
unattended in your vehicle and do not an obstruction when closing.
let them play with the power windows.
Failure to follow this instruction could OVERRIDING WINDOW BOUNCE-
result in personal injury. BACK
WARNING: When closing the
power windows, verify they are free of WARNING: If you override
obstruction and make sure that children bounce-back, the window does not
and pets are not in the proximity of the reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take
window openings. care when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your
Press the control to open the vehicle.
window. Lift the control to close
the window. 1. Close the window until it reaches the
Note: The power windows operate with the point of resistance and let it reverse.
ignition on, and for several minutes after you 2. Lift and hold the window control switch
switch the ignition off or until you open a within two seconds to override
front door. bounce-back and close the window.
To reduce wind noise or pulsing noise when Bounce-back is now disabled and you
one window is open, slightly open the can close the window manually.
opposite window. Note: The window goes past the point of
resistance and you can fully close it.
Tailgate Window
Note: If the window does not close, have
To open the window, do the following: your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
1. Open the tailgate. See Opening the
Tailgate From Outside Your Vehicle LOCKING THE REAR WINDOW
(page 84).
CONTROLS
2. Lift the window.
To close the window, do the following: Press the window control switch
to lock or unlock the rear window
1. Push the window down. controls. It illuminates when you
2. Close the tailgate. See Closing the lock the rear window controls.
Tailgate From Outside Your Vehicle
(page 84).
103
Interior Mirror
INTERIOR MIRROR
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not adjust the

mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or

glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
MANUALLY DIMMING THE

INTERIOR MIRROR
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.
AUTO-DIMMING INTERIOR
MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
WHAT IS THE AUTO-DIMMING

INTERIOR MIRROR
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R), to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
AUTO-DIMMING INTERIOR
MIRROR LIMITATIONS
Do not block the sensors on the front and
back of the mirror.
Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear
center head restraint could prevent light
from reaching the sensor.
104
Exterior Mirrors
ADJUSTING THE EXTERIOR FOLDING THE EXTERIOR

MIRRORS MIRRORS
Push the mirror toward the door window
WARNING: Do not adjust the glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This mirror in its support when returning it to its
could result in the loss of control of your original position.
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
E328042
A Left-hand mirror.
B Right-hand mirror.
C Adjustment control.
To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle

on, with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running.
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control light turns on.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
105
Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW
E328319
A Speedometer.
B Fuel gauge.
C Digital speedometer.
D Tachometer.
E Compass and ambient temperature.
F Odometer.
G Distance to empty.
WHAT IS THE TACHOMETER FUEL GAUGE
Indicates the engine speed. WHAT IS THE FUEL GAUGE

Indicates approximately how much fuel is
WHAT IS THE SPEEDOMETER in the fuel tank.
Indicates the vehicle speed.
106
Instrument Cluster
FUEL GAUGE LIMITATIONS WHAT IS THE TRANSMISSION

The fuel gauge may not provide an FLUID TEMPERATURE GAUGE
accurate reading when your vehicle is on
an incline. Indicates the transmission fluid
temperature.
LOCATING THE FUEL FILLER Special operating conditions can cause
DOOR higher than normal operating
temperatures. See Special Operating
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump Conditions Scheduled Maintenance
symbol indicates on which side of your (page 457).
vehicle the fuel filler door is located. Note: This is a configurable gauge.
WHAT IS THE LOW FUEL WHAT IS THE TURBO BOOST

REMINDER
GAUGE - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty Indicates the amount of manifold air
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for pressure in the engine.
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi Note: This is a configurable gauge.
(40 km), 12 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at WHAT IS THE INFORMATION
different fuel gauge positions depending on BAR
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal. Displays information for navigation, outside
air temperature, odometer and distance
WHAT IS DISTANCE TO EMPTY to empty.
Indicates the approximate distance your WHAT ARE THE INSTRUMENT

vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern can CLUSTER WARNING LAMPS
cause the value to not only decrease but
also increase or stay constant for periods Warning lamps alert you to a vehicle
of time. condition that could become serious.
Some lamps illuminate when you start
your vehicle to make sure they work. If any
WHAT IS THE ENGINE lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,
COOLANT TEMPERATURE refer to the respective system warning
lamp for further information.
GAUGE
Indicates the engine coolant temperature.
107
Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Electric Park Brake

WARNING LAMPS It illuminates or flashes when the
electric parking brake requires
Anti-Lock Brake System E325775 service.
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle Note: Indicators may vary depending on
continues to have normal braking without region.
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Engine Coolant Temperature
Battery If it illuminates, safely stop your

vehicle and switch your vehicle
It illuminates when you switch off.
the ignition on.
If it illuminates when the engine Fasten Seatbelt
is running this indicates a malfunction. It illuminates and a tone sounds
Have your vehicle checked as soon as until you fasten the seatbelts.
possible. E71880
Brake System Warning Lamp Hood Ajar

It illuminates when you apply the It illuminates when the ignition
parking brake and the ignition is
E324249
is on and the hood is not
E270480
on. If it illuminates when your completely closed.
vehicle is moving, make sure the
parking brake is released. If the Low Beam Warning
parking brake is released, this
indicates low brake fluid level or the brake Illuminates when the low beam
E325579
system requires service. Have your vehicle headlamp bulb requires service.
checked as soon as possible. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Note: Indicators may vary depending on
region.
Low Fuel Level
Door Ajar It illuminates when the fuel level
It illuminates when you switch is low.
E340898
the ignition on and remains on if
any door is open.
Low Tire Pressure
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If illuminated,
check your tire pressure as soon
as possible. If it begins to flash at anytime,
have the system checked as soon as
possible.
108
Instrument Cluster
Low Washer Fluid Level INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

It illuminates when the washer INDICATORS
fluid is low.
E132353 Adaptive Cruise Control
Malfunction Indicator Lamp See Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 234).
E144524
It illuminates when the ignition
is on and the engine is off, this is
normal operation. If it illuminates Automatic Headlamp High Beam
when the engine is on this indicates that
See Automatic High Beam
the emission control system requires
Control (page 98).
service. If it flashes, have your vehicle
checked immediately. See Emission Law
(page 521). Auto-Start-Stop
Oil Pressure See Auto-Start-Stop (page
161).
It illuminates when the engine
oil pressure is low.
Blind Spot Monitor
Powertrain Malfunction See Blind Spot Information
E323542
System (page 256).
Illuminates when the powertrain
requires service. Have the
system checked as soon as Cruise Control
possible. See Cruise Control (page 232).
Tailgate Ajar E71340
It illuminates when the ignition Differential Lock

E340897 is on and the tailgate is not
completely closed. See Electronic Locking
E328595
Differential (page 190).
WHAT ARE THE INSTRUMENT E325779

CLUSTER INDICATORS
Indicators notify you of various features
that are active on your vehicle.
109
Instrument Cluster
Drive Modes Front Fog Lamp

See G.O.A.T. Mode Control See Switching the Front Fog
(page 242). Lamps On and Off (page 96).
E225314
E295420
Headlamp High Beam
See Using the High Beam
Headlamps (page 94).
E295413
E296606
Hill Descent
See Hill Descent Control (page
217).
E317283
E322413
Lane Keeping System
See Lane Keeping System
(page 249).
E295414 E308131
One Pedal Drive

E246593
See Trail One Pedal Drive
1
E328584 (page 208).
E246592
Four-Wheel Drive Parking Lamps

See Exterior Lighting (page
See Four-Wheel Drive (page
94).
182).
E181778
Pre-Collision Assist
E181781
See Pre-Collision Assist (page
E329466 262).
E181780
E329467
E181779
Note: Some indicators will appear different
depending on vehicle options.
Front Airbag
See Airbags (page 59).
E67017
110
Instrument Cluster
Stability Control and Traction

Control
See Stability Control (page
204). See Traction Control
E138639 (page 202).
E130458
Stabilizer Bar Disconnect

See Stabilizer Bar Disconnect
E329476 (page 214).
Trail Control
See Trail Control (page 207).
E318506
Trail Turn Assist

See Trail Turn Assist (page
E329474 212).
E329475
Tow Haul
See Towing a Trailer (page 283).
E246592
Turn Signal Lamps

See Exterior Lamps (page 95).
111
Instrument Cluster Display
USING THE INSTRUMENT OK Button

CLUSTER DISPLAY CONTROLS Press to make a selection. Press the toggle
button up or down to scroll through menu
items.
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
Menu Button
and injury. We strongly recommend that Press to display the submenus.
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the Toggle Buttons
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We Used to navigate the menus.
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and Status Indicator
encourage the use of voice-operated Menu items with a check box
systems when possible. Make sure you indicates a feature's status. A
are aware of all applicable local laws E204495 check in the box indicates the
that may affect the use of electronic feature is on, and unchecked indicates the
devices while driving. feature is off.
The controls are on the steering wheel.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY MAIN MENU
Depending on your vehicle options, some
menu items may appear different or not
at all.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent and could be unavailable
when your vehicle is above a certain speed.
Menu Item
E326969
MyView
A Menu button.
Trip/Fuel
B Return button.
Off-Road
C Up button.
D OK toggle button. Navigation
E Down toggle button Phone
Audio
Return Button
Settings
Press to go back or to exit a menu.
112
Instrument Cluster Display
TRIP COMPUTER CHANGING THE TEMPERATURE

UNIT
ACCESSING THE TRIP COMPUTER 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
1. Select Trip/Fuel. 2. Press General.
2. Select Fuel Economy, Trip 1 or Trip 2. 3. Press Temperature Units.
4. Select Fahrenheit or Celsius.
RESETTING THE TRIP COMPUTER
CHANGING THE TIRE PRESSURE
1. Select Trip/Fuel. UNIT
2. Press and hold the OK button for a few
seconds. 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press General.
RESETTING THE INDIVIDUAL TRIP 3. Press Tire Pressure Units.
VALUES 4. Select a pressure unit.
1. Select Trip/Fuel.
2. Select Trip 1 or Trip 2.
3. Press and hold the OK button for a few
seconds.
PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
CHANGING THE INSTRUMENT

CLUSTER DISPLAY LANGUAGE
Note: Available languages vary by region.
2. Press General.
3. Press Language.
4. Select a language.
CHANGING THE MEASURE UNIT

2. Press General.
3. Press Measure Units.
4. Select a measurement unit.
113
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WHAT IS REMOTE START 3. Press Remote Start Setup.

4. Switch Remote Start on or off.
The system allows you to remotely start Note: To remote start with FordPass, make
your vehicle and to adjust the interior sure that the modem is enabled. See
temperature according to the settings that Connecting FordPass to the Modem
you chose. (page 409).
REMOTE START REMOTELY STARTING AND

PRECAUTIONS STOPPING THE VEHICLE
Remotely Starting the Vehicle
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed Press the button on the remote
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always control.
E138623
open the garage door before you start
the engine. Failure to follow this Within three seconds, press the
instruction could result in personal injury button on the remote control.
E138625
or death. Within three seconds, press the
button again.
REMOTE START LIMITATIONS Note: You can also use FordPass to start
the vehicle.
Remote start does not work under the Note: The turn signal lamps flash twice.
following conditions:
Note: The parking lamps turn on when the
• The perimeter alarm is sounding. vehicle is running.
• The hood is open. Note: The horn sounds if the system fails
• The transmission is not in park (P). to start.
• The ignition is on. Note: All other vehicle systems remain off
• The check engine light is on. when you have remotely started the vehicle.
• The battery voltage is below the Note: The vehicle remains secured when
minimum operating voltage. you have remotely started the vehicle. A
valid key must be inside your vehicle to
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel switch the ignition on and drive your vehicle.
level is low.
Note: To use remote start with the Ford Remotely Stopping the Vehicle
Pass or Phone as a Key, enable the modem.
Within three seconds, press the
See Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
button on the remote control.
Network (page 409). E138625
Within three seconds, press the
button again.
ENABLING REMOTE START
114
REMOTE START REMOTE SWITCHING CLIMATE CONTROL

LAST SETTINGS ON AND OFF
CONTROL INDICATORS (IF
EQUIPPED) 1. Using the information display controls
on the steering wheel, select Settings.
Remote Control Feedback 2. Select Vehicle.
An LED on the remote control provides 3. Select Remote Start.
status feedback of remote start or stop 4. Select Climate Control.
commands. 5. Switch Last Settings on or off.
Note: If you switch the last settings on, the
LED Status
system remembers the last used settings.
Solid green. Remote start
successful. SWITCHING THE HEATED SEAT
Solid red. Remote stop
SETTINGS ON AND OFF
successful. 1. Using the information display controls
Blinking red. Request failed or on the steering wheel, select Settings.
status not received. 2. Select Vehicle.
Blinking green. Status incomplete. 3. Select Remote Start.
4. Select Front Seats.
5. Select Auto or Off.
REMOTE START SETTINGS
Note: If you switch the heated seat settings
on, the heated seats turn on during cold
SWITCHING CLIMATE CONTROL weather.
AUTO MODE ON AND OFF
Note: You cannot adjust the heated seat
1. Using the information display controls settings when you have remotely started
on the steering wheel, select Settings. the engine.
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Remote Start.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
STEERING WHEEL SETTINGS ON
4. Select Climate Control. AND OFF
5. Switch Auto on or off.
1. Using the information display controls
Note: If you switch the auto mode on, the on the steering wheel, select Settings.
system attempts to heat or cool the interior
to 72°F (22°C). 2. Select Vehicle.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, the 3. Select Remote Start.
climate control system returns to the last 4. Select Front Seats & Wheel.
used settings. 5. Select Auto or Off.
Note: The heated windshield, heated rear Note: If you switch the heated steering
window, heated mirrors, heated seats and wheel settings on, the heated steering wheel
heated steering wheel could turn on in cold turns on during cold weather.
weather.
115
Note: You cannot adjust the heated

steering wheel settings when you have
remotely started the engine.
SETTING THE REMOTE START

DURATION
You can set a duration for the vehicle to
run.
Note: Wait a few seconds before remotely
starting the engine after the engine stops
running.
1. Using the information display controls
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Remote Start.
4. Select Duration.
116
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE Note: Under certain conditions, the air

conditioning compressor could continue to
CONTROL UNIT operate after you switch air conditioning off.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
DEFROST ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,

E339318
the temperature is set to the highest
Depending on your vehicle options, the setting, and the blower motor adjusts to
controls could look different than what you the highest speed.
see here. You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
SWITCHING CLIMATE ice.
CONTROL ON AND OFF Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
Press the button. maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window and heated
mirrors also turn on when you select
maximum defrost.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED
AIR ON AND OFF SWITCHING MAXIMUM
COOLING ON AND OFF
Press the button to recirculate
air currently in the passenger Press the button.
compartment.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off
automatically, or prevent you from switching Air flows through the instrument panel air
on in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to vents, the temperature is set to the lowest
reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may setting, and the blower motor adjusts to
also turn on and off automatically in various the highest speed.
air distribution control combinations to
improve heating or cooling efficiency. Note: When you switch maximum cooling
off, air conditioning remains on.
SWITCHING AIR
CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
117
Control
SWITCHING THE HEATED SETTING THE TEMPERATURE

REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF (IF
EQUIPPED)
Press the button to clear the rear

window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: This button also activates the heated
mirrors.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. E244115
Turn the control on the left-hand side of

SWITCHING THE HEATED the climate control to set the left-hand
MIRRORS ON AND OFF temperature.
Note: This control also sets the right-hand
Press the button. side temperature when you switch off dual
E266189
zone mode.
Turn the control on the right-hand side of
the climate control to set the right-hand
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR temperature.
SPEED
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR
E266187 Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Press up or down on the control Vents
to select the blower motor
Press the button to activate the
speed.
selection screen.
E265283
E266186 Press the button on the

touchscreen.
Directing Air to the Instrument

Panel Air Vents
Press the button to activate the
selection screen.
E265283
118
Control
Press the button on the AUTO MODE

E244097 touchscreen.
SWITCHING AUTO MODE ON AND
Directing Air to the Footwell Air OFF
Vents
Press the button to switch auto
Press the button to activate the mode on. Repeatedly press the
selection screen. button to adjust auto mode.
E265283
Press the button on the Note: When you switch auto mode on,
touchscreen. lights on the blower motor control do not
illuminate to indicate the blower motor
speed.
Adjust the blower motor control or air
distribution control to switch auto mode
off.
AUTO MODE INDICATORS

The indicators are on the Auto Mode
button.
Auto Mode Indicator Description

Status
One indicator illumin- The blower motor speed is reduced. Use this setting to
ated. minimize the amount of noise from the blower motor. This
setting increases the time taken to cool the interior.
Two indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is moderate.
ated.
Three indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is increased. Use this setting to
ated. reduce the time taken to cool the interior. This setting
increases the amount of noise from the blower motor.
119
Control
SWITCHING DUAL MODE ON AND • If you press AUTO during cold outside
OFF temperatures, the system directs air
flow to the windshield and side window
Press the button. air vents. In addition, the blower motor
may run at a slower speed until the
E265280 engine warms up.
• If you press AUTO during hot
CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS temperatures and the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system uses
General Hints recirculated air to maximize interior
cooling. Blower motor speed may also
• Prolonged use of recirculated air may reduce until the air cools.
cause the windows to fog up.
• You may feel a small amount of air Quickly Heating the Interior
from the footwell air vents regardless 1. Press AUTO.
of the air distribution setting.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
• To reduce humidity build-up inside your
setting you prefer.
vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air Recommended Settings for
always switched on. Heating
• Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the 1. Press AUTO.
airflow to the rear seats. 2. Adjust the temperature function to the
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
the air intake area at the base of the a starting point, then adjust the setting
windshield. as necessary.
• To improve the time to reach a Quickly Cooling the Interior
comfortable temperature in hot
weather, drive with the windows open Press MAX A/C.
until you feel cold air through the air
vents. Recommended Settings for
Cooling
Automatic Climate Control
1. Press AUTO.
• Adjusting the settings when your
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
is not necessary. Automatic mode is
a starting point, then adjust the setting
best recommended to maintain set
as necessary.
temperature.
• The system adjusts to heat or cool the Defogging the Side Windows in
interior to the temperature you select Cold Weather
as quickly as possible.
1. Press and release defrost or maximum
• For the system to function efficiently, defrost.
the instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open.
120
Control
2. Adjust the temperature control to the

setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
121
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE Note: Under certain conditions, the air

conditioning compressor could continue to
CONTROL UNIT operate after you switch air conditioning off.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
DEFROST ON AND OFF
Turn the temperature control
clockwise past the highest
setting to maximize defrosting.
E308141
Note: The temperature control springs back
to the highest setting.
Depending on your vehicle options, the Air flows through the windshield air vents,
controls could look different than what you and the blower motor adjusts to the
see here. highest speed.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
SWITCHING CLIMATE cannot select recirculated air when
CONTROL ON AND OFF maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns
Press the button. on when you select maximum defrost.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED COOLING ON AND OFF
AIR ON AND OFF Turn the temperature control
counterclockwise past the
Press the button to recirculate
lowest setting to maximize
air currently in the passenger
cooling.
compartment.
Note: The temperature control springs back
Note: Recirculated air may turn off
to the lowest setting.
automatically, or prevent you from switching
on in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to Note: When you switch maximum cooling
reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may off, air conditioning remains on.
also turn on and off automatically in various
air distribution control combinations to
improve heating or cooling efficiency.
REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF
SWITCHING AIR Press the button to clear the rear
CONDITIONING ON AND OFF window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
Press the button. after a short period of time.
122
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor SETTING THE TEMPERATURE

blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.

MIRRORS ON AND OFF
Press the button.
E266189
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR

SPEED E244106
Turn the temperature control

counterclockwise for cooler temperature
settings.
Turn the temperature control clockwise
for warmer temperature settings.
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR

Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents
Press the button.
E317606
Directing Air to the Instrument
Turn the blower motor control Panel Air Vents
counterclockwise for a lower blower
setting. Press the button.
E244097
Turn the blower motor control clockwise
for a higher blower setting.
Directing Air to the Footwell Air
Note: Lights on the control illuminate to
Vents
indicate the blower motor speed.
Note: When you switch the blower motor Press the button.
off, air conditioning turns off and the
windows could fog up.
123
CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS 2. Drive with the windows open for a short
period of time.
General Hints
Recommended Settings for
• Prolonged use of recirculated air may Cooling
cause the windows to fog up.
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
• You may feel a small amount of air center setting.
from the footwell air vents regardless
of the air distribution setting. 2. Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside your
vehicle, do not drive with the system 3. Direct air to the instrument panel air
switched off or with recirculated air vents.
always switched on.
Defogging the Side Windows in
• Do not place objects under the front Cold Weather
seats as this may interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats. 1. Direct air to the instrument panel and
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from windshield air vents.
the air intake area at the base of the 2. Press and release A/C.
windshield. 3. Adjust the temperature control to the
• To improve the time to reach a setting you prefer.
comfortable temperature in hot 4. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
weather, drive with the windows open highest setting.
until you feel cold air through the air
vents. 5. Direct air toward the side windows.
6. Close the instrument panel air vents.
Quickly Heating the Interior
highest speed setting.
highest setting.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Recommended Settings for

Heating
center setting.
midway point of the hot settings.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Quickly Cooling the Interior

1. Press MAX A/C.
124
Interior Air Quality
WHAT IS THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
The cabin air filter improves the quality of
air in your vehicle by trapping dust, pollen
and other particles.
REPLACING THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
Replace the filter at regular intervals.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Note: Using an aftermarket cabin air filter
could reduce cabin air filtration and climate
control performance.
125
Front Seats
FRONT SEAT PRECAUTIONS SITTING IN THE CORRECT

POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat

backrest too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in personal injury in the event
of a crash.
E68595
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the top of the seat backrest. When you use them properly, the seat,
Failure to follow this instruction could head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will
result in personal injury or death in the provide optimum protection in the event
event of a sudden stop or crash. of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver guidelines:
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle • Sit in an upright position with the base
is moving. This may result in sudden seat of your spine as far back as possible.
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle. • Do not recline the seat backrest so that
your torso is more than 30 degrees
from the upright position.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
126
Front Seats
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can ADJUSTING THE HEAD
press the pedals fully. RESTRAINT
• Position the shoulder strap of the
seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap WARNING: Fully adjust the head
tightly across your hips. restraint before you sit in or operate your
Make sure that your driving position is vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
comfortable and that you can maintain full of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
control of your vehicle. not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
MANUAL SEATS WARNING: The head restraint is a

safety device. Whenever possible it
should be installed and properly
HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS adjusted when the seat is occupied.
Failure to adjust the head restraint
properly could reduce its effectiveness
during certain impacts.
WARNING: Adjust the head

restraints for all passengers before you
drive your vehicle. This will help minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash. Do not adjust the head restraints
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright

E308298 driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
The head restraints consist of: the top of it is level with the top of your head
A An energy absorbing head and as far forward as possible. Make sure
restraint. that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
B Guide sleeve adjust and release its highest position.
button.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
C Two steel stems.
To lower the head restraint:
D Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button (If equipped). 1. Press and hold the adjust and release
button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
127
Front Seats
1. Pull up the head restraint until it

reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Press and hold the button.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Note: You cannot remove head restraints
that have audio system speakers.
INSTALLING THE HEAD

RESTRAINT
E327919
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
For vehicles with tilting head restraints: and push the head restraint down until it
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright locks.
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward MOVING THE SEAT BACKWARD
your head to the preferred position. AND FORWARD
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, untilted WARNING: Make sure the seat fully
position. locks into place by rocking it backward
and forward. Not securing the seat into
Note: Do not attempt to force the head the locked position can be dangerous in
restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead, a crash and could cause serious personal
continue tilting it forward until the head injury or death.
restraint releases to the upright position.
REMOVING THE HEAD RESTRAINT
E327503
E308316
128
Front Seats
ADJUSTING THE SEAT BACKREST POWER SEATS
HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS

WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or

any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have
a crash.
E327921
The head restraints consist of:

A An energy absorbing head
restraint.
B Two steel stems.
C Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
D Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button (If equipped).
E327922
ADJUSTING THE HEAD
RESTRAINT
WARNING: Fully adjust the head

restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
129
Front Seats
Note: Do not attempt to force the head

WARNING: The head restraint is a restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,
safety device. Whenever possible it continue tilting it forward until the head
should be installed and properly restraint releases to the upright position.
adjusted when the seat is occupied.
Failure to adjust the head restraint REMOVING THE HEAD RESTRAINT
properly could reduce its effectiveness
during certain impacts. 1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches its highest position.
WARNING: Adjust the head 2. Press and hold the adjust and release
restraints for all passengers before you button.
drive your vehicle. This will help minimize
3. Pull up the head restraint.
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash. Do not adjust the head restraints Note: You cannot remove head restraints
when your vehicle is moving. that have audio system speakers.
To raise the head restraint, pull the head INSTALLING THE HEAD
restraint up. RESTRAINT
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
1. Press and hold the adjust and release and push the head restraint down until it
button. locks.
To tilt the head restraint: MOVING THE SEAT BACKWARD
AND FORWARD
E327919
E308339
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the preferred position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, untilted
position.
130
Front Seats
ADJUSTING THE SEAT CUSHION ADJUSTING THE SEAT HEIGHT
E308336 E308337
ADJUSTING THE SEAT BACKREST ADJUSTING THE LUMBAR

SUPPORT
WARNING: Do not place cargo or

any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
E327927
E308338
131
Front Seats
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
HEATED SEAT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Use caution when using

the heated seat if you are unable to feel
pain to your skin because of advanced E146322
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
exhaustion or other physical conditions. through the various heat settings and off.
The heated seat could cause burns even The more indicators that display, the
at low temperatures, especially if used warmer the temperature of the seat.
for long periods of time. Failure to follow Note: The heated seats may remain on
this instruction could result in personal after you remote start your vehicle, based
injury. on your remote start settings. The heated
seats may also turn on when you start your
WARNING: Do not poke sharp vehicle if they were on when you switched
objects into the seat cushion or seat your vehicle off.
backrest. This could damage the heated
seat element and cause it to overheat.
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place anything

on the seat that blocks the heat, for
example a seat cover or a cushion. This
could cause the seat to overheat. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
Do not:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry.
SWITCHING THE HEATED SEATS

ON AND OFF
The vehicle must be running to use this
feature.
132
Rear Seats
MANUAL SEATS C Guide sleeve adjust and release

button.
HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS D Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button (If equipped).
Rear Seat Outermost Head Restraints
(4-Door) E Fold button (If equipped).
Rear Seat Outermost Head Restraints

(2-Door)
B
E333887
The head restraints consist of:
E330418
A An energy absorbing head
restraint.
Rear Seat Center Head Restraint B Two steel stems.
(4-Door)
C Fold strap.
ADJUSTING THE HEAD

RESTRAINT
4-Door
Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
1. Press and hold the adjust and release
button.
E342165
The head restraints consist of: Press the fold button to fold the head
A An energy absorbing head restraint.
restraint.
B Two steel stems.
133
Rear Seats
2-Door 4-Door
Pull the strap to fold the head restraint
rearward.
REMOVING THE HEAD RESTRAINT

1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold the adjust and release
button and the unlock and remove
button.
3. Pull up the head restraint. E327939
Note: The head restraints are not Pull the lever up to fold the seat backrest
removable on 2-door vehicles. fully forward.
Note: Make sure that the area under the
INSTALLING THE HEAD seat is free of objects before folding the
RESTRAINT backrest.
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves To return the seat backrest to the upright
and push the head restraint down until it position, rotate it up until it locks.
locks. Note: To store the removable doors, the
seat backrest must be in the upright
ADJUSTING THE SEAT BACKREST position.
To recline the seat backrest to the optimal
seating position, pull the lever up and push
WARNING: Do not place cargo or the backrest rearward.
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position. FOLDING THE SEATS
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become WARNING: Do not drive your
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have vehicle with a seat that is unlatched or
a crash. in the folded position. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
Note: The rear seats are not adjustable on injury or death in the event of a sudden
2-door vehicles. stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not adjust a seat or

release a seat floor latch when the
vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this
or death in a sudden stop or crash.
134
Rear Seats
2-Door UNFOLDING THE SEATS
WARNING: Make sure that cargo

and other objects are not trapped under
the seat cushion and that you return the
seat cushion to the full-down position.
Failure to do so may prevent the seat
from operating properly, which could
increase the risk of serious injury in a
crash.
For 2-door vehicles, rotate the seat

backrest upright until it locks in the seating
position. Then, move the seat cushion back
to the seating position.
E342383
1. Pull the strap at the front of the seat

cushion. Then, flip the seat cushion up
to the vertical position.
E342771
2. Pull the strap on the top of the seat

backrest to fold it forward.
135
Rear Occupant Alert System (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE REAR

OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
The rear occupant alert system monitors Failure to follow this instruction could
vehicle conditions and notifies you to check result in personal injury or death.
for rear seat occupants when you switch
the ignition off.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
HOW DOES THE REAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM The system does not function if any door
WORK is removed.
The system does not detect the presence
The system monitors when rear doors have of objects or passengers in the rear seat.
been opened and closed to indicate the It monitors when rear doors are opened
potential presence of an occupant in the and closed.
rear seat.
Note: It is possible to receive an alert when
A message displays in the information and there is no rear seat occupant, but alert
entertainment display screen and an conditions are met.
audible warning sounds when you switch
the ignition off after any of the following Note: It is possible to receive no alert when
conditions have been met: there is an occupant in the rear seat, if alert
conditions are not met. For example, if a rear
• A rear door is opened or closed while seat occupant does not enter the vehicle
the ignition is on. through a rear door.
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of a rear door opening and Note: The audible warning does not sound
closing. when the front door is opened before you
switch the ignition off.
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of the alert having displayed
or sounded. SWITCHING REAR OCCUPANT
ALERT SYSTEM ON AND OFF
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Switch Rear Occupant Alert on or off.
WARNING: On hot days, the Note: The default setting is on.
temperature inside the vehicle can rise Note: Performing a master reset causes the
very quickly. Exposure of people or system to switch on again.
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or
serious heat related injuries, including
brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
136
Rear Occupant Alert System (If Equipped)
Semiannual Reminder (If Equipped)

When you switch the system off, a
message appears every six months as a
reminder that the system is off. You can
switch the system back on or leave it off.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT

SYSTEM INDICATORS
E350472
Message
Check rear seats for occupants.
Displays when you switch your vehicle off

after the alert conditions are met.
The message displays for a short period of
time. Press Close to acknowledge and
remove the message.
Note: Depending on your SYNC version, the
graphic may look different from what you
see here.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT

SYSTEM AUDIBLE WARNINGS
Sounds when you switch your vehicle off
after the alert conditions are met.
The warning sounds for a short period of
time.
137
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE GARAGE DOOR GARAGE DOOR OPENER

OPENER PRECAUTIONS
HomeLink Wireless Control
System WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does
not have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal
Safety Standards (this includes any
garage door opener manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door
opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door opener
without these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
E188211
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
The universal garage door opener replaces security device are free from obstruction
the common hand-held garage door when you are programming. Do not program
opener with a three-button transmitter the system with your vehicle in the garage.
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
HOW DOES THE GARAGE vehicles as well as for future system
DOOR OPENER WORK programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
The system includes two primary features, or lease termination of your vehicle, you
a garage door opener and a platform for erase the programmed function buttons for
remote activation of devices within the security reasons. See Clearing the Garage
home. You can program garage doors as Door Opener (page 140).
well as entry gate operators, security
systems, entry door locks and home or
office lighting. GARAGE DOOR OPENER
Additional system information can be LIMITATIONS
found online at www.homelink.com or by
calling the toll-free help line at Canadian radio-frequency laws require
1-800-355-3515. transmitter signals to time-out (or quit)
after several seconds – which may not be
Note: You can program a maximum of long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
three devices. To change or replace any of signal.
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the U.S. gate operators time-out in the same
current settings. See Clearing the Garage manner.
Door Opener (page 140).
138
Note: If programming a garage door opener 4. Press and hold the hand-held
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the transmitter button you want to
device during the “cycling” process to program while watching the indicator
prevent possible overheating. light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE or is continuously on.
DOOR OPENER TO YOUR Note: You may need to use a different
HAND-HELD TRANSMITTER method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
This process is to program your in-vehicle or garage door opener. See Programming
HomeLink function button with your the Garage Door Opener to Your Gate
hand-held transmitter. Opener Motor (page 140).
Note: The programming steps below 5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
assume you will be programming HomeLink you programmed for two seconds, then
that was not previously programmed. If your release. You may need to do this twice
HomeLink was previously programmed, you to activate the door.
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons. Note: If the indicator light stays on, the
See Clearing the Garage Door Opener programming is complete.
(page 140).
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat step 5.
Note: If your device still does not operate,
you must program your garage door. See
Programming the Garage Door Opener to
Your Garage Door Opener Motor (page
139).
6. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE

E188212
DOOR OPENER TO YOUR
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the GARAGE DOOR OPENER
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle. MOTOR
2. Press and release one of the three
HomeLink function buttons that you
would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
E142659
139
1. Press the learn button on the garage 1. Press and release, every two seconds,
door opener motor, you have 30 your hand-held transmitter until the
seconds to complete the next two HomeLink indicator light changes to a
steps. rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Return to your vehicle. 2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink function
button you want to program for two
seconds, then release. You may need
to do this twice to activate the door.
Note: If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat Step 3.
Note: If your device still does not operate,
E188212
you must program your garage door. See
Programming the Garage Door Opener to
3. Press and hold one of the three Your Garage Door Opener Motor (page
HomeLink function buttons you want 139).
to program for two seconds, then 4. To program additional buttons, repeat
release. Repeat this step. Depending Steps 1 – 4.
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time. CLEARING THE GARAGE DOOR
OPENER
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER TO YOUR GATE
OPENER MOTOR
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, E188213
some U.S. gate operators “time-out” in the
same manner. 1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
Note: If programming a garage door opener approximately 10 seconds until the
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the indicator light above the buttons
device during the “cycling” process to flashes rapidly.
prevent possible overheating.
140
2. When the indicator light flashes, This equipment complies with FCC
release the buttons. radiation exposure limits set forth for an
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons. uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
REPROGRAMMING THE transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
GARAGE DOOR OPENER from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
To program a device to a previously trained antenna or transmitter.
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow programming steps.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER

RADIO FREQUENCIES
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
WARNING: Changes or
by the party responsible for compliance
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
specifications were met.
This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that could cause undesired
operation.
141
USB Ports
LOCATING THE USB PORTS PLAYING MEDIA USING THE

USB PORT
Data Transfer USB Ports

The USB Ports could be in the following and injury. We strongly recommend that
locations: you use extreme caution when using any
• On the lower instrument panel. device that may take your focus off the
• Inside the media bin.
safe operation of your vehicle. We
• Inside the center console. recommend against the use of any
Note: These USB ports can also charge hand-held device while driving and
devices. encourage the use of voice-operated
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have are aware of all applicable local laws
data transfer capabilities. that may affect the use of electronic
Note: We recommend using only USB-IF devices while driving.
certified cables and adapters. Non-certified
cables and adapters may not work. Connect your device to the USB port.
Press the audio button on the
Charge Only USB Ports feature bar.
E100027
Select Sources.
The USB ports could be in the following Select the USB option.
locations:
• On the lower instrument panel. Press the button to play a track.
• On the upper instrument panel. Press the button again to pause
• Inside the media bin. the track.
• Inside the center console. Press the button to skip to the
• On the rear of the center console. next track.
• In the cargo area. Press and hold the button to fast
forward through the track.
Press the button once to return
to the beginning of a track.
Repeatedly press the button to
return to previous tracks.
Press and hold the button to fast rewind.
142
USB Ports
CHARGING A DEVICE
Connect your device to the USB port.
You can use the charger when the vehicle
is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is
running, or when SYNC is on.
143
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 120V Power Outlet
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET Rear of the Center Console
The power outlet can power devices that

use a household plug.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not keep electrical

devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so may
cause the power point to overload due E337926
to powering multiple devices that can
reach beyond the 400 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury. POWER OUTLET INDICATORS
Note: The vehicle provides up to 400 watts The power outlet indicator illuminates to
when in park and up to 300 watts when in let you know the status of the system.
drive mode. This wattage is divided between
multiple outlets when in use at the same Indicator Status Description
time.
On The power point is
working, the ignition
LOCATING THE POWER is on, or the vehicle
OUTLET is in accessory
mode.
The power outlet is on the rear of the
Off The power point is
center console.
off, the ignition is
off, or the vehicle is
not in accessory
mode.
Flashing The power point is
in fault mode.
Note: Due to different technologies used

on its construction, some devices may
exceed the capacity shown on its label
when they are initially plugged in.
144
Note: The power outlet temporarily turns

off power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the Watt limit. Unplug your device
and switch the ignition off. Switch the
ignition back on, but do not plug your device
back in. Let the system cool off and switch
the ignition off to reset the fault mode.
Switch the ignition back on and make sure
the indicator light remains on.
145
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET

The power outlet can power devices using
a 12 V outlet adapter.
POWER OUTLET
PRECAUTIONS
When you switch the vehicle on, you can
use the socket to power 12 V appliances
with a maximum current rating of 20 A. Do
not use the power point over the vehicle
capacity of 12 V DC 240 W or a fuse could
blow. Do not plug in any device that
supplies power to the vehicle through the
power points. This could result in damage
to vehicle systems. Do not hang any
accessory from the accessory plug. Always
keep the power point caps closed when
not in use. Do not insert objects other than
an accessory plug into the power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is off.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
LOCATING THE POWER

OUTLET
Power outlets may be in the following
locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
• On the front of the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the cargo area.
• On the passenger side floor panel.
• 3rd row on the quarter trim panels.
146
Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE WIRELESS This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
ACCESSORY CHARGER Operation is subject to:
The wireless accessory charger allows you • This device may not cause interference.
to charge one compatible Qi wireless • This device must accept any
charging device on the charging area. interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
WIRELESS ACCESSORY
Keep the charging area clean and remove
CHARGER PRECAUTIONS foreign objects prior to charging a device.
Do not place items with a magnetic strip,
for example passports, parking tickets or
WARNING: Wireless charging
credit cards, near the charging area when
devices can affect the operation of
charging a device. Damage may occur to
implanted medical devices, including
the magnetic strip.
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any
implanted medical devices, we Do not place metal objects, for example
recommend that you consult with your remote controls, coins and candy
physician. wrappers, on or near the charging area
when charging a device. Metal objects may
Tests on this equipment show that it heat up and degrade the charging
complies with part 18 of the FCC Rules. performance, in addition to causing error
• This equipment generates, uses and messages and interruptions in charging.
can radiate radio frequency energy and Note: The rate of charge, or charging power,
may cause harmful interference to is controlled by the device. During charging,
radio communications. There is no the device and the charger could heat up,
guarantee that the interference will not this is normal. If the battery gets hotter than
occur in a particular installation. If this usual, the device may stop charging.
equipment does cause harmful
Note: If the system detects a foreign object
interference to radio or television
or if the device is misaligned on the charging
reception, please consult the dealer.
area, a message appears on the display.
• This product is not end-user
serviceable.
LOCATING THE WIRELESS
ACCESSORY CHARGER
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved The charging area is on the
by the party responsible for compliance center console or in the media
could void the user's authority to operate E297549
bin below the instrument panel.
147
Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped)
CHARGING A WIRELESS Displays on the status bar when

wireless charging is in progress.
DEVICE
Note: The charging performance may be
Place the device on the center of the affected if your device is in a case. It may be
charging surface with the charging side necessary to remove the case to wirelessly
down. The charging stops after your device charge your device.
reaches a full charge.
Note: Software and firmware updates may
You can use the charger when the vehicle affect device compatibility, including the
is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is use of unofficial software or firmware.
running, or when SYNC is on. Customers should verify charging
functionality with their specific devices
in-vehicle.
WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGER – TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGER – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Behavior Description
Phone misaligned or object The system stops charging

between phone and charger your device if the system
detected. Correct the condi- detects the phone is
Pop-up window.
tion to resume charging. misaligned, or a foreign
metal object is on the char-
ging surface.
148
Storage
GLOVE COMPARTMENT CENTER CONSOLE
OPENING THE GLOVE OPENING THE CENTER CONSOLE

COMPARTMENT
E310218 E333116
Push the latch to open the center console.

Pull the latch to the left to open.
LOCKING THE CENTER CONSOLE
LOCKING THE GLOVE
COMPARTMENT
The lower glove compartment may be
locked using the key.
E333115
You can lock the center console using the

key.
E351063
A Unlock.
B Lock.
149
Storage
UNDER FLOOR STORAGE MAP POCKET
LOCATING THE LUGGAGE LOCATING THE MAP POCKET

COMPARTMENT UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE A map pocket and optional hook and
MOLLE system are on the backs of the
front seats.
E332867
Lift the strap to access the under floor

storage in the luggage compartment.
GLASSES HOLDER
LOCATING THE GLASSES HOLDER E337638
A. MOLLE system (if equipped).

B. Hooks (if equipped).
C. Map pocket.
Note: The recommended weight limit for
this system is 7 lb (3 kg).
E306967
The glasses holder is in the overhead

console.
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
150
Starting and Stopping the Engine
STARTING AND STOPPING PUSH BUTTON IGNITION

THE ENGINE – PRECAUTIONS SWITCH
WARNING: Extended idling at high

engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or

drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. E340581
WARNING: Do not start the engine Switching the Ignition Off

in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always When the ignition is on or in accessory
open the garage door before you start mode, press the push button ignition
the engine. Failure to follow this switch once without your foot on the brake
instruction could result in personal injury pedal.
or death.
Switching the Ignition to
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may Accessory Mode
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger When the ignition is off, press the push
compartment. If you smell exhaust button ignition switch once without your
fumes inside your vehicle, have your foot on the brake pedal.
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not All electrical circuits and accessories are
drive if you smell exhaust fumes. operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
The powertrain control system meets all Note: Your vehicle has a battery saver
Canadian interference-causing equipment feature that shuts your vehicle off when it
standard requirements regulating the detects a certain amount of battery drain,
impulse electrical field or radio noise. or after about 30 minutes of inactivity in
If you stop your vehicle and leave the accessory mode.
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the Starting the Engine
following:
With the transmission in park (P), press
• Open the windows at least 1 in the brake pedal and press the push button
(2.5 cm). ignition switch. An indicator light on the
• Set your climate control to outside air. button illuminates when then ignition is on
and when the engine starts.
151
Note: The system may not function if the STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE -
passive key is close to metal objects or AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone. Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
Note: A valid key must be inside your
vehicle to switch the ignition on and start • Make sure that the headlamps and
the engine. electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
STARTING THE ENGINE • Make sure that the transmission is in
park (P).
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE - 1. Fully press the brake pedal.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure that the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in
neutral.
1. Fully press the clutch pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E340581
2. Press the push button ignition switch.

Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: The engine takes longer to start at
lower temperatures. It may crank for several
seconds when very cold.
RESTARTING THE ENGINE AFTER

STOPPING IT
E340581
2. Press the push button ignition switch. The system allows you to start the engine
within 10 seconds of switching it off, even
Note: The engine may continue cranking if it does not detect a valid passive key.
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Within 10 seconds of switching the engine
Note: The engine takes longer to start at off, fully press the brake or clutch pedal
lower temperatures. It may crank for several and press the push button ignition switch.
seconds when very cold. After 10 seconds, you can no longer start
the engine if the system does not detect a
valid passive key.
152
When you start the engine, it remains temperatures, and be clearly marked
running until you press the push button Suitable for Use with Outdoor
ignition switch, even if your vehicle does Appliances. Do not use an indoor
not detect a valid passive key. If you open extension cord outdoors. This could
and close a door when the engine is result in an electric shock or become a
running, the system searches for a valid fire hazard.
passive key. • Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF • Do not use multiple extension cords.
EQUIPPED) • Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER water. This could cause an electric
PRECAUTIONS shock or fire.
• If the block heater cord is under the
hood, do not remove the wiring from
WARNING: Failure to follow engine its original location. Do not close the
block heater instructions could result in hood on the extension wiring.
property damage or serious personal
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
injury.
clean area, clear of combustibles.
WARNING: Do not use your heater • Make sure the heater, heater cord and
with ungrounded electrical systems or extension cord are firmly connected.
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of • Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical shock. electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for about 30 minutes.
WARNING: Do not fully close the
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
properly stowed before starting and
weight when using the engine block
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
heater. This could damage the power
protective cover seals the prongs of the
cable and may cause an electrical short
block heater cord plug when not in use.
resulting in fire, injury and property
damage. • Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
We recommend that you do the following winter.
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord HOW DOES THE ENGINE BLOCK
that is product certified by HEATER WORK
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association The engine block heater warms the engine
(CSA). This extension cord must be coolant. This allows the climate control
suitable for use outdoors, in cold system to quickly respond. The equipment
includes a heater element installed in the
engine block and a wire harness. You can
connect the system to a grounded
220-240 volt AC electrical source.
153
Note: The heater is most effective when STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F YOUR VEHICLE IS STATIONARY -
(-18°C). AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
USING THE ENGINE BLOCK 1. Shift into park (P).

HEATER 2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Wait until the engine reaches idle
Make sure the receptacle terminals are speed.
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
STOPPING THE ENGINE E340581

STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN
YOUR VEHICLE IS STATIONARY -
MANUAL TRANSMISSION STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN
YOUR VEHICLE IS MOVING -
1. Shift into neutral. MANUAL TRANSMISSION
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Wait until the engine reaches idle
speed. WARNING: Switching off the
engine when your vehicle is still moving
results in a significant decrease in
braking assistance. Higher effort is
required to apply the brakes and to stop
your vehicle. A significant decrease in
steering assistance could also occur. The
steering does not lock, but higher effort
could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some
electrical circuits, for example airbags,
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
E340581
restart the engine.
154
E340581 E340581
1. Press and hold the push button ignition 1. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch until the engine stops, or press switch until the engine stops, or press
it three times within two seconds. it three times within two seconds.
2. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to 2. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop. bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
3. Apply the parking brake. 3. Shift into park (P).
STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN
YOUR VEHICLE IS MOVING -
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC ENGINE

WARNING: Switching off the STOP
engine when your vehicle is still moving
results in a significant decrease in Automatic engine stop switches the engine
braking assistance. Higher effort is off if it has been idling for an extended
required to apply the brakes and to stop period to help you save fuel.
your vehicle. A significant decrease in
steering assistance could also occur. The HOW DOES AUTOMATIC ENGINE
steering does not lock, but higher effort STOP WORK
could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some Automatic engine stop turns the engine
electrical circuits, for example airbags, off. The ignition also turns off in order to
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch save battery power. Before the engine
the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and shuts down, a message appears in the
restart the engine. information display showing a timer
counting down. If you do not intervene
within 30 seconds, the engine shuts down.
Another message appears in the
information display to inform you that the
engine has shut down in order to save fuel.
Start your vehicle as you normally do.
155
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC ENGINE

STOP ON AND OFF
3. Switch 30min Max Idle on or off.
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. If you switch it off,
it turns on each time you switch the ignition
on.
OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC ENGINE

STOP
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic engine stop feature. When
you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at
the next ignition cycle. E327286
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset 1. Open the floor console storage
the timer, at any point before the compartment lid.
30-second countdown has expired by
doing any of the following: 2. With the buttons facing upward and
the unlock button facing the front of
• Pressing the brake pedal or accelerator your vehicle, place the passive key into
pedal. the backup slot.
• Pressing the OK or RESET button 3. With the key in this position, press the
during the countdown. brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
ACCESSING THE PASSIVE KEY and start your vehicle.
BACKUP POSITION
STARTING AND STOPPING
If you are unable to start the engine, do the THE ENGINE –
following:
TROUBLESHOOTING
STARTING AND STOPPING THE

ENGINE – WARNING LAMPS
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If it illuminates when the engine
is running, the on-board
diagnostics system is detecting
a malfunction of the vehicle emission
control system.
156
If it flashes, engine misfire could be Powertrain Warning Lamp

occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic If it illuminates when the engine
converter or other vehicle components. is running, this indicates a
Avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration, powertrain or four-wheel drive
and have your vehicle checked as soon as fault. If it flashes when you are driving,
possible. immediately reduce the vehicle speed.
Avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration,
and have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
If both lamps illuminate when the engine
is running, stop your vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so. Continuing to drive your
vehicle could cause reduced power or the
engine to stop. Switch the ignition off and
attempt to restart the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Cranking Time Exceeded Displays if you exceed the starting time limit. You cannot
attempt to start the engine for 15 minutes. If you cannot start
the engine after 15 minutes passes, have your vehicle imme-
diately checked.
Starting System Fault Displays if you are unable to start your vehicle with a correctly
coded key. The system has detected a fault that requires
service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
No Key Detected Displays if the system does not detect a valid passive key.
157
STARTING AND STOPPING THE Note: The engine cranks for a short period
ENGINE – FREQUENTLY ASKED of time and then it stops.
QUESTIONS 4. Release the accelerator pedal.
Why is the engine idle speed high when
I am starting the engine?
The speed at which the engine idles
immediately after starting is optimized
to minimize vehicle emissions and
maximize cabin comfort and fuel
economy.
Why does the engine not crank?
You can only attempt to start the
engine for a limited amount of time
before the starting system temporarily E340581
disables. If you exceed the starting
time limit, a message may appear and 5. Press the push button ignition switch.
you cannot attempt to start the engine Why does the system not detect a
for at least 15 minutes. passive key?
Why do I experience different driving If the system does not detect a passive
characteristics? key and you are unable to start the
If you disconnect the battery, your engine, insert the passive key into the
vehicle may exhibit some unusual backup position and press the push
driving characteristics for about 5 mi button ignition switch to start the
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is engine. See Accessing the Passive
because the engine management Key Backup Position (page 156).
system must realign itself with the
engine. You can disregard any unusual
driving characteristics during this
period.
Why can I not start the engine?
If you cannot start the engine after
three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
do the following:
1. Fully press the brake pedal or the
clutch pedal.
Note: Make sure that the parking brake is
applied.
Note: Make sure that the transmission is in
park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
158
Start in Gear - Manual Transmission
WHAT IS START IN GEAR 2. Firmly press the brake pedal when in

gear and press and hold the Start
Crank in gear allows the driver to restart button.
the engine and launch the vehicle after 3. When the engine starts and your
stalling in four-wheel drive low (4L). Use vehicle begins to move, release the
the information displayed on the cluster brake pedal.
to direct you when to apply the brake and
start button. While driving off road, it is
possible to stall the engine trying to
maneuver terrains. Trying to restart your
vehicle by using the clutch or shifting into
neutral to restart the engine can be difficult
and cause potential roll back situations
when driving uphill.
Note: Crank in gear is an alternate name
for the feature.
START IN GEAR
PRECAUTIONS
Always press the brake pedal when
starting the vehicle to prevent unwanted
vehicle movement, and release after
starting to drive away. Start in gear is only
possible with the brake pedal pressed.
START IN GEAR LIMITATIONS

You can only use start in gear in four-wheel
drive low (L).
USING START IN GEAR

When driving difficult terrains in four-wheel
drive low (4L), it is possible to stall the
engine when your vehicle is not able to
maintain speed. To easily start the engine
and launch your vehicle, perform the
following steps:
1. After the vehicle stalls an information
message displays in the cluster, To
start in gear select YES and press
OK.
159
Start in Gear - Manual Transmission
START IN GEAR – START IN GEAR – FREQUENTLY

ASKED QUESTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING
Can I use start in gear in reverse?
START IN GEAR – INFORMATION You can use start in gear in any
MESSAGES forward or reverse gear.
Will this start my vehicle?
Message Action
Upon following the maneuvers, the
Do you want to After stalling your engine starts, runs and launches the
start in gear? vehicle, a message vehicle in gear.
can display
prompting you start If my vehicle stalls, do I have to use
in gear is now avail- start in gear?
able. After your vehicle stalls in four-wheel
drive low, you do not have to use start
Press Brake and For use with push in gear. You can still start your vehicle
Hold Start Button button vehicles, normally with use of the clutch.
to Start in Gear press the brake
pedal and press the How hard does the brake need pressing
push to start button for start in gear?
to begin start in The brake requires a hard press at the
gear. time you press the push button, and
Start in Gear After stalling in then you need to release it to allow the
Canceled four-wheel drive vehicle to move.
low, if your vehicle
does not meet all
the requirements or
you make any other
inputs, a message
can display in the
cluster.
Start in Gear Limit After stalling in
Reached Normal four-wheel drive
Start Available low, a message can
display if you have
incorrectly
attempted a start
in gear situation or
have attempted to
many times.
160
Auto-Start-Stop
WHAT IS AUTO-START-STOP
WARNING: Apply the parking
The system is designed to help reduce fuel brake, shift into park (P), switch the
consumption and CO2 emissions by ignition off and remove the key before
stopping the engine when it is idling, for you open the hood or have any service
example at traffic lights. or repair work completed. If you do not
switch the ignition off, the engine could
restart at any time. Failure to follow this
AUTO-START-STOP instruction could result in personal injury
PRECAUTIONS - MANUAL or death.
TRANSMISSION
SWITCHING AUTO-START-
WARNING: Apply the parking STOP ON AND OFF
brake, shift into neutral, switch the
ignition off and remove the key before The system turns on when you switch the
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow ignition on.
this instruction could result in personal Press the button to switch the
injury or death. system off.
WARNING: Apply the parking Note: OFF illuminates in the switch.

brake, shift into neutral, switch the
Note: Deactivating the system using the
ignition off and remove the key before
button lasts only one key cycle.
you open the hood or have any service
or repair work completed. If you do not Press the button again to switch the
switch the ignition off, the engine could system back on.
restart at any time. Failure to follow this Note: The system turns off if it detects a
instruction could result in personal injury malfunction. If the system malfunctions,
or death. have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
AUTO-START-STOP
PRECAUTIONS - AUTOMATIC STOPPING THE ENGINE -
TRANSMISSION MANUAL TRANSMISSION
1. Stop your vehicle.
WARNING: Apply the parking 2. Shift into neutral.
brake, shift into park (P), switch the 3. Release the clutch pedal and the
ignition off and remove the key before accelerator pedal.
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow Note: To obtain maximum benefit from the
this instruction could result in personal system, shift into neutral and release the
injury or death. clutch pedal whenever you stop your vehicle
for more than three seconds.
Note: Power assist steering turns off when
the engine stops.
161
Auto-Start-Stop
STOPPING THE ENGINE - RESTARTING THE ENGINE -

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Stop your vehicle, keep your foot on the Press the clutch pedal.
brake pedal and the transmission in drive
A message appears in the information
(D).
display if the system requires you to take
Note: Power assist steering turns off when action.
the engine stops.
Message Condition Action
Auto StartStop Press a The system needs to restart Press the accelerator pedal,
Pedal to Start Engine the engine but requires your brake pedal or clutch pedal
confirmation. to restart the engine.
Auto StartStop Select The system needs to restart Shift into neutral to restart
Neutral To Start Engine the engine but cannot the engine.
because the transmission is
in gear.
162
Auto-Start-Stop
RESTARTING THE ENGINE - The Auto-Start-Stop indicator

illuminates green when the
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION engine stops. It flashes amber
and a message appears when you need to
Release the brake pedal or press the take action.
accelerator pedal.
A message appears in the information The Auto-Start-Stop indicator
display if the system requires you to take illuminates gray with a
E146361
action. strikethrough when the system
is not available.
AUTO-START-STOP Note: You can display the reason why the
system is not available in the information
INDICATORS display.
WARNING: The system may

require the engine to automatically
restart when the auto-start-stop
indicator illuminates green or flashes
amber. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
AUTO-START-STOP – TROUBLESHOOTING
AUTO-START-STOP – INFORMATION MESSAGES - MANUAL

TRANSMISSION
Auto StartStop Manual The system is not func- Restart the engine yourself.
Restart Required tioning.
163
Auto-Start-Stop
AUTO-START-STOP – A message appears in the information

INFORMATION MESSAGES - display if the system requires you to take
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION action.
Auto StartStop Press Brake The system needs to restart Press the brake pedal to
to Start Engine the engine but requires your restart the engine.
confirmation.
Auto StartStop Press a The system needs to restart Press the brake pedal or the
Pedal to Start Engine the engine but requires your accelerator pedal to restart
confirmation. the engine.
Auto StartStop Shift to P, The System is not func- Shift in park (P) and restart
then Restart Engine tioning. the engine.
164
Auto-Start-Stop
AUTO-START-STOP – Can I permanently switch the

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS system off?
Why does the engine not always No. The system plays an important role in
stop when I expect it to? reducing the fuel consumption and the CO2
emissions.
The system is designed to work in a way
that complements other vehicle systems, Will the frequent engine starts
allowing them to operate at optimum cause parts to wear out?
performance.
Your vehicle has an enhanced battery and
The system does not stop the engine if: starter motor that are designed for the
• The driver door is open. increased number of engine starts.
• Your vehicle is at high altitude.
• The heated windshield is on.
• The engine is warming up.
• The outside temperature is too low or
too high.
• The battery charge is low.
• The battery temperature is outside the
optimal operating range.
• The engine is required to run to
maintain interior climate and reduce
fogging.
Why does the engine sometimes

restart when I do not expect it to?
The system is designed to work in a way
that complements other vehicle systems,
allowing them to operate at optimum
performance.
The system restarts the engine if:
• You switch the heated windshield on.
• You switch maximum defrost on.
• Your vehicle starts to roll downhill in
neutral.
maintain adequate brake system
assistance.
maintain interior climate and reduce
fogging.
165
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL AND REFUELING • Automotive fuels can be harmful or

fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
PRECAUTIONS and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel symptoms are immediately apparent.
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank The toxic effects of fuel may not be
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray apparent for hours.
and fire. • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
WARNING: The fuel system may tract irritation. In severe cases,
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing excessive or prolonged breathing of
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, permanent injury.
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury. • Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious remove contact lenses, if worn, flush
injury or death if misused or mishandled. with water for 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Failure to seek
WARNING: Fuel may contain proper medical attention could lead to
benzene, which is a cancer-causing permanent injury.
agent. • Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
WARNING: When refueling always your skin, clothing or both, promptly
shut the engine off and never allow remove contaminated clothing and
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank thoroughly wash your skin with soap
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is contact causes skin irritation.
extremely hazardous under certain • Be particularly careful if you are taking
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
WARNING: Read and follow all the Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
instructions on the pump island. adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. Immediately call a
Follow these guidelines when refueling: physician if you experience any adverse
• Extinguish all smoking materials and reactions.
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Switch the engine off before refueling.
166
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
SELECTING THE CORRECT FUEL performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
E161513 • Fuels containing methanol.
Your vehicle operates on regular unleaded • Fuels containing metallic-based
gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 additives, including manganese-based
octane rating of 87. compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
Some fuel stations, particularly those in additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels • Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
could result in engine damage that will not prohibited by law.
be covered by the vehicle Warranty. The use of fuels with metallic compounds
For best overall vehicle and engine such as methylcyclopentadienyl
performance, premium fuel with an octane manganese tricarbonyl, which is a
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The manganese-based fuel additive, will impair
performance gained by using premium fuel engine performance and affect the
is most noticeable in hot weather as well emission control system.
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer LOCATING THE FUEL FILLER
(page 283).
FUNNEL
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the The fuel filler funnel is in the rear floor
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with compartment with the jack and tools.
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance.
For additional information, visit
www.toptiergas.com.
167
Fuel and Refueling
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
FILLING A PORTABLE FUEL in the household refuse or the public
CONTAINER sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from

WARNING: Flow of fuel through a a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
fuel pump nozzle can produce static included with your vehicle. See Locating
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are the Fuel Filler Funnel (page 167).
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
Use the following guidelines to avoid they may not work with the capless fuel
electrostatic charge build-up, which can system and can damage it.
produce a spark, when filling an When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
ungrounded fuel container: a fuel container, do the following:
• Only use an approved fuel container to 1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
ADDING FUEL FROM A PORTABLE

FUEL CONTAINER
E157452
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
of a fuel container or an aftermarket
funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may 2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
damage the fuel system filler neck or its fuel filler inlet.
seal and cause fuel to run onto the 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
ground. container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
WARNING: Do not pry open the
fuel tank filler valve. This could damage 5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
the fuel system. Failure to follow this 6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
instruction could result in fire, personal back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
injury or death. of it.
168
Fuel and Refueling
Note: If your vehicle runs out of fuel add a REFUELING YOUR VEHICLE
minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to restart
the engine.
Note: You may need to switch the ignition WARNING: When refueling always
from off to on several times after refueling shut the engine off and never allow
to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
from the tank to the engine. When filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
restarting, cranking time takes a few phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
seconds longer than normal. extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to WARNING: The fuel system may
dispose of the funnel. be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
REFUELING refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
REFUELING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
WARNING: Do not pry open the
fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
A B the fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel

pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when

C the fuel pump nozzle automatically
E267248 shuts off for the first time. Failure to
follow this will fill the expansion space
A Fuel filler door. in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
B Fuel tank filler valve.
C Fuel tank filler pipe. WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five

seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
169
Fuel and Refueling
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for

your vehicle.
E206912
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within

the area shown. Refer to A for left hand
drive or B for right hand drive.
E139202
E119081
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch. Keep the fuel pump nozzle 6. When the pump shuts off, wait five
resting on the fuel tank filler pipe. seconds, then raise the fuel pump
nozzle and slowly remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use could cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle immediately checked.
MANUALLY OPENING THE FUEL

FILLER DOOR
E327438 Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
A when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position B can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
170
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL AND REFUELING –

TROUBLESHOOTING

WARNING LAMPS
If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as
possible.

INFORMATION MESSAGES
E206911 Refueling System Warning

If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
A Left-hand side. To open the fuel close, a message could appear in the
filler door, press the center rear information display.
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
Message
B Right-hand side. To open the
fuel filler door, press the center Check Fuel Fill Inlet
rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release. If the message appears, do the following:
C Left-hand side. Pull the rear of 1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
the fuel filler door to open it. to do so and switch the engine off.
D Right-hand side. Pull the rear of 2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
the fuel filler door to open it.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
FUEL TANK CAPACITY 5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
Advertised Capacity movement.
The advertised capacity is the maximum 6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel filler valve.
tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. 7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty fuel filler funnel provided with your
reserve. The empty reserve is an vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
unspecified amount of fuel that remains Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge (page 167). This action should dislodge
indicates empty. any debris that may be preventing the
fuel tank filler valve from fully closing.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon 8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
to increase driving range. filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
171
Fuel and Refueling
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.

Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
172
Catalytic Converter
WHAT IS THE CATALYTIC Note: Do not make any unauthorized

changes to your vehicle or engine. By law,
CONVERTER vehicle owners and anyone who
manufactures, repairs, or services a fleet of
The catalytic converter is part of your vehicles are not permitted to intentionally
vehicle's emissions system and filters remove an emission control device or
harmful pollutants from the exhaust gas. prevent it from working.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER CATALYTIC CONVERTER –

PRECAUTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING
CATALYTIC CONVERTER –
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
WARNING LAMPS
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system Your vehicle has an on-board diagnostics
heats up the engine compartment and system that monitors the emission control
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. system. If any of the following warning
lamps illuminate, this may indicate that
WARNING: The normal operating the on-board diagnostics system has
temperature of the exhaust system is detected an emission control system
very high. Never work around or attempt malfunction.
to repair any part of the exhaust system
until it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short
period of engine operation and stays hot
after the engine is switched off.
To avoid damaging the catalytic converter:

• Do not crank the engine for more than Continuing to drive your vehicle may cause
10 seconds at a time. reduced power or the engine to stop.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug Failure to respond to a warning lamp may
lead disconnected. cause damage that your vehicle Warranty
• Do not push-start or tow-start your may not cover. Have your vehicle checked
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump as soon as possible.
Starting the Vehicle (page 301).
• Use the correct fuel. See Fuel and
Refueling (page 166).
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
173
Manual Transmission
MANUAL TRANSMISSION Note: You can only move the gearshift lever
to reverse (R) by raising the collar below the
PRECAUTIONS gearshift knob up before shifting to reverse.
This is a lockout feature which protects the
transmission from accidentally engaging
WARNING: Always set the parking reverse (R) when intending to select first
brake fully and make sure you shift the (1).
gearshift lever to first gear. Switch the If reverse (R) is not fully engaged, press
ignition off and remove the key whenever the clutch pedal down and return the
you leave your vehicle. gearshift to the neutral position. Release
the clutch pedal, then raise the collar and
Failure to fully press the clutch pedal to shift to reverse (R) again.
the floor may cause increased shift efforts,
premature wear to transmission Note: Do not move the transmission
components or damage the transmission. selector lever to reverse (R) gear when your
vehicle is moving. This can cause damage
Do not drive with your foot resting on the to the transmission.
clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal to hold
your vehicle at a standstill when waiting Note: Make sure that your vehicle is at a
on a hill. These actions reduce the life of complete stop before you shift into reverse
the clutch and could nullify a clutch (R). Failure to do so could damage the
warranty claim. transmission.
SHIFTING INTO REVERSE CRAWLER GEAR
Reverse (R) WHAT IS CRAWLER GEAR

1. Press the clutch pedal to the floor to Allows you to cruise at ultra low speeds
disengage clutch. with the clutch fully engaged, when driving
2. Shift into reverse (R) by raising the through obstacles and jagged terrain.
collar below the gearshift knob up, then
moving the lever fully to the left, then
USING CRAWLER GEAR
forward.
Crawler (C)
Shifting into crawler gear:
1. Press the clutch pedal to the floor to
disengage clutch.
2. Shift into crawler (C) by raising the
collar below the gearshift knob up, then
moving the lever fully to the left, then
backward.
E99067
174
Manual Transmission
RECOMMENDED SHIFT
SPEEDS
Recommended Shift Speeds
For best fuel efficiency when driving your
vehicle, shift to the next gear by 3000
RPM.
Shifting at a higher RPM such as
3000-6000 RPM can increase the
performance capabilities of the vehicle.
However, higher engine and transmission
speeds can increase wear and reduce fuel
E99067
economy.
Note: You can only move the gearshift lever When downshifting your vehicle, always
to crawler (C) by raising the collar below shift at the lowest engine RPM possible to
the gearshift knob up before shifting to match your driving conditions. This is
crawler. This is a lockout feature which usually under 2000 RPM for all forward
protects the transmission from accidentally gears, except for downshifting into the
engaging crawler (C) when intending to crawler (C) gear which you should do
select second (2). below 1500 RPM. See Manual
If crawler (C) is not fully engaged, press Transmission Precautions (page 174).
the clutch pedal down and return the Note: Always fully depress the clutch pedal
gearshift to the neutral position. Release between gear shifts.
the clutch pedal, then raise the collar and
shift to crawler (C) again.
The crawler gear enables an easier start in
unusual conditions or terrain. You should
change up to first (1) when possible and
refrain from using crawler (C) at high
engine speeds as transmission damage
could result. See Manual Transmission
Precautions (page 174).
In normal use, ensure your vehicle is
stationary before selecting crawler (C) as
it is primarily a starting gear. If you change
down to crawler (C) from first (1) while the
vehicle is moving, ensure an engine speed
is below 1500 rpm, and that the clutch
pedal is fully pressed for a smooth
transition to crawler gear.
175
Manual Transmission
CHECKING THE MANUAL 1. Check the system for any visual leaks
before continuing.
TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL
2. Make sure the clutch pedal is in the
most upward position.
3. Remove the cap and diaphragm and
inspect the fluid level. To avoid
contamination, make sure the reservoir
cap remains in place and fully
tightened unless you are checking the
fluid level.
4. Reinstall the reservoir cap and
diaphragm.
Only use fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 393).
Note: A fluid level on the step line in the
reservoir is within the normal operating
range and there is no need to add fluid. A
fluid level not in the normal operating range
could compromise the performance of the
system. Have your vehicle checked
immediately.
E339771
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Transmission fill level is 0.16 in (4 mm) FLUID CAPACITY AND
from oil fill plug. SPECIFICATION
CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID See Manual Transmission Fluid

Capacity and Specification (page 403).
LEVEL
CLUTCH FLUID CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 393).
E310419
176
Manual Transmission
MANUAL TRANSMISSION –
TROUBLESHOOTING
MANUAL TRANSMISSION –
Using Crawler Gear
E322877
When shifting into crawler (C), make sure

your vehicle is completely stationary and
that the engine speed is below 1500 RPM.
Because the low gear ratio enables you to
start the vehicle in off-road conditions,
shift out of crawler (C) as soon as possible.
Prolonged use of crawler (C) can cause
transmission wear and increased fuel
consumption.
Note: Use crawler (C) when driving your
vehicle off-road, or in hilly, rocky terrain.
177
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The electric parking brake could apply

when you shift to park (P) without the
PRECAUTIONS brake pedal fully pressed. The electric
parking brake applies when you shift to
park (P) on large slopes. The electric
WARNING: Apply the parking parking brake releases with the drive away
brake, shift into park (P), switch the release function or manually as described
ignition off and remove the key before in the Releasing the Electric Parking Brake
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow section. See Electric Parking Brake
this instruction could result in personal (page 198).
injury or death. Note: A warning tone sounds if you open
the driver door and you have not shifted the
WARNING: Do not use tow/haul transmission selector to park (P).
when the road surface is slippery. Failure
the loss of control of your vehicle. REVERSE (R)
WARNING: When your vehicle is

stationary, keep the brake pedal fully WARNING: Move the transmission
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to selector lever to reverse (R) only when
follow this instruction could result in your vehicle is stationary and the engine
personal injury, death or property is at idle speed.
damage.
This position allows your vehicle to move
WARNING: Do not apply the brake backward. Come to a complete stop
pedal and accelerator pedal before shifting into and out of reverse (R).
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few
seconds will limit engine performance, NEUTRAL (N)
which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury. WARNING: In neutral (N) your
vehicle is free to roll.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION This position allows your vehicle to roll

POSITIONS free. Hold the brake pedal down when in
this position.
PARK (P) Note: You can start your vehicle in this

position.
This position locks the driveline and
prevents the wheels from turning. Come DRIVE (D)
to a complete stop before putting your
vehicle into and out of park (P). Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy, and allows
automatic upshifts and downshifts through
all available gears.
178
MANUAL (M) SHIFTING YOUR VEHICLE INTO

To select manual mode press the (M) GEAR
button on the shifter.
Note: In order to activate manual mode
your vehicle must be in drive (D).
This position allows you to change gears
up or down as preferred using + or -
buttons on the shifter lever.
To return to the normal drive (D) position,
press the (M) button again to exit manual
mode.
SPORT (S)
To activate Sport Mode, press
the button on the gearshift lever
E176099 until sport mode is selected. The E324063
SPORT or S indicator light illuminates in

the instrument display when the system 1. Fully press down on the brake pedal.
becomes active. 2. Press the front button on the shifter
and move the gearshift lever into the
The sport mode feature: desired gear.
• Provides additional slope, engine 3. When you finish driving, come to a
braking and extends lower gear complete stop.
operation to enhance performance for
uphill climbs, hilly terrain or 4. Press the front button on the shifter,
mountainous areas. This increases move the gearshift lever and securely
engine RPM during engine braking. latch it in park (P).
• Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
transmission shift strategy. POSITION INDICATORS
• Selects gears more quickly and at
higher engine speeds.
To deactivate the sport mode feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever again. The
SPORT or S indicator light deactivates
when the system turns off. The sport mode
feature also deactivates when you power
down your vehicle.
E324267
179
MANUALLY SHIFTING GEARS

WARNING: When doing this
SHIFTING USING THE BUTTONS procedure, you need to take the
ON THE SELECTOR LEVER transmission out of park (P) which
means your vehicle can roll freely. To
Your vehicle has a SelectShift Automatic avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
transmission gearshift lever. This gives you always fully apply the parking brake prior
the ability to change gears up or down, to doing this procedure. Use wheels
without a clutch, as preferred. chocks if appropriate.
To prevent the engine from running at too WARNING: If the parking brake is
low an RPM, which could cause it to stall, fully released, but the brake warning
SelectShift still makes some downshifts lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
if it determines that you have not may not be working properly. Have your
downshifted in time. Although SelectShift vehicle checked as soon as possible.
makes some downshifts for you, it still
allows you to downshift at any time if it In the event of an electrical malfunction,
determines that damage to the engine it is possible that a fuse has blown or the
from over-revving does not occur. stoplamps are not working. See Fuse
Note: SelectShift does not automatically Precautions (page 310).
upshift, even if the engine is approaching If the vehicle battery has no charge, jump
the RPM limit. Shift manually by pressing start your vehicle. See Jump Starting
the + button. Precautions (page 300).
Note: Engine damage could occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without USING BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK
shifting.
BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK
WHAT IS BRAKE SHIFT

INTERLOCK
Brake shift interlock prevents you from
shifting out of park (P) when you have
switched the ignition on and not pressed
the brake pedal.
BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK

PRECAUTIONS
E346836
WARNING: Do not drive your 1. Insert a screwdriver between the shifter

vehicle until you verify that the boot material and trim ring to access
stoplamps are working. the retainer tabs from the top panel
trim ring.
180
2. Lift the shifter boot upward.

3. Locate the release lever on the side of
the transmission selector lever.
4. Using a screwdriver, move the release
lever toward the front of the
transmission selector lever.
5. When holding the release lever in the
forward position, move the
transmission selector lever out of the
park (P) position and into another gear.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
AUDIBLE WARNINGS
Transmission Not In Park(P)
Audible Warning
Sounds if any of the following occur:
• You switch your vehicle off before
shifting into park (P).
• You open the driver door before shifting
into park (P).
• You unlatch your seatbelt before
shifting into park (P) when the driver
door is removed. See Removable
Windows (page 334).
181
Four-Wheel Drive
HOW DOES FOUR-WHEEL high or four-wheel drive low, the system

provides electronically locked power to the
DRIVE WORK - 4X4 WITH PART front and rear wheels for use in off-road or
TIME ENGAGEMENT slippery conditions such as deep snow,
sand or mud. Selecting four-wheel drive
4x4 With Part Time Engagement (If low also provides additional gearing for
Equipped) increased torque multiplication for
conditions like deep sand, steep slopes, or
This system offers the driver two-wheel pulling heavy objects.
drive high, four-wheel drive high, and Additionally, the system is capable of
four-wheel drive low as available modes recreational flat towing by putting the
of operation. When you select either transfer case into neutral (N). See
four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle
low, the system provides mechanically (page 307).
locked four-wheel drive power to both the
front and rear wheels for use in off-road or
slippery conditions such as deep snow, FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
sand or mud. Selecting four-wheel drive PRECAUTIONS
low also provides additional gearing for
increased torque multiplication for
conditions like deep sand, steep slopes, or
pulling heavy objects. WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
Additionally, the system is capable of drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
recreational flat towing by putting the drive vehicle may accelerate better than
transfer case into neutral (N). See a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle situations, it won't stop any faster than
(page 307). two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
HOW DOES FOUR-WHEEL
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
DRIVE WORK - ADVANCED 4X4 center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
WITH 4A MODE drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
Advanced 4x4 With Automatic On (passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
Demand Engagement (If Equipped) excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
This system monitors various vehicle increases the risk of losing control of your
sensory inputs to provide an increased vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
level of performance. This system offers and death.
the driver two-wheel drive high, four-wheel
drive auto, four-wheel drive high, and
four-wheel drive low as available modes
of operation. When you select four-wheel
drive auto, the system continuously varies
power to the front wheels for optimum
performance for all on-road conditions.
When you select either four-wheel drive
182
Four-Wheel Drive
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE If there is a significant difference between

the size of the spare tire and the remaining
LIMITATIONS tires, you could have limited four-wheel
drive functionality, added noise, discomfort
Do not use four-wheel drive high or and driveline damage.
four-wheel drive low mode on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so can produce Due to normal tire wear, your spare tire is
excessive noise, increase tire wear and can not necessarily the same size as your
damage drive components. Four-wheel on-road tires, which makes your spare tire
drive high or four-wheel drive low mode is a dissimilar size. Use the spare tire on a
only for use on consistently slippery or limited basis only.
loose surfaces. Use of four-wheel drive low When driving with a dissimilar wheel and
mode on these surfaces could produce tire assembly do not:
some noise, such as occasional clunks, but
should not damage drive components. • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) while
operating in a four-wheel drive mode.
For vehicles with an electronic
shift-on-the-fly transfer case, the driveline • Select a four-wheel drive mode unless
could become mechanically blocked when the vehicle is stationary.
attempting to shift out of a four-wheel • Use a four-wheel drive mode on dry
drive mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. pavement.
Note: When your vehicle comes with the You could have limited four-wheel drive
4x4 part-time selectable engagement functionality when driving with a dissimilar
transfer case and you are transitioning from wheel and tire assembly, especially when
consistently loose or slippery surfaces, be driving in a mechanically locked four-wheel
sure the four-wheel drive system is not drive mode. You can experience the
mechanically blocked once you are on dry, following:
hard surfaced roads in two-wheel drive high. • Additional noise from the transfer case
Note: In certain scenarios, where the or other drive components.
four-wheel drive system has difficulty • Difficulty shifting in and out of a
engaging, a To Engage 4x4 Slow to 3 MPH mechanically locked four-wheel drive
or To Engage 4x4 Slow to 5 km/h mode.
message could appear in the instrument
cluster. You can also see this message • Driveline component damage.
when engaging the four-wheel drive system Mechanical Shift Blocking
in extreme cold climates at the beginning
of the drive cycle. Once the driveline warms On vehicles with an electronic
up, shifting to four-wheel drive can resume shift-on-the-fly transfer case, the transfer
as normal. case distributes torque to the front wheels
by mechanically interlocking the front and
Operating Four-Wheel Drive with rear driveshafts together. Various external
a Spare or Mismatched Tires factors can affect shifting performance of
this type of system including, but not
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of
limited to:
the spare tire can affect the four-wheel
drive system. • Vehicle acceleration.
• Dissimilar tire sizes.
• High steering input.
183
Four-Wheel Drive
For vehicles with an electronic SWITCHING FOUR-WHEEL

shift-on-the-fly transfer case, when
shifting into two-wheel drive high on dry, DRIVE ON AND OFF
hard surfaced roads, we recommend that
you follow the following procedure to A vehicle that comes with four-wheel drive,
reduce the likelihood of a mechanical shift when selected, has the ability to use all
block: four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction, which may enable you to safely
1. While driving straight, come to a drive over terrain and road conditions that
complete stop on a flat, horizontal a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
surface. cannot.
2. For vehicles with an automatic On some four-wheel drive models, the
transmission, shift into park (P). For initial shift from two-wheel drive to
vehicles with a manual transmission, four-wheel drive while the vehicle is
press the clutch. moving can cause a momentary clunk and
3. Select 2H and wait for the 2H LED to ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal
become solid. as the front drivetrain comes up to speed
and are not cause for concern.
4. For vehicles with an automatic
transmission, shift into reverse (R). For Note: Your four-wheel drive system is for
vehicles with a manual transmission, use with a spare tire that is identical in
select reverse (R) and release the make, model and size, to the road tires.
clutch. Let the vehicle roll backward up We make four-wheel drive vehicles
to 3 ft (1 m) and press the brake. specially for driving on sand, snow, mud
5. For vehicles with an automatic and rough terrain and having operating
transmission, shift into drive (D). For characteristics that are somewhat
vehicles with a manual transmission, different from conventional vehicles, both
press the clutch in again, select a on and off the road.
forward gear and release the clutch.
Let the vehicle roll forward up to 3 ft The transfer case supplies power to all four
(1 m). wheels. On four-wheel drive vehicles, the
transfer case allows you to select different
If the system is mechanically blocked, one four-wheel drive modes when necessary.
or more of the following actions can relieve
the mechanical shift block:
• Momentary acceleration.
• Momentary braking.
• Bringing the vehicle to a stop.
• Shifting the transmission to neutral and
back to drive.
• Shifting the transmission to reverse
and back to drive.
• Driving the vehicle around a tight turn
at a slow speed.
184
Four-Wheel Drive
SELECTING A FOUR-WHEEL Note: A 4x4 Shift in Progress message

appears in the information display indicating
DRIVE MODE - 4X4 WITH PART the shift is in progress. If any of the previous
TIME ENGAGEMENT shift conditions are not met, the shift should
not occur and the information display can
guide the driver through the proper shifting
procedures.
Note: If Shift Delayed Drive Forward
displays in the information display, place
the transmission in a forward gear, move
your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft
(1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to
neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to
complete the range shift.
Note: When the light is solid, the system
has achieved the desired four-wheel drive
mode. When a selected four-wheel drive
mode light is blinking, the system is
attempting to shift to that specific
four-wheel drive mode.
Note: When you achieve recreational
towing, all lights will be off and the
E345849 instrument cluster will display Neutral Tow
Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral.
To select a four-wheel drive mode, push
the button.
• 2H - Two-wheel drive high.
• 4H - Four-wheel drive high. See
Four-Wheel Drive High (page 187).
• 4L - Four-wheel drive low. See
Four-Wheel Drive Low (page 187).
Shifting to or from Four-Wheel

Drive Low
1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 0 mph
(0 km/h).
transmission, place in neutral (N). For
vehicles with a manual transmission,
fully depress the clutch pedal.
3. Push the 4L on the four-wheel drive
mode selector.
185
Four-Wheel Drive
SELECTING A FOUR-WHEEL Note: A 4x4 Shift in Progress message

appears in the information display indicating
DRIVE MODE - ADVANCED 4X4 the shift is in progress. If any of the previous
WITH 4A MODE shift conditions are not met, the shift should
not occur and the information display can
guide the driver through the proper shifting
procedures.
Note: If Shift Delayed Drive Forward
displays in the information display, place
the transmission in a forward gear, move
your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft
(1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to
neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to
complete the range shift.
Note: When the light is solid, the system
has achieved the desired four-wheel drive
mode. When a selected four-wheel drive
mode LED is blinking, the system is
attempting to shift to that specific
four-wheel drive mode.
Note: When all lights are blinking have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
E324543
Note: When you achieve recreational
To select a four-wheel drive mode, push towing, all lights will be off and the
the button. instrument cluster will display Neutral Tow
Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral.
• 2H - Two-wheel drive high.
• 4A - Four-wheel drive Auto. See
Four-Wheel Drive Auto (page 187). FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODES
• 4H - Four-wheel drive high. See
Four-Wheel Drive High (page 187). TWO-WHEEL DRIVE HIGH
• 4L - Four-wheel drive low. See Two-wheel drive high is for general
Four-Wheel Drive Low (page 187). on-road driving. Power is sent to the rear
wheels only.
Shifting to or from Four-Wheel
Drive Low Note: Two-wheel drive high can turn on or
off based on Drive Mode selection See
1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 0 mph G.O.A.T. Mode Control (page 242).
(0 km/h).
Transmission, place in neutral (N). For
vehicles with a manual transmission,
fully depress the clutch pedal.
3. Push the 4L on the four-wheel drive
mode selector.
186
Four-Wheel Drive
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE AUTO (If FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE

Equipped)
INDICATORS
Four-wheel drive auto provides
Two-wheel Drive High
electronically controlled four-wheel drive
power to both the front and rear wheels, Illuminates briefly when
as required, for increased traction in varying two-wheel drive high is selected.
on-road conditions. The four-wheel drive E181778
auto tuning varies based on selected Drive
Mode. See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Four-wheel Drive Auto (If Equipped)
Mode (page 185).
Illuminates when four-wheel
Note: Four-wheel drive auto can turn on or drive auto is selected.
off automatically based on Drive Mode E181781
selection. See Selecting a Four-Wheel
Drive Mode (page 185). Four-wheel Drive High
Illuminates when four-wheel
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE HIGH drive high is selected.
E181779
Four-wheel drive high provides
electronically or mechanically locked Four-wheel Drive Low
four-wheel drive power to both the front
and rear wheels for use in off-road or Illuminates when four-wheel
winter conditions such as deep snow, sand drive low is selected.
E181780
or mud. This mode is not for use on dry
pavement.
Note: Four-wheel drive high can turn on or TRANSFER CASE FLUID
off automatically based on Drive Mode CAPACITY AND
selection. See Selecting a Four-Wheel SPECIFICATION
Drive Mode (page 185).
See Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE LOW Specification (page 405).
Four-wheel drive low provides

electronically or mechanically locked FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE –
four-wheel drive power to both the front TROUBLESHOOTING
and rear wheels for use on low traction
surfaces, but does so with additional
gearing for increased torque multiplication.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE – WARNING
This mode is only for off-road conditions LAMPS
such as deep sand, steep slopes, or pulling Illuminates when a four-wheel
heavy objects. drive or power train fault is
Note: Four-wheel drive low can turn on or present.
off automatically based on drive mode
selection. See Selecting a Four-Wheel
Drive Mode (page 185).
187
Four-Wheel Drive
Note: When a system fault is present, the

system can typically remain in whichever
mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It does not default to
two-wheel drive in all circumstances. When
this warning is displayed, have your vehicle
serviced by an authorized dealer.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
For 4L slow to a stop Displays when the driver attempts to shift into four-
wheel drive low when traveling at too high of a speed.
For 4L Shift to N Displays when the driver attempts to shift into four-
wheel drive low without the transmission in neutral
(N).
For 4L press Clutch Displays when the driver attempts to shift into four-
wheel drive low without the clutch pedal pressed.
To exit 4L slow to a stop Displays when the driver attempts to shift out of four-
wheel drive low when traveling at too high of a speed.
To Exit 4L Shift to N Displays when the driver attempts to shift out of four-
wheel drive low without the transmission in neutral
(N).
To exit 4L Press Clutch Displays when the driver attempts to shift out of four-
wheel drive low without the clutch pedal pressed.
4x4 Shift in Progress Displays when the four-wheel drive system is shifting
into and out of two-wheel drive high or between high
and low ranges.
4X4 Temporarily Locked Displays when the four-wheel drive system detects a
driving condition which temporarily requires greater
four-wheel drive performance. The system resumes
normal function after the system no longer detects
these driving conditions.
4x4 Temporarily Disabled Displays when the four-wheel system detects elevated
system temperature and temporarily stops providing
power to the front wheels. The system resumes normal
function when the system temperature returns to
normal.
4x4 Restored Displays when the four-wheel drive system resumes
normal function.
188
Four-Wheel Drive
Message Details
Shift Delayed Drive Forward Displays when the transfer case is not able to complete
a shift and requires forward motion to complete the
shift.
4x4 OFF Displays when the system has become disabled due
to mismatched tires or an external fault.
Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Displays when neutral tow mode has been successfully
Transmission in Neutral engaged.
Neutral Tow Disabled Displays when neutral tow mode has been successfully
disengaged.
Selected 4x4 Mode Not Avail- Displays when the driver selects a four-wheel drive
able in Current Drive Mode mode that is disallowed in the currently selected drive
mode.
To Engage 4x4 Slow to 5 km/h Displays when the system is unable to engage four-
wheel drive high and requires the driver to slow down
before attempting to engage.
To Engage 4x4 Release Acceler- Displays when the four-wheel drive system requires
ator Pedal the accelerator pedal to be released to perform the
shift into four-wheel drive mode.
4x4 Performance Reduced See Displays when the system has entered a degraded
Manual mode due to mismatched tires.
189
Electronic Locking Differential (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE ELECTRONIC Note: Switching the electronic locking

differentials off while turning results in
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL disengagement difficulties. If the electronic
locking differential has difficulty
The electronic locking differential is a disengaging, release the accelerator pedal
device housed in the front or rear axle, and and turn the steering wheel back and forth
when activated allows both wheels on that in small increments while maintaining
axle to turn at the same speed. The control and following a straight line.
electronic locking differential can provide
additional traction should your vehicle
become stuck. You can activate the SWITCHING THE ELECTRONIC
differential electronically and shift it on the LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL ON
fly within the operating speed range. The
electronic differential automatically AND OFF
disengages when the vehicle speed
exceeds a set value and it automatically Activating the Electronic Locking
reengages when the vehicle speed goes Differential
below a set value. See Switching the
Electronic Locking Differential On and
Off (page 190). It also automatically
engages based on certain selected drive
modes. See G.O.A.T. Mode Control
(page 242). The electronic locking
differential is for use in mud, rocks, sand,
or any off-road condition where you need
maximum traction. It is not for use on dry
pavement.
Note: The electronic locking differentials E333068
are for off-road use only and not for use on

dry pavement. Using the electronic locking A Front locking differential switch
differentials on dry pavement results in B Rear locking differential switch
increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
Note: The front electronic locking You can activate the front or rear locking
differential is only available in four-wheel differential by pressing the switch on the
drive low. center switch pack.
Note: Locking the front differential reduces
your ability to make tight turning maneuvers
and creates additional resistance to steering
inputs.
Front Electronic Locking Differential Engagement Speed and Availability

Four-Wheel Drive Maximum Engage- Automatic Disen- Automatic Re-
Mode ment Speed gagement Speed Engagement Speed
4L 20 mph (32 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h)
190
Rear Electronic Locking Differential Engagement Speed and Availability

Drive Modes (Four- Maximum Engage- Automatic Disen- Automatic Re-
Wheel Drive Modes) ment Speed gagement Speed Engagement Speed
Normal (2H,4A, 4H) 20 mph (32 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h)
Eco (2H, 4A, 4H) 20 mph (32 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h)
Sport (2H, 4A, 4H) 20 mph (32 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h)
Slippery (2H, 4A, 20 mph (32 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h)
4H)
Deep Snow/Sand
1
(4H, 4L)
1
Mud/Ruts (4H, 4L)
Baja (2H, 4H, 4L) No Speed Limit No Speed Limit No Speed Limit
1
Rock Crawl (4L)
1 Automaticallyengages when you select these drive modes. You have the ability to
manually override the automatic engagement by pressing the electronic locking differential
switch.
Drive Modes (Four- Maximum Engage- Automatic Disen- Automatic Re-

Wheel Drive Modes) ment Speed gagement Speed Engagement Speed
4L No Speed Limit No Speed Limit No Speed Limit
If the electronic locking differential is

selected and the indicator in the cluster is
ELECTRONIC LOCKING gray or turns from amber to gray while
DIFFERENTIAL INDICATORS driving, one of the following has occurred:
• Your vehicle speed is too high.
Rear locking differential
E325779
Indicator. • The accelerator pedal is too high during
an engagement attempt.
Front locking differential • Your vehicle is experiencing an
E328595
Indicator. anti-lock brake activation.
• The left and right wheel speed
If the front or rear indicator in the cluster difference is too high during an
is amber, both wheels of the indicated axle engagement attempt.
are locked together providing additional
traction.
191
If the electronic locking differential is • The electronic locking differential is not

selected and the indicator in the cluster allowed in the current drive mode and
does not turn on, one of the following has is accompanied by SELECTED
occurred: LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL NOT
AVAILABLE IN CURRENT DRIVE MODE
in the information display.
• The electronic locking differential is not
allowed in the current 4x4 mode and
is accompanied by SELECTED
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL NOT
AVAILABLE IN CURRENT 4x4 MODE in
the information display.
• The system has malfunctioned and is
accompanied by CHECK LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL in the information
display. See your authorized dealer for
assistance.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL – TROUBLESHOOTING
ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Selected Locking Differen- The selected electronic locking differential is not available
tial Not Available in in current drive mode. See G.O.A.T. Mode Control (page
Current Drive Mode 242).
Selected Locking Differen- The selected electronic locking differential is not available
tial Not Available in in your current four-wheel drive mode. See G.O.A.T. Mode
Current 4x4 Mode Control (page 242).
To Engage Locking The selected electronic locking differential requires that you
Differential Release release the accelerator pedal in order to engage.
Accelerator Pedal
Check Locking Differen- An electronic locking differential system fault is present. See
tial your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
The following conditions affect the

electronic locking differential:
192
• Based on drive mode selection, the rear release the accelerator pedal and turn the
electronic locking differential does not steering wheel in the opposite direction
engage if your vehicle speed is above when rolling. We recommend engaging
20 mph (32 km/h). and disengaging the electronic locking
• The front electronic locking differential differential at a stop when you mount a
does not engage if your vehicle speed spare or mismatched tire on either axle.
is above 20 mph (32 km/h) in
four-wheel drive low (4L).
• Based on drive mode selection, the
electronic locking differential
automatically disengages at speeds
above 25 mph (41 km/h) and
automatically re-engages at speeds
below 20 mph (32 km/h).
• The electronic locking differential may
not engage if you press your
accelerator pedal during an
engagement attempt. A message may
display in the instrument display
guiding you to release the accelerator
pedal.
• In four-wheel drive low (4L), the front
electronic locking differential
automatically disengages at speeds
above 25 mph (41 km/h) and
automatically re-engages at speeds
• The AdvanceTrac system has the
ability to take over control of the
electronic locking differential and
disable it during driving maneuvers
when necessary.
Operating Electronic Locking

Differential With a Spare or
Mismatched Tires
On vehicles with an electronic locking
differential, the size of the spare tire can
affect performance of the system. If there
is a significant difference between the two
rear tires or two front tires, you may have
limited electronic locking differential
functionality. If the electronic locking
differential has difficulty disengaging,
193
Brakes
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS stop. Move the transmission to park (P),

switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
WARNING: Driving your vehicle condition persists, have your vehicle towed
with the warning lamp on is dangerous. to the nearest authorized dealer.
A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your LOCATING THE BRAKE FLUID
vehicle checked as soon as possible. RESERVOIR - 2.3L
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake ECOBOOST™
failure and the risk of personal injury.
• See Under Hood Overview (page 319).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a LOCATING THE BRAKE FLUID
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes. RESERVOIR - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM • See Under Hood Overview (page 320).
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID

LIMITATIONS
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risk of crash when: WARNING: Do not use any fluid
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in other than the recommended brake fluid
front of you. as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use
of incorrect fluid could result in the loss
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning. of vehicle control, serious personal injury
• You take corners too fast. or death.
• The road surface is poor.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid
Note: If the system activates, the brake from a sealed container. Contamination
pedal could pulse and could travel further. with dirt, water, petroleum products or
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. other materials may result in brake
system damage or failure. Failure to
BRAKE OVER ACCELERATOR adhere to this warning could result in the
loss of vehicle control, serious personal
In the event the accelerator pedal injury or death.
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to WARNING: Do not allow the fluid
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. to touch your skin or eyes. If this
If you experience this condition, apply the happens, rinse the affected areas
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe immediately with plenty of water and
contact your physician.
194
Brakes
BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION

WARNING: The brake system
could be affected if the brake fluid level See Brake Fluid Specification (page 404).
is below the MIN mark or above the MAX
mark on the brake fluid reservoir.
BRAKES –
TROUBLESHOOTING
BRAKES – WARNING LAMPS

If the ABS indicator illuminates
when you are driving, this
indicates a malfunction. Your
vehicle continues to have normal braking
without the anti-lock braking system
function. See an authorized dealer.
It also momentarily illuminates when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
E170684
E270480
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface. The brake indicator momentarily
2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see illuminates when you switch the
where the brake fluid level is relative ignition on to confirm the lamp
to the MIN and the MAX marks on the is functional. It may also illuminate when
reservoir. you apply the parking brake and the
ignition is on. If it illuminates when your
Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the vehicle is moving, make sure the parking
reservoir cap must remain in place and fully brake is disengaged. If the parking brake
tight, unless you are adding fluid. is disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
Only use fluid that meets our level or a brake system fault. See an
specifications. See Capacities and authorized dealer.
195
Brakes
BRAKES – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Brake Fluid Level Low The brake fluid level is low, check the brake system immedi-
ately. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 194).
Check Brake System Have the system checked before continuing on your journey.
196
Brakes
BRAKES – FREQUENTLY ASKED

QUESTIONS
Is it normal for my brakes to make
noise?
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding,
or continuous squeal sound is present,
the brake lining could be worn-out.
Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
There is an electrical motor sound
when I press on the brake pedal or
activate the park brake switch. Is this
normal?
Yes, those sounds are the electronic
brake booster or the electronic park
brake operating.
Note: Brake dust could accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning Wheels (page
361).
197
Electric Parking Brake
WHAT IS THE ELECTRIC The electric parking brake continues to

slow your vehicle down unless you release
PARKING BRAKE the switch.
The electric parking brake is used to hold The red warning lamp illuminates, a tone
your vehicle on slopes and flat roads. sounds and the stoplamps turn on when
you use the electric parking brake in an
emergency.
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC
Note: Do not apply the electric parking
PARKING BRAKE brake when your vehicle is moving, except
in an emergency.
WARNING: Always fully apply the

parking brake and make sure you shift
MANUALLY RELEASING THE
into park (P). Failure to follow this ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
or death. 1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
WARNING: If you drive extended
distances with the parking brake applied, 3. Push the switch down.
you could cause damage to the brake The red warning lamp turns off.
system.
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
The switch is on the lower part Trailer
E267156
of the instrument panel. 1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
1. Pull the switch up. 2. Pull the switch upward and hold it.
3. Shift into gear.
The red warning lamp flashes during
operation and illuminates when the parking 4. Press the accelerator pedal until engine
brake is applied. has developed sufficient torque to
prevent your vehicle from rolling down
Note: You can apply the electric parking the hill.
brake when the ignition is off.
5. Release the switch and pull away in a
Note: The electric parking brake could normal manner.
apply when you shift into park (P). See Park
(P) (page 178).
AUTOMATICALLY RELEASING
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC THE ELECTRIC PARKING
PARKING BRAKE IN AN BRAKE
EMERGENCY 1. Close the driver door.
You can use the electric parking brake to 2. Shift into gear.
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency. 3. Press the accelerator pedal and pull
1. Pull the switch up and hold it. away in a normal manner.
198
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE –

AUDIBLE WARNING TROUBLESHOOTING
Sounds when the parking brake is on and
your vehicle is moving. If the warning tone
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE –
continues after you have released the
WARNING LAMPS
parking brake, this indicates a malfunction. Brake System
possible. It illuminates red when you apply
the parking brake and your
E270480
vehicle is on. If the lamp flashes
RELEASING THE ELECTRIC when the parking brake has been
PARKING BRAKE IF THE released, this indicates the
VEHICLE BATTERY HAS RUN parking brake system requires
service. Have your vehicle checked as
OUT OF CHARGE soon as possible.
Note: Lamps may vary depending on region.
WARNING: The electric parking Electric Parking Brake
brake does not operate if the vehicle
battery has run out of charge.
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle

battery to release the electric parking brake When the lamp illuminates
if the vehicle battery has run out of charge. E146190
yellow, it indicates a malfunction
See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page in the electric parking brake.
301). Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
199
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE – INFORMATION MESSAGES

Park Brake
Message Details
To Release: Press Brake The electric parking brake is set and you attempted a manual
and Switch release without pressing the brake.
Park Brake Use Switch With the electric parking brake set, you attempted an auto-
to Release matic release with no success. Perform a manual release.
Release Park Brake The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds
3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.
Park Brake Not Applied The electric park brake is not fully applied.
Park Brake Not Released The electric park brake is not fully released.
Park Brake Maintenance The electric park brake system has been put into a special
Mode mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
Function Service requires service. Some functionality may still be available.
Required Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
Service Now requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
200
Hill Start Assist
WHAT IS HILL START ASSIST SWITCHING HILL START

ASSIST ON AND OFF -
Hill Start Assist makes it easier for you to
pull away when your vehicle is on a slope MANUAL TRANSMISSION
without using the parking brake.
You can switch hill start assist on and off
on the touchscreen:
HOW DOES HILL START 1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
ASSIST WORK 2. Press Driver Assistance.
When the system activates, your vehicle 3. Switch Hill Start Assist on or off.
remains stationary for a few seconds after Note: The system remembers the last
you release the brake pedal. This gives you setting when you start your vehicle.
time to move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal. The brakes
release when the engine has developed SWITCHING HILL START
sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle ASSIST ON AND OFF -
from rolling down the slope.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The system activates when your vehicle is
in any forward gear and facing uphill, or Hill start assist is active when you switch
when your vehicle is in reverse (R) and the ignition on. You cannot switch the
facing downhill. system on or off.
HILL START ASSIST HILL START ASSIST –

PRECAUTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING
HILL START ASSIST –

WARNING: The system does not INFORMATION MESSAGES
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
Message Action
parking brake.
Hill Start Assist Not Displays when
WARNING: You must remain in Available system is not avail-
your vehicle when the system turns on. able. Have your
At all times, you are responsible for vehicle checked as
controlling your vehicle, supervising the soon as possible.
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
WARNING: The system turns off if

there is a malfunction or if you
excessively rev the engine.
201
Traction Control
WHAT IS TRACTION CONTROL When you switch the system off, a

message and an illuminated icon appear
The traction control system helps to avoid on the instrument cluster.
drive wheel spin and loss of traction. Use the switch again to return the traction
control system to normal operation.
HOW DOES TRACTION Note: When you switch traction control off,
CONTROL WORK stability control remains fully active.
Note: When you place your vehicle into
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system four-wheel drive low, the traction control
applies the brakes to individual wheels disables. Traction control resumes when
and, when needed, reduces engine power you put your vehicle back into two-wheel
at the same time. If the wheels spin when drive or four-wheel drive high.
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
Note: For additional information on the
the system reduces engine power in order
traction and stability control systems. See
to increase traction.
Stability Control (page 204).
SWITCHING TRACTION TRACTION CONTROL

CONTROL ON AND OFF INDICATOR
Stability and Traction Control
WARNING: Operating your vehicle Indicator
with the traction control disabled could
lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle If the indicator does not
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury illuminate when you switch the
and death. E138639 ignition on, or remains on when
the engine is running, this indicates a
The system turns on each time you switch malfunction. Have your vehicle checked
the ignition on. by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be The traction control off indicator
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin. illuminates when you switch the
E130458 traction control system off, or
Switching the System Off when an alternative stability control mode
is selected that requires the traction
The switch for the stability and
control off depending on the drive mode
E348750 traction control system is on the
selected.
instrument panel.
202
Traction Control
TRACTION CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
TRACTION CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Traction Control Off The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off.
Traction Control On The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on.
203
Stability Control
HOW DOES STABILITY

CONTROL WORK WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
WARNING: Vehicle modifications drive with due care and attention. Failure
involving braking system, aftermarket to follow this instruction could result in
roof racks, suspension, steering system, the loss of control of your vehicle,
tire construction and wheel and tire size personal injury or death.
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect If a driving condition activates either the
the performance of the electronic stability control or traction control you may
stability control system. In addition, experience the following conditions:
installing any stereo speakers may
interfere with and adversely affect the • The stability and traction control light
electronic stability control system. flashes.
Reducing the effectiveness of the • Your vehicle slows down.
electronic stability control system could
• Reduced engine power.
lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury The stability control system has several
and death. features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the Electronic Stability Control
laws of physics. It's always possible to
lose control of a vehicle due to Electronic stability control enhances your
inappropriate driver input for the vehicle’s ability to prevent skids or lateral
conditions. Aggressive driving on any slides by applying brakes to one or more
road condition can cause you to lose of the wheels individually and, if necessary,
control of your vehicle increasing the risk reducing engine power.
of personal injury or property damage. Roll Stability Control
Activation of the electronic stability
control system is an indication that at Roll stability control enhances your
least some of the tires have exceeded vehicle’s ability to prevent rollovers by
their ability to grip the road; this could detecting your vehicle’s roll motion and
reduce the operator's ability to control the rate at which it changes by applying
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss the brakes to one or more wheels
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, individually.
personal injury and death.
Curve Control
Curve control enhances your vehicle’s
ability to follow the road when cornering
severely or avoiding objects in the roadway.
Curve control operates by reducing engine
power and, if necessary, applying brakes
to one or more of the wheels individually.
204
Stability Control
Side Wind Stabilization

Side wind stabilization is an advanced
feature that works by carefully applying
the brakes on one side of the vehicle to
reduce the effect of a side wind gust on
the vehicle's path.
Torque Vectoring by Brakes

Torque vectoring control applies brake
torque on the inner driven wheel in a curve
for better traction to avoid an understeer,
or oversteer situation. Unlike electronic
stability control, enhanced torque
vectoring control does not slow the
vehicle. It helps control excessive wheel
slip and gives the vehicle improved
cornering agility.
E72903
Traction Control
Traction control enhances your vehicle’s A Vehicle without stability control
ability to maintain traction of the wheels skidding off its intended route.
by detecting and controlling wheel spin. B Vehicle with stability control
See What Is Traction Control (page 202). maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
SWITCHING STABILITY
CONTROL ON AND OFF
The system turns on each time you switch
the ignition on.
The electronic stability control system is
disabled when the transmission selector
is in reverse (R).
You can switch the traction control
independently. See Switching Traction
Control On and Off (page 202).
Note: When you place your vehicle into
four-wheel drive low, the stability control
disables. Stability control resumes when
you put your vehicle back into two-wheel
drive or four-wheel drive high.
205
Stability Control
ESC Features
Button Func- Mode Stability Control Electronic Traction Control

tions Off Light Stability Control Systems
Default at start- Default - Trac- On during bulb Enabled Enabled

up tion Control On check
and Normal
Advancetrac
Button Traction Control On Enabled Disabled
momentarily Off
pressed - single
press
Button pressed AdvanceTrac On Disabled Disabled
and held for five Off
seconds
Button pressed Return to Off Enabled Enabled
when Traction Default
Control Off or
Advance Trac
Off
Note: Do not use the AdvanceTrac Off • The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
setting on public roadways.
• If the driving condition is severe and
If a fault occurs in either the stability your foot is not on the brake, the brake
control or the traction control system, you pedal may move as the system applies
may experience the following conditions: higher brake force.
• The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily. STABILITY CONTROL
• The stability control and traction INDICATOR
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of If it does not illuminate when you
the wheels. switch the power on, or remains
If a driving condition activates either the E138639 on, this indicates a malfunction.
stability control or the traction control Have your vehicle checked by an
system you may experience the following authorized dealer as soon as possible.
conditions
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
206
Trail Control (If Equipped)
WHAT IS TRAIL CONTROL

control speed in low traction conditions
or extremely steep slopes. The system
is designed to be an aid and does not
with due care and attention. Failure to
personal injury.
Trail control lets you focus on steering

during low-speed and off-road use by
controlling your vehicle's acceleration and
braking to maintain the speed that you set.
You may hear a noise from the anti-lock
brake system pump motor when you use E329455
the system. This is normal.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with trail
one pedal drive, this will activate trail one
TRAIL CONTROL LIMITATIONS pedal drive if you are in four wheel drive high
or four wheel drive low mode, until you set
Trail control is unavailable when any of the a speed for trail control.
following occur:
The system switches off if you press the
• Your vehicle speed is greater than button again or exceed 40 mph (64 km/h).
20 mph (32 km/h) in two-wheel drive
high or four-wheel drive high modes.
• Your vehicle speed is greater than SETTING THE TRAIL CONTROL
9 mph (15 km/h) in four-wheel drive SPEED
low mode.
• Your vehicle speed is greater than Note: The buttons are on the steering
3 mph (5 km/h) in reverse (R). wheel.
• The transmission is in park (P). Drive to the speed you prefer.
• The driver side door is open or your Press the button to set or
seatbelt is off when the driver side door increase the set speed. Press
is removed. and hold to adjust the speed in
• Cruise control is on. larger increments.
• Pro trailer backup assist is on. Press the button to set or
decrease the set speed. Press
and hold to adjust the speed in
SWITCHING TRAIL CONTROL larger increments.
ON AND OFF Note: The indicator changes color.
Press the button on the center console.
207
You can also adjust the set speed by TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE
braking, then pressing the + or - button. PRECAUTIONS
Note: Pressing the brake pedal does not
switch off the system.
WARNING: This system is an extra
driving aid. It does not replace your
CANCELING THE SET SPEED attention and judgment, or the need to
apply the brakes. This system does NOT
Press the button on the steering automatically brake your vehicle. If you
wheel to cancel the set speed. fail to press the brake pedal when
necessary, you may collide with another
Note: If your vehicle has trail one pedal vehicle.
drive and you are in four-wheel drive high
(4H) or four-wheel drive low (4L) mode, Shifting into drive (D) or reverse (R) does
cancelling the set speed activates this not cause the vehicle to move.
feature.
You can press the brake pedal to increase
braking. This does not turn the system off.
TRAIL CONTROL INDICATORS
Trail one pedal drive could apply the
parking brake when your vehicle is not
moving and not in park (P).
E318506
Note: Always check the transmission
selection before accelerating.
TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE (IF Note: Only use trail one pedal drive on
EQUIPPED) slippery or loose surfaces. Using trail one
pedal drive on dry, hard surfaces could
produce some vibration, driveline bind up
WHAT IS TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE and potential excessive tire and vehicle
wear.
Trail one pedal drive allows you to
accelerate and brake using only the
accelerator pedal. The system assists TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE
when driving through difficult off-road LIMITATIONS
terrain. Pressing the accelerator pedal
Trail one pedal drive is unavailable when
down accelerates your vehicle and
any of the following occur:
releasing pressure on the accelerator
pedal, with your foot still on the pedal, • Your vehicle is not in four-wheel drive
slows your vehicle down. Releasing the high or four-wheel drive low modes.
accelerator pedal may allow your vehicle • Using cruise control.
to come to a complete stop, some • Using trail control.
situations may require you to press the
brake pedal to come to a complete stop. • You exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Releasing the accelerator pedal may allow
your vehicle to come to a complete stop,
some situations may require you to press
the brake pedal to come to a complete
stop.
208
SWITCHING TRAIL ONE PEDAL Selecting a driveline mode other than

DRIVE ON AND OFF four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive
low switches trail one pedal drive off.
If you exceed 42 mph (68 km/h) trail one
pedal drive switches off.
Pressing either button when trail
one pedal drive is active turns
trail control on and places trail
one pedal drive into standby
mode.
Switching from Trail Control to

Trail One Pedal Drive
When using trail control in
four-wheel drive high or
four-wheel drive low modes, you
can switch to trail one pedal drive by
pressing the button on the steering wheel.
E343599
TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE
Switching Trail One Pedal Drive On INDICATORS
Press the trail features button when in When trail one pedal drive is
four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive 1
active, the indicator displays
E328584
low to activate trail one pedal drive. green in the instrument cluster.
When the system is switched on but is
Switching Trail One Pedal Drive unavailable or in standby mode, it displays
Off grey.
Press the trail features button again to
switch trail one pedal drive off.
209
TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE – TROUBLESHOOTING (IF EQUIPPED)
TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Trail 1-Pedal Drive Active Use SET Button Displays when trail one pedal drive is active,
for Trail Control use the SET+ or SET- to switch to trail
control.
Trail Control with Trail 1- Pedal Drive Off Displays when you switch trail one pedal
drive off.
Trail Control Enabled Use SET button to Trail control is in two-wheel drive high or
Set Speed Trail 1-Pedal Drive Available in four-wheel drive auto. Set a speed to
4H or 4L activate trail control or change the driveline
state to four-wheel drive high or four-wheel
drive low modes to active trail one pedal
drive.
210
TRAIL CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
TRAIL CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Reduce Speed To Enter Trail Displays when you must reduce your vehicle speed to
Control use trail control.
Trail Control Not Available with Displays when you must release the park brake to use
Park Brake Applied trail control.
Trail Control Not Available Displays when you must switch off the trailer backup
While Pro Trailer Backup assist to use trail control.
Assist™ Active
Trail Control Enabled Use SET Displays when you successfully enabled trail control
Button to Set Speed and can set a speed with the Set+ or Set- control.
Trail Control Off Driver Resume Displays when a system fault has occurred when trail
Control control was active and the driver must resume control.
Trail Control Off Displays when the system has turned off.
Trail Control Fault See Manual Displays when a system fault is present. See the trail
control section in your Owner's Manual. See your
authorized dealer for diagnosis.
Trail Control To Activate Select Displays when you must be in drive (D), neutral (N) or
Gear reverse (R) to use trail control.
Trail Control Not Available with Displays when you must switch the cruise control off
Cruise Control Active to use trail control.
Trail Control Not Available with Displays when you must close the driver door to use
Driver Door Open trail control.
Set Trail Control to 1 MPH to Aid Displays when the system detects you may be stuck
in Getting Unstuck in Sand in sand and recommends using trail control on to the
lowest set speed. Doing this could slowly pull sand
Set Trail Control to 2 km/h to under the tires to free the vehicle.
Aid in Getting Unstuck in Sand
Descent Control Now Active Due to some driver action, Trail Control propulsion was
Press Trail Control Switch To turned off but the vehicle will still brake if descending
Exit a hill. The driver must press the Trail Control switch to
turn the feature OFF, they can then turn it back on.
Trail Control Not Available with Displays when you must have the seatbelt on to use
Seatbelt Off trail control.
211
Trail Turn Assist (If Equipped)
WHAT IS TRAIL TURN ASSIST SWITCHING TRAIL TURN

ASSIST ON AND OFF
Trail turn assist can reduce the turning
radius of your vehicle by applying the While in four-wheel drive high or
brakes to the inside rear wheel in four-wheel drive low, press the trail turn
low-speed, high steering-angle maneuvers. assist button to turn the feature on. trail
turn assist will be on at this time but will
TRAIL TURN ASSIST not activate until:
PRECAUTIONS • Vehicle speed is less than 12 mph
(19.3 km/h).
Note: Do not use trail turn assist on dry, • Rear differential is fully unlocked.
hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
• Steering wheel is almost fully turned
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
to the left or right.
damage drive line, or braking components.
Trail turn assist is only intended for slippery, You can turn off trail turn assist by doing
or loose surfaces. any of the following:
You may hear noise from the anti-lock • Pressing the trail turn assist button
brake system while trail turn assist is again.
active. This is normal operation. • Selecting a two-wheel drive high, or
four-wheel drive auto.
TRAIL TURN ASSIST • Turning on the rear locking differential.
LIMITATIONS
TRAIL TURN ASSIST
You can only use trail turn assist when the
system is in four-wheel drive high (4H), or
INDICATORS
four-wheel drive low (4L) mode.
When trail turn assist is on, one
You cannot use trail turn assist with the of these two indicators will be
E338899
rear differential engaged. If the system displayed, depending on the
detects that the rear differential has direction of the vehicle’s last
recently been engaged, it may not activate turn. When the feature is on but
E338900
trail turn assist until it can confirm that the not in use, the indicator light will
rear differential is disengaged. be grey. When the feature is active the
If the vehicle’s rear differential is engaged indicator light will be green.
when pressing the trail turn assist button,
the rear differential will attempt to
disengage to allow for trail turn assist
operation.
212
Trail Turn Assist (If Equipped)
TRAIL TURN ASSIST –

TROUBLESHOOTING

Message Details
Trail Turn Switch to four-wheel

Assist Avail- drive low or four-wheel
able in 4L or drive high to activate trail
4H turn assist. See
Selecting a Four-
Wheel Drive Mode
(page 185).
Trail Turn Trail turn assist system
Assist Not malfunction could be
Available See present. if this condition
Manual persists, have your
vehicle serviced.
Trail Turn You have activated trail
Assist ON turn assist.
Trail Turn You have switched trail
Assist OFF turn assist off.

Why does Trail Turn Assist not activate
after unlocking the rear differential?
The rear differential may not be fully
disengaged. When possible, turn off
the rear axle locker while driving
straight before using trail turn assist.
If you are already in a tight turn when
you encounter this situation, driving
the vehicle for a short distance in
reverse could allow the differential to
fully disengage.
213
Stabilizer Bar Disconnect (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE STABILIZER BAR SWITCHING THE STABILIZER

DISCONNECT BAR DISCONNECT ON AND
OFF
Stabilizer bar disconnect is a feature that
allows the front stabilizer bar to be Switching the Stabilizer Bar
disconnected for off-road use. This allows Disconnect On
for increased front wheel articulation to
improve capability and comfort on off-road Switch the system on by
terrain. pressing the button on the
E329476
instrument panel. The stabilizer
bar disconnects when the vehicles speed
STABILIZER BAR DISCONNECT is below 20 mph (32 km/h). An amber
PRECAUTIONS indicator illuminates to show that the
stabilizer bar disconnected.
WARNING: If the stabilizer bar When the vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph
disconnect warning lamp illuminates red, (32 km/h), the stabilizer bar reconnects
a fault could be detected and the and a grey indicator illuminates, indicating
stabilizer bar could not be connected. the system is in standby mode. The
Do not drive your vehicle above 20 mph stabilizer bar disconnects again once the
(32 km/h) and have the system checked vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
as soon as possible. Driving your vehicle If the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
above 20 mph (32 km/h) could reduce (32 km/h) and the system is on, the
vehicle stability. request is stored and a grey indicator
illuminates to indicate that the system is
WARNING: Do not get under a in standby mode. When the vehicle speed
vehicle that is switched on as the falls below 20 mph (32 km/h), the
stabilizer bar disconnect could activate stabilizer bar disconnects and the amber
and the vehicle could unexpectedly drop. indicator illuminates, indicating that the
Failure to follow this instruction could stabilizer bar has disconnected.
Note: The grey indicator stays on until either
the vehicle speed reduces and the stabilizer
If an amber warning message appears in bar disconnects or, the system turns off.
the cluster indicating that the system
requires service, the stabilizer bar The stabilizer bar system also turns on and
disconnect will not be available. Have your disconnects when you select the Rock
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer Crawl drive mode. See Selecting a
as soon as possible. G.O.A.T. Mode (page 242).
Note: The stabilizer bar disconnect is not
available in certain drive modes. See
Selecting a G.O.A.T. Mode (page 242).
Note: The stabilizer bar disconnect could
be delayed during wheel slippage, dynamic
maneuvers, dynamic cornering, or when
there is an anti-lock brake system or
electronic stability control event in progress.
214
Switching the Stabilizer Bar STABILIZER BAR DISCONNECT

Disconnect Off
– TROUBLESHOOTING
Switch the system off by pressing the
stabilizer bar disconnect button, which STABILIZER BAR DISCONNECT –
reconnects the stabilizer bar if currently INFORMATION MESSAGES
disconnected.
The stabilizer bar disconnect system also Message Action
turns off when:
Sta-Bar Disconnect The selected drive
• The engine is switched off. Not Available In mode does not
• You switch out of four-wheel drive low Selected Drive allow you to turn on
or four-wheel drive high. Mode the stabilizer bar
• You select a drive mode that does not disconnect feature.
allow the stabilizer bar to disconnect. See G.O.A.T.
Mode Control
Note: The stabilizer bar can be reconnected (page 242).
at any time, it is not necessary for the vehicle
to be on a level surface as the stabilizer bar Sta-Bar Discon- The stabilizer bar
self-aligns. nected Sta-Bar has been discon-
Reconnects over 20 nected.
MPH
STABILIZER BAR DISCONNECT
INDICATORS Sta-Bar Discon-
nected Sta-Bar
An indicator illuminates when Reconnects over 32
you switch the stabilizer bar km/h
E329476
disconnect system on. The color
Sta-Bar Disconnect The stabilizer bar
of the indicator changes to indicate the
Available Below 20 disconnect is avail-
system status.
MPH able below 20 mph
Amber indicates that the stabilizer bar is (32 km/h).
Sta-Bar Disconnect
disconnected. Available Below 32
Grey indicates that the stabilizer bar is km/h
connected and in standby.
Sta-Bar Disconnect The selected 4WD
Red indicates that there is a fault with the Available in 4L or mode does not
system, have the system checked as soon 4H allow you to turn on
as possible. the stabilizer bar
disconnect feature.
215
Message Action Why is the stabilizer bar disconnect not

disconnecting?
Sta-Bar Disconnect Stabilizer bar The vehicle's battery charge is low and
Not Available See disconnect is not needs to be changed or charged.
Manual available. See
Stabilizer Bar Why is the stabilizer bar disconnect not
Disconnect – disconnecting?
Frequently Asked There is a fault active in another
Questions (page system on the vehicle, have the system
216). checked as soon as possible.
Sta-Bar Disconnect Stabilizer bar Why is the stabilizer bar disconnect not
Drive Below 32 disconnect fault disconnecting?
km/h Service Now detected, drive
The vehicle is in a drive mode that
below 20 mph
Sta-Bar Disconnect (32 km/h). Have does not allow the stabilizer bar to
Drive Below 20 disconnect and needs to be switched
your vehicle
MPH Service Now to a different drive more.
checked by an
authorized dealer
STABILIZER BAR DISCONNECT –

Why is the stabilizer bar disconnect not
disconnecting?
The engine is turned off and needs to
be turned on.
disconnecting?
The vehicle is not in four-wheel drive
low or four-wheel drive high, and
needs to be switched to either mode.
disconnecting?
Vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h) and needs to be reduced in
order for the stabilizer bar to
disconnect.
disconnecting?
The vehicle is on a very significant
lateral incline, and needs to be moved
to more level ground.
216
Hill Descent Control - Manual Transmission
WHAT IS HILL DESCENT HILL DESCENT CONTROL

CONTROL PRECAUTIONS
Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while WARNING: The system does not
descending steep slopes in various surface control speed in low traction conditions
conditions. or extremely steep slopes. The system
is designed to be an aid and does not
HOW DOES HILL DESCENT relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to
CONTROL WORK follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill slopes between WARNING: The system does not
2–20 mph (3–32 km/h). Above 20 mph replace the parking brake. When you
(32 km/h), the system remains on but the leave your vehicle, always apply the
descent speed cannot be set or parking brake.
maintained.
Note: The system does not function below
2 mph (3 km/h). SWITCHING HILL DESCENT
The system requires a cool down interval CONTROL ON AND OFF
after a period of sustained use. Hill descent
control provides a warning in the message Press the button on the center
center and a tone sounds when the system console. A light in the instrument
E328593
is about to disengage for cooling. At this cluster illuminates when the
time, manually apply the brakes as needed system is active.
to maintain descent speed.
Note: The amount of time that the system
can remain active before cooling varies with SETTING THE HILL DESCENT
conditions. SPEED
To increase or decrease the descent speed,
press the accelerator or brake pedal, or use
the SET + and SET - buttons on the
steering wheel. Once you reach the
preferred speed remove your feet from the
pedals.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL

INDICATOR
Illuminates when you switch hill
descent control on.
E328593
217
Hill Descent Control - Manual Transmission
HILL DESCENT CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
HILL DESCENT CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Hill Descent Control OFF Displays when you deactivate hill descent
control mode.
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed Displays when the speed exceeds 20 mph
(32 km/h) and hill descent control is
unavailable.
Hill Descent Control Not Available With Displays when Cruise Control is Active and
Cruise Control Active driver attempts to turn on hill descent
control.
Hill Descent Driver Resume Control Displays when the hill descent control
mode requires you to resume control.
Hill Descent Control Fault Displays when a hill descent system fault
is present.
Hill Descent Control Off System Cooling Displays when the hill descent control turns
off to cool the brake system.
Hill Descent Control Ready Displays when you activate the hill descent
control mode.
218
Steering
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING Switch the vehicle off. After at least 10

seconds, switch the vehicle on and
HOW DOES ELECTRIC POWER watch the information display for a
STEERING WORK steering system warning message. If a
steering system warning message
The electric power steering system assists returns, have the system checked as
the brake system to help operate soon as possible.
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. WARNING: If the system detects
an error, you may not feel a difference in
If your vehicle loses electrical power or the steering, however a serious condition
detects a concern when you are driving the may exist. Have your vehicle checked as
system switches off and you retain normal soon as possible. Failure to do so may
steering function. Additionally, whenever result in loss of steering control.
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery is installed, you must drive your Adapt your speed and driving behavior
vehicle a short distance before the system according to reduced steering assist.
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems. Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort to steer. This occurs to prevent
internal overheating and damage to the
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING steering system. If this occurs, you will not
PRECAUTIONS lose the ability to steer your vehicle
manually nor will it cause damage to the
system. Normal steering and driving allows
WARNING: The electric power the system to cool down and steering
steering system has diagnostic checks assist returns to normal.
that continuously monitor the system. If
Note: There is no fluid reservoir to check or
a fault is detected, a message displays
fill.
in the information display. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
219
Steering
STEERING – TROUBLESHOOTING
STEERING – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Steering Fault Service Now The power steering system has detected a
condition that requires service. Have your
Steering Loss Stop Safely The power steering system is not working.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Have your
Steering Assist Fault Service Required The power steering system has detected a
condition that requires service. Have your
Steering Lock Malfunction Service Now The steering system has detected a condi-
tion that requires service. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
220
Steering
STEERING – FREQUENTLY ASKED

QUESTIONS
Why does it seem that the steering is
wandering or pulling?
Check your vehicle for an improperly
inflated or uneven tire, loose or worn
suspension or steering components,
or improper vehicle alignment.
The system is functioning properly and
the components have been checked,
why is the steering system continuing
to pull or wander?
A high crown in the road or crosswinds
could make the steering system feel
like it is wandering or pulling.
221
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
PARKING AID PRECAUTIONS Note: If your vehicle sustains damage

leaving the sensors misaligned, this will
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in When you connect a trailer to your vehicle,
reverse (R) and when using the sensing the rear parking aid detects the trailer and
system. provides an alert. Disable the parking aid
when you connect a trailer to prevent the
WARNING: The system may not alert.
detect objects with surfaces that absorb Note: Certain add-on devices installed
reflection. Always drive with due care around the bumper or fascia may create
and attention. Failure to take care may false alerts, for example, large trailer
result in a crash. hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
WARNING: Traffic control systems, that could block the normal detection zone
fluorescent lamps, inclement weather, of the parking aid system. Aftermarket spare
air brakes, external motors and fans may tires or spare tire covers mounted to the rear
affect the correct operation of the tailgate could cause false alerts from the
sensing system. This may cause reduced park aid system. Remove the add-on device
performance or false alerts. to prevent false alerts.
WARNING: The system may not Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
detect small or moving objects, and large accumulations of dirt. If the
particularly those close to the ground. sensors are covered, the system's accuracy
can be affected.
WARNING: The parking aid system Do not clean the sensors with sharp
can only assist you to detect objects objects.
when your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you Note: When using a programmed MyKey
must take care when using the parking you cannot switch this off. See MyKey™
aid system. (page 74).
WARNING: The system may not SWITCHING PARKING AID ON

function if the sensor is blocked.
AND OFF
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not Press the parking aid button and
function. Rain, snow and spray can all use the menu to switch the
E139213 system on and off.
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the You can also switch the system off using
immediate area surrounding the sensor, the pop-up message that appears when
have your vehicle checked as soon as you are in reverse (R).
possible.
222
REAR PARKING AID LOCATING THE REAR PARKING

AID SENSORS
WHAT IS THE REAR PARKING AID
Rear parking sensors detect objects behind
your vehicle when in reverse (R).
REAR PARKING AID LIMITATIONS

There is a decreased coverage area at the
outer corners.
When using a programmed MyKey, you
cannot switch the rear parking aid off.
The rear parking aid sensors are active
when your vehicle is in reverse (R) and the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). E130178
The sensor coverage area is up to 71 in
(180 cm) from the rear bumper. The rear parking aid sensors are in the rear
bumper.
The rear parking aid detects large objects
when you shift into reverse (R) and any of
the following occur: REAR PARKING AID AUDIBLE
WARNINGS
• Your vehicle is moving backward at a
low speed. A warning tone sounds when your vehicle
• Your vehicle is stationary but an object approaches an object. As your vehicle
is approaching the rear of your vehicle moves closer to an object, the rate of the
at a low speed. tone increases. The warning tone
• Your vehicle is moving backward at a continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
low speed and an object is moving (30 cm) or less from the rear bumper.
towards your vehicle, for example If your vehicle remains stationary for a few
another vehicle at a low speed. seconds, the audible warning turns off. If
your vehicle moves backward the tone
sounds again.
Note: When the parking aid system sounds
a tone, the audio system could reduce the
set volume.
FRONT PARKING AID
WHAT IS THE FRONT PARKING

AID
Front parking sensors detect objects in
front of your vehicle.
223
FRONT PARKING AID LOCATING THE FRONT PARKING

LIMITATIONS AID SENSORS
The front parking aid sensors are active
when your vehicle is in any position other
than park (P) and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The sensor coverage area is up to 28 in
(70 cm) from the bumper.
If your vehicle is in reverse (R), the front
parking aid detects objects when your
vehicle is moving at a low speed or an
object is moving toward your vehicle and
provides an audio warning, for example
another vehicle at a low speed. Once your E187330
vehicle reaches a stop, the audio warning The front parking aid sensors are in the
stops after a few seconds. Visual indication front bumper.
is always active in reverse (R).
If your vehicle is in any forward gear, the FRONT PARKING AID AUDIBLE
front parking aid provides audible warnings WARNINGS
and visual indication when your vehicle is
moving at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) or A warning tone sounds when there is an
below and the system detects an object object within 28 in (70 cm) from the front
within the detection zone. Once your bumper. As your vehicle moves closer to
vehicle reaches a stop, the visual indication an object, the rate of the tone increases.
and audio warning stops after a few
seconds. The warning tone continuously sounds
when an object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from
If your vehicle is in neutral (N), the front the front bumper.
and rear sensors provide visual indication
only when your vehicle is moving below a Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)
speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and obstacles or less from your vehicle, visual indication
are detected inside the detection areas. remains on.
Once your vehicle stops, the visual
indication and audio warning stops after
a few seconds.
224
PARKING AID INDICATORS • As the distance to the object

decreases, the indicator blocks
illuminate and move toward the vehicle
icon.
• If there is no object detected, the
distance indicator blocks are gray.
Visual indication remains on when the
transmission is in reverse (R). When you
stop your vehicle, visual indication turns
off after four seconds.
If the system is not available, the side
distance indicator blocks do not display.
PARKING AIDS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
PARKING AIDS – INFORMATION

MESSAGES
E190459
If a fault is present in the parking aids, a
The system provides object distance warning message appears in the
indication through the information display. instrument cluster or the information and
entertainment display.
Message Action
Check Front Park Aid The system detects a condition that

requires service. Have your vehicle checked
Check Rear Park Aid The system detects a condition that
requires service. Have your vehicle checked
Front Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status.
Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status.
225
Rear View Camera
WHAT IS THE REAR VIEW Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
CAMERA adequate coverage and you might not see
some objects. In some vehicles, the guide
The rear view camera provides a video lines may disappear when you connect the
image of the area behind your vehicle when trailer tow connector.
the transmission is in reverse (R).
LOCATING THE REAR VIEW

REAR VIEW CAMERA
CAMERA
PRECAUTIONS
The rear view camera is in the spare tire
carrier.
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use REAR VIEW CAMERA GUIDE
it in conjunction with the interior and LINES
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
Note: Active guide lines and fixed guide
WARNING: Objects that are close lines are only available when the
to either corner of the bumper or under transmission is in reverse (R).
the bumper, might not be seen on the Note: The centerline is only available if the
screen due to the limited coverage of the active or fixed guide lines are on.
camera system.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle

slowly. Failure to follow this instruction
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Use caution when the

rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo
door is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image could be
incorrect. All guide lines disappear when
the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to
personal injury.
WARNING: Use caution when

turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
226
Rear View Camera
Use caution while reversing. Objects in the

red zone are closest to your vehicle and
objects in the green zone are farther away.
Objects get closer to your vehicle as they
move from the green zone to the yellow or
red zones. Use the side view mirrors and
rear view mirror to get better coverage on
both sides and rear of your vehicle.
REAR VIEW CAMERA OBJECT

DISTANCE INDICATORS
The system provides an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
highlight green, yellow, and red when the
parking aid sensors detect an object in the
coverage area.
REAR VIEW CAMERA

SETTINGS
ZOOMING THE REAR VIEW

E306774 CAMERA IN AND OUT
A. Active guide lines.

B. Centerline. WARNING: When manual zoom is
C. Fixed guide line: Green zone. on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
D. Fixed guide line: Yellow zone. when using the manual zoom feature.
E. Fixed guide line: Red zone.
F. Rear bumper. Selectable settings for this feature are
zoom in (+) and zoom out (-). Press the
Active guide lines only show with fixed symbol on the camera screen to change
guide lines. To use active guide lines, turn the view. The default setting is zoom off.
the steering wheel to point the guide lines
toward an intended path. If the steering This allows you to get a closer view of an
wheel position changes while reversing, object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
your vehicle might deviate from the image keeps the bumper in the image to
intended path. provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
The fixed and active guide lines fade in and (R).
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines do not Note: Manual zoom is only available when
display when the steering wheel position the transmission is in reverse (R).
is straight. Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
227
Rear View Camera
SWITCHING REAR VIEW CAMERA

DELAY ON AND OFF
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Rear View Camera.
4. Switch Rear View Camera Delay on or
off.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
228
360 Degree Camera (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE 360 DEGREE 360 DEGREE CAMERA

CAMERA PRECAUTIONS
The 360 degree camera system consists
of front, side and rear cameras. WARNING: The 360 degree
The 360 degree camera system: camera system still requires the driver
to use it in conjunction with looking out
• Allows you to see what is directly in
of the windows, and checking the interior
front of or behind your vehicle.
and exterior mirrors for maximum
• Provides a cross traffic view in front of coverage.
and behind your vehicle.
• Allows you to see a top-down view of WARNING: Objects that are close
the area outside your vehicle, including to either corner of the bumper or under
the blind spots. the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
The system provides visibility around your camera system.
vehicle to you in parking maneuvers such
as: WARNING: Use caution when
• Centering in a parking space. turning camera features on or off when
• Obstacles near your vehicle. the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
• Parallel parking.
WARNING: You are responsible for
HOW DOES THE 360 DEGREE controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
CAMERA WORK not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
The 360 degree camera system: to follow this instruction could result in
• Allows you to see what is directly in the loss of control of your vehicle,
front of or behind your vehicle. personal injury or death.
• Helps you when parallel parking and
centering in a parking space.
360 DEGREE CAMERA
• Provides a cross traffic view in front of
and behind your vehicle. LIMITATIONS
• Allows you to see a top-down view of Note: Use caution if a door is ajar. The 360
the area outside your vehicle, including degree camera could be out of position and
the blind spots and obstacles near your the image could be incorrect.
vehicle.
229
LOCATING THE 360 DEGREE

CAMERAS
Rear View Camera
The rear view camera is in the spare tire
carrier. It provides an image of the area
behind your vehicle.
Front View Camera

The front video camera is in the grille. It
provides a video image of the area in front
of your vehicle. To use the front camera
system, place the transmission in any gear
except reverse (R) and press the camera
icon in the corner of the screen.
Note: The front camera system switches
on when you are in mud/sand, rock crawl,
or baja mode.
Side View Camera

The side view cameras are on the outside
mirrors. They provide a video image of the
area on the sides of your vehicle to aid you E306774
when parking.
A Active guide lines.
360 DEGREE CAMERA GUIDE B Centerline.
LINES C Fixed guide line: Green zone.
Note: Active guide lines are only available D Fixed guide line: Yellow zone.
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
E Fixed guide line: Red zone.
F Rear bumper.
Active guide lines only show with fixed

guide lines. Turn the steering wheel to
point the guide lines toward an intended
path. If the steering wheel position changes
when reversing, your vehicle could deviate
from the intended path.
230
The fixed and active guide lines fade in and • Normal view.
out depending on the steering wheel • Normal view with 360.
position. The active guide lines do not
display when the steering wheel position • Split view.
is straight. Note: The rear view camera activates when
Objects in the red zone are closest to your you switch into reverse (R). Additional views
vehicle and objects in the green zone are are then accessible on the touchscreen.
farther away. Objects get closer to your When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D),
vehicle as they move from the green zone only the front images display when you
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side press the button. When in reverse (R), only
view mirrors and rear view mirror to get the rear images display when you press the
better coverage on both sides and rear of button.
your vehicle.
Note: The 360 degree camera system turns
Keep Out Zone off when your vehicle is in motion at low
speed, except when in reverse (R).
SWITCHING THE 360 DEGREE

CAMERA VIEW
Press to access the different
camera views.
E224483
Normal + 360 view: Contains

the normal camera view next to
E224783
a 360 degree camera view.
Normal view: Provides an
E310341
image of what is directly in front
E224784
The Keep Out Zone is represented by the of or behind your vehicle.
yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
Split view: Provides an
vehicle.
extended view of what is in front
E224785
of or behind your vehicle.
360 DEGREE CAMERA
Zooms in on the image.
SETTINGS
E224485
SWITCHING THE 360 DEGREE

CAMERA ON AND OFF
The 360 degree camera system
E332186
button is on the instrument
panel and allows you to toggle
through different camera views. The front
and rear cameras have multiple screens
which consist of:
231
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL SETTING THE CRUISE

CONTROL SPEED
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING: When you are going
Requirements downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The
Use cruise control when the vehicle speed system does not apply the brakes.
is greater than 15 mph in imperial units and
20 km/h in metric units. Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press either the Set+ or Set-
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL buttons to set the current speed.
ON AND OFF
WARNING: Do not use cruise

control on winding roads, in heavy traffic Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
or when the road surface is slippery. This Note: The indicator changes color in the
could result in loss of vehicle control, information display.
Changing the Set Speed
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. Press the Set+ button to
increase the set speed in small
Switching Cruise Control On increments. Press and hold the
Set+ button to accelerate. Release the
Press the button to activate the button when you have reached your
system. When the system preferred speed.
E332905
activates, the set speed is equal
to whichever is greater, the current vehicle Press the Set- button to
speed, or 15 mph when in imperial units or decrease the set speed in small
20 km/h when in metric units. If the speed increments. Press and hold the
is too low, or other conditions are not Set- button to decelerate. Release the
correct for cruise control activation, the button when you have reached your
system will instead enter standby mode. preferred speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
Switching Cruise Control Off accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
Press the button when the pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
system is active or switch the you previously set.
E332905
ignition off.
Note: When you switch cruise control off,
the set speed clears.
232
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
CANCELING THE SET SPEED

Press the button, or tap the
brake pedal to cancel the set
E308130
speed.
Note: The system remembers the set
speed.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED

Press the button.
E308130
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
system on.
E71340
233
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
HOW DOES ADAPTIVE CRUISE

CONTROL WORK WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has
Adaptive cruise control uses a radar sensor aftermarket electronic trailer brake
to adjust your vehicle speed to maintain a controls. Failure to follow this instruction
set gap between you and the vehicle in could result in the loss of control of your
front of you in the same lane. vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL other than those recommended because
PRECAUTIONS this can affect the normal operation of
the system. Failure to do so may result
in a loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The WARNING: Do not use the system
system is designed to be an aid and does with a snow plow blade installed.
drive with due care and attention. Failure WARNING: Do not use the system
to follow this instruction could result in in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
the loss of control of your vehicle, rain, spray or snow.
WARNING: Pay close attention to When Following a Vehicle

changing road conditions such as
entering or leaving a highway, on roads
with intersections or roundabouts, roads WARNING: When following a
without visible lanes of travel, roads that vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does
are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep not always decelerate quickly enough to
slopes. avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
WARNING: The system does not to follow this instruction could result in
control speed in low traction conditions personal injury or death.
or extremely steep slopes. The system
is designed to be an aid and does not Hilly Condition Usage
with due care and attention. Failure to You should select a lower gear when the
follow this instruction could result in system is active in situations such as
personal injury. prolonged downhill driving on steep slopes,
for example in mountainous areas. The
WARNING: The system is not a system needs additional engine braking in
crash warning or avoidance system. these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
it from overheating.
234
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the

system shuts down if it applies brakes for WARNING: The system does not
an extended period of time. This allows the detect oncoming vehicles in the same
brakes to cool. The system functions lane.
normally again after the brakes cool.
WARNING: The system may not
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
LIMITATIONS obstruction.
Sensor Limitations WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in
WARNING: On rare occasions, a false or missed warning.
detection issues can occur due to the
road infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these
cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening,
if required.
WARNING: If the system

malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
WARNING: Large contrasts in E327935

outside lighting can limit sensor
performance. The camera is mounted on the windshield
behind the interior mirror.
WARNING: The system only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning
or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this
or death.

detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
E327936
detect pedestrians or objects in the road. The radar sensor is in the lower grille.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.
235
Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free of Detection issues can occur:
dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors, aftermarket lights, additional
paint or plastic coatings could also degrade
sensor performance.
A message displays if something obstructs
the camera or the sensor. When something
blocks the sensor, the system cannot
detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function. See Adaptive Cruise Control –
Information Messages (page 240).
The radar sensor has a limited field of
view. It may not detect vehicles at all or
detect a vehicle later than expected in
some situations. The lead vehicle image
does not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
E71621
A When driving on a different line

than the vehicle in front.
B With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
C There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
In these cases, the system may brake late

or unexpectedly.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone could change. This
could result in a missed or false vehicle
detection.
236
Optimal system performance requires a Automatic Cancellation or

clear view of the road by the Deactivation
windshield-mounted camera.
The system may cancel if:
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The tires lose traction.
• The camera is blocked.
• You apply the parking brake.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
• Your vehicle speed falls significantly
conditions.
below 15 mph or 20 km/h.
• There are bad weather conditions.
The system may cancel and set the parking
brake if:
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE • You unbuckle the seatbelt and open
CRUISE CONTROL ON AND OFF the driver door after you stop your
vehicle.
The cruise controls are on the steering The system may turn off or prevent
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 232). activating when requested if:
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control • The vehicle has a blocked sensor.
On • The brake temperature is too high.
Press the button to activate the • There is a failure in the system or a
system. When the system related system.
E144529
activates, the set speed is equal
to the current vehicle speed. If the speed SETTING THE ADAPTIVE
is too low, or other conditions are not
correct for adaptive cruise control CRUISE CONTROL SPEED
activation, the system enters standby
mode. Drive to the speed you prefer.
Note: The minimum set speed is 15 mph or Press the toggle button upward
20 km/h. or downward to set the current
speed.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Off The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Press the button when the
system is in standby mode or
E144529
switch the ignition off.
Note: When you switch the system off, the
set speed clears.
E255686
237
A vehicle image illuminates if there is a

vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
Manually Changing the Set Speed

Press and release the toggle
button upward to increase the
set speed in small increments.
Press and hold the toggle button upward

to increase the set speed in large
increments. Release the button when you
reach the speed you prefer.
Press and release the toggle
button downward to decrease
the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the toggle button

downward to decrease the set speed in
large increments. Release the button when
you reach the speed you prefer. E348855
Press the accelerator or brake pedal until The selected gap appears in the
you reach the speed you prefer. Press the instrument cluster display as shown by the
toggle button upward or downward to bars in the image.
select the current speed as the set speed.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
The system may apply the brakes to slow and therefore, the distance adjusts with your
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set vehicle speed.
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
active. appropriate to the driving conditions.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE

CRUISE CONTROL GAP
Note: A minimum vehicle speed of 15 mph
or 20 km/h must be met, before you can set
the gap.
Press the button to cycle
through the four gap settings.
238
If the system determines that its maximum

Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the
Graphic Gap Distance Dynamic instrument cluster display and an indicator
Display, Behavior flashes when the system continues to
Bars Indic- brake. Take immediate action.
ated
Between
Vehicles CANCELING THE SET SPEED
1 Closest. Sport. Press the button or tap the brake
2 Close. Normal. pedal.
3 Medium. Normal. The set speed does not erase.

4 Far. Comfort.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting. Press the button.
Following a Vehicle
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the Your vehicle speed returns to the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in previously set speed and gap setting. The
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts set speed displays continuously in the
to maintain the gap setting. information display when the system is
active.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a turn signal lamp, adaptive Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
cruise control may provide a small, the set speed and intend to return to it.
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap OVERRIDING THE SET SPEED
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed. WARNING: If you override the
• The vehicle in front of you moves out system by pressing the accelerator
of the lane you are in. pedal, it does not automatically apply
the brakes to maintain a gap from any
• You set a new gap distance. vehicle ahead.
The system applies the brakes to slow
down your vehicle to maintain a safe gap When you press the accelerator pedal, you
distance from the vehicle in front of you. override the set speed and gap distance.
The system only applies limited braking. Use the accelerator pedal to intentionally
You can override the system by applying exceed the set speed limit.
the brakes.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
239
When you override the system, the green Use the touchscreen to select the
indicator illuminates and the vehicle icon following:
does not appear in the instrument cluster 1. Select Settings.
display.
2. Select Driver Assist..
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle 3. Select Cruise Control.
speed decreases to the set speed, or a 4. Select Normal.
lower speed if following a slower vehicle. The cruise control indicator
replaces the adaptive cruise
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL E71340 control indicator if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
INDICATORS not display, and the system does not
respond to lead vehicles. Automatic
Illuminates when you switch
braking remains active to maintain set
adaptive cruise control on. The
E144529 speed. The system remembers the last
color of the indicator changes to
setting when you start your vehicle.
indicate the system status.
White indicates the system is on but

inactive. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
Green indicates that you set the speed and
– TROUBLESHOOTING
the system is active.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL –
SWITCHING FROM ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL TO CRUISE Note: Depending on your vehicle options
CONTROL and instrument cluster type, not all
messages display or are available.
Note: The system could abbreviate or
WARNING: Normal cruise control shorten certain messages depending upon
will not brake when your vehicle is which cluster type you have.
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
Message Action
Adaptive Cruise A malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging.

Malfunction
Front Sensor Not Aligned Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
Adaptive Cruise Not Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.
Available
240
Message Action
Adaptive Cruise Not You have a blocked radar because of poor radar visibility due
Available Sensor to inclement weather or ice, mud, or water in front of the radar.
Blocked See Manual You can typically clean the sensor to resolve this.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a
blockage warning with no actual block. This happens, for
example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments.
A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you
restart your vehicle.
Normal Cruise Active You have selected normal cruise control. The system does
Adaptive Braking Off not brake or react to traffic.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver Displays when the adaptive cruise control is going to cancel
Resume Control and you must take control.
Adaptive Cruise Speed Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
Too Low to Activate adaptive cruise control and there is no lead vehicle in range.
241
WHAT IS G.O.A.T. MODE Note: Your vehicle has diagnostic checks

that continuously monitor all systems for
CONTROL proper operation. If a mode is unavailable
due to a system fault, your vehicle defaults
Your vehicle has several goes over to normal mode and the driveline remains
any-type of terrain (G.O.A.T.) modes that in the four-wheel drive setting that you last
you can select for different driving selected prior to the system fault.
conditions. Depending on the mode that
you select, the system adjusts various
vehicle settings. SELECTING A G.O.A.T. MODE
HOW DOES G.O.A.T. MODE

CONTROL WORK
Each selectable mode changes various
electronic and mechanical settings within
your vehicle to tailor its performance and
driving characteristics to on-road or
off-road driving conditions. The system
may alter steering feel and effort, traction
control, stability control, chassis controls,
powertrain response, transmission shift
points, four-wheel driveline setting,
exhaust noise level and suspension
dampening to a pre-determined setting,
depending upon the mode that you select.
Your vehicle reverts to normal mode each
time it is started. If you switch your vehicle
off in a drive mode other than normal E324543
mode at startup, the instrument cluster
screen displays a pop-up asking if you To select a mode, use the console
would like to return to your last used mode. mounted controller.
If you select yes to the pop-up, your vehicle Note: Mode changes may not be available
returns to the last selected mode and the when the ignition is off or when the engine
default four-wheel driveline setting is not running.
associated with that mode. If you select
Note: Button icons may vary.
no, your vehicle remains in normal mode
and the default four-wheel driveline setting
associated with that mode. If you do not
select yes or no, the pop up message times
out, your vehicle remains in normal mode,
and the four-wheel driveline setting
remains in its last used setting.
242
Note: To optimize off-road driving ECO

performance, the system disables the brake
over accelerator feature on off-road modes, For efficient driving. This mode
including mud/ruts, sand, baja and rock helps deliver maximum fuel
E295413
crawl modes. A message displays in the efficiency and helps to increase
instrument cluster when you select an driving range.
off-road mode. See G.O.A.T. Mode Control Two-wheel drive high is the default
– Information Messages (page 246). Brake four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive
over accelerator enables when an off-road low is not selectable in eco mode.
mode is exited or during the next ignition
key-cycle. Return to on-road modes, normal, The front electronic locking differential is
eco, sport or slippery, when driving on not available in eco mode. The rear
regular roads. See Brake Over Accelerator electronic locking differential is available
(page 194). below 25 mph (40 km/h).
The stabilizer bar disconnect is not
G.O.A.T. MODES available in eco mode.
BAJA MUD/RUTS
For high speed off-road driving. E296606 For off-road driving. This mode
Baja mode optimizes the throttle enhances vehicle performance
E225314
control for better response and to traverse muddy, rutted or
torque delivery. uneven terrains.
Four-wheel drive high is the default Four-wheel drive high is the default
four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive
auto is not selectable in baja mode. low is selectable in mud/rut mode.
The front electronic locking differential is The front electronic locking differential is
available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when
in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic
locking differential is available at any locking differential is engaged when in
speed in all selectable four-wheel drive mud/ruts mode and is available at any
modes. speed in all selectable four-wheel drive
The stabilizer bar disconnect is available modes.
in four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive The stabilizer bar disconnect is available
low. in four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive
Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard low.
pavement. This could produce some Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard
vibration, driveline bind up, and potential pavement. This could produce some
excessive tire and vehicle wear depending vibration, driveline bind up, and potential
on the four-wheel drive mode selection. excessive tire and vehicle wear depending
on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
243
NORMAL Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard

pavement. This could produce some
For everyday driving. This mode vibration, driveline bind up, and potential
is the perfect balance of
E317283
excessive tire and vehicle wear depending
excitement, comfort and on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
convenience. This is the default mode after
each ignition cycle, the driveline settings
SAND
remain the same prior to the ignition cycle.
Two-wheel drive high is the default For off-road driving on soft, dry
four-wheel drive mode. All four-wheel drive sand or deep snow. This mode
E332185
modes are selectable when in normal may help get your vehicle
mode. unstuck from deep snow or sand.
The front electronic locking differential is Four-wheel drive high is the default
available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive
in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic low is selectable in sand mode.
locking differential is available below The front electronic locking differential is
25 mph (40 km/h). available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when
Note: The rear electronic locking differential in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic
is available at any speed when in four-wheel locking differential is engaged when in
drive low. sand mode and is available at any speed
in all selectable four-wheel drive modes.
The stabilizer bar disconnect is available
in four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive The stabilizer bar disconnect is available
low. in four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive
low.
ROCK CRAWL Note: The front camera system switches
on when you are in sand mode and your
For off-road driving and speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h). If you
optimum rock-climbing ability.
E322413 exceed 15 mph (24 km/h), the camera shuts
Rock crawl mode optimizes the off until your vehicle speed is below 12 mph
throttle and transmission response to (20 km/h).
provide you additional control of your
Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard
vehicle.
Four-wheel drive low is the only four-wheel vibration, driveline bind up, and potential
drive mode selectable in rock crawl, the excessive tire and vehicle wear depending
system prompts you to put your vehicle on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
into four-wheel drive low upon selection. Note: Sand mode is not intended for use
The front electronic locking differential is on firm, slippery surfaces, such as paved
available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when roads covered with snow or ice. For slippery,
in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic firm surfaces use slippery mode.
locking differential is engaged when in rock
crawl mode and is available at any speed.
The stabilizer bar disconnects when in rock
crawl mode.
244
SLIPPERY - 4X4 WITH PART TIME The front electronic locking differential is
ENGAGEMENT available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when
in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic
For less than ideal road locking differential is available below
E295414
conditions such as snow or ice 25 mph (40 km/h).
covered roads. This mode can
Note: The rear electronic locking differential
be used for crossing terrain where a firm
is available at any speed when in four-wheel
surface is covered with loose, wet or
drive low.
slippery material. Slippery mode lowers
throttle response and optimizes shifting The stabilizer bar disconnect is not
for slippery surfaces. available in slippery mode.
Four-wheel drive high is the default Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard
four-wheel drive mode. All four-wheel drive pavement. This could produce some
modes are selectable in slippery mode. vibration, driveline bind up, and potential
The front electronic locking differential is on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when
in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic SPORT - 4X4 WITH PART TIME
locking differential is available below
ENGAGEMENT
25 mph (40 km/h).
Note: The rear electronic locking differential For sporty driving with improved
is available at any speed when in four-wheel performance handling and
drive low. E246593 response. This mode increases
accelerator pedal response and provides
a sportier steering feel. The powertrain
available in slippery mode.
system holds onto lower gears longer,
Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard helping your vehicle accelerate faster.
Two-wheel drive high is the default
vibration, driveline bind up, and potential
four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive
low is not selectable in sport mode.
on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
The front electronic locking differential is
SLIPPERY - ADVANCED 4X4 WITH not available in sport mode. The rear
4A MODE electronic locking differential is available
For less than ideal road
conditions such as snow or ice
E295414 available in sport mode.
covered roads. This mode can
be used for crossing terrain where a firm
surface is covered with loose, wet or
slippery material. Slippery mode lowers
throttle response and optimizes shifting
for slippery surfaces.
Four-wheel drive auto is the default
four-wheel drive mode. Two-wheel drive
high is not selectable in slippery mode.
245
SPORT - ADVANCED 4X4 WITH 4A The stabilizer bar disconnect is not

MODE available in sport mode.
For sporty driving with improved

performance handling and G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL –
E246593 response. This mode increases TROUBLESHOOTING
accelerator pedal response and provides
a sportier steering feel. The powertrain
system holds onto lower gears longer,
G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL –
helping your vehicle accelerate faster. WARNING LAMPS
Four-wheel drive auto is the default Some drive modes reduce
four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive traction and stability control
low is not selectable in sport mode. E130458 performance and the indicator
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
The front electronic locking differential is
not available in sport mode. The rear
electronic locking differential is available
G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Changing to Normal Drive Mode for Displays when the system switches to
Improved Towing Performance normal mode to support towing perform-
ance.
Drive Mode Not Available Displays when you select a drive mode that
is not available. Select a different drive
mode.
Drive Mode Preconditions Not Met Displays when you select a drive mode that
is not available. Check the four-wheel drive
mode, electronic locking differential and
stabilizer bar before selecting a drive mode.
Drive Mode Selection Reduced due to Displays when you select a drive mode that
System Fault is not available. Have the system checked.
Off-Road Use Only Displays when you select an off-road drive
mode.
246
Message Details
Selected 4x4 Mode Not Available in Current Displays when you select a four-wheel drive
Drive Mode mode that is not available in the current
drive mode. Select an available four-wheel
drive mode.
Selected Locking Differential Not Available Displays when you select an electronic
in Current Drive Mode locking differential that is not available in
the current drive mode. Select an available
electric locking differential.
Sta-Bar Disconnect Not Available In Displays when you attempt to disconnect
Selected Drive Mode the stabilizer bar in the current drive mode.
Select a different drive mode to disconnect
the stabilizer bar.
247
G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL –

Why did the system default to normal
mode?
If a mode is unavailable due to a
system fault, it defaults to normal
mode and the driveline settings remain
the same as prior to the system fault.
248
Lane Keeping System (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE LANE KEEPING

SYSTEM WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
The lane keeping system alerts you by structures or objects. This can result in
providing temporary steering assistance a false or missed warning.
or steering wheel vibration when it detects
an unintended lane departure. WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
HOW DOES THE LANE limit sensor performance.
KEEPING SYSTEM WORK
The lane keeping system uses a forward operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
looking camera mounted on the windshield Keep the windshield free from
to monitor vehicle movement within the obstruction.
travel lane.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
When the camera detects a drift out of the immediate area surrounding the sensor,
travel lane, the lane keeping system alerts have your vehicle checked as soon as
the driver by vibrating the steering wheel, possible.
or aids the driver by providing a small
steering input to move the vehicle back WARNING: The system may not
into the travel lane. correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
The driver can select one of three modes: with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
• Alert (If Equipped)
• Aid WARNING: Large contrasts in
• Alert + Aid outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for The lane keeping system only operates
controlling your vehicle at all times. The when the vehicle speed is greater than
system is designed to be an aid and does 40 mph (64 km/h).
not relieve you of your responsibility to The system works when the camera can
drive with due care and attention. Failure detect at least one lane marking.
the loss of control of your vehicle, The lane keeping system may not correctly
personal injury or death. operate in any of the following conditions:
• The lane keeping system does not
WARNING: The system will not detect at least one lane marking.
operate if the sensor cannot track the • You switch the turn signal on.
road lane markings.
249
• You apply direct steering, accelerate SWITCHING THE LANE

fast or brake hard.
KEEPING SYSTEM MODE
• The vehicle speed is less than 40 mph
(64 km/h). The lane keeping system has different
• The anti-lock brake, stability control or settings that you can view or adjust using
traction control system activates. the information display.
• The lane is too narrow. The system stores the last known selection
• Something is obscuring the camera or for each of these settings. You do not need
it is unable to detect the lane markings to readjust your settings each time you
due to environment, traffic or vehicle switch on the system.
conditions. To change the lane keeping system mode,
The lane keeping system may not correct use the touchscreen:
lane positioning in any of the following 1. Select Driver Assistance.
conditions:
2. Select Lane Keeping System.
• High winds.
3. Select Mode.
• Uneven road surfaces.
4. Select a setting.
• Heavy or uneven loads.
Note: The system remembers the last
• Incorrect tire pressure. setting when you start your vehicle. If the
system detects a MyKey™, the mode is set
SWITCHING THE LANE to alert.
KEEPING SYSTEM ON AND
OFF ALERT MODE
To activate the lane keeping WHAT IS ALERT MODE

system, press the button on the
E308131
steering wheel. Alert mode vibrates the steering wheel
when it detects an unintended lane
To deactivate the lane keeping system, departure.
press the button again.
Note: When switching the system on or off
a message appears in the information and
entertainment display to show the status.
Note: The system stores the on or off
setting until manually changed, unless it
detects a MyKey™. If the system detects a
MyKey™, it defaults to the last setting for
that MyKey™.
Note: If the system detects a MyKey™,
pressing the button does not affect the on
or off status of the system. You can only
change the mode and intensity settings.
250
HOW DOES ALERT MODE WORK HOW DOES AID MODE WORK
E165515 E165516
When in alert mode, the lane keeping The lane keeping system aids you when
system alerts you by vibrating the steering an unintentional lane departure occurs.
wheel. The intensity of the vibration is set The system provides a small steering input
through the lane keeping system menu. to move the vehicle towards the center of
the lane.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL VIBRATION INTENSITY ALERT AND AID MODE
To change the steering wheel vibration
intensity, use the touchscreen: WHAT IS ALERT AND AID MODE
1. Select Driver Assistance. Alert and aid mode uses multiple features
2. Select Lane Keeping System. to keep you in your lane. The system first
provides a small steering input to bring
3. Select Intensity.
your vehicle back towards the center of
4. Select a setting. the lane. If your vehicle moves too far out
of the center of the lane the system alerts
AID MODE you with vibration in the steering wheel.
WHAT IS AID MODE

Aid mode provides temporary steering
assistance toward the center of the lane.
251
HOW DOES ALERT AND AID MODE LANE KEEPING SYSTEM

WORK
INDICATORS
E165517
A Alert.
B Aid. E339671
The lane keeping system detects a lane If you switch the lane keeping system on,
departure and provides aid when the a graphic with lane markings appears in
vehicles enters B and applies the the information display.
additional alert warning if A is entered.
When you switch the system off, the lane
marking graphics do not display.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may
still display if adaptive cruise control is
enabled.
While the lane keeping system is on, the
color of the lane markings change to
indicate the system status.
Gray Green Yellow Red
Indicates that the Indicates that the Indicates that the Indicates that the
system is tempor- system is available system is providing system is providing
arily unavailable to or ready to provide a or has just provided or has just provided
provide a warning or warning or interven- a lane keeping aid a lane keeping alert
intervention on the tion on the indicated intervention. warning.
indicated side. side.
252
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service The system has malfunctioned. Have your
Required vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Front Camera Temporarily Not Available The system has detected a condition that
has caused the system to be temporarily
unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen The system has detected a condition that
requires you to clean the windshield in order
for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Malfunction Service Required The system has malfunctioned. Have your
Keep Hands on Steering Wheel The system requests that you keep your
hands on the steering wheel.
253
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Why is the feature not available (lane markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle speed is less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings for an extended interval of time.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example, in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings, or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example, partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
You have not calibrated the camera after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight or on uneven roads.
254
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid, or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds are present.

There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy, uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
You changed the tires or modified the suspension.
255
Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped)
WHAT IS BLIND SPOT

INFORMATION SYSTEM WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
Blind spot information system detects conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
vehicles that may have entered the blind rain and spray. Always drive with due
spot zone. care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
HOW DOES BLIND SPOT Note: Blind spot information system does
INFORMATION SYSTEM WORK not prevent contact with other vehicles. It
does not detect parked vehicles,
Blind spot information system uses pedestrians, animals or other infrastructure.
sensors on both sides of your vehicle,
detecting rearward from the exterior
mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m)
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
beyond the rear bumper. The detection SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
area extends to approximately 59 ft (18 m)
beyond the rear bumper when the vehicle Blind spot information system does not
speed is greater than 30 mph (48 km/h) operate in park (P) or reverse (R).
to alert you of faster approaching vehicles. The system may not alert you if a vehicle
quickly passes through the detection zone.

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS -
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Blind spot information system turns on
when all the following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
E255695
6 mph (10 km/h).
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not use the blind

spot information system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The
blind spot information system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
256
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION LOCATING THE BLIND SPOT

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS - INFORMATION SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SENSORS
Blind spot information system turns on
when all the following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
6 mph (10 km/h).
SWITCHING BLIND SPOT

INFORMATION SYSTEM ON
AND OFF E339014
To switch blind spot information system The sensors are behind the rear fascia
on or off, use the touchscreen: panel.
1. Press Features on the touchscreen. Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
2. Press Driver Assistance. and large accumulations of dirt.
3. Press Blind Spot Information System. Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
4. Switch the feature on or off.
Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause
When you switch blind spot information false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor.
system off, a warning lamp illuminates and We recommend switching the feature off
a message displays. When you switch the when using a bike or cargo rack.
system on or off, the alert indicators flash
twice. Note: Blocked sensors may affect system
accuracy.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle. If the sensors become blocked, a message
appears in the instrument cluster display.
To permanently switch the system off, See Blind Spot Information System –
contact an authorized dealer. Information Messages (page 258). The
alert indicators illuminate but the system
does not alert you.
257
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION When blind spot information

system detects a vehicle, an
E249861
SYSTEM INDICATORS alert indicator illuminates in the
exterior mirror on the side the approaching
vehicle is coming from. If you turn the turn
signal on for that side of your vehicle, the
alert indicator flashes.
E142442
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Blind Spot System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Blind Spot Not Available Sensor Blocked Something is blocking the sensors. Clean
See Manual the sensors.
Blind Spot Alert Deactivated Trailer The system automatically turns off and
Attached displays this message when you connect a
trailer to the vehicle that does not have a
trailer blind spot system or when you switch
the trailer blind spot system off through the
touchscreen.
258
Cross Traffic Alert (If Equipped)
WHAT IS CROSS TRAFFIC CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT

ALERT PRECAUTIONS
The system alerts you of vehicles
approaching from the sides behind your WARNING: Do not use the cross
vehicle when you shift into reverse (R). traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
HOW DOES CROSS TRAFFIC looking over your shoulder before
reversing out of a parking space. The
ALERT WORK cross traffic alert system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Cross Traffic Alert detects vehicles that
approach at a speed between 4–37 mph WARNING: The system may not
(6–60 km/h). Coverage decreases when operate properly during severe weather
the sensors are partially, mostly or fully conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
obstructed. rain and spray. Always drive with due
care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT

LIMITATIONS
Cross Traffic Alert may not correctly
E142440 operate when any of the following occur:
The sensor on the left-hand side is only • Something is blocking the sensors.
partially obstructed and zone coverage on • Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
the right-hand side is maximized. are obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds less than
4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• Your vehicle speed is greater than
7 mph (12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
E142441
SWITCHING CROSS TRAFFIC

Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on ALERT ON AND OFF
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and
zone coverage on that side is severely To switch cross traffic alert on or off use
reduced. the touchscreen.
Note: Slowly reversing helps increase the 1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
coverage area and effectiveness. 2. Press Driver Assistance.
259
3. Switch Cross Traffic Alert on or off. Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause
Note: The system switches on every time false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor.
you switch the ignition on. To permanently We recommend switching the feature off
switch the system off, contact an authorized when using a bike or cargo rack.
dealer. Note: Blocked sensors may affect system
accuracy.
LOCATING THE CROSS If something is blocking the sensors, a
TRAFFIC ALERT SENSORS message may appear in the information
display when you shift into reverse (R).
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT

INDICATORS
When the cross traffic alert
detects an approaching vehicle,
E268294
a tone sounds, a warning lamp

illuminates in the relevant exterior mirror
and arrows appear in the information
display to show which side the vehicle is
approaching from.
E339014
If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp
The sensors are behind the rear fascia illuminates in the instrument cluster and
panel. a message appears in the information
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice display. Have your vehicle checked as soon
and large accumulations of dirt. as possible.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper Note: If arrows do not display, a message
stickers, repair compound or other objects. appears in the information display.
Note: In some conditions, the system could
alert you, even when there is nothing in the
detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing further away from your vehicle.
260
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT – TROUBLESHOOTING
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Cross Traffic Alert Displays instead of indication arrows when

the system detects a vehicle. Check for
approaching traffic.
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system
See Manual sensors. Clean the sensors. If the message
continues to appear, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System Fault The system has malfunctioned. Have your
Cross Traffic Alert Deactivated Trailer Displays if you attach a trailer to your
Attached vehicle.
261
WHAT IS PRE-COLLISION Note: If you perceive pre-collision assist

alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
ASSIST then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
although the manufacturer recommends
Pre-collision assist detects and warns of using the highest sensitivity setting where
approaching hazards in the roadway. If possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
your vehicle is rapidly approaching another lead to fewer and later system warnings.
stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the
same direction as yours, or a pedestrian Each system has various levels of
within your driving path, the system detection capabilities. See Pre-Collision
provides multiple levels of assistance to Assist Limitations (page 263).
help avoid a collision.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
HOW DOES PRE-COLLISION PRECAUTIONS
ASSIST WORK
The system warns the driver of potential WARNING: You are responsible for
hazards by providing three levels of controlling your vehicle at all times. The
assistance. system is designed to be an aid and does
drive with due care and attention. Failure
E156130 the loss of control of your vehicle,
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching personal injury or death.
potential hazards the system provides the
following levels of functionality: WARNING: The system does not
detect vehicles that are driving in a
1. Alert. different direction, cyclists or animals.
2. Brake Support. Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
3. Automatic Emergency Braking.
the loss of control of your vehicle,
Alert: When active, a flashing personal injury or death.
E329466 visual warning appears and an
audible warning tone sounds. WARNING: The system does not
Brake Support: The system is designed operate during hard acceleration or
to help reduce the impact speed by steering. Failure to take care may lead
preparing the brakes for rapid braking. The to a crash or personal injury.
system does not automatically apply the
brakes. If you press the brake pedal, the WARNING: The system may fail or
system could apply additional braking up operate with reduced function during
to maximum braking force, even if you cold and severe weather conditions.
lightly press the brake pedal. Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can
adversely affect the system. Keep the
Automatic Emergency Braking: front camera and radar free of snow and
Automatic emergency braking may ice. Failure to take care may result in the
activate if the system determines that a loss of control of your vehicle, serious
collision is imminent. personal injury or death.
262
Note: Brake support and automatic

WARNING: Take additional care if emergency braking are active at speeds up
your vehicle is heavily loaded or you are to 75 mph (120 km/h). If the vehicle has a
towing a trailer. These conditions could radar sensor included with adaptive cruise
result in reduced performance of this control, then brake support and automatic
system. Failure to follow this instruction emergency braking are active up to the
could result in the loss of control of your maximum speed of the vehicle.
vehicle, personal injury or death. Pedestrian Detection Limitations
WARNING: The system cannot Pedestrian detection is active at speeds
help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
this system to replace driver judgment
and the need to maintain a safe distance Pedestrian detection operates optimally
and speed. when detected hazards are clearly
identifiable. System performance may
WARNING: In situations where the reduce in situations where pedestrians are
vehicle camera has limited detection running, partly obscured, have a complex
capability, this may reduce system background, or cannot be distinguished
performance. These situations include from a group.
but are not limited to direct or low
Intersection Assist (If Equipped)
sunlight, vehicles at night without tail
lights, unconventional vehicle types, If your vehicle comes with a radar sensor
pedestrians with complex backgrounds, included in adaptive cruise control, the
running pedestrians, partly obscured pre-collision assist system may operate in
pedestrians, or pedestrians that the a scenario where you are turning across an
system cannot distinguish from a group. oncoming vehicle's path. Detection of
Failure to take care may result in the loss vehicles driving in an oncoming direction
of control of your vehicle, serious is active if your vehicle is driving at speeds
personal injury or death. up to 19 mph (30 km/h).
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
LIMITATIONS
Pre-collision assist depends on the
detection ability of its camera and sensors.
Any obstructions or damage to these areas
can limit detection or prevent the system
from functioning. See Locating the
Pre-Collision Assist Sensors (page 264).
The system is active at speeds above E309750
3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: The pre-collision assist system
automatically disables when you select
four-wheel drive low, manually disable
AdvanceTrac™, or select rock crawl mode.
263
SWITCHING PRE-COLLISION LOCATING THE PRE-

ASSIST ON AND OFF COLLISION ASSIST SENSORS
To switch the system on or off, use the
touchscreen:
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist

Settings
You can adjust the following settings by
using the touchscreen controls in the
pre-collision assist menu:
• Change alert and distance alert
E327933
sensitivity to one of three possible
settings.
1 Camera.
• Switch distance indication and alert on
or off. 2 Radar sensor (if equipped).
• If required, switch automatic If a message regarding a blocked sensor
emergency braking on or off. or camera appears in the information
• If required, switch the entire display, something is obstructing the radar
pre-collision assist feature on or off. signals or camera images. If your vehicle
• If required, switch evasive steering has a radar sensor, it is behind the fascia
assist on or off. cover in the center of the lower grille. With
a blocked sensor or camera, the system
Note: Automatic emergency braking and may not function, or performance may
evasive steering turn on every time you reduce. See Pre-Collision Assist –
switch the ignition on. Information Messages (page 267).
Note: If your vehicle has a radar sensor, we
recommend that you switch the system off
if you install a snow plow or similar object
DISTANCE INDICATION
in such a way that it may block the radar
sensor. Your vehicle remembers the selected WHAT IS DISTANCE INDICATION
setting across key cycles.
Distance indication displays the gap
Note: If you switch automatic emergency between your vehicle and the vehicle
braking off, evasive steering assist switches ahead of you.
off.
Note: The graphic does not display if you
switch on cruise control or adaptive cruise
control.
264
Vehicle Speed System Sensit- Distance Indic- Distance Gap Time Gap
ivity ator Color
62 mph Normal. Gray. Greater than Greater than 0.9

(100 km/h). 82 ft (25 m). seconds.
Yellow. 56–82 ft 0.6-0.9
(17–25 m). seconds.
Red. Less than 56 ft Less than 0.6
(17 m). seconds.
265
SWITCHING DISTANCE AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY

INDICATION ON AND OFF
BRAKING
touchscreen: WHAT IS AUTOMATIC
1. Press Features on the touchscreen. EMERGENCY BRAKING
2. Press Driver Assistance. Automatic emergency braking may
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist. activate if the system determines that a
4. Switch Distance Indication on or off. collision is imminent. The system may help
reduce impact damage to avoid the crash
completely.
DISTANCE INDICATION
INDICATOR Automatic emergency braking is only
available up to certain speeds. See
The indicator displays the time gap Pre-Collision Assist Limitations (page
between your vehicle and vehicles traveling 263).
in the same direction ahead of you.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC
EMERGENCY BRAKING ON AND
OFF
touchscreen:
3. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
4. Press Auto Emergency Braking.
EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST
WHAT IS EVASIVE STEERING

ASSIST
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching a road
user, evasive steering assist helps you steer
E254791 around the road user.
266
After you turn the steering wheel in an Note: Evasive steering assist does not
attempt to avoid a crash with the road activate if the distance to the road user
user, the system applies additional steering ahead is too small and the system cannot
torque to help you steer around the road avoid a crash.
user. After you pass the road user, the Note: Evasive steering does not activate
system applies steering torque when you with cyclists or pedestrians.
turn the steering wheel to steer back into
the lane. The system deactivates after you
fully pass the road user. SWITCHING EVASIVE STEERING
ASSIST ON AND OFF
Note: Road users are defined as another
stationary vehicle in the same lane or a To switch the system on or off, use the
vehicle traveling in the same lane in the touchscreen:
same direction as you. See Pre-Collision
Assist Precautions (page 262). 1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST 3. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
LIMITATIONS 4. Switch Evasive Steering on or off.
Evasive steering assist only activates when Note: If you switch automatic emergency
all the following occur: braking off, evasive steering assist turns off.
• Automatic emergency braking and Note: Automatic emergency braking and
evasive steering assist are on. evasive steering assist turn on every time
• The system detects a road user ahead you switch the ignition on.
and starts to apply the brakes.
• You significantly turn the steering PRE-COLLISION ASSIST –
wheel to steer around a road user. TROUBLESHOOTING
Note: Evasive steering assist does not
automatically steer around a road user. If PRE-COLLISION ASSIST –
you do not turn the steering wheel, evasive
WARNING LAMPS
steering assist does not activate.
A telltale illuminates in the
E335612
cluster to indicate if the system
is disabled or unavailable.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor You have a blocked sensor due to bad
Blocked weather, ice, mud or water in front of the
radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available A fault with the system has occurred. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
267
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST – Radar is out of alignment due to a front

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS end impact.
Have your vehicle serviced to have the
Camera Troubleshooting radar checked for proper coverage and
The windshield in front of the camera operation.
is dirty or obstructed.
Clean the outside of the windshield in
front of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera
is clean, but the message remains in
the instrument cluster display.
Wait a short time. It could take several
minutes for the camera to detect that
there is no obstruction.
Radar Troubleshooting (If Equipped)

The surface of the radar in the grille is
dirty or obstructed.
Clean the grille surface in front of the
radar or remove the object causing the
obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is
clean, but the message remains in the
instrument cluster display.
Wait a short time. It could take several
minutes for the radar to detect that
there is no obstruction.
Heavy rain, spray or fog is interfering
with the radar signals.
The pre-collision assist system is
temporarily disabled. Pre-collision
assist reactivates a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
Swirling water or snow or ice on the
surface of the road could interfere with
the radar signals.
The pre-collision assist system is
temporarily disabled. Pre-collision
assist reactivates a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
268
Driver Alert (If Equipped)
WHAT IS DRIVER ALERT

WARNING: Certain driving styles
Driver alert alerts you if it determines that may result in the system warning you
you are becoming drowsy or if your driving even if you are not feeling tired.
deteriorates.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
HOW DOES DRIVER ALERT function. Rain, snow and spray can all
WORK limit sensor performance.
Driver Alert calculates your alertness level WARNING: The system will not
based on your driving behavior in relation operate if the sensor cannot track the
to the lane markings and other factors road lane markings.
through use of the front camera sensor
behind the interior mirror. WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.

correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.

operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
E309385 obstruction.
Note: If something is blocking the camera

DRIVER ALERT PRECAUTIONS or damaged the windshield, Driver Alert may
not function.
WARNING: You are responsible for DRIVER ALERT LIMITATIONS

controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does Driver alert may not function correctly if:
drive with due care and attention. Failure • The sensor cannot track the road lane
to follow this instruction could result in markings.
the loss of control of your vehicle, • Your vehicle's speed is less than
personal injury or death. approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
WARNING: Take regular rest

breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for
the system to warn you.
269
Driver Alert (If Equipped)
SWITCHING DRIVER ALERT ON DRIVER ALERT INDICATORS

AND OFF
System Warnings
To switch driver alert on or off, use the The warning system has two stages:
touchscreen:
1. A temporary warning is issued to advise
1. Press Features on the touchscreen. you to take a rest. This message only
2. Press Driver Assistance. appears for a short time.
3. Switch Driver Alert on or off. 2. If you do not rest and the system
Note: The system remains on or off continues to detect that your driving
depending on the last selection. deteriorates, it issues a further warning.
This remains in the instrument cluster
Resetting Driver Alert display until you cancel it.
Note: The system does not warn you if the
You can reset the system by either: vehicle speed falls below approximately
• Switching the ignition off and on. 40 mph (65 km/h).
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver door.
DRIVER ALERT – TROUBLESHOOTING
DRIVER ALERT – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Driver Alert Warning Rest Now Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested Take a rest soon.
270
Load Carrying
LOAD CARRYING
PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification
Keep your loaded vehicle weight label vehicle weight limits can
within its design rating capability, adversely affect the
with or without a trailer. Properly performance and handling of
loading your vehicle provides your vehicle, cause vehicle
maximum return of vehicle design damage and can result in the
performance. Before you load your loss of control of your vehicle,
vehicle, become familiar with the serious personal injury or death.
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with WARNING: Do not use
or without a trailer, from the replacement tires with lower
vehicle’s Tire and Loading load carrying capacities than the
Information label or Safety original tires because they may
Compliance Certification label. lower your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
WARNING: The original tires do not increase the
appropriate loading capacity of GVWR and GAWR limitations.
your vehicle can be limited either
by volume capacity (how much WARNING: Do not exceed
space is available) or by payload the GVWR or the GAWR
capacity (how much weight the specified on the certification
vehicle should carry). Once you label.
have reached the maximum
payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is WARNING: Exceeding any
space available. Overloading or vehicle weight rating can
improperly loading your vehicle adversely affect the
can contribute to loss of vehicle performance and handling of
control and vehicle rollover. your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: When loading

the roof racks, we recommend
you evenly distribute the load,
as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may
271
Load Carrying
handle differently than unloaded WHAT IS THE GROSS AXLE

vehicles. Take extra precautions, WEIGHT RATING
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
when driving a heavily loaded Rating)
vehicle.
GAWR is the maximum allowable
The gross combined weight must weight that a single axle (front or
never exceed the Gross Combined rear) can carry. These numbers
Weight Rating. are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
LOCATING THE SAFETY
WHAT IS THE GROSS VEHICLE
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION
WEIGHT RATING
LABELS
GVWR is the maximum allowable
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example: weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM

LOADED TRAILER WEIGHT
E198828
Maximum loaded trailer weight is the

The Safety Compliance Certification label highest possible weight of a fully loaded
is located on the door hinge pillar, trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an
door-latch post, or the door edge that authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer
meets the door-latch post, next to the Towing Guide available at an authorized
driver seating position. dealer) for more detailed information. See
Towing a Trailer (page 283).
WHAT IS THE GROSS

COMBINED WEIGHT RATING
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer, including
all cargo and passengers, that the
vehicle can handle without risking
272
Load Carrying
damage. (Important: The towing be used for safe control of towed

vehicle’s braking system is rated vehicles and for trailers where the
for operation at Gross Vehicle Gross Combined Weight of the
Weight Rating, not at Gross towing vehicle plus the trailer
Combined Weight Rating.) exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Separate functional brakes should Rating of the towing vehicle.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer, or online at
the website that follows.
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online

Website www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides
273
Load Carrying
CALCULATING PAYLOAD is the maximum payload for your

vehicle as built by the assembly
Tire and Loading Label Information plant. If you install any additional
Example: equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
CALCULATING THE LOAD

LIMIT
Steps for determining the correct
load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
E198719
in your vehicle.
Payload is the combined weight 3. Subtract the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your of the driver and passengers
vehicle is carrying. The maximum from XXX kg or XXX lb.
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The 4. The resulting figure equals the
label is either on the B-pillar or the available amount of cargo and
edge of the driver door. Vehicles luggage load capacity. For
exported outside the US and example, if the “XXX” amount
Canada may not have a tire and equals 1,400 lb. and there will
loading label. Look for “The be five 150 lb. passengers in
combined weight of occupants your vehicle, the amount of
and cargo should never exceed available cargo and luggage
XXX kg or XXX lb” for maximum load capacity is 650 lb.
payload. The payload listed on the (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
Tire and Loading Information label
274
Load Carrying
5. Determine the combined Suppose your vehicle has a

weight of luggage and cargo 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. and luggage capacity. You and
That weight may not safely one of your friends decide to pick
exceed the available cargo and up cement from the local home
luggage load capacity improvement store to finish that
calculated in Step 4. patio you have been planning for
6. If your vehicle will be towing a the past two years. Measuring the
trailer, load from your trailer inside of the vehicle with the rear
will be transferred to your seat folded down, you have room
vehicle. Consult this manual to for twelve 100-pound
determine how this reduces the (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
available cargo and luggage you have enough load capacity to
load capacity of your vehicle. transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
Helpful examples for weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
calculating the available the calculation would be: 1400 -
amount of cargo and luggage (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
load capacity - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a to carry that much weight. In
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo metric units, the calculation would
and luggage capacity. You decide be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
to go golfing. Is there enough load kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
capacity to carry you, four of your 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
friends and all the golf bags? You You will need to reduce the load
and four friends average 220 weight by at least 240 pounds
pounds (99 kilograms) each and (104 kilograms). If you remove
the golf bags weigh approximately three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. cement bags, then the load
The calculation would be: 1400 - calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
enough load capacity in your the load capacity to transport the
vehicle to transport four friends cement and your friend home. In
and your golf bags. In metric units, metric units, the calculation would
the calculation would be: 635 be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) - kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 - 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
275
Load Carrying
The above calculations also Make sure that you securely fasten the
assume that the loads are load. Check the tightness of the load
positioned in your vehicle in a before driving and at each fuel stop.
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE
weight rating specified for your ROOF RACK
vehicle on the Safety Compliance Removing the Roof Rack (If Equipped)
Certification label.
ROOF RACK (IF EQUIPPED) 2
ROOF RACK PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Read and follow the

E339405
manufacturer's instructions when you
are fitting a roof rack. 1. Using the provided T30 tool, remove
the front roof rack cover fasteners.
WARNING: When loading the roof
racks, we recommend you evenly 2. Remove the front roof rack covers by
distribute the load, as well as maintain pulling upward at the rear edge and
a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, rotating forward.
with higher centers of gravity, may
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
Note: If you use a roof rack, the fuel

consumption of your vehicle will be higher E339073
and you may experience different driving
characteristics. 3. Using the provided T30 tool, remove
the front roof rack fasteners.
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
You must place loads directly on the
crossbars fitted to the roof rack side rails.
When using the roof rack system, we
recommend that you use genuine Ford
accessory crossbars specifically designed
for your vehicle.
276
Load Carrying
Installing the Roof Rack
E339074
4. Remove the cover to access the rear E339406

fastener.
1. To remove, press the button on the rear
5. Using the supplied special tool, loosen of the cover and rotate forward.
the fastener until you can remove the
rack. 2. Remove the fasteners and remove the
trim cover retaining plate.
6. Remove the rack from the vehicle.
3. Store the trim cover components.
E339073
4. Position the roof rack on the vehicle.

E339407
5. Hand start the front roof rack fasteners.
Note: The windshield trim cover, retaining 6. Using the provided T30 tool, tighten
plate and fasteners are provided. The trim the front roof rack fasteners. Torque
cover is installed when you remove the roof bolts to 7.7 lb.ft (10.5 Nm).
rack. 7. Align the cover with the alignment slot
7. Locate the trim cover components. and rotate rearward.
8. Place the trim cover retaining plate 8. Hand start the front roof rack cover
over the mounting studs. fasteners.
9. Install the supplied fasteners. Torque 9. Using the provided T30 tool, tighten
nuts to 7.7 lb.ft (10.5 Nm). the front roof rack cover fasteners.
10. Align the cover with the alignment Torque bolts to 5.9 lb.ft (8 Nm).
slot at the front of the cover, then
rotate rearward and snap into place.
277
Load Carrying
ADJUSTING A ROOF RACK

CROSSBAR
Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped)
E339074
Note: The rear crossbar is part of the

clamping system. If you removed the
crossbar you must install it first for proper
attachment to the hard top.
10. Using the supplied special tool,
tighten the fastener.
Note: The supplied special tool stops
turning the fastener when you have proper
torque applied.
E339075
11. Install the rear roof rack fastener
cover. 1. Using the provided T30 tool, remove
the crossbar bolts.
2. Move the crossbar to the new position.
3. Using the provided T30 tool, install the
crossbar bolts.
Note: Torque bolts to 5.9 lb.ft (8 Nm).
Note: Moving the crossbars forward may
increase wind noise. To limit wind noise
return the crossbars to the rearward
position.
ROOF RACK LOAD CAPACITIES

Maximum Recommended Load Amounts
Description Maximum Recommended Load
When in motion 110 lb (50 kg)

When stationary 450 lb (204 kg)
Vehicles with 315/70R17 Tires 0 lb (0 kg)
278
Load Carrying
Note: The maximum recommended load

is based on the load being evenly distributed
on the crossbars.
FENDER ANCHOR POINTS
LOCATING THE FENDER ANCHOR

POINTS
E331351
FENDER ANCHOR POINT LOAD

CAPACITIES
The maximum recommended load is 150 lb
(68 kg).
279
Rear Cargo Area
REAR CARGO AREA ANCHOR LOCATING THE REAR CARGO

AREA ANCHOR POINTS
POINTS
REAR CARGO AREA ANCHOR

POINT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Always properly secure

cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo
falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in compromised vehicle
stability and serious personal injury to
vehicle occupants or others.
WARNING: The appropriate

loading capacity of your vehicle can be
limited either by volume capacity (how
much space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle, E324512
do not add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
REAR CARGO AREA ANCHOR
contribute to loss of vehicle control and POINT LOAD CAPACITIES
vehicle rollover.
Maximum Load Value
WARNING: It is extremely
2,000 lb (907 kg)
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
280
CONNECTING A TRAILER CONNECTING A TRAILER

PRECAUTIONS
Trailer Towing Connector (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring

bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper
is higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may
cause unpredictable handling, and could
result in serious personal injury.
Do not tow a trailer until you drive your

vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
Consult your local motor vehicle laws for E163167
towing a trailer.
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
See the instructions included with towing to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
accessories for the proper installation and connector that works with the vehicle and
adjustment specifications. trailer functions.
Service your vehicle more frequently if you
tow a trailer. See Normal Scheduled Trailer Lamps
Maintenance (page 455).
If you use a rental trailer, follow the
WARNING: Never connect any
instructions the rental agency gives you.
trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail
When attaching the trailer wiring connector lamp wiring; this may damage the
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting electrical system resulting in fire. Contact
connector that works with the vehicle and your authorized dealer as soon as
trailer functions. possible for assistance in proper trailer
Account for the trailer coupler weight as tow wiring installation. Additional
part of your vehicle load when calculating electrical equipment may be required.
the total vehicle weight.
Most towed vehicles require trailer lamps.
Do not exceed the load limits. See Make sure all running lights, brake lights,
Calculating the Load Limit (page 274). turn signals and hazard lights are working.
Safety Chains
Install trailer safety chains to the trailer
hitch as recommended by the
manufacturer. Cross the chains under the
trailer coupler and allow enough slack for
turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.
281
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the

bumper. Always connect the safety chains
to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer
hitch.
E265060
If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch,

make sure to fully close the latch.
CONNECTING A TRAILER – TROUBLESHOOTING
CONNECTING A TRAILER – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Description
Trailer Disconnected The system senses a trailer connection

disconnecting, either intentionally or unin-
tentionally, during a given ignition cycle.
282
Towing a Trailer
TOWING A TRAILER
PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not cut,
drill, weld or modify the trailer
hitch. Modifying the trailer hitch
WARNING: Do not exceed could reduce the hitch rating.
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification WARNING: The anti-lock
label. brake system does not control
the trailer brakes.
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum TRAILER BRAKE
recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of your PRECAUTIONS
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of WARNING: Do not connect a
trailer's hydraulic brake system directly
vehicle control, vehicle rollover to your vehicle's brake system. Your
and personal injury. vehicle may not have enough braking
power and your chances of having a
WARNING: Do not exceed collision greatly increase.
the lowest rating capacity for
your vehicle or trailer hitch. WARNING: Do not tow a trailer
Overloading your vehicle or fitted with electric trailer brakes unless
your vehicle is fitted with a compatible
trailer hitch can impair your aftermarket electronic trailer brake
vehicle stability and handling. controller. Failure to follow this
Failure to follow this instruction instruction could result in the loss of
could result in the loss of control control of your vehicle, personal injury or
of your vehicle, personal injury or death. For additional information and
death. assistance, we recommend that you
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Make sure that Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
the vertical load on the tow ball surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
is between the minimum and install them properly and adjust them to
maximum recommended weight the manufacturer's specifications. The
at all times. Failure to follow this trailer brakes must meet local and federal
instruction could result in the regulations.
loss of control of your vehicle, The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
personal injury or death. system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
283
Towing a Trailer
Certain states require functioning trailer • Load the heaviest items above
brakes for trailers over a specified weight. the trailer axles or just slightly
Be sure to check state regulations for this forward toward the trailer
specified weight.
tongue. Do not allow the final
Ford Motor Company recommends trailer tongue weight to go
separate functioning brake systems for above or below 10-15% of the
trailers weighing more than 1,500 lb
(680 kg) when loaded.
loaded trailer weight. The
trailer tongue weight should
never exceed 10% of the
TOWING A TRAILER maximum towing capacity.
LIMITATIONS • Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
The vehicle's load capacity the loaded vehicle and trailer
designation is by weight, not by are connected, the trailer frame
volume, so you cannot necessarily should be level, or slightly
use all available space when angled down toward your
loading a vehicle or trailer. vehicle, when viewed from the
Note: Your vehicle could have side.
reduced performance when
operating at high altitudes and TRAILER TOWING HINTS
when heavily loaded or towing a
trailer. When driving at elevation, Towing a trailer places an extra load on
to match driving performance as your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,
perceived at sea level, reduce gross brakes, tires and suspension. Periodically
vehicle weight and gross inspect these components during and after
any towing operation.
combination weight by 2% per
1,000 ft (300 m) elevation. When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be
present due to the increased payload
LOADING YOUR TRAILER weight.
Your vehicle may have a temporary or
To help minimize how trailer conventional spare tire. A temporary spare
movement affects your vehicle tire is different in diameter or width,
when driving: tread-type, or is from a different
• Load the heaviest items closest manufacturer than the road tires on your
to the trailer floor. vehicle. Consult information on the tire
label or Safety Compliance label for
• Load the heaviest items limitations when using.
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
284
Towing a Trailer
When towing a trailer: • Allow more distance for stopping with

• Obey country specific regulations for a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
towing a trailer. gradually brake.
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph • Avoid parking on a slope. However, if
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi you must park on a slope, turn the
(800 km). steering wheel to point your vehicle
tires away from traffic flow, set the
• Do not make full-throttle starts. parking brake, place the transmission
• Check your hitch, electrical connections in park (P) and place wheel chocks in
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly front and back of the trailer wheels.
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
Note: Chocks are not included with your
• When stopped in congested or heavy vehicle.
traffic during hot weather, place the
transmission in park (P) to aid engine
and transmission cooling and to help LAUNCHING OR RETRIEVING
A/C performance. A BOAT OR PERSONAL
• Turn off the speed control with heavy WATERCRAFT
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off when you are When backing down a ramp during boat
towing on long, steep slopes. launching or retrieval:
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down • Do not allow the static water level to
a long or steep hill. Do not continuously rise above the bottom edge of the rear
apply the brakes, as they may overheat bumper.
and become less effective.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
• If your transmission has Grade Assist than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
or Tow/Haul, use this feature when edge of the rear bumper.
towing. This provides engine braking
and helps eliminate excessive Exceeding 6 in (15 cm) could allow water
transmission shifting for optimum fuel to enter vehicle components, causing
economy and transmission cooling. internal damage to the components and
affecting driveability, emissions and
• Your vehicle has AdvanceTrac with roll reliability.
stability control. When towing a trailer,
additional loads could cause the Note: Replace the rear axle lubricant
AdvanceTrac system to engage during anytime the rear axle has been submerged
cornering maneuvers. Reduce cornering in water.
speeds to make sure that you can Note: Disconnect the trailer wiring
maintain control of the vehicle and connector before backing the trailer into the
trailer if the AdvanceTrac system water.
engages.
Note: Reconnect the trailer wiring
connector after removing the trailer from
the water.
285
Towing a Trailer
TOWING WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Market Website
United States of America https://www.fleet.ford.com/
towing-guides/
Canada https://www.fleet.ford.ca/towing-
guides/
286
Towing a Trailer
WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM LOADED • Driver weight.

TRAILER WEIGHT
• Passenger weight.
The maximum loaded trailer • Payload, cargo and luggage
weight is the highest possible weight.
weight of a fully loaded trailer the • Aftermarket equipment weight.
vehicle can tow.
This equals the maximum loaded
CALCULATING THE MAXIMUM trailer weight for this combination.
LOADED TRAILER WEIGHT FOR Note: The trailer tongue load is
YOUR VEHICLE considered part of the payload for
1. Start with the gross combined your vehicle. Reduce the total
weight rating for your vehicle payload by the final trailer tongue
model and axle ratio. weight.
2. Subtract all of the following Note: Consult an authorized dealer
that apply to your vehicle: to determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
• Vehicle curb weight. you are not sure.
• Hitch hardware weight, for
example a draw bar, ball, locks
or weight distributing hardware.
TOWING A TRAILER – TROUBLESHOOTING
TOWING A TRAILER – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed The trailer sway control detects trailer
sway. Reduce the vehicle's speed.
287
Trailer Sway Control
HOW DOES TRAILER SWAY 2. Press Towing.

CONTROL WORK 3. Switch Trailer Sway Control on or off.
The system turns on each time you start
The system applies the brakes to the your vehicle.
individual wheels and reduces engine
torque to aid vehicle stability.
If the trailer begins to sway, the stability
control lamp flashes and the message
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed appears in
the information display.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so. Check the vertical weight on the
tow ball and trailer load distribution.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL

PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway

control increases the risk of loss of
vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Ford does not recommend disabling this
feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (such as
hill climbing), the driver has significant
trailer towing experience, and can control
trailer sway and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature only activates when

significant trailer sway occurs.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
SWITCHING TRAILER SWAY

CONTROL ON AND OFF
288
Driving Hints
OFF-ROAD DRIVING Before you venture off road, have a clear

mental picture of the underside of your
vehicle. Learn the location of any low
WHAT IS OFF-ROAD DRIVING hanging items and any skid plates that may
be on the vehicle. You can avoid snagging
Off-road driving is driving your vehicle on them on rocks and other obstacles if you
unsurfaced roads or trails, made from dirt, know where they are.
rocks, sand and mud.
Memorizing some basic dimensions helps
Your vehicle has been designed and you confidently deal with off-road
equipped to explore those places where obstacles. Get to know your vehicle’s
the road cannot take you, whether you height and width, its lowest point, its
choose a forest trail or the open desert. wading depth and angles. Familiarize
yourself with your vehicle’s on-board
OFF-ROAD DRIVING technology features.
PRECAUTIONS We recommend driving at least two
vehicles when driving off-road. The buddy
system helps make sure that help is close
WARNING: If you continue to drive at hand should a vehicle become stuck or
your vehicle when the engine is damaged.
overheating, the engine could stop
We recommend taking supplies such as a
without warning. Failure to follow this
first aid kit, supply of water, tow strap and
instruction could result in the loss of
cell or satellite phone with you any time
control of your vehicle.
you plan an off-road excursion.
Before going off-road, consult with your
local governmental agencies to determine BASIC OFF-ROAD DRIVING
designated off-road trails and recreation TECHNIQUES
areas. Also, be sure to understand any
off-road vehicle registration requirements Grip the steering wheel with your thumbs
for the area in which you plan on driving. on the outside of the rim. This reduces the
risk of injury due to abrupt steering wheel
Tread Lightly is an educational program motions that occur when negotiating rough
designed to increase public awareness of terrain.
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nation’s wilderness areas. The U.S. Control your throttle, brake and steering
Forest Service and Bureau of Land inputs in a smooth manner. Sudden inputs
Management is encouraging you to help to the controls can cause a loss of traction
preserve our national forest and other for the vehicle, especially when on sloped
public and private lands by treading lightly. terrain or crossing obstacles such as rocks
or logs.
Before taking your vehicle off-road,
perform a basic vehicle inspection to make
sure the vehicle is in top working condition.
289
Driving Hints
Look ahead on your route noting upcoming DRIVING OFF-ROAD

obstacles, surface texture or color changes
or any other factors which may indicate a Driving In Snow and Ice
change in available traction. Adjust the
vehicle speed and route to avoid a loss in
traction. Conditions can change causing WARNING: If you are driving in
the course to vary day to day. Mark slippery conditions that require tire
obstacles with GPS markers to avoid chains or cables, then it is critical that
potential vehicle damage. Where you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down,
necessary, get out of your vehicle and allow for longer stopping distances and
check the terrain. avoid aggressive steering to reduce the
When driving off-road, if the front or rear chances of a loss of vehicle control
suspension is bottoming-out or excessive which can lead to serious injury or death.
contact with the skid-plates is happening, If the rear end of your vehicle slides while
reduce the vehicle's speed to avoid cornering, steer in the direction of the
potential damage to your vehicle. slide until you regain control of your
vehicle.
If you are driving in a dusty area, be sure to
leave ample distance between your vehicle Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
and any other vehicles to allow for over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
adequate vision. ice but can skid like any other vehicle. If
When driving off-road verify that your your vehicle slides when driving on snowy
wipers and washers are working properly or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the
and reduce your speed for better visibility. direction of the slide until you regain
control. Avoid sudden applications of
When driving in desert conditions, we power and quick changes of direction on
recommend driving with your headlamps snow and ice. Slowly and steadily apply
on to help other drivers easily see you. the accelerator when starting from a full
When convoying with other vehicles, we stop. Avoid sudden braking.
recommend that communication is used,
and the lead vehicle notify other vehicles
of upcoming obstacles. WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
Keep available ground clearance in mind drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
and pick a route that minimizes the risk of drive vehicle may accelerate better than
catching the underside of the vehicle on a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
an obstacle. situations, it won't stop any faster than
When negotiating low speed obstacles, two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
applying light brake pressure in conjunction at a safe speed.
with the throttle allows you to negotiate
the obstacle in a more controlled manner. Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between your vehicle and other vehicles
Driving off-road requires a high amount of
for stopping.
concentration. Even if your local law does
not prohibit drinking alcohol when driving In emergency stopping situations, do not
off-road we do not recommend it. pump the brake pedal, apply the brake
firmly.
290
Driving Hints
Driving In Sand If you lose traction on your wheels facing

uphill, stop and choose a more suitable
When driving over sand, try to keep all four route.
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Drive through the terrain without varying Leave a generous gap between your
vehicle speed. Apply the accelerator and vehicle and other vehicles to minimize the
avoid excessive wheel slip. risk of damage from flying gravel. Avoid
dust clouds as they reduce visibility.
Use the vehicle's momentum to maintain
forward motion in sand. Avoid coming to Before navigating on uneven ground,
a stop on steep sand slopes as the vehicle secure anything inside the vehicle. If
may not be able to continue forward after possible, remove any roof-rack items. Use
it has stopped. the lowest gear possible and approach the
obstacle at a slow speed.
Driving In Mud If your vehicle begins to slide down a slope,
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle steer downhill and gently apply the
speed or direction when you are driving in throttle. If you lose traction on your uphill
mud. wheels, stop immediately and choose a
more suitable route.
Even four-wheel drive vehicles can lose
traction in slick mud. If your vehicle does Approach logs, rocky steps or ditches
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until diagonally. Keep at least three wheels on
you regain control of your vehicle. the ground at all times.
After driving through mud, clean off residue Climbing A Hill

stuck to the wheels and tires and rotating
driveshafts. Excess mud stuck on the
wheels and tires and rotating driveshafts WARNING: Extreme care should
can cause an imbalance that could be used when steering the vehicle in
damage drive components. reverse down a slope so as not to cause
Note: The vehicle brakes are less effective the vehicle to swerve out of control.
when wet or muddy.
Although natural obstacles can make it
Driving Over Rocks and Gravel necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, try to drive straight
Gravel is a constantly changing, low-grip up or straight down.
surface. Driving at slow speeds on gravel
reduces the risk of losing traction when you Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or
stop, accelerate or turn a corner. hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
When approaching large rocks, position
the vehicle so that the tires pass over the Whenever driving on a hill, you must first
largest obstacle. determine the route you can use.
Note: Never attempt to straddle a rock that When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
is large enough to strike your axles or in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
undercarriage. a lower gear from a higher gear. This
reduces strain on the engine and the
Note: Never attempt to drive over a rock possibility of stalling.
which is large enough to contact the door
sills if your vehicle does not have rock rails.
291
Driving Hints
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn The key to a safe crossing is the water
around because this could cause your depth, current and bottom of the water's
vehicle to roll over. It is better to reverse condition. On soft bottoms, the vehicle
back to a safe location. sinks in, effectively increasing the water
level on the vehicle. Make sure to consider
Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
this when determining the depth of water.
seeing what conditions are on the other
side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill Determine the depth and speed of the
without the aid of an observer. current before attempting a water crossing.
If the vehicle is unable to make it up the Be aware that obstacles and debris may
hill, do not attempt to turn back down the be beneath the water’s surface.
slope. Note: Cross flowing water at an angle
Apply the accelerator just enough for the heading slightly upstream.
wheels to climb the hill. Note: You should tread lightly and avoid
Note: Too much acceleration can cause damage to the environment.
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, Drive slowly when crossing water. Proceed
resulting in loss of vehicle control. with a constant slow speed lightly pressing
Descending A Hill: on the accelerator.
• Use the same gear you would use to Drive through the water very slowly when
climb the hill. entering, then build up momentum. Keep
• Do not descend in neutral. your vehicle moving at a steady pace.
• Disengage overdrive. Note: Do not try to accelerate through the
• Avoid sudden and excessive braking. water crossing.
Note: The front wheels have to be turning When driving too fast in water or through
in order to steer your vehicle. deep water, the engine, transmission,
transfer case, axles, electrical components
When descending a steep hill in a manual or vehicle interior could ingest water. Water
transmission vehicle do not leave the can cause permanent damage that may
vehicle in gear with the clutch pressed. This not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
could cause damage to your driveline. See Driving Through Water Limitations
(page 294).
Driving Through Water
Note: Failure to follow the recommended
speeds can result in vehicle damage.
WARNING: Do not attempt to Never stop or shut a vehicle off when
cross a deep, fast flowing body of water. crossing deep water unless your vehicle
Failure to follow this instruction could ingested water into the engine air intake.
result in the loss of control of your If the engine stalls, do not attempt to
vehicle, personal injury or death. restart it.
Ease off the accelerator as you reach the
As the water depth increases, you must
other side to diminish the front wave. Apply
reduce your vehicle speed to avoid
the accelerator slowly and as necessary
potential vehicle damage.
to climb out of the other side.
292
Driving Hints
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling Avoid Getting High-Centered

system effectiveness by depositing debris
into the radiator. Always keep available ground clearance
in mind and pick a route that minimizes the
Extra care must be taken crossing any type risk of catching the underside of the vehicle
of water. Do not drive into water unless on an obstacle and getting high-centered.
necessary. You should only drive through
areas that are designated and approved. Freeing A Stuck Vehicle
High currents even in shallow water can
wash the dirt out from around your tires or
push your vehicle across slippery rocks or WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
surfaces. at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Never attempt to cross flowing water that
is deeper than your vehicles ground Recovery hooks are mounted to the
clearance. Even in low currents your vehicle's structure and are used to pull out
vehicles body surface area can be pushed the vehicle from a surface or location when
downstream and out of control. stuck. Recover your vehicle using various
Do not cross any body of water that is fast towing apparatus attached to your
flowing and rising, wait for the flow rate to recovery hook such as winch, open hook,
reduce. or strap.
Determine exit points that are downstream Note: Do not use recovery hooks to
of your entry point to allow for drifting. recreationally tow your vehicle. See
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle (page
If there are other vehicles ahead, wait until
307).
they’ve left the water. Unsettled water can
make a safe passage more challenging. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
Know your vehicle’s abilities and be able
forward and reverse gears, stopping
to recover it if something goes wrong.
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
Keep the doors fully closed during a water the accelerator in each gear.
crossing.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
Vehicles used to traverse water regularly is not at normal operating temperature
should be periodically inspected for signs damage to the transmission may occur.
of water ingestion in all of the vehicle's
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
fluids. If water is found inside your vehicle
than a minute damage to the transmission
fluids, service your vehicle or see an
and tires may occur or the engine may
authorized dealer.
overheat.
After driving through water and as soon as
If you are unable to free your vehicle call
it is safe to do so, check the brakes, horn,
roadside assistance. See Roadside
lights, and steering wheel to make sure
Assistance (page 299).
everything is still in working order.
293
Driving Hints
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, OFF-ROAD DRIVING AIDS

Washout Or Rut
Selecting an Off-Road Drive Mode
Review the path ahead before attempting
to cross any obstacle. Review the obstacle Using the appropriate drive mode increases
from outside the vehicle for an your vehicle's control. See G.O.A.T. Mode
understanding of the terrain condition in Control (page 242).
front of and behind the obstacle. Approach Note: Drive modes are selected by using
obstacles slowly and inch the vehicle over. the Goes Over Any-type of Terrain G.O.A.T.
Ditches and washouts should be crossed MODES controller.
at a 45 degree angle when possible.
Using Four-Wheel Drive
Driving Over Logs
Your vehicle has a four-wheel drive system
Review the path ahead before attempting that offers various modes to help you
to cross any obstacle. Review the obstacle optimize traction on any off-road surface.
from outside the vehicle for an See Four-Wheel Drive (page 182).
understanding of the terrain condition in
front of and behind the obstacle. Using the Stabilizer Bar
Approach obstacles slowly and inch the Disconnect
vehicle over, approaching at a 15 degree
The stabilizer bar disconnect improves
angle.
suspension articulation, improving traction
Note: It is best to have a front tire on top of and comfort in rough terrain.
the log when the other begins to climb over.
The vehicle's disconnect system is
If a large obstacle near the log such as a hydraulically actuated.
rock cannot be avoided, choose a path that
Your vehicle is capable of disconnecting
places the rock directly under the tire
under high load. Your vehicle is also
rather than the undercarriage of the
capable of reconnecting under all
vehicle. This helps prevent damage to the
conditions.
vehicle.
It is not necessary for the vehicle to be on
level ground in order to reconnect the
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
stabilizer bar. See Stabilizer Bar
LIMITATIONS Disconnect (page 214).
Model Maximum Wading Using the Cameras Off-Road
Depth
Use the 360 degree camera to enhance
Vehicles without 31.5 in (800 mm) your off-road experience. See 360 Degree
the Sasquatch Camera (page 229).
Package.
Vehicles with the 33.5 in (850 mm)
Sasquatch
Package.
When you are driving through water do not

exceed 4 mph (7 km/h).
294
Driving Hints
Using the Front and Rear Use this when driving over large obstacles,
Differential Lock such as rocks or logs, to help maintain a
constant vehicle speed.
When engaged, the front and rear
differential lock provides additional In 4H, the system offers lift pedal braking
traction to your vehicle by forcing either and auto hill hold functionality. See What
the two rear wheels or two front wheels to Is Trail One Pedal Drive (page 208).
turn at the same speed. Note: Trail one pedal drive is only available
You can activate and deactivate the front when the vehicle is in 4H or 4L.
and rear differential lock on the fly within
the operating speed range. See Electronic Using Trail Turn Assist
Locking Differential (page 190). The feature reduces the turn radius of the
vehicle on off-road surfaces.
Using Trail Control
The system reduces driver effort to
The system works in a similar manner to negotiate difficult off-road terrain by
cruise control in off-road conditions. Trail allowing the vehicle to make a tight turn
Control provides you the ability to in a single maneuver that might otherwise
maneuver the vehicle without using the require a three point turn. See Trail Turn
throttle and brake pedals. Assist (page 212).
Trail Control allows you to set a speed Note: Trail turn assist is only available when
between 1 mph (1.6 km/h) to 14 mph the vehicle is in 4H or 4L.
(23 km/h) in a forward motion and 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) to 5 mph (8 km/h) in reverse. Note: Trail turn assist cannot activate if the
The system controls acceleration and rear differential is locked.
braking in difficult off-road environments,
What Are Rock Rails (If Equipped)
which allows you to focus on steering. See
Trail Control (page 207). Rock rails protect the rocker and body side
Trail Control Performance: from damage and provide a sliding surface
to allow the vehicle to cross boulders and
• Manages wheel slip to maximize
rock ledges.
traction.
• Removes the need for you to use both Rock rails also can act as a pivot point to
feet when driving in off-road situations. sharply turn the vehicle in tight spaces with
high walls or rocks present.
• Provides braking to maximize traction
in descents.
AFTER DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
• Gives you confidence in difficult OFF-ROAD
environments.
Using Trail One Pedal Drive

WARNING: After off-road use,
Trail one pedal drive coordinates before returning to the road, check the
propulsive and braking torque through your wheels and tires for damage. Off-road
application of the accelerator pedal to use may cause damage to your wheels
simulate a two footed driving technique. and tires that can lead to tire failure, loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
295
Driving Hints
Driving off-road places more stress on your Note: If you have removed the impacted
vehicle than most on-road driving. After material from the wheels and your vehicle
driving off-road, check for damage to the still has a vibration check your vehicle for
wheels, chassis and underbody. damage or see an authorized dealer.
Inspect the underbody of your vehicle by Inspect the exhaust system for damage or
checking tires, body structure, steering, looseness.
suspension, and exhaust system for
Make sure that the brakes are in proper
damage.
working order and free of any mud, stones
Inspect the tires for any cuts in the tread and debris, which can become trapped
or sidewall area. Also inspect the sidewall around the brake rotor, backing plate and
for any bulge indicating damage to the tire. caliper.
Make sure the tires are inflated to proper Inspect the wheels for dents, cracks, or
tire pressure as indicated on the tire other damage.
placard.
Inspect undercarriage fasteners. If any are
Check the radiator for mud and debris and loose or damaged, tighten or replace
clean as needed. ensuring that the proper torque
Check that the air filter is clean and dry. specification is used.
Remove accumulations of plants or brush. Inspect for torn or punctured boots on ball
These things could be a fire hazard or hide joints, half shafts, steering gears.
damage to the fuel lines, brake hoses and Refit the front license plate if removed
propeller shafts. previously.
Make sure the grille and radiator are clear
of any obstructions that may affect DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE AT HIGH
cooling. SPEEDS
After extended operation in mud, sand, Before off-road driving in unfamiliar areas
water, or similar dirty conditions, inspect at high speeds, do a low speed
the wipers and washers to make sure they reconnaissance run to become aware of
are working. any obstacles that you could encounter.
Note: Mud caked windows are hard to see Your vehicle can incur damage if driven
through and can damage wiper blades or beyond its capabilities. Skid plates and
motor. rock rails are designed to help limit
Check wipers for debris or anything that damage to vital components and exterior
may scratch the windshield. finishes, but cannot prevent all damage if
driven in extreme off-road conditions.
If you experience unusual vibration after
Damage to skid plates, rock rails and
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
exterior finishes as well as bent, cracked
check the wheels for impacted material.
or broken body, frame and chassis
Impacted material can cause vibrations
components may not be covered by
when driving and wheel imbalance.
warranty.
Remove the material to reduce the
vibration. It is important that you take the time to
become familiar with the controls and
dynamics of your vehicle before
attempting higher speed off-road driving.
296
Driving Hints
Some points to consider: • When driving in desert conditions, the

• Slowly build up speed. Initially, drive at midpoint of the day is the most difficult
a speed that allows ample time to fully time to see many of the small ridges
assess the terrain around you and to and dips due to flat shadows from the
understand how the vehicle responds sun being at its highest point. Extreme
to both the terrain and your inputs. care should be taken at these times.
Increase speed as comfort increases, • We encourage you to switch on
being mindful of how the vehicle off-road modes for off-road driving.
responds to various conditions at See G.O.A.T. Mode Control (page
different speeds. 242).
• Find a wide open place to experiment
with different functions on your vehicle COLD WEATHER
and different driving techniques. Try a
given maneuver with different PRECAUTIONS
functions, such as drive modes,
four-wheel drive modes or switching The functional operation of some
the electronic locking differential on components and systems can be affected
and off and see how your vehicle at temperatures below approximately
responds. If the vehicle is tending to -13°F (-25°C).
push straight ahead when trying to
negotiate a turn, a light application of BREAKING-IN
the brake when turning could help turn
your vehicle. A wider entry to a corner Your vehicle requires a break-in period. For
or entering a corner more slowly could the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km), avoid driving
help your vehicle turn and allow you to at high speeds, heavy braking, aggressive
apply the throttle sooner after shifting or using your vehicle to tow. During
negotiating the turn. this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
• As speed increases, look farther ahead unusual driving characteristics.
of the vehicle so that there is time to
react to oncoming obstacles.
Remember that in many off-road DRIVING ECONOMICALLY
environments, obstacles can be hard
to see until they are relatively near. A The following helps to improve fuel
good strategy is to alternate between consumption:
looking far ahead and up closer to the • Drive smoothly, accelerate gently and
front of your vehicle when driving. anticipate the road ahead to avoid
• Remember that you may not be the heavy braking.
only one in a particular recreational • Regularly check your tire pressures and
area. Be aware of others in your area. make sure that they are inflated to the
This is especially true of motorcycles correct pressure.
and all-terrain vehicles that may be • Follow the recommended maintenance
more difficult to spot than a full-sized schedule and carry out the
vehicle. recommended checks.
297
Driving Hints
• Plan your journey and check the traffic

before you set off. It is more efficient WARNING: Secure the floor mat
to combine errands into a single trip to both retention devices so that it
whenever possible. cannot slip out of position and interfere
• Avoid idling the engine in cold weather with the pedals. Failure to follow this
or for extended periods. Start the instruction could result in the loss of
engine only when you are ready to set control of your vehicle, personal injury or
off. death.
• Do not carry unnecessary weight in your
vehicle as extra weight wastes fuel. WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top
• Do not add unnecessary accessories of the original floor mats. This could
to the exterior of your vehicle, for result in the floor mat interfering with the
example running boards. If you use a operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
roof rack, remember to fold it down or this instruction could result in the loss of
remove it when not in use. control of your vehicle, personal injury or
• Do not shift into neutral when you are death.
braking or when your vehicle is slowing
down. WARNING: Always make sure that
• Shut all windows when driving at high objects cannot fall into the driver foot
speeds. well while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped
• Switch off all electric systems when
under the pedals causing a loss of
not in use, for example air conditioning.
vehicle control.
Make sure that you unplug any
accessories from the auxiliary power
points when not in use.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat

designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal
area. Failure to follow this instruction
vehicle, personal injury or death. E142666
WARNING: Pedals that cannot To install the floor mats, position the floor
move freely can cause loss of vehicle mat eyelet over the retention post and
control and increase the risk of serious press down to lock in position.
personal injury. To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
298
Crash and Breakdown Information
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE • Towing — independent service

contractors, if not prohibited by state,
Vehicles Sold in the United States: local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
Getting Roadside Assistance eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
To fully assist you should you have a disablement location or to the nearest
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company authorized dealer. If a member
offers a complimentary roadside requests a tow to an authorized dealer
assistance program. This program is that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
separate from the New Vehicle Limited the disablement location, the member
Warranty. shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
The service is available:
• Roadside Assistance includes up to
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
• For the coverage period supplied with eligible vehicle requires service at the
your vehicle. nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
Roadside Assistance covers: vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
• A flat tire change with a good spare any roadside services.
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit). Vehicles Sold in the United States:
• Battery jump start. Using Roadside Assistance
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement Complete the roadside assistance
cost is the customer's responsibility). identification card and place it in your
• Fuel delivery — independent service wallet for quick reference. This card is in
contractors, if not prohibited by state, the Owner's Manual kit.
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
United States vehicle customers who
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
require Roadside Assistance, call
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
1-800-241-3673.
Roadside assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences If you need to arrange roadside assistance
within a 12-month period. for yourself, Ford Motor Company
• Winch out — available within 100 ft reimburses a reasonable amount for
(30 m) of a paved or county towing to the nearest dealership within
maintained road, no recoveries. 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
299
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a JUMP STARTING PRECAUTIONS
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This WARNING: Batteries normally
program is eligible within Canada or the produce explosive gases which can
continental United States. cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
The service is available 24 hours a day, allow flames, sparks or lighted
seven days a week. substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
This program is separate from the New shield your face and protect your eyes.
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage Always provide correct ventilation.
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside WARNING: Keep batteries out of
coverage and benefits may differ from the reach of children. Batteries contain
U.S. coverage. sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
If you require more information, please call eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit working near the battery to protect
our website at www.ford.ca. against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
SWITCHING THE HAZARD a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
FLASHERS ON AND OFF medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
The hazard flasher button is on
the instrument panel. Press the WARNING: Use only adequately
button to switch the hazard sized cables with insulated clamps.
flashers on if your vehicle is creating a
safety hazard for other road users. WARNING: Make sure that the
cables are clear of any moving parts and
When you switch the hazard flashers on,
fuel delivery system parts.
all front and rear direction indicators flash.
Note: The hazard flashers operate when WARNING: Connect batteries with
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is only the same nominal voltage.
not in the ignition. The battery loses charge
and could have insufficient power to restart WARNING: If the engine is running
your vehicle. while the hood is open, stay clear of
moving engine components. Failure to
Press the button again to switch them off.
follow this warning could result in serious
Do not attempt to push-start an automatic

transmission vehicle. This could cause
transmission damage.
300
Do not disconnect the battery of the

disabled vehicle. This could damage your
vehicle's electrical system.
PREPARING THE VEHICLE

Use only a 12 volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the

negative jumper cable to any other part
of your vehicle. Use the ground point.
Note: If you are using a jump pack or

booster box, follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
E281345
1. Pull the red rubber boot backward.

Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) jumper cable
to the negative (-) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) jumper cable to an
exposed metal part of the disabled
vehicle's engine, as shown in the
following illustration, away from the
battery and fuel injection system, or
connect the negative (-) jumper cable
to a ground connection point if
available.
301
HOW DOES THE POST-CRASH

ALERT SYSTEM WORK
The system is designed to turn the hazard
flashers on and to intermittently sound the
horn in the event of a serious impact that
deploys an airbag or the seatbelt
pretensioners.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS
E309115
Depending on applicable laws in the
Starting the Engine country your vehicle was built for, the horn
does not sound in the event of a serious
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle impact.
and moderately rev the engine, or
gently press the accelerator to keep SWITCHING THE POST-CRASH
the engine speed between 2000 and ALERT SYSTEM OFF
3000 RPM, as shown in your
tachometer. Press the hazard flasher switch or the
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. unlock button on the remote control to
switch the system off.
3. Once you start the disabled vehicle, run
both vehicle engines for an additional Note: The alert turns off when the vehicle
three minutes before disconnecting the battery runs out of charge.
jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC CRASH
SHUTOFF
Note: Do not switch the headlamps on
when disconnecting the cables. The peak The automatic crash shutoff is designed
voltage could blow the bulbs. to stop the fuel going to the engine in the
event of a moderate or severe crash.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM Note: Not every impact causes a shutoff.
WHAT IS THE POST-CRASH

ALERT SYSTEM
The system helps draw attention to your
vehicle in the event of a serious impact.
302
AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF

PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Never link two straps
together with a clevis pin. These heavy
metal objects could become projectiles
WARNING: If your vehicle has been if the strap breaks and can cause serious
involved in a crash, have the fuel system injury or death.
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or
death.
RE-ENABLING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Attempt to start your vehicle.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Attempt to start your vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle does not start after the
third attempt, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
E335946
A
RECOVERY TOWING
A. Front recovery hooks.
ACCESSING THE FRONT TOWING Note: Do not apply a load to the recovery
POINT hooks that is greater than the gross vehicle
weight rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
WARNING: Using recovery hooks
is dangerous and should only be done by • Make sure all attaching points are
a person familiar with proper vehicle secure and capable of withstanding
recovery safety practices. Improper use the applied load.
of recovery hooks may cause hook failure • Do not use chains, cables or tow straps
or separation from the vehicle and could with metal hook ends.
result in serious injury or death.
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
WARNING: Slowly remove the
three times the gross vehicle weight of
slack from the recovery strap prior to
the stuck vehicle.
pulling. Failure to do so can introduce
significantly higher loads which can • Make sure the recovery strap is in good
cause the recovery hooks to break off, or condition and free of visible cuts, tears
the recovery strap to fail which can cause or damage.
303
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,

heavy blanket or piece of carpet, and
place it over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the
strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.
• Align the tow vehicle and stuck vehicle
in a straight line, within 10 degrees.
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This A
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a E335947
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path. A. Rear recovery hooks.
Note: Do not apply a load to the recovery
ACCESSING THE REAR TOWING hooks that is greater than the gross vehicle
POINT weight rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
WARNING: Using recovery hooks • Make sure all attaching points are
is dangerous and should only be done by secure and capable of withstanding
a person familiar with proper vehicle the applied load.
recovery safety practices. Improper use • Do not use chains, cables or tow straps
of recovery hooks may cause hook failure with metal hook ends.
or separation from the vehicle and could • Only use recovery straps that have a
result in serious injury or death. minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
WARNING: Slowly remove the the stuck vehicle.
slack from the recovery strap prior to
pulling. Failure to do so can introduce • Make sure the recovery strap is in good
significantly higher loads which can condition and free of visible cuts, tears
cause the recovery hooks to break off, or or damage.
the recovery strap to fail which can cause • Use a damper device such as a tarp,
serious injury or death. heavy blanket or piece of carpet, and
place it over the recovery strap to help
WARNING: Never link two straps absorb the energy in the event the
together with a clevis pin. These heavy strap breaks.
metal objects could become projectiles • Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
if the strap breaks and can cause serious loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
injury or death. weight rating specified on the
certification label.
304
• Align the tow vehicle and stuck vehicle We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
in a straight line, within 10 degrees. dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the vehicle. Vehicle damage could occur if
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice towed incorrectly, or by any other means.
the length of the recovery strap. This Make sure front-wheel and rear-wheel
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a drive vehicles have their designated drive
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a wheels off the ground regardless of towing
vehicle lurching into their path. direction. Use tow dollies to prevent
damage to the transmission.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE We recommend towing a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. However, it is acceptable to
use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your
vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle
configuration, you perform the following
before towing:
• If your vehicle has an electronic
shift-on-the-fly transfer case, make
sure you switch the four-wheel drive
control to the 2H position before
towing.
Note: Towing an electronic shift-on-the-fly
four-wheel drive vehicle with the front
wheels on the ground without disengaging
the front hubs could cause damage to the
automatic transmission.
Note: Towing a two-wheel drive vehicle or
an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel
drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground for more than 50 mi (80 km) or
faster than 35 mph (56 km/h) could cause
damage to the automatic transmission.
E143886
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a

professional towing service or your
roadside assistance service provider.
Your manufacturer produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures.
305
Towing Your Vehicle
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE You can only tow your vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground by placing the
PRECAUTIONS transfer case in its neutral position by
engaging the recreational tow feature.
Use the following guidelines when towing Perform the following steps after
your vehicle. Failure to follow this positioning your vehicle behind the tow
instruction could result in vehicle damage vehicle and properly securing them
not covered by the vehicle warranty. together.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your Note: Put your climate control system in
vehicle to the tow vehicle. recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
Note: If you are unsure of the vehicle’s fumes from entering your vehicle.
configuration, contact an authorized dealer. Note: Failure to put the transfer case in its
neutral position can damage vehicle
RECREATIONALLY TOWING components.
YOUR VEHICLE - MANUAL Note: You can check the towing status at
any time by opening the driver door or
TRANSMISSION turning the ignition to the accessory or on
position. Neutral Tow Enabled Leave
Transmission in Neutral appears in the
WARNING: Do not disconnect the instrument cluster display to confirm you
battery when recreationally towing your can recreationally tow your vehicle.
vehicle. This prevents the transfer case
Note: If your vehicle has an anti-theft
from shifting properly and could cause
alarm, make sure you switch perimeter
the vehicle to roll, even if the
sensing on when towing.
transmission is in gear.
Note: A tone could sound for up to 30
WARNING: Placing the transfer minutes if you recreationally tow with the
case in its neutral position could cause doors removed.
your vehicle to freely roll. Make sure you
press and hold the brake pedal and the Switching Neutral Tow On
vehicle is in a secure, safe position when
1. Switch your vehicle to accessory mode
you place the transfer case in its neutral
by pressing the push button ignition
position.
switch without pressing any pedals.
Follow these guidelines if you have a need 2. Press the 2H button on the four-wheel
for recreational towing. An example of drive mode control.
recreational towing would be towing your 3. Leave the gearshift lever in the neutral
vehicle behind a motorhome. These position and fully press and hold both
guidelines are to make sure that you do the clutch and the brake pedal.
not damage the transmission.
4. Using the instrument cluster controls
5. Select Neutral Tow.
6. Press and hold the OK button until a
confirmation message appears in the
information display.
306
Towing Your Vehicle
Note: If completed successfully, the 4. Apply the parking brake, then

information display shows Neutral Tow disconnect your vehicle from the tow
Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral. vehicle.
This indicates that your vehicle is safe to 5. Release the parking brake, start your
tow with all wheels on the ground. vehicle, and shift into either a forward
Note: If you do not see a confirmation or a reverse gear to make sure the
message in the instrument cluster display, transfer case is out of the neutral tow
you must perform the procedure again from position.
the beginning. 6. If the transfer case did not successfully
Note: You may hear noise as the transfer shift out of its neutral position, set the
case shifts into its neutral position. This is parking brake. Have your vehicle
normal. checked as soon as possible.
7. Release both the clutch and the brake Resolving the Shift Delayed Drive
pedals and leave the gearshift lever in Forward Message
the neutral position.
1. Fully press and hold both the brake and
8. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the
the clutch pedals.
push button ignition switch once
without pressing any pedals. 2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. With the vehicle running, shift into a
Switching Neutral Tow Off forward gear and release the clutch.
1. With your vehicle properly secured to Let the vehicle roll forward up to 3 ft
the tow vehicle, switch your vehicle to (1 m).
accessory mode by pressing the push Note: You may hear a noise as the transfer
button ignition switch without pressing case shifts out of its neutral position. This
any pedals. is normal.
2. Starting with both the brake and clutch 4. Make sure the instrument cluster
pedal released, fully press and hold displays Neutral Tow Disabled.
both pedals at the same time for
approximately seven seconds.
Continue holding both pedals until the RECREATIONALLY TOWING
instrument cluster display shows 2H YOUR VEHICLE - AUTOMATIC
and Neutral Tow Disabled. TRANSMISSION
Note: If completed successfully, the
instrument cluster displays 2H and Neutral
Tow Disabled.
WARNING: Do not disconnect the
Note: You must perform the switching battery when recreationally towing your
neutral tow on and switching neutral tow vehicle. This prevents the transfer case
off procedures again from the beginning if from shifting properly and could cause
the indicator light and message do not the vehicle to roll, even if the
display. transmission is in park (P).
Note: You may hear a noise as the transfer
case shifts out of its neutral position. This
is normal.
3. Release the pedals.
307
Towing Your Vehicle
Switching Neutral Tow On

WARNING: Placing the transfer 1. Switch your vehicle to accessory mode
case in its neutral position could cause by pressing the push button ignition
your vehicle to freely roll. Make sure you switch without pressing any pedals.
press and hold the brake pedal and the
vehicle is in a secure, safe position when 2. Press the 2H button on the four-wheel
you place the transfer case in its neutral drive mode control.
position. 3. Fully press and hold the brake pedal
and shift the transmission to neutral
Follow these guidelines if you have a need (N).
for recreational towing. An example of 4. Using the instrument cluster controls
recreational towing would be towing your on the steering wheel, select Settings.
vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are to make sure that you do 5. Select Neutral Tow.
not damage the transmission. 6. Press and hold the OK button until a
You can only tow your vehicle with all four confirmation message appears in the
wheels on the ground by placing the information display.
transfer case in its neutral position by Note: If completed successfully, the
engaging the recreational tow feature. information display shows Neutral Tow
Perform the following steps after Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral.
positioning your vehicle behind the tow This indicates that your vehicle is safe to
vehicle and properly securing them tow with all wheels on the ground.
together. Note: If you do not see a confirmation
Note: Put your climate control system in message in the instrument cluster display,
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust perform the procedure again from the
fumes from entering your vehicle. beginning.
Note: Failure to put the transfer case in its Note: You may hear noise as the transfer
neutral position can damage vehicle case shifts into its neutral position. This is
components. normal.
Note: You can check the towing status at 7. Release the brake pedal and leave the
any time by opening the driver door or transmission in neutral (N).
turning the ignition to the accessory or on 8. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the
position. Neutral Tow Enabled Leave push button ignition switch once
Transmission in Neutral appears in the without pressing any pedals.
instrument cluster display to confirm you
can recreationally tow your vehicle. Switching Neutral Tow Off
Note: If your vehicle has an anti-theft 1. With your vehicle properly secured to
alarm, make sure you switch perimeter the tow vehicle, switch your vehicle to
sensing on when towing. accessory mode by pressing the push
Note: A tone could sound for up to 30 button ignition switch without pressing
minutes if you recreationally tow with the any pedals.
doors removed.
308
Towing Your Vehicle
2. Starting with the brake pedal released 6. If the transfer case did not successfully
and the transmission in neutral (N), shift out of its neutral position, set the
fully press and hold the brake pedal for parking brake. Have your vehicle
approximately seven seconds and shift checked as soon as possible.
the transmission to park (P). Continue
holding the brake pedal until the Resolving the Shift Delayed Drive
instrument cluster display shows 2H Forward Message
and Neutral Tow Disabled. 1. Fully press and hold the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the 2. Press the push button ignition switch.
instrument cluster displays 2H and Neutral
Tow Disabled. 3. With the vehicle running, shift into drive
(D). Let the vehicle roll forward up to
Note: Perform the switching neutral tow 3 ft (1 m).
on and switching neutral tow off procedures
again from the beginning if the indicator Note: You could hear a noise as the transfer
light and message do not display. case shifts out of its neutral position. This
is normal.
Note: You could hear a noise as the transfer
case shifts out of its neutral position. This 4. Make sure the instrument cluster
is normal. displays Neutral Tow Disabled.
3. Release the brake pedal.
4. Apply the parking brake, then
EMERGENCY TOWING
disconnect your vehicle from the tow
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
vehicle.
professional towing service or, if you are a
5. Release the parking brake, start your member of a roadside assistance program,
vehicle, and shift into either drive (D) your roadside assistance service provider.
or reverse (R) to make sure the transfer
case is out of the neutral tow position.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Description
Neutral Tow Enabled The transfer case is in the neutral position and your vehicle
Leave Transmission in is safe to tow with all four wheels on the ground.
Neutral
Shift Delayed Drive There is a transfer case gear tooth blockage present. With
Forward your vehicle on, shift the transmission into drive (D) and let
the vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m).
Neutral Tow Disabled The transfer case is not in the neutral position and your vehicle
is not safe to tow with all four wheels on the ground.
309
Fuses
FUSE PRECAUTIONS UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX
LOCATING THE UNDER HOOD

WARNING: Always disconnect the FUSE BOX
battery before servicing high current
fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of

electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box
before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
WARNING: Always replace a fuse

with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a
higher amperage rating can cause severe E329461
wire damage and could start a fire.
ACCESSING THE UNDER HOOD

FUSE BOX
E329462
310
Fuses
IDENTIFYING THE FUSES IN THE UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX
E330939
Item Rating Protected Component
1 30 A Body control module -

battery power in feed 1.
3 30 A Body control module -
battery power in feed 2.
4 30 A Fuel pump.
6 25 A Powertrain control module
power.
7 30 A Powertrain components.
8 20 A Powertrain components.
9 20 A Ignition coils.
13 40 A Blower motor.
16 10 A Rear windshield washer.
18 30 A Starter motor.
311
Fuses
21 10 A Not used (spare).

22 10 A 360 degree camera module.
23 10 A Anti-lock brake system run-
start feed.
24 10 A Powertrain control module.
Power steering module.
25 10 A Blind spot information
system.
Rear view camera.
Adaptive cruise control.
Driveline control module.
26 15 A Transmission control
module.
28 60 A Anti-lock brake system
valves.
29 60 A Anti-lock brake system
pump.
30 30 A Driver power seat.
31 30 A Passenger power seat.
32 20 A Auxiliary power point.
36 40 A 150 watt DC/AC inverter.
38 30 A Heated seat module.
42 30 A Trailer brake control
module.
44 10 A Brake on-off switch.
46 20 A SYNC module.
50 40 A Heated rear windshield.
54 40 A Driveline control module.
55 30 A Trailer tow park lamp relay.
312
Fuses
58 20 A Trailer tow backup lamps.

60 30 A Upfitter switch #1.
66 10 A Stability bar disconnect
module.
69 30 A Front windshield wiper.
71 30 A Rear windshield wiper.
91 40 A Trailer tow light module.
100 20 A Left-hand headlamps.
101 20 A Right-hand headlamps.
107 30 A Trailer tow battery charge.
120 10 A Fuel injectors (2.7L).
124 5A Not used (spare).
125 10 A USB smart charger 1.
139 5A USB smart charger 2.
146 20 A Amplifier.
158 10 A Stability bar disconnect
module run/start.
160 10 A Smart data link control.
182 60 A Driver door module.
313
Fuses
183 60 A Passenger door module.

202 60 A Body control module B+.
210 30 A Body control module start
stop.
ACCESSING THE BODY CONTROL

BODY CONTROL MODULE MODULE FUSE BOX
FUSE BOX
LOCATING THE BODY CONTROL

MODULE FUSE BOX
E329071
E329070
314
Fuses
IDENTIFYING THE FUSES IN THE BODY CONTROL MODULE FUSE BOX
E145984
1 — Not used.
2 10 A Power windows.
DC/AC inverter.
3 7.5 A Exterior mirrors.
Wireless charging module.
5 — Not used.
6 10 A Anti-theft alarm horn.
7 10 A Not used.
10 — Not used.
11 — Not used.
12 7.5 A Climate control.
Gateway module.
315
Fuses
13 7.5 A Steering column control

module.
Instrument cluster module.
16 — Not used.
17 7.5 A Not used (spare).
18 7.5 A Not used (spare).
19 5A Ignition switch.
Headlamps.
20 5A Telematics modem.
21 5A In-vehicle temperature and
humidity sensor.
22 5A Not used.
30 5A Brake on-off switch.
31 10 A Terrain management switch.
Integrated control panel
switch.
Driveline and chassis
controls switch panel.
12 inch center display.
Radio frequency receiver
module.
32 20 A Audio control module.
316
Fuses
33 — Not used.
34 30 A Run/start relay.
36 15 A Automatic high beam.
Image processing module A.
37 20 A Auto-dimming interior
mirror.
Parking assist control
module.
Heated steering wheel.
38 30 A Circuit Breaker Not used.
IDENTIFYING FUSE TYPES FUSES – TROUBLESHOOTING
FUSES – FREQUENTLY ASKED

QUESTIONS
When do I need to check a fuse?
If electrical components in the vehicle
are not working.
When do I need to replace a fuse?
E267379
If a fuse has blown.
A Micro 2. How do I identify a blown fuse?
B Micro 3. You can identify a blown fuse by a
broken wire within the fuse.
C Maxi.
D Mini.
E M Case.
F J Case.
G J Case Low Profile.
H Slotted M Case.
317
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS OPENING AND CLOSING THE

HOOD
Service your vehicle regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale Opening the Hood
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which E331612
parts and services are covered.
1. Pull the hood release handle under the
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
left-hand side of the instrument panel.
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. See Capacities and
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material, such as cigarettes, away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Set the parking brake, shift the
transmission to park (P) and block the E331900
wheels.
2. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your
left-hand side.
318
Maintenance
3. Open the hood and support it with the

hood strut.
Closing the Hood
WARNING: Make sure that you fully

latch the hood before driving. Failure to
1. Fully stow the strut prior to lowering

the hood.
2. To close, lower the hood and make
sure that it fully latches.
E331793
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
E339861
A Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 322).

B Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Adding Washer Fluid (page 93).
C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 321).
319
Maintenance
D Engine oil filler cap. See Adding Engine Oil (page 321).
E Brake fluid reservoir. See Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir (page 194).
F Engine compartment fuse box. See Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box (page
310).
G Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 326).
H Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 326).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
E339862
A Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 322).

B Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Adding Washer Fluid (page 93).
C Engine oil filler cap. See Adding Engine Oil (page 321).
D Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 321).
E Brake fluid reservoir. See Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir (page 194).
F Engine compartment fuse box. See Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box (page
310).
320
Maintenance
G Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 326).

H Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 326).
6. If the oil level is at the minimum mark,

immediately add oil.
ENGINE OIL
7. Reinstall the dipstick. Make sure it is
fully seated.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK OVERVIEW
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
ADDING ENGINE OIL
WARNING: Do not remove the filler

cap when the engine is running.
WARNING: Do not add engine oil

when the engine is hot. Failure to follow
E270482 this instruction could result in personal
injury.
A Minimum.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
B Nominal. additives because they are unnecessary
C Maximum. and could lead to engine damage that the
vehicle warranty may not cover.
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL oil filler cap before you remove it.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level 2. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
ground. 3. Add engine oil that meets our
2. Check the oil level before starting the specifications. See Capacities and
engine, or switch the engine off after Specifications (page 393).
warming up and wait 10 minutes for 4. Reinstall the engine oil filler cap. Turn
the oil to drain into the oil pan. it clockwise until you feel a strong
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with resistance.
a clean, lint-free cloth. Note: Do not add oil further than the
4. Reinstall the dipstick and make sure it maximum mark. Oil levels above the
is fully seated. maximum mark may cause engine damage.
5. Remove the dipstick again to check the Note: Immediately soak up any oil spillage
oil level. with an absorbent cloth.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
321
Maintenance
RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND

CHANGE REMINDER SPECIFICATION
Use the information display controls on For filling information, please refer to the
the steering wheel to reset the oil change Capacities and Specifications section of
reminder. your owner's manual. See Engine Oil
Capacity and Specification (page 398).
From the main menu scroll to:
Message Action and Description CHECKING THE COOLANT
Settings Press the right arrow button, When the engine is cold, check the
then from this menu scroll concentration and level of the coolant at
to the following message. the intervals listed in the scheduled
Conveni- Press the right arrow button, maintenance information. See Scheduled
ence then from this menu scroll Maintenance (page 452).
to the following message. Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the minimum and maximum marks
Oil Life Press the right arrow button, on the coolant reservoir.
Reset then from this menu scroll
to the following message. Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Hold OK to Press and hold the OK
If the coolant level is at or below the
Reset button until the instrument
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
cluster displays the
immediately.
following message.
Maintain coolant concentration within
Reset Successful 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
When the oil change point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
reminder resets the instru- (-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
ment cluster displays 100%. checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
Remaining Life coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
{00}%
Adding Coolant
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
WARNING: Do not remove the
process.
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
Not Reset on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
Reset Cancelled down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
322
Maintenance
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure

WARNING: Do not add engine escapes as you unscrew the cap.
coolant when the engine is on or the 2. Add enough prediluted coolant to
cooling system is hot. Failure to follow reach the correct level.
this instruction could result in personal Note: We do not recommend the use of
injury. recycled coolant.
WARNING: Do not add coolant 3. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
further than the MAX mark. the cap clockwise until it contacts the
hard stop.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in 4. Check the coolant level in the coolant
the windshield washer reservoir. If reservoir the next few times you drive
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could your vehicle. If necessary, repeat step
make it difficult to see through the 2.
windshield.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
Operating an engine with a low level of
as they can cause damage to the engine
coolant can result in engine overheating
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
and possible engine damage.
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty. In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
Note: Automotive fluids are not
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
interchangeable.
Service your vehicle as soon as possible.
It is very important to use prediluted
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
coolant approved to the correct
cause engine damage from corrosion,
specification in order to avoid plugging the
overheating or freezing.
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and Do not use the following as a coolant
Specifications (page 393). Do not mix substitute, as they can cause engine
different colors or types of coolant in your damage from overheating or freezing:
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using • Alcohol.
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and could • Methanol.
void the vehicle Warranty. • Brine.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available, • Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
use the approved concentrated coolant methanol antifreeze.
diluting it to 50/50 with deionized or Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
distilled water. See Capacities and the coolant. These can be harmful and
Specifications (page 393). Using water that compromise the corrosion protection of
has not been deionized may contribute to the coolant.
deposit formation, corrosion and plugging
of the small cooling system passageways.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
323
Maintenance
Severe Climates A warning lamp illuminates and

a message may appear in the
If you drive in extremely cold climates, you information display.
may need to increase the coolant
concentration above 50%. If the engine reaches a preset
Note: A coolant concentration of 60% over-temperature condition, the engine
provides improved freeze point protection. automatically switches to alternating
Coolant concentrations above 60% cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
decrease the overheat protection acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
characteristics of the coolant and could When this occurs, your vehicle still
cause engine damage. operates, however:
If you drive in extremely hot climates, you • Engine power is limited.
may need to decrease the coolant • The air conditioning system turns off.
concentration to 40%.
Continued operation increases the engine
Note: A coolant concentration of 40% temperature, causing the engine to
provides improved overheat protection. completely shut down. Your steering and
Coolant concentrations below 40% braking effort increases in this situation.
decrease the overheat and corrosion
protection characteristics of the coolant and When the engine temperature cools, you
could cause engine damage. can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
Coolant Change engine damage.
Change the coolant at specific mileage When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
intervals. Refer to the scheduled
maintenance information. See Normal
Scheduled Maintenance (page 455). WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for
Note: Dispose of used coolant in the use during emergencies only. Operate
appropriate manner. your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as
long as necessary to bring your vehicle
Follow your community's regulations and to rest in a safe location and seek
standards for recycling and disposing of immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
automotive fluids. mode, your vehicle will have limited
power, will not be able to maintain
Fail-Safe Cooling high-speed operation, and may
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily completely shut down without warning,
drive your vehicle before any incremental potentially losing engine power, power
component damage occurs. The fail-safe steering assist, and power brake assist,
distance depends on ambient which may increase the possibility of a
temperature, vehicle load and terrain. crash resulting in serious injury.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works

If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:
324
Maintenance
Engine Coolant Temperature

WARNING: Do not remove the Management (If Equipped)
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool WARNING: To reduce the risk of
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap crash and injury, be prepared that the
with a thick cloth to prevent the vehicle speed may reduce and the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove vehicle may not be able to accelerate
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction with full power until the coolant
could result in personal injury. temperature reduces.
Your vehicle has limited engine power If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your engine may temporarily reach a higher
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not temperature during severe operating
maintain high-speed operation and the conditions, for example ascending a long
engine could operate poorly. or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent At this time, you may notice the coolant
engine damage. In this situation: temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely information display.
possible and switch the engine off.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
2. If you are a member of a roadside
speed caused by reduced engine power in
assistance program, we recommend
order to manage the engine coolant
that you contact your roadside
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
assistance service provider.
mode if certain high-temperature and
3. If this is not possible, wait for a short high-load conditions take place. The
period of time for the engine to cool. amount of speed reduction depends on
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant vehicle loading, grade and ambient
level is at or below the minimum mark, temperature. If this occurs, there is no
add prediluted coolant immediately. need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your The air conditioning may automatically
vehicle checked as soon as possible to turn on and off during severe operating
minimize engine damage. conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
temperature decreases to the normal
increases the chance of engine damage.
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
325
Maintenance
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe

to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. If the
temperature does not drop after
several minutes, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
E340582
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER 1. Remove the screws from the air filter
housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of 3. Remove the air filter element from the
vehicle damage and personal burn air filter housing.
injuries, do not start your engine with the 4. To install, reverse the removal
air cleaner removed and do not remove procedure.
it while the engine is running.
Change the air filter element at the proper CHANGING THE FUEL FILTER
intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 452). Your vehicle has a lifetime fuel filter that
integrates with the fuel tank. It does not
When changing the air filter element, use need regular maintenance or replacement.
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
393). CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element could result in severe engine
damage that the vehicle Warranty may not WARNING: Batteries normally
cover. produce explosive gases which can
Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
not allow foreign material to enter the air allow flames, sparks or lighted
induction system. The engine is susceptible substances to come near the battery.
to damage from even small particles. When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
326
Maintenance
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the

WARNING: When lifting a top of the battery clean and dry and the
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure battery cables tightly fastened to the
on the end walls could cause acid to flow battery terminals. If any corrosion is
through the vent caps, resulting in present on the battery or terminals, remove
personal injury and damage to the the cables from the terminals and clean
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
battery carrier or with your hands on acid with a solution of baking soda and
opposite corners. water.
We recommend that you disconnect the
WARNING: Keep batteries out of negative battery cable terminal from the
reach of children. Batteries contain battery if you plan to store your vehicle for
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, an extended period.
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
Note: If you only disconnect the negative
working near the battery to protect
battery cable terminal, make sure it is
against possible splashing of acid
isolated or placed away from the battery
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
terminal to avoid unintended connection or
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
arcing.
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, To maintain correct operation of the
call a physician immediately. battery management system, if you add
any electrical devices to your vehicle, do
WARNING: Battery posts, not connect the ground connection directly
terminals and related accessories to the negative battery terminal. A
contain lead and lead compounds, connection at the negative battery terminal
chemicals known to the State of can cause inaccurate measurements of
California to cause cancer and the battery condition and potential
reproductive harm. Wash your hands incorrect system operation.
after handling. Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to your vehicle this may
WARNING: This vehicle may have adversely affect battery performance,
more than one battery. Removing the durability and the performance of other
battery cables from only one battery electrical systems on your vehicle.
does not disconnect your vehicle
electrical system. Make sure you If you replace the battery make sure it
disconnect the battery cables from all matches the electrical requirements of
batteries when disconnecting power. your vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause serious If you disconnect or replace the battery
personal injury or property damage. and your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, it must relearn its adaptive
The battery is in the engine compartment. strategy. Because of this, the transmission
See Under Hood Overview (page 320). may shift firmly when first driven. This is
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free normal operation while the transmission
battery. It does not require additional fully updates its operation to optimum
water during service. shift feel.
327
Maintenance
Remove and Reinstall the Battery Note: To calibrate the steering angle
sensor, drive the vehicle above 30 mph
To disconnect or remove the battery, do (50 km/h) for a minimum of 1.2 mi (2 km).
the following: Make sure to drive straight ahead for a
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the minimum of 30 seconds. Several vehicle
ignition off. functions are disabled and a warning light
could appear until the sensor is calibrated.
2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for
example lights and radio. Battery Management System
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
The battery management system monitors
disconnecting the battery.
battery conditions and takes actions to
Note: The engine management system has extend battery life. If excessive battery
a power hold function and remains powered drain is detected, the system temporarily
for a period of time after you switch the disables some of the following features:
ignition off. This is to allow diagnostic and
adaptive tables to be stored. Disconnecting • Heated rear window.
the battery without waiting can cause • Heated seats.
damage not covered by the vehicle • Climate control.
Warranty.
• Heated steering wheel.
4. Disconnect the negative battery cable
• Audio unit.
terminal.
• Navigation system.
5. Disconnect the positive battery cable
terminal. A message may appear in the information
display to alert you that battery protection
6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
actions are active.
7. Remove the battery.
After battery replacement, or in some
8. To install, reverse the removal cases after charging the battery with an
procedure. external charger, the battery management
Note: Before reconnecting the battery, system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
make sure the ignition remains switched off. time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time your vehicle must remain
Note: Make sure the battery cable terminals fully locked with the ignition off.
are fully tightened.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
Note: After cleaning or replacing the components to the vehicle, it may adversely
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery affect battery performance and durability.
cover or shield. This may also affect the performance of
If you disconnect or replace the vehicle other electrical systems in the vehicle.
battery, you must reset the following
features: Battery Disposal
• Window bounce-back. See Window Make sure that you dispose of
Bounce-Back (page 103). old batteries in an
• Clock Settings. environmentally friendly way.
E107998
Seek advice from your local authority

• Pre-set radio stations. about recycling old batteries.
• Steering Angle Sensor.
328
Maintenance
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident,
contact an authorized dealer to check and
realign your headlamps.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E167358
4. On the wall or screen, observe a light

pattern with a distinct horizontal edge
toward the right. If this edge is not at
the horizontal reference line, adjust the
beam so the edge is at the same height
as the horizontal reference line.
E142592
A 8 ft (2.4 m).
B Center height of lamp to ground.
C 25 ft (7.6 m).
D Horizontal reference line.
1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a

wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp, indicated by a 3
millimeter circle on the lens, to the
ground and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) E339582
horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height, a piece of 5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
masking tape works well. headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to screwdriver to turn the adjuster either
illuminate the wall or screen and open counterclockwise or clockwise in order
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps to adjust the vertical aim of the
so no light hits the wall. headlamp.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
329
Maintenance
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps. EXTERIOR BULBS
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
EXTERIOR BULB SPECIFICATION
Horizontal aim is not required for this CHART
vehicle and is not adjustable.
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
Lamp Specification Power (Watt)
Center high mounted stop lamp. LED LED

Daytime running lamp. LED LED
Front turn signal and parking lamp. LED LED
Front fog lamp. LED LED
Front side marker lamp. LED LED
Headlamp low beam. LED LED
Headlamp high beam. LED LED
Rear turn signal - high series. LED LED
Rear lamp, stoplamp, rear side marker
WT21W/7W 21/7
lamp and rear turn signal - low series.
Reversing lamp - low series. WT21W 21
Reversing lamp - high series. LED LED
Side turn signal lamp. LED LED
Taillamp. LED LED
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
330
Maintenance
REMOVING A REAR LAMP

ASSEMBLY
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
E334849
5. Remove the lower trim piece by

disengaging the retaining tabs. Pull
from the inside edge first, then pull
from the outside edge.
E334894
2. Loosen the quarter-turn fastener on

the rearmost fender flare.
3. Fully open the tailgate. See Opening
the Tailgate From Outside Your
Vehicle (page 84).
E334850
6. Remove the lower retaining bolt from

the inside trim piece. Pull on the lower
part of the trim piece to disengage the
upper retaining clips.
E334848
4. Remove the three pushpins from inside

the trim panel.
E339584
331
Maintenance
7. Remove the three retaining bolts 1. Remove the rear lamp assembly. See
securing the rear lamp to the body. Removing a Rear Lamp Assembly
Note: Remove and install the retaining bolt (page 331).
near the wheel well before the retaining 2. Rotate the bulb socket
bolts near the luggage compartment. counterclockwise and remove it from
the rear lamp assembly.
8. Pull the rear lamp away from the
vehicle and disconnect the electrical 3. To install, reverse the removal
connectors as needed. procedure.
procedure. INTERIOR BULBS
CHANGING A REAR LAMP BULB INTERIOR BULB SPECIFICATION
CHART
Your vehicle has LED lamps. These are not
serviceable items. See an authorized dealer
if they fail.
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 2.3L

ECOBOOST™
B
E161383
A. Long drive belt is on the first

pulley groove closest to engine.
E339583
B. Short drive belt is on the second
pulley groove farthest from
A. Stoplamp, rear and turn signal engine.
bulb.
B. Reversing lamp bulb.
332
Maintenance
DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 2.7L

ECOBOOST™
E340713
333
Removable Vehicle Components
REMOVABLE WINDOWS (IF

EQUIPPED)
REMOVABLE WINDOWS
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not drive unless all

rear windows are removed or securely
installed. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal
injury.
Note: Use caution when moving or handling

the windows. Do not drop the windows.
Note: Do not place the windows directly on
hard or sharp surfaces. This could cause
damage to the window.
REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE E334214

REAR QUARTER WINDOWS -
VEHICLES WITH: MODULAR HARD 1. Lift the latch to release the quarter
TOP window.
Note: The quarter window opens slightly
The following procedure shows the to provide access.
passenger side rear window, driver side is
similar.
334
E334216 E347134
2. Rotate the quarter window while 1. Release the rear edge of the panel by
pulling down to separate the glass pulling the fabric out of the slot.
from the frame.
To install the glass back on your vehicle:
1. Rotate the quarter window in to the
rubber seal.
2. Push the rear glass into the latch
mechanism. The latch engages when
correctly installed.
REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE

REAR QUARTER WINDOWS -
VEHICLES WITH: SOFT TOP
The following procedure shows the driver
side rear window, passenger side similar.
335
3. Release the front edge of the panel by

pulling the fabric out of the slot to
remove.
E347137
4. Slide the bottom panel forward out of

the slot to remove.
E347135
5. To install the rear quarter window,
2. Unbuckle the three clips at the top. perform the steps above in reverse
order.
E347138
6. When installing the rear quarter

windows, make sure the window is
tucked under the tension cable.
E347136
336
Note: When installing the rear edge of the REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE
rear quarter window into the slot, you can REAR WINDOW - VEHICLES WITH:
unlatch the soft top for easier installation. SOFT TOP
See Opening and Closing the Soft Top
(page 348).
E347139
7. After installing the rear quarter

windows, press along the top of the
window to secure the Velcro strips.
Note: The buckles snap together and
windows are flush when correctly installed.
If the parts have visible gaps or stick out
they are not correctly secured.
E347143
1. Pull the bottom corners of the

backlight rearward to disengage the
clip.
337
3. Unbuckle the four clips at the top.
E347146
4. Slide the bottom out of the slot left or

right to remove.
5. To install the rear window, perform the
E347144
above steps in reverse order.
2. Remove the top corners from the slots.
E347147
6. After installing the rear window, press

along the top of the window to secure
the Velcro strips.
Note: The buckles snap together and
windows are flush when correctly installed.
If the parts have visible gaps or stick out
they are not correctly secured.
E347145
338
REMOVABLE DOORS 5. Locate the fender protector in the tool

pouch and install it over the fender
edge near the top door hinge.
DOORS
Removing the Doors
WARNING: Removal of doors for

off-road use only. Removing the doors
from the vehicle will affect protection
provided by the doors and may affect
safety system performance, including
safety canopy and front seat mounted
side airbags, during a crash or rollover. E328722
WARNING: Vehicle needs to be 6. To release the door harness connector,

turned off before reconnecting doors to open the connector door. Pull the
verify all electrical connections have connector straight out.
been properly connected. Failure to
follow these instructions may affect
safety system performance, including
safety canopy and front seat mounted
side airbags, during a crash or rollover.
1. Fully open the windows on the doors

you are removing.
2. Switch your vehicle off.
3. Fold the mirrors toward the front of
your vehicle before removing the front
doors. E328724
4. Fully open the door you are removing. 7. Make sure to seat the connector door
in the closed position.
8. We recommend that you use a door
storage bag on the door you are
removing.
Note: Make sure you fully secure the bag.
Make sure the bag contains the edge and
corners of the door to prevent accidental
door damage before proceeding with the
removal of the door.
E347602
339
E328730
9. Locate the tool pouch and use the hex

tool to remove the lower hinge bolt.
E346853
11. Locate the lower lift handle.
E328731
10. Remove the upper hinge bolt.

Note: Store the hinge bolts in the pocket of
the tool pouch.
E346854
12. Use the door handle as the upper lift

handle.
13. With the help of another person, lift
the door vertically to separate it from
the vehicle.
Note: Use caution when removing the doors
as they are heavy.
Note: Store the doors out of the elements
to prevent damage.
14. To remove additional doors, repeat
Steps 4 – 13.
340
15. Return the hex tool to the tool pouch

and secure it in vehicle.
16. Return mirrors to the driving position.
Note: When you remove the doors, the rear
seat occupant alert no longer functions.
Installing the Doors

1. Switch your vehicle off.
2. Fold the mirrors towards the front of
the vehicle before installing the front
doors. E347537
3. Inspect and clean debris from the 6. Locate the lower bodyside hinge and
bodyside and door hinges. install alignment pin.
4. If you are using a storage bag, unzip it
far enough to allow access to the
hinges.
E347604
E347540
5. Locate the fender and door protectors 7. Locate the upper door hinge portion.
in the tool pouch. Install one over the
fender edge near the upper door hinge
and the other on the door edge near
the bottom door hinge.
341
11. Hand start the hinge bolts to the

upper and lower door hinges.
12. Use the hex tool to tighten the bolts.
Note: We recommend that you use a torque
wrench to make sure you tighten the bolts
to the required 22 lb.ft (30 Nm)
specification.
13. If using a storage bag, remove it from
the door.
14. Open the harness connector door.
E347538
8. Locate the upper bodyside hinge.
E328723
15. Insert the door harness into the

connector.
E347242
9. With the help of another person, lower

the door onto the body hinges, aligning E328726
the upper door portion to the upper
body pin and the lower door portion to 16. Open and close the installed door a
the alignment pin. few times to make sure you aligned
it properly and that it operates
Note: Make sure you do not pinch the wiring normally.
connector harness between the door and
the body of the vehicle. 17. To install additional doors, repeat
Steps 3 – 16.
10. Remove the lower alignment pin.
342
18. Close the doors and switch the If there is any damage to the roof panels,
ignition on. Check for any warning see an authorized dealer.
messages. Make sure the locating pins on the rear roof
19. Return the mirrors to the driving panel sit flush in your vehicle when
position. installed.
Failure to follow these instructions could
DOORS AND LOCKS AUDIBLE cause interior water damage, stains or
WARNINGS mildew:
Sounds when a door is not fully closed or • Properly position the hard top
removed and your vehicle is moving. assembly to seal the top to your vehicle
during installation. Improper
installation could cause water to leak
REMOVABLE ROOF PANELS (IF into the vehicle’s interior.
EQUIPPED) • Properly handle and store the
removable roof panels. Improper
handling and storage could damage
REMOVABLE ROOF PANEL the seals, causing water to leak into
PRECAUTIONS the vehicle’s interior.
• Do not place anything on top of the
rear roof panel when it is removed from
WARNING: When opening, closing, the vehicle. This could cause damage
removing or installing the removable to the rear roof panel and its seals.
vehicle components, take care not to get
your fingers or hands caught in the
mechanism. Failure to follow this
FRONT ROOF PANEL
Remove the driver side front roof panel
WARNING: Do not drive your before removing the passenger side front
vehicle with only the center or the rear roof panel.
roof panel removed. Failure to follow this
instruction could cause unintended 1. Fold down the sun visor against the
separation of the roof panels from your windshield.
vehicle.
WARNING: Do not drive your

vehicle unless the installed roof panels
are properly secured. Failure to follow
this instruction could cause unintended
separation of the roof panels from your
vehicle.
Removal of the center and rear roof panels

requires two adults.
Do not cut, drill, weld or modify the roof E333995
panels or attach anything other than the
factory-installed roof rack.
343
2. Turn the three L-shaped latches on the REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE
driver side front roof panel, unlocking REAR ROOF PANEL - 2-DOOR
them from the roof.
3. Unlatch the driver side header panel Remove the front panels before removing
latch at the top of the windshield. the rear roof panel.
4. Remove the driver side front roof panel. 1. Open the rear doors.
5. Repeat the steps to remove the 2. Open the tailgate window. See
passenger side panel front roof panel. Opening and Closing the Windows
(page 103).
6. Store the front roof panels in the
storage bag. See Storing the Roof 3. Locate the wire harness and washer
Panels (page 359). See Storing the hose on the driver side rear inside
Doors and the Roof Panels (page corner of the vehicle.
352). 4. Release the locking tab by pushing it
7. To install, reverse the removal down.
procedure.

CENTER ROOF PANEL - 4-DOOR
Remove both of the front roof panels
before removing the center roof panel.
E335339 6 5
5. Push the tab inward when pulling down
to disconnect and remove the wiring
harness.
E333996
6. Push the release button on the hose
1. Turn the three L-shaped latches on the connector and pull down to remove
center roof panel, unlocking them from the washer hose.
the rear roof panel.
2. Unlatch the driver side and passenger
side latches of the center roof panel.
3. Remove the center roof panel.
procedure.
344
Note: Store the rear roof panel with the

7 8 tailgate window open to prevent damage
to the glass seal.
procedure. Torque the fasteners that
secure the rear roof panel to your
vehicle to 15 ± 2 lb.ft (20 ± 3 Nm).
Note: Make sure the locating pins on the
rear roof panel sit flush in your vehicle when
installed.
Note: Do not overtighten the fasteners. You
can strip the fasteners if they are
overtightened.
E335340 Removing and Installing the
Modular Roof Panel (If Equipped)
7. Secure the wiring harness to the body
side by plugging it into the receptacle Store the modular roof panel in a safe
and pushing up on the locking tab. place when you remove it to prevent part
8. Secure the washer hose by snapping it damage.
into the top of the body side
receptacle.
E342198
E333997
1. Pull and hold the spring-loaded slide.
2. Turn the L-shaped latch.
9. Remove the four fasteners on each side
of your vehicle that secure the rear roof 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 on the other latch
panel to the vehicle using the provided to unlock the modular roof panel from
head driver and ratchet. the roof.
10. With the tailgate window open, grab 4. Push up on the front of the panel.
the opening with one hand and 5. Slide the panel forward to remove it
slightly lift with the other hand. Lift from your vehicle.
the rear roof panel straight up and
off. Place the rear roof panel on a soft
procedure.
surface to prevent damage.
345
Note: Make sure the modular roof panel

slides back into place and the locating pins 7 8
sit in the front latch receiver when installing
the modular roof panel.
Note: You do not need to pull and hold the
spring-loaded slides to turn the latches to
lock the modular roof panel.

REAR ROOF PANEL - 4-DOOR
Remove the front panels and center panel
before removing the rear roof panel.
1. Open the rear doors.
E335340
2. Open the tailgate window. See
Opening and Closing the Windows 7. Secure the wiring harness to the body
(page 103). side by plugging it into the receptacle
3. Locate the wire harness and washer and pushing up on the locking tab.
hose on the driver side rear inside 8. Secure the washer hose by snapping it
corner of the vehicle. into the top of the body side
4. Release the locking tab by pushing it receptacle.
down.
E335339 6 5
5. Push the tab inward when pulling down
E345383
to disconnect and remove the wiring
harness. 9. Remove the two fasteners that secure
6. Push the release button on the hose the rear roof panel at the C-pillar using
connector and pull down to remove the provided head driver and ratchet.
the washer hose.
346
REMOVABLE HARD TOP (IF

EQUIPPED)

HARD TOP
WARNING: When opening, closing,

removing or installing the removable
E333997 your fingers or hands caught in the
10. Remove the four fasteners on each instruction could result in personal injury.
side of your vehicle that secure the
rear roof panel to the vehicle using
1. Remove the roof panels. See
the provided head driver and ratchet.
Removable Roof Panels (page 343).
11. With the tailgate window open, grab
the opening with one hand and
procedure.
slightly lift with the other hand. Lift
the rear roof panel straight up and Removing the Soft Top Trim Piece
off. Place the rear roof panel on a soft
(If Equipped)
surface to prevent damage.
Note: Store the rear roof panel with the Make sure to remove the soft top trim
tailgate window open to prevent damage pieces before installing the hard top.
to the glass seal.
procedure. Torque the fasteners that
secure the rear roof panel to your
vehicle to 15 ± 2 lb.ft (20 ± 3 Nm).
Note: Make sure the locating pins on the
rear roof panel sit flush in your vehicle when
installed.
overtightened.
E334239
Remove the three fasteners to the soft top

trim piece on each side of your vehicle
using the provided head driver and ratchet.
347
REMOVABLE SOFT TOP (IF

EQUIPPED)
OPENING AND CLOSING THE

SOFT TOP

your fingers or hands caught in the E342767
instruction could result in personal injury. 3. Attach the provided straps if you are
off-road driving or driving on rough
roads.
Partially Opening the Soft Top
4. To close, rotate the soft top forward,
making sure it latches in place.
Note: Do not drive without the soft top
properly latched or fully opened.
Note: Do not store your vehicle in cold
weather with the soft top open.
E337137 Fully Opening the Soft Top

1. Unlatch the two latches in the 1. Remove the rear quarter windows and
headliner. the rear window. See Removable
Windows (page 334).
Note: Do not drive unless all rear windows
are removed or installed.
2. Follow the steps to partially open the
soft top.
E337153
2. Push the soft top up and rearward.
348
Removable
1 2 Vehicle Components
5. To return to the partially open position,

press down and lift the handle on the
driver side of your vehicle to unlatch
the soft top, then rotate the soft top
forward.
Note: Do not store your vehicle in cold
weather with the soft top open.
Accessing the Rear Cargo Area

1. Open the tailgate.
E348154
3. Press down the handle on the driver

side of your vehicle to unlatch the soft
top. Lift and rotate the soft top
rearward, making sure to keep your
hands and fingers free of the
mechanism.
E343763
2. Unlatch the soft top.
E339888
4. Press down on the driver side and

passenger side of the soft top to fully
secure it.
349
E342245
2. Remove the three fasteners on each

side in the rear cargo area using the
provided head driver and ratchet.
3. Remove the soft top.
E343786 Note: Safely store the soft top when it is
off your vehicle.
3. Lift the rear of the soft top and support 4. To install, reverse the removal
it with the soft top strut. procedure. Torque the fasteners that
secure soft top to the vehicle to
REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE 15 ± 2 lb.ft (20 ± 3 Nm).
SOFT TOP Note: Make sure the soft top is set flush on
the locating pins.
overtightened.
your fingers or hands caught in the Installing the Soft Top Trim Piece
(If Equipped)
Make sure to install the soft top trim pieces
1. Fully open the soft top. See Opening before installing the soft top.
and Closing the Soft Top (page 348).
350
REMOVING THE FENDER FLARES
E334239
Secure the three fasteners to the soft top

trim piece on each side of your vehicle
using the provided head driver and ratchet.
REMOVABLE FENDERS
REMOVABLE FENDER E334073

PRECAUTIONS
1. Unlock the five quarter turn clips by
turning the clips counterclockwise.
WARNING: Do not drive your
vehicle on public roads with fenders
removed as you will lose the protection
they provide in a crash. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
E334101
2. Pull outward on the fender flare with

your hands to unseat the 5 push pin
clips from the sheet metal.
351
Note: Push pins and quarter pins should 2. Lock the five quarter turn clips by
not be removed from fender flare. turning the clips clockwise.
Installing the Fender Flares

STORING THE DOORS AND
THE ROOF PANELS - 4-DOOR
(IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not store removed

doors or roof panels in vehicle without
using the Ford onboard storage kit, and
verifying they have been secured per
instructions. Failure to follow this
or death.
Note: Cargo can shift under severe vehicle

use, to reduce the risk of damage, avoid high
speed or extreme rock crawl off-road
situations when storing the doors in the
cargo area.
E334101
Note: Inspect the bags and harness
1. Press the five push clips in until they periodically to make sure they are not
are seated. damaged. Inspect the door retention
harness straps to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
Note: Clean the roof panels and doors prior
to storing them in the bags as dirt may
damage the finish.
Storing the Front Roof Panels

1. Remove the front roof panels. See
Removing and Installing the Front
Roof Panel (page 343).
E342192
352
E338782
2. Open the bag and pull out the divider.

Place the first panel into the bag.
Replace the divider before placing the
second panel into the bag.
3. Zip the bag closed.
E340967
4. Gently slide the roof panel bag into the
cargo area. 2. Secure the upper roof bag strap around
the rear seat headrests. Adjust the
Securing the Front Roof Panels tension on the strap until it is snug.
Vertically
Note: Do not over-tighten the strap. This
1. Raise the bag to the vertical position. may cause damage to the headrest.
3. Secure the lower bag hooks to the
forward cargo rings.
Note: Some vehicle accessories may
prevent vertical storage of the panels.
353
Securing the Front Roof Panels Securing the Door Retention

Horizontally Harness
E346658
1. Install the loops through the two

D-rings and secure the panels.
Note: Do not place objects on the roof
panel bag to avoid damaging the panels.
E339591
1. Install the eyebolts located in the Ford

onboard storage kit into the rear cargo
area pillars.
E339585
2. Use the ratchet tool provided in the kit

to assist in tightening the eyebolts. The
eyebolts should rest in the groove of
the handle. Using the tool as a lever,
apply force until fully tightened.
354
Note: We recommend tightening the 6. Place the narrow strap loop over all the
eyebolts to 13 lb.ft (17 Nm). rear headrests and tighten until snug.
Note: The eyebolts can remain installed on Note: Do not over-tighten the strap. This
the vehicle. Make sure the eyebolts are fully may cause damage to the headrest.
tightened each time they are used. 7. Place the remaining harness over the
3. Fully open the tailgate and rear lift seat so it is out of the way.
glass, or open the soft top cargo access
and connect the prop rod to hold open. Storing the Front Doors
1. Adjust the seat backrest to the optimal
seating position. Pull the lever up, and
push the backrest rearward when
storing the two front doors. This
creates more space between the front
door sail and the upper trim. Ensure the
cargo area is clear of any other items.
E339054
See Adjusting the Seat Backrest
4. Install the door retention harness. (page 134).
Note: Refer to harness label for image. 2. See Securing the Door Retention
Harness earlier in this chapter and
complete Steps 1-7.
3. Open the passenger side front door and
install the door bag See Removing
and Installing the Doors (page 339).
E339061
5. Attach upper straps 1 and 2 to the

eyebolts. Attach lower straps 3 and 4
to the forward cargo rings.
E339067
355
9. Lift the retention harness over the

doors. Make sure the straps are
straight.
10. Secure the upper straps 5 and 6 to
the eyelet bolts and lower straps 7
and 8 to the rear cargo rings.
11. Tighten all adjustable straps to
secure the doors.
12. To prevent the doors from moving,
fold the unused rear door bags to use
as a spacer and place them between
the doors and lower cargo hooks as
shown.
1 2 3
E350241
E346666
4. Zip the bag fully closed and gently

place the door in the cargo area. Avoid
contacting the rear pillars, speakers,
striker, and trim. For soft tops, take care
to avoid contacting the prop rod.
5. Slide the door into position with the
bag label facing rearward. Center the
door to make sure there is space
between the door and cargo box trim
panels.
6. Push the lower edge of the door
forward until it stops to create space
for the door peak. E350274
7. Secure the door bag to the retention Note: The doors should not move when
harness with the clip. pressure is applied.
8. Repeat Steps 3-5 for the driver side
front door. Secure the bags using the
clips on the bags.
356
Storing the Front Roof Panels and 4. Zip the bag fully closed and gently
the Front Doors place the door in the cargo area. Avoid
1. Adjust the seat backrest to the optimal striker, and trim.
seating position. Pull the lever up, and
push the backrest rearward when 5. Slide the door into position with the
storing the two front doors. This bag label facing rearward. Center the
creates more space between the front door to make sure there is space
door sail and the upper trim. Ensure the between the door and cargo box trim
cargo area is clear of any other items. panels.
See Adjusting the Seat Backrest 6. Push the lower edge of the door
(page 134). forward until it stops to create space
2. See Securing the Door Retention for the door peak.
Harness earlier in this chapter and 7. Secure the door bag to the retention
complete Steps 1-7. harness with the clip.
3. Open the passenger side front door and 8. Repeat Steps 3-5 for the driver side
install the door bag. See Removing front door. Secure the bags using the
and Installing the Doors (page 339). clips on the bags.
9. Place the front roof panels in the bag,
and then into the cargo area. See
Storing the Doors and the Roof
Panels (page 352).
Note: Do not use the roof bag retention
system in this orientation. Secure the roof
panels by the harness.
straight.
secure the doors and roof panels.
Note: The doors and roof panels should not
move when pressure is applied.
Storing all Four Doors

1. Adjust the rear seat backrest to the
upright position and raise the center
headrest to the highest position. Pull
on the seat backrest to make sure that
E346666 it has fully latched. Ensure the cargo
area is clear of any other items. See
Adjusting the Seat Backrest (page
134).
357
Note: Four door storage in the cargo area 6. Align the door peak with the highest
will prevent the soft tops from fully point in the upper trim.
retracting. Limit to the partially open
position.
Note: Make sure the rear seat headrests are
upright.
2. See Securing the Door Retention
Harness earlier in this chapter and
complete Steps 1-7.
3. Open the driver-side rear door and
install the bag. See Removing and
Installing the Doors (page 339).
E339016
7. Secure the door bag to the retention

harness with the clip.
8. Repeat Steps 3-5 for the remaining
doors. Secure the bags with the
harness clips.
Note: In order to store all four doors
onboard, you must store the doors in the
following sequence: driver-side rear,
driver-side front, passenger-side front,
passenger-side rear.
straight.
secure the doors.
Note: The doors should not move when
pressure is applied.
E338915
Note: When closing the tailgate, make sure
the tailgate and glass do not strike the
4. Zip the bag fully closed and gently stowed doors.
place the door in the cargo area. Avoid
striker, and trim. For soft tops, take care
to avoid contacting the prop rod.
5. Slide the door into position with the
bag label facing rearward.
358
STORING THE ROOF PANELS 3. Zip the bag closed.

- 2-DOOR (IF EQUIPPED) 4. Gently slide the roof panel bag into the
cargo area in the vertical position.
5. Secure the upper roof bag strap around
the rear seat headrests. Adjust the
WARNING: Do not store removed
tension on the straps until it is snug.
doors or roof panels in vehicle without
using the Ford onboard storage kit, and Note: Do not over-tighten the strap. This
verifying they have been secured per may cause damage to the headrest.
instructions. Failure to follow this
or death.
Note: The two-door vehicle is not capable

of on board storage of the doors. Store the
doors in a secure area to avoid damage.
Note: Roof panels should be clean prior to
storage in bags as dirt may damage the
finish.
1. Remove the front roof panels. See
Removing and Installing the Front
Roof Panel (page 343).
E347721
6. Secure the lower bag hooks to the

forward cargo rings.
E338782
2. Open the bag and pull out the divider.

Place the first panel into the bag.
Replace the divider before placing the
second panel into the bag.
359
Vehicle Care
CLEANING PRODUCTS or products of equivalent quality:

For additional information and assistance,
Materials we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
For best results, use the following products
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)

Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M5B194-B
Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M14P4-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.) ESR-M14P3-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with WSS-M14P19-A
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37- WSS-M14P19-A
F/M (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird

droppings, insect deposits and road tar
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR from your vehicle. These items may cause
damage to your vehicle’s paintwork or trim
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR over time.
PRECAUTIONS Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
If you have a Sasquatch or soft top wash.
package, wash your vehicle by hand, or by
using a touchless commercial wash with
no mechanical tracks on the floor.
360
Vehicle Care
CLEANING HEADLAMPS AND Note: Do not use abrasive materials, for

REAR LAMPS example steel wool or plastic pads, as they
can scratch these surfaces.
We recommend that you only use cold or
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
lukewarm water containing car shampoo
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
to clean the headlamps and the rear
lamps.
CLEANING WHEELS
Do not scrape the lamps.
Do not wipe lamps when they are dry. Only use a recommended wheel and tire
cleaner to clean the wheels weekly. For
additional information and assistance, we
CLEANING WINDOWS AND WIPER recommend that you contact an
BLADES authorized dealer.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades: 1. Use a sponge to remove heavy
• Clean the windshield with a deposits of dirt and brake dust.
non-abrasive glass cleaner. 2. Rinse well after cleaning.
Note: When cleaning the interior of the Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
on the instrument panel or door panels. If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
Wipe any glass cleaner off these surfaces extended period after cleaning the wheels
immediately. with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
• Clean the wiper blades with washer a few minutes before parking your vehicle.
fluid or water applied with a soft This reduces the risk of corrosion of the
sponge or cloth. brake discs, brake pads and linings.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
sharp objects to clean or remove decals Note: Some car washes could damage
from the inside of the heated rear window. wheel rims and covers.
This can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle Warranty. Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
CLEANING CHROME, ALUMINIUM damage wheel rims and covers.
OR STAINLESS STEEL
We recommend that you only use a car CLEANING THE ENGINE
shampoo, a soft cloth and water on COMPARTMENT
bumpers and other chrome, aluminium or
stainless steel parts. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove debris
from the screen area below windshield.
Note: For additional information and
assistance, we recommend that you contact Note: If you are not familiar with the parts
an authorized dealer. around the engine do not wash the engine
compartment. Avoid frequent engine
Note: Rinse the area well after cleaning. washes.
361
Vehicle Care
When washing the engine compartment: • Do not use water pressure higher than
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it 2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
is hot or running. • Do not use water hotter than 179°F
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, (82°C).
spark plug wire or spark plug well. Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
• Cover the battery, power distribution at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
box, and air filter assembly to prevent damage graphics and cause the edges to
water damage. peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover
remove the cover before application of CLEANING CAMERA LENSES AND
shampoo and degreaser. SENSORS
• Spray an approved engine shampoo We recommend that you only use
and degreaser on all parts that require lukewarm or cold water and a soft cloth
cleaning and rinse with water. to clean the camera lens and sensors.
Note: Do not pressure wash camera lens
CLEANING THE CONVERTIBLE and sensors.
TOP
Remove lint with a lint roller or a vacuum CLEANING THE UNDERBODY
with a soft bristle brush.
Regularly clean the underside of your
Wash with an approved high quality vehicle using water. Keep body and door
convertible top cleaner and protectant. drain holes free of debris or foreign
Note: Do not use stiff bristle brushes, material.
abrasive materials or household cleaning
products. CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Note: High pressure water may cause water
leaks and possible seal damage to the CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
convertible top. PANEL
CLEANING STRIPES OR
GRAPHICS WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
It is recommended to wash your vehicle by cleaning the steering wheel or
hand however, pressure washing may be instrument panel to avoid contamination
used under the following conditions: of the airbag system.
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern. We recommend that you only clean the
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm) instrument panel and cluster lens with a
distance and 90° angle to your damp soft cloth. Dry the area with a clean,
vehicle's surface. soft cloth.
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
362
Vehicle Care
Note: Avoid cleaners or polishes that 4. Rub the conditioner into the leather
increase the gloss of the upper portion of until it disappears. Allow the
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this conditioner to dry, then repeat the
area helps protect you from undesirable process for the entire interior. If a film
windshield reflection. appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean
cloth.
CLEANING PLASTIC 5. For additional information and
assistance, we recommend that you
We recommend that you only use a mild contact an authorized dealer.
soap and water solution on a soft cloth.
Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING FABRIC SEATS AND
HEADLINERS
CLEANING DISPLAYS AND
SCREENS
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
We recommend that you only use a
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
microfiber cloth in a circular motion to
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
clean off the fingerprint or dust.
Such products could contaminate the
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen, side airbag system and affect
apply a small amount of alcohol to the performance of the side airbag in a crash.
cloth and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the We recommend that you only clean the
touchscreen. fabric seats and headliners in the following
way:
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen. 1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
CLEANING LEATHER AND VINYL 2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
cloth and a mild soap and water
We recommend that you only clean the solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
leather and vinyl surfaces in the following cloth.
way: 3. For additional information and
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a assistance, we recommend that you
vacuum cleaner. contact an authorized dealer.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp For heavy stains, spot clean the area. If a
cloth and a mild soap and water ring forms on the fabric, clean the entire
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft area immediately, but do not oversaturate
cloth. or the ring could set.
3. Make sure the leather is dry, then apply
a small amount of conditioner to a CLEANING CARPETS AND FLOOR
clean, dry cloth. MATS
We recommend that you only clean your
carpets in the following way:
363
Vehicle Care
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a CLEANING SEATBELTS

vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
cloth and a mild soap and water WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
cloth. seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
3. For additional information and the belt webbing.
assistance, we recommend that you
contact an authorized dealer. 1. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
cloth and a mild soap and water
For heavy stains, spot clean the area. If a solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
ring forms on the fabric, clean the entire cloth.
area immediately, but do not over-saturate
or the ring could set.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
We recommend that you only clean your
floor mats in the following way: DAMAGE
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
vacuum cleaner. match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
2. Wash rubber floor mats using mild color code is printed on a sticker on the
soap and lukewarm or cold water. front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
3. Completely dry the floor mat before color code to your authorized dealer to
placing them back in your vehicle. make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
Cleaning Rubber Floors a cleaner to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
1. Remove the floor mats prior to washing
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
out. See Floor Mats (page 298).
Note: Prior to washing out, remove large Read the instructions before using cleaning
debris to prevent clogging the drain. products.
2. Turn active drain plugs in each

passenger compartment WAXING YOUR VEHICLE
counterclockwise to open.
Wax the high-gloss painted surface of your
3. Wash out debris using a standard prewashed vehicle once or twice a year.
garden style hose.
We recommend that you only use an
Note: Use caution to not spray seats,
approved quality wax that does not
console, door interior, electrical connections,
contain abrasives. Follow the
instrument cluster display and underside of
manufacturer's instructions to apply and
the instrument panel on both driver and
remove the wax. For additional information
passenger sides.
and assistance, we recommend that you
4. Wipe out remaining water or debris contact an authorized dealer.
from the floor.
When washing and waxing, park your
5. Install active drain plugs and turn vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
clockwise to close. sunlight.
6. Reinstall floor mats.
364
Vehicle Care
Note: Avoid waxing unpainted or low-gloss

black colored parts, they discolor over time.
365
Storing Your Vehicle
PREPARING YOUR VEHICLE Body

FOR STORAGE • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housings
days or more, the following maintenance and the underside of front fenders.
recommendations ensures your vehicle • Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stays in good operating condition. stored in exposed locations.
Under various conditions, long-term • Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
storage may lead to degraded engine prevent rust.
performance or failure unless you use
specific precautions to preserve your • Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
vehicle. with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
General when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated compartment hinges and latches with
place. a light grade oil.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they • Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and weather damage. • Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered Hybrid Battery Systems
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) We recommend the following actions for
every 15 days to lubricate working parts your vehicle:
and prevent corrosion. • When storing your vehicle for greater
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel than 30 days the state of charge
until the first automatic shutoff of the should be approximately 50%.
fuel pump nozzle. Additionally we recommend
disconnecting the 12V battery which
Engine will reduce system loads on the HV
battery.
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil 12 Volt Battery
contains contaminants which may
cause engine damage. • Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast Note: It is necessary to reset memory
idle with the climate controls set to features if you disconnect the battery
defrost until the engine reaches normal cables.
operating temperature.
Brakes
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine Make sure the brakes and parking brake
is running. release fully.
366
Storing Your Vehicle
Note: If you intend on parking your vehicle • Check fluid levels (including coolant,
for an extended period after cleaning the oil and gas) to make sure there are no
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your leaks, and fluids are at recommended
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so to levels.
reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the • If you remove the battery, clean the
brake discs, brake pads and linings. battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Tires
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
• Maintain recommended air pressure. any concerns or issues.
Note: If you intend on parking your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This reduces the risk of corrosion of the
brake discs, brake pads and linings.
REMOVING YOUR VEHICLE

FROM STORAGE
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
367
Wheel and Tire Information
LOCATING THE TIRE LABEL Tire Quality Grades apply to new

pneumatic passenger car tires.
You will find a Tire Label They do not apply to deep tread,
containing tire inflation pressure winter-type snow tires,
by tire size and other important space-saver or temporary use
information located on the B-Pillar spare tires, light truck or LT type
or the edge of the driver's door. tires, tires with nominal rim
See Locating the Safety diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
Compliance Certification limited production tires as defined
Labels (page 272). in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
DEPARTMENT OF U.S. Department of
TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Transportation Tire quality
TIRE QUALITY GRADES grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires us to give
you the following information
about tire grades exactly as the
government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
E142542 For example, a tire graded 150
Tire Quality Grades apply to new would wear 1½ times as well on
pneumatic passenger car tires. the government course as a tire
The Quality grades can be found graded 100. The relative
where applicable on the tire performance of tires depends
sidewall between tread shoulder upon the actual conditions of their
and maximum section width. For use, however, and may depart
example: Treadwear 200 significantly from the norm due to
Traction AA Temperature A. variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
These Tire Quality Grades are characteristics and climate.
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
368
Traction AA A B C test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
WARNING: The traction and reduce tire life, and excessive
grade assigned to this tire is temperature can lead to sudden
based on straight-ahead braking tire failure. The grade C
traction tests, and does not corresponds to a level of
include acceleration, cornering, performance which all passenger
hydroplaning or peak traction car tires must meet under the
characteristics. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
The traction grades, from highest represent higher levels of
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The performance on the laboratory
grades represent the tire’s ability test wheel than the minimum
to stop on wet pavement as required by law.
measured under controlled
conditions on specified INFORMATION ON THE TIRE
government test surfaces of SIDEWALL
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction Both United States and Canada
performance. Federal regulations require tire
Temperature A B C manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
WARNING: The describes the fundamental
temperature grade for this tire is characteristics of the tire and also
established for a tire that is provides a U.S. DOT Tire
properly inflated and not Identification Number for safety
overloaded. Excessive speed, standard certification and in case
underinflation, or excessive of a recall.
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
369
Information on P Type Tires B. 215: Indicates the nominal

width of the tire in millimeters
E from sidewall edge to sidewall
C D F edge. In general, the larger the
G number, the wider the tire.
B
H C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
A which gives the tire's ratio of
I height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
M J your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
L index. It is an index that relates to
K
E142543 how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
P215/65R15 95H is an example of your owner’s manual. If not,
a tire size, load index and speed contact a local tire dealer.
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that Note: You may not find this
the tire size, load index and speed information on all tires because it
rating for your vehicle may be is not required by federal law.
different from this example.) G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated rating. The speed rating denotes
by the Tire and Rim Association, the speed at which a tire is
that may be used for service on designed to be driven for extended
cars, sport utility vehicles, periods of time under a standard
minivans and light trucks. Note: If condition of load and inflation
your tire size does not begin with pressure. The tires on your vehicle
a letter this may mean it is may operate at different
designated by either the European conditions for load and inflation
Tire and Rim Technical pressure. These speed ratings may
Organization or the Japan Tire need to be adjusted for the
Manufacturing Association. difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
370
Note: You may not find this the tire size code and the last four
information on all tires because it numbers represent the week and
is not required by federal law. year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
Letter Speed rating the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
rating the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
M 81 mph (130 km/h) week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
N 87 mph (140 km/h) used for traceability. This
Q 99 mph (159 km/h) information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
R 106 mph (171 km/h) a recall.
S 112 mph (180 km/h) I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
T 118 mph (190 km/h) AT: All Terrain, or
U 124 mph (200 km/h) AS: All Season.
H 130 mph (210 km/h) J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
V 149 mph (240 km/h) number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
W 168 mph (270 km/h) the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
Y 186 mph (299 km/h) manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
Note: For tires with a maximum sidewall, which include steel,
speed capability over 149 mph nylon, polyester, and others.
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
those with a maximum speed maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
capability over 186 mph (299 tire. See the Safety Compliance
km/h), tire manufacturers always Certification Label (affixed to
use the letters ZR. either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification that meets the door-latch post,
Number (TIN): This begins with next to the driver's seating
the letters DOT and indicates that position), for the correct tire
the tire meets all federal pressure for your vehicle.
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code L. Treadwear, Traction and
designating where it was Temperature Grades:
manufactured, the next two are
371
*Treadwear: The treadwear door-latch post, or the door edge

grade is a comparative rating that meets the door-latch post,
based on the wear rate of the tire next to the driver's seating
when tested under controlled position), or Tire Label which is
conditions on a specified located on the B-Pillar or the edge
government test course. For of the driver’s door. The cold
example, a tire graded 150 would inflation pressure should never be
wear one and one-half times as set lower than the recommended
well on the government course as pressure on the vehicle label.
a tire graded 100. The tire suppliers may have
*Traction: The traction grades, additional markings, notes or
from highest to lowest are AA, A, warnings such as standard load
B, and C. The grades represent the or radial tubeless.
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under Additional Information
controlled conditions on specified Contained on the Tire Sidewall
government test surfaces of for LT Type Tires
asphalt and concrete. A tire Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
marked C may have poor traction apply to this type of tire.
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature B
grades are A (the highest), B and C
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of A
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's D
B
recommended cold inflation E142544
pressure which can be found on

the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
372
LT type tires have some additional

information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below. B C D
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated A E
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates E142545
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as T type tires have some additional
a single, defined as two tires information beyond those of P
(total) on the rear axle. type tires; these differences are
described below:
Information on T Type Tires
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
T145/80D16 is an example of a designated by the Tire and Rim
tire size. Association, that is intended for
Note: The temporary tire size for temporary service on cars, sport
your vehicle may be different from utility vehicles, minivans and light
this example. Tire Quality Grades trucks.
do not apply to this type of tire. B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
373
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio *Extra load: A class of P-metric

which gives the tire's ratio of or Metric tires designed to carry a
height to width. Numbers of 70 or heavier maximum load at 42 psi
lower indicate a short sidewall. (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. not increase the tire’s load
R: Indicates a radial type tire. carrying capability.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim *kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
diameter in inches. If you change air pressure.
your wheel size, you will have to *PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
purchase new tires to match the standard unit of air pressure.
new wheel diameter.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
GLOSSARY OF TIRE pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
TERMINOLOGY sunlight for an hour or more and
*Tire label: A label showing the prior to the vehicle being driven for
original equipment tire sizes, 1 mi (1.6 km).
recommended inflation pressure *Recommended inflation
and the maximum weight the pressure: The cold inflation
vehicle can carry. pressure found on the Safety
*Tire Identification Number Compliance Certification Label
(TIN): A number on the sidewall (affixed to either the door hinge
of each tire providing information pillar, door-latch post, or the door
about the tire brand and edge that meets the door-latch
manufacturing plant, tire size and post, next to the driver's seating
date of manufacture. Also referred position), or Tire Label located on
to as DOT code. the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire. * B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
*Standard load: A class of the front door.
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set *Bead area of the tire: Area of
pressure. For example: For the tire next to the rim.
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and * Sidewall of the tire: Area
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar). between the bead area and the
Increasing the inflation pressure tread.
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
374
*Tread area of the tire: Area of U.S. DOT Tire Identification

the perimeter of the tire that Number
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle. Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) manufacturers to place
for a tire or a tire and tube standardized information on the
assembly upon which the tire sidewall of all tires. This
beads are seated. information identifies and
describes the fundamental
TIRE REPLACEMENT characteristics of the tire and also
REQUIREMENTS provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
AGE standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
WARNING: Tires degrade and indicates that the tire meets
over time depending on many all federal standards. The next
factors such as weather, storage two numbers or letters are the
conditions, and conditions of use plant code designating where it
(load, speed, inflation pressure) was manufactured, the next two
the tires experience throughout are the tire size code and the last
their lives. four numbers represent the week
In general, tires should be and year the tire was built. For
replaced after six years example, the numbers 317 mean
regardless of tread wear. the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
However, heat caused by hot the numbers go to four digits. For
climates or frequent high loading example, 2501 means the 25th
conditions can accelerate the week of 2001. The numbers in
aging process and may require between are identification codes
tires to be replaced more used for traceability. This
frequently. information is used to contact
You should replace your spare customers if a tire defect requires
tire when you replace the road a recall.
tires or after six years due to
aging even if it has not been Tire Replacement
used. Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
375
WARNING: Only use WARNING: To reduce the

replacement tires and wheels risk of serious injury, when
that are the same size, load mounting replacement tires and
index, speed rating and type wheels, you should not exceed
(such as P-metric versus the maximum pressure indicated
LT-metric or all-season versus on the sidewall of the tire to set
all-terrain) as those originally the beads without additional
provided by Ford. The precautions listed below. If the
recommended tire and wheel beads do not seat at the
size may be found on either the maximum pressure indicated,
Safety Compliance Certification re-lubricate and try again.
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or WARNING: For a mounting
the door edge that meets the pressure more than 20 psi
door-latch post, next to the (1.38 bar) greater than the
driver's seating position), or the maximum pressure, a Ford
Tire Label which is located on dealer or other tire service
the B-Pillar or edge of the professional should do the
driver's door. If this information mounting.
is not found on these labels, then
you should contact your WARNING: Always inflate
authorized dealer as soon as steel carcass tires with a remote
possible. Use of any tire or wheel air fill with the person inflating
not recommended by Ford can standing at a minimum of 12 ft
affect the safety and (3.66 m) away from the wheel
performance of your vehicle, and tire assembly.
which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle WARNING: When inflating
control, vehicle rollover, personal the tire for mounting pressures
injury and death. up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on
the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
• Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
376
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft If the tire pressure monitoring

(3.66 m) away from the wheel system indicator is flashing, your
and tire assembly. system is malfunctioning. Your
• Use both eye and ear replacement tire might be
protection. incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
Important: Remember to replace some component of the system
the wheel valve stems when the may be damaged.
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
USING SNOW CHAINS
If a four tire rotation is being
followed, it is recommended that
both front tires or both rear tires WARNING: Do not exceed 30 mph
generally be replaced as a pair if (50 km/h). Failure to follow this
the two remaining worn tires still instruction could result in the loss of
have usable tread depth. If a five control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
tire rotation is being followed and
the fifth tire is used to replace a WARNING: Do not use snow chains
single unrepairable tire, a four tire on snow-free roads.
rotation should be followed with
the undamaged tires. Any WARNING: Only fit snow chains to
replacement for the damaged tire specified tires.
should be used as a dedicated
WARNING: If your vehicle is fitted
spare until the remaining tires are with wheel trims, remove them before
replaced as a set. fitting snow chains.
To avoid potential Four-Wheel
WARNING: If you choose to install
Drive (4WD) malfunction or snow tires on your vehicle, they must be
(4WD) system damage, it is the same size, construction, and load
recommended to replace all tires range as the original tires listed on the
used in the tire rotation rather tire placard, and they must be installed
than mixing significantly worn tires on all four wheels. Mixing tires of
with new tires. different size or construction on your
vehicle can adversely affect your
The tire pressure sensors mounted vehicle's handling and braking, and may
in the wheels (originally installed lead to loss of vehicle control.
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels. Only use snow chains on rear wheels.
Install snow chains in pairs. Do not use
The use of wheels or tires not self-tensioning snow chains.
recommended may affect the Only use snow chains on the following
operation of your tire pressure specified tire sizes:
monitoring system.
377
• 255/70R16 • When driving with snow chains do not

• Only install chains that are 15 mm exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) or the
or less. maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
• 255/75R17
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the snow
• Only install chains that are 15 mm chains rub or bang against the vehicle,
or less. stop and tighten them. If this does not
We recommend you use steel wheels of work, remove the snow chains to
the same size and specification if snow prevent vehicle damage.
chains are required because chains may • Remove the snow chains when they
chip aluminum wheels. are no longer needed. Do not use snow
Follow these guidelines when using snow chains on dry roads.
tires and traction devices: • If a temporary spare wheel is mounted
on your vehicle, do not use snow chains
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
on the axle with the temporary spare
vehicle.
wheel.
• Purchase snow chains from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions.
E292547
If you have any questions regarding snow

Use snow chains that fit against the
chains, please contact your authorized
sidewall of the tire to prevent the chains
dealer.
from touching the wheel rims or
suspension, see following illustration
above.
378
Tire Care
CHECKING THE TIRE

PRESSURES WARNING: Do not use the
tire pressure displayed in the
Safe operation of your vehicle information display as a tire
requires that your tires are pressure gauge. Failure to follow
properly inflated. Every day before this instruction could result in
you drive, check your tires. personal injury or death.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and Use the recommended cold
check the tire pressure with a tire inflation pressure for optimum tire
gauge. Inflate all tires to the performance and wear.
recommended inflation pressure. Under-inflation or over-inflation
See Inflating the Tires (page may cause uneven treadwear
379). patterns.
Inflate your tires to the
INFLATING THE TIRES recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum
inflation pressure information
WARNING: Under-inflation found on the tire. You can find the
is the most common cause of tire label with the recommended
tire failures and may result in tire inflation pressure next to the
severe tire cracking, tread tire size on the B-Pillar or the edge
separation or blowout, with of the driver door.
unexpected loss of vehicle The recommended tire inflation
control and increased risk of pressure is also found on the
injury. Under-inflation increases Safety Compliance Certification
sidewall flexing and rolling Label, affixed to either the door
resistance, resulting in heat hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
buildup and internal damage to door edge that meets the
the tire. It also may result in door-latch on the B-pillar, or on
unnecessary tire stress, irregular the edge of the driver door.
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to Failure to follow the tire pressure
half of its air pressure and not recommendations can cause
appear to be flat! uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
379
Tire Care
INSPECTING THE TIRE FOR INSPECTING THE TIRE FOR

WEAR DAMAGE
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
dismounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
E142546 because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), Periodically inspect the tire treads
tires must be replaced to help and sidewalls for damage, such
prevent your vehicle from skidding as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
and hydroplaning. Built-in cracks in the tread groove and
treadwear indicators, or wear bars, separation in the tread or sidewall.
which look like narrow strips of If damage is observed or
smooth rubber across the tread suspected, have the tire inspected
will appear on the tire when the by a tire professional.
tread is worn down to one Safety Practices
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear WARNING: If your vehicle
bars, the tire is worn out and must is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do
be replaced. not rapidly spin the tires;
The tires should also be balanced spinning the tires can tear the
periodically. An unbalanced tire tire and cause an explosion. A
and wheel assembly may result in tire can explode in as little as
irregular tire wear. three to five seconds.
Periodically inspect the tire treads WARNING: Do not spin the
for uneven or excessive wear and wheels at over 34 mph
remove objects such as stones, (55 km/h). The tires may fail and
nails or glass that may be wedged injure a passenger or bystander.
in the tread grooves.
380
Tire Care
Highway Hazards Wheel misalignment in the front

or the rear can cause uneven and
No matter how carefully you drive, rapid treadwear of your tires and
there is always the possibility that should be corrected by an
you could eventually have a flat authorized dealer.
tire on the highway. Drive slowly
to the closest safe area out of
traffic. This could further damage INSPECTING THE WHEEL
the flat tire, but your safety is VALVE STEMS
more important.
Check the valve stems for holes,
If you feel a sudden vibration or cracks, or cuts that could permit
ride disturbance while driving, or air leakage.
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately TIRE ROTATION
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is WARNING: If the tire label
under-inflated or damaged, shows different tire pressures for
deflate it, remove the wheel and the front and rear tires and the
replace it with your spare tire and vehicle has a tire pressure
wheel. If you cannot detect a monitoring system, then you
cause, have the vehicle towed to need to update the settings for
the nearest repair facility or tire the system sensors. Always
dealer to have the vehicle perform the system reset
inspected. procedure after tire rotation. If
you do not reset the system, it
Tire and Wheel Alignment may not provide a low tire
pressure warning when
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or necessary.
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become Note: If your tires show uneven
misaligned or cause damage to wear ask an authorized dealer to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to check for and correct any wheel
pull to one side when you are misalignment, tire imbalance or
driving, the wheels could be out of mechanical problem involved
alignment. Have an authorized before tire rotation.
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically. Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
381
Tire Care
Rotating your tires at the Rear-wheel drive vehicles and

recommended interval, as four-wheel drive vehicles with four
indicated in the scheduled tire rotation, front tires at left of
maintenance chapter, will help diagram.
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life.
For the best tire life, a five tire
rotation is recommended that
includes the matching spare tire
mounted on the back of the
vehicle. This rotation requires a
forced re-learning of your tire
pressure monitor system sensors
by your vehicle, and should be E142548
performed by an authorized dealer
or a service center to ensure the Sometimes irregular tire wear can
tire pressure monitor system will be corrected by rotating the tires.
provide proper warning at all
times. When performing the tire
rotation yourself, a four tire
rotation is recommended, without
using the spare tire in the rotation,
so that no tire pressure monitor
system sensor re-learn is required.
If a five tire rotation is performed
without a tire pressure monitor
system sensor re-learn, the
system may not provide a low tire
pressure warning when necessary.
Keep in mind that a spare tire that
is not used in the tire rotation
should only be used temporarily
in the event of a flat tire, not as a
permanent replacement. The
spare tire should always be
replaced if it exceeds 6 years of
age, regardless of whether it is
part of the tire rotation.
382
WHAT IS THE TIRE PRESSURE Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
MONITORING SYSTEM inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
The tire pressure monitoring on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
system measures the vehicle's pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
tire pressures. A warning lamp a different size than the size indicated on
illuminates if one or more tires are the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
significantly underinflated or if there is a label, you should determine the proper tire
system malfunction. inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
SYSTEM OVERVIEW illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
WARNING: If the tire pressure when the low tire pressure telltale
monitor sensor becomes damaged it illuminates, you should stop and check
may not function. your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
WARNING: Under-inflation is the significantly under-inflated tire causes the
most common cause of tire failures and tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
may result in severe tire cracking, tread Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
separation or blowout, with unexpected and tire tread life, and may affect the
loss of vehicle control and increased risk vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
of injury. Under-inflation increases Please note that the TPMS is not a
sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
resulting in heat buildup and internal it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
damage to the tire. It also may result in correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, has not reached the level to trigger
loss of vehicle control and accidents. A illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
tire can lose up to half of its air pressure telltale.
and not appear to be flat!
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
WARNING: To determine the a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see when the system is not operating properly.
the Safety Compliance Certification The TPMS malfunction indicator is
Label (on the door hinge pillar, combined with the low tire pressure
door-latch post or the door edge that telltale. When the system detects a
meets the door-latch post, next to the malfunction, the telltale will flash for
driver seat) or the Tire Label on the approximately one minute and then remain
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
383
When the malfunction indicator is TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate WARNING: The tire pressure
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent monitoring system is not a substitute for
the TPMS from functioning properly. manually checking tire pressures. You
Always check the TPMS malfunction should periodically check tire pressures
telltale after replacing one or more tires or using a pressure gauge. Failure to
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the correctly maintain tire pressures could
replacement or alternate tires and wheels increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
allow the TPMS to continue to function control, vehicle rollover and personal
properly. injury.
WARNING: Do not use the tire

WARNING: Changes or pressure displayed in the information
modifications not expressively approved display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure
by the party responsible for compliance to follow this instruction could result in
could void the user's authority to operate personal injury or death.
radio certification number only signifies Note: The use of tire sealants can damage
that Industry Canada technical the tire pressure monitoring system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: When the outside temperature drops
1. This device may not cause harmful significantly, the tire pressure could
interference, and decrease and activate the low tire pressure
warning lamp.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including The warning lamp could also illuminate
interference that may cause undesired when you use a spare wheel, or tire sealant
operation. from the inflator kit.
Note: Regularly checking the vehicle tire
pressures can reduce the possibility for the
warning lamp to illuminate due to outside
air temperature changes.
Note: After you inflate the tires to the
recommended pressure it could take up to
two minutes of driving over 20 mph
(32 km/h) for the warning indicator to turn
off.
384
VIEWING THE TIRE Using the information display

PRESSURES arrow keys navigate to the truck
info section where you can view
the tire pressures.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM –
TROUBLESHOOTING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM – WARNING LAMPS
The low tire pressure warning
E224333 lamp has combined functions,
as it warns you when your tires
need air, and when the system is no longer
capable of functioning as intended.
Warning Lamp Possible Cause Action Required
Solid warning lamp One or more tires are After inflating your tires to the manufac-
significantly under turer’s recommended pressure as shown
inflated on the tire label, on the edge of driver
door or the B-pillar, drive your vehicle for
at least two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light turns off.
Solid warning lamp Temporary spare wheel Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
or flashing warning in use and refit it to your vehicle to restore
lamp operation of the system.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are inflated to the recom-
system malfunction mended tire pressures and the temporary
spare wheel is not in use, the system
detected a fault that requires service.
possible.
385
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Tire Pressure Low After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended
pressure as shown on the tire label, on the edge of the driver
door or the B-pillar, drive your vehicle for at least two minutes
over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off.
Tire Pressure Monitor The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
Fault your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor The system has detected a fault that requires service or a
Fault spare tire is in use. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
386
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

WARNING: Check that the vehicle
Note: You should only use tire sealants in jack is not damaged or deformed and
roadside emergencies as they may cause the thread is lubricated and clean.
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor. WARNING: Do not work on your
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system vehicle when the jack is the only support
indicator light illuminates when the spare as your vehicle could slip off the jack.
tire is in use. To restore the full function of Failure to follow this instruction could
the monitoring system, all road wheels result in personal injury or death.
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle. WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not wheel, shift the transmission into park
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually (P), set the parking brake and use an
decrease your speed. Hold the steering appropriate block or wheel chock to
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
place on the side of the road. the wheel being changed. For example,
Have a flat serviced by an authorized when changing the front left wheel,
dealer in order to prevent damage to the place an appropriate block or wheel
tire pressure monitoring system sensors. chock on the right rear wheel.
Replace the spare tire with a road tire as
soon as possible. During repairing or WARNING: Always use the jack
replacing of the flat tire, have the provided as original equipment with your
authorized dealer inspect the tire pressure vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
monitoring system sensor for damage. provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight,
Tire Change Procedure including any vehicle cargo or
modifications. If you are unsure if the jack
capacity is adequate, contact the
WARNING: Failure to follow these authorized dealer.
guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or WARNING: Use only the specified
death. jacking points. If you use other positions,
you may damage the body, steering,
WARNING: Do not get under a suspension, engine, braking system or
vehicle that is only supported by a the fuel lines.
vehicle jack.
WARNING: Never place anything
WARNING: The jack supplied with between the vehicle jack and your
this vehicle is only intended for changing vehicle.
wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other
than when you are changing a wheel in WARNING: Never place anything
an emergency. between the vehicle jack and the ground.
387
WARNING: Park your vehicle so

that you do not obstruct the flow of
traffic or place yourself in any danger and
set up a warning triangle.
WARNING: Do not attempt to

change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being
hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel. E142551
Note: Passengers should not remain in your 4. Find the jack and tool kit in the rear
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. trunk of the vehicle. Turn the jack
retainer counterclockwise to remove
Note: Jack at the specified locations to the jack and jack extension block.
avoid damage to the vehicle.
E166722
Note: No maintenance or additional E324358

lubrication of your jack is required over the
service life of your vehicle. 5. Remove the tool bag.
1. Park the vehicle on a level firm ground
and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Apply the parking brake, and place the
transmission in park (P) for an
automatic transmission or reverse (R)
for a manual transmission and turn the
engine off.
3. Block the wheel diagonally opposite of
the flat tire. For example, if the left
front is flat, block the right rear wheel.
E343390
388
6. Remove the lug wrench from the tool

bag. Turn the spare tire fasteners
counterclockwise starting with the
lowest first, and remove the spare tire
from the rear of the vehicle.
Note: The wheel lock key must be inserted
into the wheel lock nut before the lug
wrench can turn the locking nut.
1
E328732
E328591 8. When you are changing a flat front tire,

connect the extension block to the jack
Note: Do not lay the wheel's face down on loadrest using the wing bolt as shown.
the ground, as there is a risk of scratching Connect the jack handle to the jack,
or marring the wheel if laid down on an and use the lug nut wrench to operate
uneven surface. the jack.
7. Loosen each road wheel nut a half a
turn counterclockwise, do not remove
them until the flat tire is raised off the
ground.
E330077
9. Do not use the extension block when

you are changing a flat tire on the rear
of the vehicle. Assemble the jack
handle using the extensions as shown
to operate the jack when placing under
the rear axle.
389
E330074
Note: Only use the jack on the specified

E330076
jacking points and as close to the affected
wheel as possible.
10. The front jacking point location is 12. Place the jack at the jacking point
indicated by an arrow-shaped mark closest to the flat tire you are
on the frame. changing. Turn the lug wrench handle
clockwise until the flat tire is
completely off the ground.
13. Remove the wheel nuts with the
wheel nut wrench.
14. Replace the flat tire with the spare
wheel, make sure the wheel is on with
the valve stem facing outward.
15. Install the wheel nuts snug against
the hub. Do not fully tighten the
wheel nuts until the vehicle is lowered
back onto the ground.
E343635
16. Turn the wrench handle
11. Use the rear axle tube for the rear counterclockwise to lower the jack.
jacking point. 17. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown below.
390
E166719
18. Stow the flat tire on the rear of the

vehicle and fully tighten the securing
E324079
nuts.
19. Remove the wheel blocks.
20. Stow the jack and tools in the original
locations shown in the removal
section and tighten the retaining
screws by turning clockwise.
391
WHEEL NUTS
Wheel Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel
hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it may not
function.
Bolt size lb.ft (Nm)

*
M12 X 1.5 100 lb.ft (135 Nm)

*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only our
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 mi (160 km) after any wheel
disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
E145950
A Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
392
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Engine Specification
Compression ratio. 10.0:1

Displacement. 138 in³ (2,261 cm³)
Firing order. 1-3-4-2
Ignition system. Coil on plug
Spark plug gap. 0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
393
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Engine Specification
Compression ratio. 10.0:1

Displacement. 165 in³ (2,700 cm³)
Firing order. 1-4-2-5-3-6
Ignition system. Coil on plug
Spark plug gap. 0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
394
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Component Motorcraft Part Number
Air filter element. FA-2022

Battery. BAGM-94RH7-800
Cabin air filter. FP-93
1 FL-910-S
Engine oil filter.
Spark plug. SP-578
Transmission fluid filter. FT-218
Windshield wiper blade-front. WW-1703
Windshield wiper blade-rear. WW-801
1 If
a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.parts.ford.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
395
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Component Motorcraft Part Number
Air filter element. FA-2022

Battery. BAGM-94RH7-800
Cabin air filter. FP-93
1 FL-2062-A
Engine oil filter.
Spark plug. SP-578
Transmission fluid filter. FT-218
Windshield wiper blade-front. WW-1703
Windshield wiper blade-rear. WW-801
1 If
a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.parts.ford.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
396
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND

SPECIFICATION - 2.3L
ECOBOOST™
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover. E142732
• Longer engine cranking periods. An oil that displays this symbol conforms
• Increased emission levels. to current engine, emission system and
• Reduced vehicle performance. fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
• Reduced fuel economy.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Variant Including the Oil Filter
All. 6.2 qt (5.9 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor WSS-M2C961-A1

Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
397
Alternative Engine Oil for we recommend that you use the following
Extremely Cold Climates alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
To improve engine cold start performance, reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name Specification
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend WSS-M2C963-A1
E240523
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND

SPECIFICATION - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™
Use oil that meets the defined
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
E142732
warranty does not cover. An oil that displays this symbol conforms
• Longer engine cranking periods. to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
• Increased emission levels.
ILSAC.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
398
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
additives because they are unnecessary
recommended viscosity grade that meet
and could lead to engine damage that your
API SP requirements and display the API
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Variant Including the Oil Filter
All. 7.0 qt (6.6 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor WSS-M2C961-A1

Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for

Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name Specification
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend WSS-M2C963-A1
399
E240523
If you do not use coolant that meets the

defined specification, it could result in:
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 2.3L warranty does not cover.
ECOBOOST™ • Reduced vehicle performance.
Use coolant that meets the defined
specification.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
With automatic transmission. 10.5 qt (9.9 L)

With manual transmission. 9.6 qt (9.1 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/ WSS-M97B57-A2

Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
400
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY If you do not use coolant that meets the
defined specification, it could result in:
AND SPECIFICATION - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™ warranty does not cover.
Use coolant that meets the defined • Reduced vehicle performance.
specification.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 12.4 qt (11.7 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/ WSS-M97B57-A2

Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
FUEL TANK CAPACITY

Capacities
Variant Quantity
Long wheelbase. 21.1 gal (80 L)

Short wheelbase. 17.4 gal (66 L)
401
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM the air conditioning refrigerant system

CAPACITY AND can cause personal injury.
SPECIFICATION Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
defined specifications.
WARNING: The air conditioning If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
refrigerant system contains refrigerant meets the defined specifications, it could
under high pressure. Only qualified result in:
personnel should service the air • Component damage that your vehicle
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Variant Refrigerant
All. 19.4 oz (0.55 kg)
Materials
Name Specification
R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.) WSS-M17B21-A

R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.) WSS-M2C300-A2
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION

Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. Fill as required.
402
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen- WSS-M14P19-A

trate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-F/M(Canada)
If you do not use fluid that meets the

defined specification and viscosity grade,
MANUAL TRANSMISSION it could result in:
FLUID CAPACITY AND • Component damage that your vehicle
SPECIFICATION warranty does not cover.
Use fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade. • Reduced fuel economy.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1
2.4 qt (2.3 L)
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Dual Clutch Transmission Fluid(U.S.) WSS-M2C200-D2

Motorcraft® Dual Clutch Transmission Fluid / Huile
pour boîtes embrayage double Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XT-11-QDC(U.S. & Canada)
CLUTCH FLUID CAPACITY AND AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

SPECIFICATION FLUID CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
The clutch and brake systems share the
same fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Use fluid that meets the defined
Specification (page 404). specification and viscosity grade.
403
If you do not use fluid that meets the • Reduced fuel economy.
defined specification and viscosity grade, Note: Only use MERCON ULV transmission
it could result in: fluid for automatic transmissions that
• Component damage that your vehicle require MERCON ULV transmission fluid.
warranty does not cover. The use of any other fluid could cause
• Reduced vehicle performance. transmission damage.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1
13.1 qt (12.4 L)
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis- WSS-M2C949-A, MERCON® ULV

sion Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)
Note: We recommend you use Dot 4 Low

Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION meeting WSS-M6C65-A2 specifications or
ISO 4925 Class 6 standards. If you use any
Use fluid that meets the defined fluid other than the recommended fluid, it
specification and viscosity grade. could cause reduced brake performance
If you do not use fluid that meets the and not meet our performance standards.
defined specification and viscosity grade, Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
it could result in: Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
• Component damage that your vehicle products or other materials could result in
warranty does not cover. brake system damage and possible failure.
• Reduced brake performance.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. Fill as required.
404
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor WSS-M6C65-A2

Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)

TRANSFER CASE FLUID it could result in:
CAPACITY AND • Component damage that your vehicle
SPECIFICATION warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
4x4 with part time engagement. 1.3 qt (1.2 L)

Advanced 4x4 with 4A mode. 1.6 qt (1.55 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,

Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)

FRONT AXLE FLUID CAPACITY it could result in:
AND SPECIFICATION • Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
specification and viscosity grade. • Reduced vehicle performance.
405
Capacities
Variant Quantity
With electronic locking differential. 26.2 fl oz (775 ml)

Without electronic locking differential and 29.2 fl oz (865 ml)
without front axle disconnect.
Without electronic locking differential and 30.4 fl oz (900 ml)
with front axle disconnect.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle WSP-M2C197-A

Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Axle Lubricant
/ Lubrifiant pour essieux de très haute qualité SAE
80W-90 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-80W90-QL(U.S.)
CXY-80W90-1L(Canada)

REAR AXLE FLUID CAPACITY it could result in:
AND SPECIFICATION • Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
specification and viscosity grade. • Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
With electronic locking differential. 63.6 fl oz (1.88 L)

Without electronic locking differential. 65.3 fl oz (1.93 L)
406
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic WSS-M2C942-A

Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
407
Vehicle Identification
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
LOCATING THE VEHICLE

IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is on the
left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142477
A World manufacturer identifier.

B Brake system, gross vehicle
weight rating, restraint devices
and their locations.
C Make, vehicle line, series, body
type.
D Engine or motor type.
E Check digit.
F Model year.
E311767 G Assembly plant.
Note: In the illustration, XXXX is H Production sequence number.
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER OVERVIEW
The vehicle identification number contains
the following information:
408
Connected Vehicle
WHAT IS A CONNECTED ENABLING AND DISABLING THE

MODEM
VEHICLE
1. Press Settings.
A connected vehicle has technology that
allows your vehicle to connect to a mobile 2. Press Connectivity.
network and for you to access a range of 3. Press Connected Vehicle Features.
features. When used in conjunction with 4. Switch vehicle connectivity on or off.
the FordPass app, it could allow you to
monitor and control your vehicle further,
for example checking the tire pressures, CONNECTING FORDPASS TO THE
the fuel level and the vehicle location. For MODEM
additional information, refer to the local
Ford website. 1. Make sure that the modem is enabled
using the vehicle settings menu.
2. Open the FordPass app on your device
CONNECTED VEHICLE and log in.
REQUIREMENTS 3. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle
if already added.
Connected service and related feature
functionality requires a compatible vehicle 4. Select the option for vehicle details.
network. 5. Select the option to activate your
Some remote features require additional vehicle.
service activation. Log in to your Ford 6. Make sure that the name on the screen
account for details. Some restrictions, third matches the name shown in your
party terms and message or data rates FordPass account.
may apply. 7. Confirm that FordPass account is
connected to the modem.
CONNECTED VEHICLE
LIMITATIONS CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A WI-FI NETWORK
Evolving technology, cellular networks, or
regulations could affect functionality and Access the application drawer on the
availability, or continued provision of some touchscreen.
features. These changes could even stop
some features from functioning. 1. Press Settings.
2. Press Connectivity.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO 3. Press Manage Wi-Fi Networks.
A MOBILE NETWORK 4. Switch Wi-Fi Hotspot on.
5. Press View Available Networks.
WHAT IS THE MODEM 6. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
The modem allows access to a Note: Enter the network password to
range of features built into your connect to a secure network.
vehicle.
409
Connected Vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Possible Cause and Resolution
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi – Password error.

network. • Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection – Weak network signal.

disconnects after successful • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
connection. a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot – Obstructed network signal.

but the network signal • If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
strength is weak. your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the – Hidden network.

list of available networks • Make the network visible and try again.
that I expect to see.
410
Connected Vehicle
Symptom Possible Cause and Resolution
I cannot see the Wi-Fi – System limitation.

hotspot name when I search • Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.
for Wi-Fi networks on my
cell phone or other device. • The system does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at
this time.
Software downloads take – Weak network signal.

too long. • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
The system seems to – No software update available.

connect to a Wi-Fi network – Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
and the signal strength is of terms and conditions.
excellent but the software
does not update. • Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
411
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
CREATING A VEHICLE WI-FI 2. If the portal does not open on your

device, open a website and it redirects
HOTSPOT to the vehicle network carrier’s portal.
You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your Note: Secure websites do not redirect.
vehicle and allow devices to connect to it 3. Follow the instructions on the carrier
for access to the Internet. portal to purchase a plan.
Select the settings option on the Note: If you have an active plan, the system
feature bar. does not redirect to the vehicle network
E280315
carrier’s portal when you connect a device.
1. Press Vehicle Hotspot. Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website
Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting to purchase more data.
is on. Note: If data usage information is available
2. Press Settings. in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is
approximate.
3. Press Edit.
Note: If you carry out a master reset, the
4. Press Hotspot visibility. system does not remove your vehicle from
Note: The hotspot visibility default setting your vehicle network carrier’s account. To
is on. remove your vehicle from the account,
contact your vehicle network carrier.
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name
Note: The vehicle network carrier provides
and Password Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your
Select the settings option on the vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
feature bar. and availability.
E280315
1. Press Vehicle Hotspot. CHANGING THE VEHICLE WI-

2. Press Settings. FI HOTSPOT NAME OR
Note: The network name is the hotspot PASSWORD
name.
3. Press View Password. Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi E280315
Hotspot 1. Press Vehicle Hotspot.

1. On your device, switch Wi-Fi on and 2. Press Settings.
select the hotspot from the list of 3. Press Edit.
available Wi-Fi networks.
4. Press Change Network Name.
2. When prompted, enter the password.
5. Enter your required network name.
Purchasing a Data Plan 6. Press Done.
1. Connect a device to the hotspot. 7. Press Change Password.
Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal 8. Enter your required password.
opens on your device. 9. Press Done.
412
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Changing the Wi-Fi Hotspot

Frequency
Note: The Vehicle Hotspot frequency band
is selectable depending upon your device
capabilities. You will be unable to connect
your device to the Vehicle Hotspot if it does
not support the selected frequency band.
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
E280315
1. Press Vehicle Hotspot.

2. Press Settings.
3. Press Edit.
4. Select a frequency.
5. Press Done.
413
Audio System
AUDIO SYSTEM PLAYING OR PAUSING THE

PRECAUTIONS AUDIO SOURCE
Audio Unit
WARNING: Driving while distracted Press the button to pause
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash playback. Press again to resume
and injury. We strongly recommend that playback.
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the Touchscreen
safe operation of your vehicle. We Press the button to pause
recommend against the use of any playback. Press again to resume
hand-held device while driving and playback.
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you Note: Not all sources can be paused.
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
devices while driving.
Listening to loud audio for long periods of

time could damage your hearing.
SWITCHING THE AUDIO UNIT

ON AND OFF
Press the button on the volume
control.
SELECTING THE AUDIO

SOURCE
Audio Unit
Press to open the media source E248939
menu.
E308143
You can press this multiple times to Turn to adjust the volume.
change the audio source or scroll through Some vehicles may be able to adjust the
the media sources. volume using buttons on the steering
wheel.
Touchscreen
Press Sources on the touchscreen to open
the media source menu.
414
Audio System
SWITCHING SHUFFLE MODE 2. Press Sound Settings.

ON AND OFF 3. Press Balance / Fade.
4. Press the arrows to adjust the settings.
Press the button on the
touchscreen to switch shuffle Tone Settings
mode on or off.
Note: Not all sources have shuffle mode.
2. Press Sound Settings.
3. Press Tone Settings.
SWITCHING REPEAT MODE ON
4. Press the arrows or slider bar to adjust
AND OFF the settings.
Press the button on the Speed Compensated Volume
touchscreen to switch repeat
mode on or off. 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
Note: Not all sources have repeat mode. 2. Press Sound Settings.
3. Press Speed Compensated Volume.
SETTING A MEMORY PRESET 4. Press a setting.
1. Select a station or channel. Occupancy Mode (If Equipped)

2. Press and hold a memory preset button 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
on the touchscreen.
2. Press Sound Settings.
Note: The audio mutes briefly while the
3. Press Occupancy Mode.
system saves the preset and returns once it
is stored. 4. Press a setting.
Note: You can save presets from multiple Sound Mode (If Equipped)
sources to the memory preset bar.
MUTING THE AUDIO 2. Press Sound Settings.
3. Press Sound Mode.
Press the button on the steering
wheel to mute the audio. 4. Press a setting.
Press to mute the signal. Press SETTING THE CLOCK AND

again to restore the signal.
DATE
ADJUSTING THE SOUND 2. Press Clock Settings.
SETTINGS 3. Set the time.
Balance and Fade (If Equipped) Note: The AM and PM options are not
available if 24-hour mode is on.
415
Audio System
Switching Automatic Time SELECTING A RADIO STATION

Updates On and Off
Manually Selecting a Radio
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. Station
2. Press Clock Settings.
3. Switch Automatic time zone update
on or off.
AM/FM RADIO
AM/FM RADIO LIMITATIONS

The further you travel from an AM or FM
station, the weaker the signal and the
weaker the reception.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking
garages, dense tree foliage and E270235
thunderstorms can interfere with the
reception. Turn to search through the radio frequency
When you pass a ground-based broadcast band.
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result in the Using Direct Tune
audio system muting.
1. Press Direct Tune to open the number
pad.
2. Enter the station you prefer.
Note: You can only enter a valid station for
the audio source you are currently listening
to.
Using Seek
Press either button. The system
stops at the first station it finds
in that direction.
416
Audio System
SWITCHING THE DISPLAY ON HD1 signifies the main programming status

and is available in both analog and digital
AND OFF broadcasts. Other multicast stations are
only available digitally and could contain
Audio Unit new or different content.
Press the button. Note: When the system first receives an
HD1 station, it plays the station in the analog
E272035
version until it verifies the station is an HD
Radio station. Then it shifts to the digital
Touchscreen version.
To switch the display off: Note: There is an audio mute delay when
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. switching to an HD2 or HD3 station because
the system has to reacquire and decode the
2. Press Display Settings. digital signal.
3. Press Display Off.
Note: The display defaults to on each time DIGITAL RADIO LIMITATIONS
you switch your vehicle on.
If you are outside the reception area, the
To switch the display on, press anywhere
system could not work.
on the touchscreen.
If you are on the fringe of the reception
area, the station could mute due to weak
DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED) signal strength.
Note: If you are listening to HD1, the system
WHAT IS DIGITAL RADIO changes back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again. If
HD Radio™ technology is the digital you are listening to any other multicast
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. channels, the station mutes and stays
For additional information, visit muted unless it is able to connect to the
www.HDRadio.com. digital signal again.
HD Radio Technology is manufactured Depending on the station quality, you could
under license from iBiquity Digital hear a slight sound change when the
Corporation and foreign patents. HD Radio station changes between analog and
and the HD and HD Radio logos are digital audio.
proprietary trademarks of DTS. The vehicle You cannot access a saved HD station if
manufacturer and DTS are not responsible your vehicle is outside the station’s
for the content sent using HD Radio reception area.
technology. Content may be changed,
added or deleted at any time at the station
owner's discretion. SWITCHING DIGITAL RADIO
RECEPTION ON AND OFF
HOW DOES DIGITAL RADIO WORK 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
Your system has a special receiver that 2. Press Radio Settings.
allows it to receive digital broadcasts in 3. Switch AM HD Radio or FM HD Radio
addition to analog broadcasts. on or off.
417
Audio System
DIGITAL RADIO INDICATORS For additional information about extended

subscription terms, visit www.SiriusXM.com
HD Radio Indicator in the United States, www.SiriusXM.ca in
Canada, or call SiriusXM at
The indicator appears when HD Radio is 1-888-539-7474.
on and you tune to a station broadcasting
HD Radio technology. Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates will be
liable to you or any third party for any such
modification, suspension or termination.
E142616
SATELLITE RADIO LIMITATIONS
The color of the indicator changes to
indicate the system status. For optimal reception performance, keep
the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up
Gray indicates the system is acquiring a and keep luggage and other material as
digital station. far away from the antenna as possible.
Orange indicates digital audio is playing. Placing luggage over the antenna may
reduce performance.
Multicast Indicator Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
The multicast indicator appears if the tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking
current station is broadcasting multiple garages, dense tree foliage and
digital broadcasts. The highlighted thunderstorms can interfere with your
numbers indicate additional digital reception.
channels available. When you pass a ground-based
Note: For stations that have more than one broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger
HD multicast, the HD indicator and radio signal may overtake a weaker one and
text appears as a button. Press the button could result in the audio system muting.
to cycle through all of the HD stations on Your display could show an error message
that specific frequency. to indicate the interference.
SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED) LOCATING THE SATELLITE RADIO

IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
WHAT IS SATELLITE RADIO 1. Select SiriusXM as the audio source.

2. Tune to channel 0.
Your factory-installed SiriusXM radio
system includes a limited subscription
term, which begins on the date of sale or
lease of your vehicle. See an authorized
dealer for availability.
418
Audio System
SELECTING A CHANNEL Note: A default profile is available when no

listener profiles are created.
Manually Selecting a Channel
SiriusXM Favorites
Press the button to find the
previous or next available radio SiriusXM Favorites are shown for the active
E328569
channel. listener profile. While you are listening to
SiriusXM, you can save favorites by:
E328570 • Tapping the currently tuned channel
or show logo on the SiriusXM audio
Linear Tuner screen. A favorite icon appears next to
the logo when it is saved as a favorite.
The linear tuner is displayed when
manually selecting a channel. You can • Tuning to a channel or show you want
swipe left or right on the linear tuner to save as a favorite. Navigate to the
carousel to navigate through the channel SiriusXM Favorites screen and press
list. Tap on a channel title to listen to it. the Add Current button. The currently
tuned channel or show is saved as a
Using Direct Tune favorite.
• Saving a radio preset. This saves the
1. Press the channel up or down button currently tuned SiriusXM channel or
to open the linear tuner screen. show as a favorite.
2. Press Direct Tune to open the number
Note: Requires a trial or active subscription
pad.
to use.
3. Enter the channel you prefer.
Listening History
Using Browse
Listening history is a list of recently listened
1. Press Browse. to SiriusXM content and is shown for the
2. Select a channel. active listener profile. You can view,
manage and reset the listening history
using the controls on the touchscreen.
SATELLITE RADIO SETTINGS
Subscription to use.
Your subscription status is displayed. You Listener Settings

can subscribe or manage your subscription
directly from the touchscreen. Listener settings apply to the active
listener profile.
Listener Add/Switch Note: Requires a trial or active subscription
You can create up to five listener profiles to use.
per SiriusXM account. Each listener profile Note: A default profile is available when no
can be personalized with a name and listener profiles are created.
profile image.
to use.
419
Audio System
Help and Support directly from SYNC and view information

required to manage your SiriusXM account.
You can contact SiriusXM Customer Care
420
Audio System
AUDIO SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
AUDIO SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES

Satellite Radio Troubleshooting
Error Message Potential Effects Recommended Action
Connectivity Disabled Internet streaming and On Internet connectivity is
Demand shows are unavail- turned off. See Connected
able and some SiriusXM Vehicle (page 409).
features are disabled.
No Internet Audio system may mute. SYNC will attempt to
"Switch to Satellite" button connect. See Satellite
may be displayed on the Radio Limitations (page
SiriusXM audio screen if the 418). Switch to a satellite
channel is also available via connection for the current
satellite. channel if the option is
available.
No Satellite Signal Audio system may mute. Antenna may be obstructed
“Switch to Internet” button or satellite reception is weak
may be displayed on the in your location. See Satel-
SiriusXM audio screen if the lite Radio Limitations
channel is also available via (page 418). Switch to an
streaming. internet connection for the
current channel if the option
is available.
Slow Network Connection Audio system may mute Allow some time for audio
while audio attempts to to load or tune to a different
load. channel.
Channel Unavailable Audio system may mute. A temporary update may be
Radio may tune to a in progress. Allow some time
different channel. before retrying to tune to the
channel. If issue persists, the
channel may no longer be
available.
Episode Unavailable Audio system may mute. A temporary update may be
Radio may tune to a in progress. Allow some time
different channel. before retrying to play the
episode. If issue persists, the
episode may no longer be
available.
421
Audio System
Something went wrong Audio system may mute. Retry action after some time
Radio may tune to a or tune to a different
different channel. channel.
Subscribe to Listen Cannot listen to selected Your subscription has
content. Content may expired or you have not yet
appear grayed out and some subscribed for access to the
features may be disabled. listed content. Navigate to
Subscription under the
Satellite Radio Settings
menu. If you have an active
subscription which includes
the listed channel or content
and you see this error, you
may need to refresh your
radio. To refresh your Siri-
usXM radio, visit www.siri-
usxm.com/refresh in the US,
or www.siriusxm.ca/refresh
in Canada.
You may need to provide
your SiriusXM Radio identific-
ation number. See
Locating the Satellite
Radio Identification
Number (page 418).
422
Audio System
Upgrade to Listen Cannot listen to selected Your subscription does not

content. Content may include access to the listed
appear grayed out and some content. You may need to
features may be disabled. upgrade your subscription.
Navigate to Subscription
under the Satellite Radio
Settings menu. If you have
an active subscription which
includes the listed channel
or content and you see this
error, you may need to
refresh your radio. To refresh
your SiriusXM radio, visit
www.siriusxm.com/refresh
in the US, or www.siri-
usxm.ca/refresh in Canada.
You may need to provide
your SiriusXM Radio identific-
ation number. See
Locating the Satellite
Radio Identification
Number (page 418).
Location Restricted Content Audio may mute. “Not avail- Content is not available in
able in your location” or your location or SiriusXM is
“Unable to determine your unable to determine your
location” may be displayed. location. Tuning to a
different channel may
resolve the issue.
Channel Blocked Audio may mute. Radio may The Block Explicit Content
tune to a different channel. filter is turned on. Navigate
to Listener Settings under
the Satellite Radio Settings
menu to access the Block
Explicit Content filter.
Navigate to Listener
Settings. See Satellite
Radio Settings (page 419).
Antenna Problem or Hard- Audio may mute. Access to If issue persists, you may
ware Problem SiriusXM features may be need to visit an authorized
unavailable. dealer for service.
423
Audio System
SiriusXM Updating... Audio may mute. Allow SiriusXM some time

to complete updating.
Loading... Audio may mute. Content No action necessary. If
may be temporarily unavail- loading time is longer than
able while loading. usual, See Satellite Radio
Limitations (page 418).
SiriusXM Loading... Audio may mute. Content No action necessary. Allow
and controls may be SiriusXM some time to finish
temporarily unavailable. loading.
IDENTIFYING THE AUDIO UNIT
E308144
Depending on your vehicle options, the

controls may look different from what you
see here.
424
Center Display Overview
CENTER DISPLAY CENTER DISPLAY

PRECAUTIONS LIMITATIONS
Speed-restricted Features
WARNING: Driving while distracted For your safety, some features are not
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash available while the vehicle is in motion at
and injury. We strongly recommend that or above 6 mph (10 km/h).
device that may take your focus off the Settings that are not critical while driving
road. Your primary responsibility is the your vehicle will be shown as restricted on
safe operation of your vehicle. We your display. See the following chart for
recommend against the use of any specific examples.
hand-held device while driving and
Restricted Features
System Functionality System updates.

Personal profiles setup.
Valet mode setup.
Driver assistance settings.
Auto start-stop speed threshold.
Vehicle Settings 30 minute max idle.
MyKey setup.
Keyless entry keypad code setup.
Call in progress.
Restricted features will become available
again once the vehicle is no longer in
motion.
Cell phone microphone muted.
STATUS BAR
Audio system muted.
The bar is on top of the display and
indicates the status of your vehicle's
features.
425
System update installed. Vehicle system update

activating.
E327785
Wi-Fi available. Additional consent needed.

.i
E347103
E327786
Wi-Fi connected. Vehicle system activation

reminder.
E327787
Cell phone roaming. Vehicle system update not

E327788
successful.
Text message received. Vehicle system update reminder.

E327789
E335295
Email received.
FEATURE BAR
Bluetooth® device connected. The bar is on the bottom of the display and
allows you to access vehicle features.
Automatic crash notification Select to use the radio, a USB, a
system off. media player or a Bluetooth®
E100027
device.
Cell phone battery status. Select to make calls and access
E335293 the phonebook on your cell
phone.
Wireless charger is active.
Select to use the navigation
system.
Cell phone network signal
strength. Select to view favorites.
E353215
Vehicle data sharing on.

Select to search for and use
E353220 compatible apps on your iOS or
Vehicle data sharing off. Android device.
E335292 Select to adjust system settings.
Vehicle location sharing on. E280315
E353210
Vehicle data and vehicle location
sharing on. Select to view features.
E335299
426
E335300
E347104
Note: The icon may be different depending

on your vehicle.
INFORMATION ON DEMAND
SCREEN - VEHICLES WITH: 12.3
INCH SCREEN
The Information on Demand screen
displays cards on the side of the display
and allows you to see information from
different features.
Select the button to view the
E353212
next card.
Select the button to view the

E353211
previous card.
Select the button to view

E353209
available cards.
427
Voice Interaction
WHAT IS VOICE INTERACTION

General Examples
Voice Interaction allows you to control Command Result
vehicle features using conversational
requests. Start Over. The system resets
the current voice
interaction.
SETTING THE WAKE WORD
Cancel. The system ends
1. Press the Settings option on the the current voice
feature bar. interaction.
2. Press the Voice Control button.
Next Page. The system goes to
3. Switch on Listen for Wake Word. the next page.
4. Press Preferred Wake Word
Previous Page. The system goes to
5. Select a wake word. the previous page.
Help. The system
BEGINNING A VOICE displays a list of
INTERACTION available
commands you can
Say the selected wake word. use on the current
screen.
Press the voice interaction
button on the steering wheel.
E142599 Entertainment Examples
Command Result
VOICE INTERACTION
Play The Beatles. The system plays
EXAMPLES the selected music.
Note: You may need to enable your Show music by The The system shows
vehicle's modem to use certain voice Beatles. the selected music.
commands. See Enabling and Disabling
the Modem (page 409). Tune to FM 101.9. The system tunes
the radio to 101.9
FM.
Set the station to The system tunes
Sirius Channel 2. the radio to Sirius
Channel 2.
428
Voice Interaction
Climate Examples Apps Examples

Command Result Command Result
Set the temper- The system sets Mobile Apps. The system
ature to low. the temperature to prompts you to say
the minimum. the name of an app
to start it on the
Set the temper- The system sets system.
ature to 72°F the temperature to
(22°C). 72°F (22°C). List Mobile Apps. The system will list
all of the currently
Phone Examples available Mobile
Apps.
Command Result
Find Mobile Apps The system will
Call Henry. The system calls search and connect
Henry using your to compatible app
connected device. running on your
mobile device.
Dial (phone The system dials
number). the selected phone
number. Navigation Examples
Command Result
Send a text The system begins
message to Henry. a dictated text Drive to 125 Main The system begins
message. Street, New York. guided navigation
Read my message The system reads to the address.
from Henry. you the most recent Where is ___ The system
message from searches for the
Henry. requested point of
interest.
Show me directions The system shows
to Oakwood directions to the
Boulevard and selected intersec-
Pelham Road. tion.
Cancel route. The system ends
guided navigation
to the destination.
Ford Assistant Examples

Note: When you are not driving, additional
commands are available by using popular
chat applications. Use FordPass to setup a
conversation with your Ford assistant.
429
Voice Interaction
Remote Vehicle Control Examples Charging Examples

Command Result Command Result
How much gas is in The vehicle tells When is my next Information about
my tank? you how much gas scheduled charge? the time and loca-
it has left. tion of the next
charge appears on
Maintenance and Roadside Assistance the center display
Examples or FordPass app.
Command Result Show me the char- Shows the charging

ging schedule. display in the
Call roadside Your vehicle calls vehicle.
assistance. the roadside assist-
ance phone Change my charge Shows the charging
number. schedule. display in the
vehicle.
Vehicle Information Examples
Command Result
How does cruise Information about

control work? the feature appears
on the center
display or FordPass
app.
What does the Information about
warning light the warning light
mean? appears on the
center display or
FordPass app.
Am I affected by Information about
any recalls? open recalls
appears on the
center display or
FordPass app.
When does my Your vehicle or
warranty expire? FordPass app tells
you the expiration
date.
430
Phone
PHONE PRECAUTIONS PHONE MENU

This menu becomes available after pairing
WARNING: Driving while distracted a phone.
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash Recent Call List
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any Display and select an entry from a list of
device that may take your focus off the previous calls.
safe operation of your vehicle. We Contacts
hand-held device while driving and Display a smart search form to look up your
encourage the use of voice-operated contacts. Use the List button to
systems when possible. Make sure you alphabetically sort your contacts.
that may affect the use of electronic Favorites
devices while driving. Display the list of favorite contacts that
are set up on your phone.
CONNECTING YOUR PHONE Messaging
Go to the settings menu on your device and Displays the list of text messages to read,
switch Bluetooth® on. listen to, or respond to.
Select the phone option on the Email
feature bar.
Displays the list of emails to read, listen to,
1. Select Add Phone. or respond to.
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your Phone List
vehicle on your cell phone.
Display the list of paired or connected
2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone. devices that you can select.
Note: A number appears on your cell phone
Note: Up to 12 devices can be stored.
and on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the PIN (personal Do Not Disturb
identification number) on your cell
phone matches the number on the Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones
touchscreen. and alerts off.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you Phone Keypad
have successfully paired your cell phone.
Directly dial a number.
4. Download the phonebook from your
cell phone when you are prompted.
Note: If you pair more than one cell phone,
use the phone settings to specify the
primary phone. You can change this setting
at any time.
431
Phone
Voice Control
Say a command to use the Google or Siri
voice assistant available on your
connected phone to access supported
features.
Note: Some features under the phone menu
may not be available if the feature is not
supported through the phone.
432
Phone
MAKING AND RECEIVING A Pressing the backspace button deletes the

last digit you typed.
PHONE CALL
Receiving Calls
Making Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
To call a number in your contacts, sounds. Caller information appears in the
select: display if it is available.
Menu Item Action and Description To accept the call, select:
Contacts You can then select the Menu Item
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers Accept
stored for that contact Note: You can also accept the call by
display along with any pressing the phone button on the steering
stored contact photos. You wheel.
can then select the
number that you want to To reject the call, select:
call. The system begins the
call. Menu Item
Reject
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Ignore the call by doing nothing. The
Menu Item Action and Description system logs it as a missed call.
Recent Call You can then select an During a Phone Call
List entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call. During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
To call a number from your favorites, with the call duration.
select: The phone status items are also visible:
Menu Item Action and Description • Signal Strength.
• Battery.
Favorites You can then select an
entry that you want to call. You can select any of the following during
The system begins the call. an active phone call:
To call a number that is not stored in

your phone, select:
Menu Item Action and Description
Phone Select the digits of the

Keypad number you wish to call.
Call The system begins the call.
433
Phone
Item
Item
Mute You can switch the
End Call Immediately end a microphone off so
phone call. You can the caller does not
also press the hear you.
button on the
steering wheel. Privacy Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
Keypad Press this to access back to the touch-
the phone keypad. screen.
SENDING AND RECEIVING A TEXT MESSAGE
Menu Item Description
Hear It Hear the text message.

View View the text message.
Call Call the sender.
Reply Reply to the text message with a standard text message.
434
Phone
SWITCHING TEXT MESSAGE

NOTIFICATION ON AND OFF
iOS
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth®.
3. Select the information icon to the right
of your vehicle.
4. Switch text message notification on or
off.
Android
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth®.
3. Select the profiles option.
4. Select the phone profile.
5. Switch text message notification on or
off.
435
Bluetooth®
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH® hand-held device while driving and

DEVICE encourage the use of voice-operated
1. Make sure Bluetooth® is enabled on are aware of all applicable local laws
your device. that may affect the use of electronic
3. Press Connectivity. Connect your device.
4. Press Bluetooth. Press the audio button on the
5. Press Add a Bluetooth Device. feature bar.
E100027
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your device. Press Sources.
6. Select your vehicle on your device.
Note: A number appears on your device and Press the Bluetooth® option.
on the touchscreen.
7. Confirm that the number on your
device matches the number on the Press to play a track. Press again
touchscreen. to pause the track.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you Press to skip to the next track.
have successfully paired your device.
Press and hold to fast forward
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are through the track.
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Press once to return to the
Ford Motor Company is under license. beginning of a track. Repeatedly
Other trademarks and trade names are press to return to previous
those of their respective owners. tracks.
Press and hold to fast rewind through the
PLAYING MEDIA USING track.
BLUETOOTH®

436
Apps
APP PRECAUTIONS ENABLING APPS ON AN IOS

DEVICE
WARNING: Driving while distracted Select the apps option on the
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash feature bar.
you use extreme caution when using any 1. Select Mobile Apps Help.
2. Follow the instructions to pair and
connect your device via Bluetooth® or
with a USB cable.
hand-held device while driving and 3. Start the apps on your device that you
encourage the use of voice-operated want to use.
systems when possible. Make sure you 4. Select the app that you want to use on
are aware of all applicable local laws the touchscreen.
devices while driving. Note: Some apps may run through Apple
CarPlay if it is enabled.
Note: Closing an app on your device will
APP REQUIREMENTS close it on the touchscreen.
Note: For troubleshooting assistance select
When you start an app through the system Compatible Apps List or My App Isn't Listed
for the first time, you could be asked to under Mobile Apps Help.
grant certain permissions. You can review
and change the permissions that you have
granted at any time when your vehicle is ENABLING APPS ON AN
not moving. We recommend that you ANDROID DEVICE
check your data plan before using your
apps through the system. Using them Select the apps option on the
could result in additional charges. We also feature bar.
recommend that you check the app
provider's terms and conditions and
privacy policy before using their app. Make 1. Select Mobile Apps Help.
sure that you have an active account for 2. Follow the instructions to pair and
apps that you want to use through the connect your device via Bluetooth® or
system. Some apps will work with no with a USB cable.
setup. Others require you to configure 3. Start the apps on your device that you
some personal settings before you can use want to use.
them.
4. Select Find Mobile Apps.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
ACCESSING APPS the touchscreen.
Select the apps option on the Note: To enable apps when pairing with a
feature bar. USB cable, switch on Android App via USB.
437
Apps
Note: Some devices may lose the ability to 1. Press Phone List.
play music over USB when Mobile Apps are 2. Select your device from the list.
enabled.
3. Press Connect to Apple CarPlay.
Note: Some apps may run through Android
Auto if it is enabled.
SWITCHING ANDROID AUTO
Note: Closing an app on your device will
close it on the touchscreen. ON AND OFF
Note: For troubleshooting assistance select Enabling Android Auto with USB
Compatible Apps List or My App Isn't Listed
(If Equipped)
under Mobile Apps Help.
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
SWITCHING APPLE CARPLAY 2. Follow the instructions on the
ON AND OFF touchscreen.
Note: Certain features of the system are
Enabling Apple CarPlay with USB not available when you are using Android
Auto.
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on your device Enabling Android Auto with
and the touchscreen. Wireless
Note: Selecting "Enable Wireless CarPlay" 1. Pair your device to Bluetooth®.
on your device will prepare the device for
wireless carplay when you re-enter the 2. Follow the instructions on your device
vehicle. and the touchscreen.
Note: Certain Android Devices do not
Enabling Apple CarPlay with support Android Auto Wireless. Please
Wireless check your Android OS version for
compatibility.
1. Pair your device to Bluetooth®.
2. Follow the instructions on your device Disabling Android Auto
and the touchscreen.
Disabling Apple CarPlay feature bar.
E280315
Select the settings option on the 1. Press Phone List.

feature bar.
E280315 2. Select your device from the list.
1. Press Phone List. 3. Press Disable.
2. Select your device from the list. Re-Enabling Android Auto
3. Press Disable.
Re-Enabling Apple CarPlay feature bar.
E280315
Select the settings option on the 1. Press Phone List.

feature bar.
E280315 2. Select your device from the list.
438
Apps
3. Press Connect to Android Auto.
439
Navigation
ACCESSING NAVIGATION ADJUSTING THE MAP
ZOOMING THE MAP IN AND OUT

can result in loss of vehicle control, crash You can use pinch gestures to zoom in and
and injury. We strongly recommend that out. Place two fingers on the screen and
you use extreme caution when using any move them apart to zoom in. Place two
device that may take your focus off the fingers on the screen and bring them
road. Your primary responsibility is the together to zoom out.
recommend against the use of any CHANGING THE FORMAT OF THE
hand-held device while driving and MAP
systems when possible. Make sure you Press the Menu button.
E328845
devices while driving. 1. Press the Map Orientation tile.
Press the button to access 2. Select a map orientation.
Navigation.
Note: For optimal reception performance,
LIVE TRAFFIC
keep the antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and other WHAT IS LIVE TRAFFIC
material as far away from the antenna as
possible. Placing luggage over the antenna You can observe real-time road congestion
may reduce performance. when live traffic is on.
NAVIGATION MAP UPDATES SWITCHING LIVE TRAFFIC ON

AND OFF
To update your Map data over Wi-Fi, your
vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi Press the Menu button.
access point. For USB updates and other E328845
details, contact dealers at
1-866-462-8837 in the United States and 1. Press the Traffic on Map tile.
Canada, or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. 2. Press Traffic on or Traffic Off.
Note: If you find map data errors, you may
report them by going to SETTING A DESTINATION
www.here.com/mapcreator.
SETTING A DESTINATION USING

THE TEXT ENTRY SCREEN
1. Press the search bar at the top of the
screen.
440
Navigation
2. Enter your destination using the SETTING A DESTINATION USING

keyboard. A POINT OF INTEREST
3. Press Search.
Press and hold on a point of interest icon
4. Select a destination from the list. on the map. Information about the location
5. Press Start to begin navigation. of the point of interest appears on the
screen.
SETTING A DESTINATION USING Press the button to begin
THE MAP SCREEN E328844
navigation to the point of
interest.
Press and hold on the map to place a pin
at that location. Information about the
location of the pin appears on the screen. WAYPOINTS
Press the button to begin
E328844
navigation to the pin. ADDING A WAYPOINT
Press the Add Waypoint button
SETTING A DESTINATION USING E328843
when in an active navigation
A PREDICTIVE DESTINATION session.
Press the predicted destination card on 1. Enter your waypoint on the keyboard.
the screen to navigate to it. These appear 2. Press Search.
when the navigation system has learned 3. Select a waypoint from the list.
your driving habits.
4. Press Add to Trip.
A RECENT DESTINATION EDITING WAYPOINTS
Press the Menu button. 1. Press the waypoint you would like to
edit.
E328845
2. Select an option to reorder or delete
1. Press the Recents tile. the waypoint.
2. Select a destination from the list.
ROUTE GUIDANCE
A SAVED DESTINATION ADJUSTING THE GUIDANCE
PROMPT VOLUME
Press the Menu button.
E328845 Turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays to adjust the volume.
1. Press Saved Places.
2. Select a saved destination. REPEATING AN INSTRUCTION
Note: Press the star icon next when viewing
location details to save the location. Press the turn indicator to hear the last
voice instruction.
441
Navigation
ROUTE GUIDANCE SETTINGS

Avoid 4x4 Roads
Before Starting a Navigation Session
Before starting a navigation session you
can enable and disable 4x4 roads using
the controls on the point of interest detail
page. When enabled the system will
include 4x4 roads when determining the
best route. When disabled the system will
avoid 4x4 roads.
During a Navigation Session

If you do not wish to have your route take
you on 4x4 roads you can remove the turn
onto the 4x4 road using the turn list.
1. Tap the chevron below the turn panel.
2. Swipe to the left on the 4x4 road on
the turn list that appears.
3. Press the delete button to remove that
road from your route.
The system will then re-route you to your
destination.
CANCELING ROUTE GUIDANCE

Press the button to cancel route
guidance to the selected
E280804
location.
442
Vehicle System Updates
UPDATING THE VEHICLE Using the Settings Menu

SYSTEMS WIRELESSLY Press the settings option on the
feature bar.
E280315
Over-the-Air Updates allow you
E327789to update your vehicle system 1. Press the System Update tile.
software wirelessly. To make
2. Press Schedule Update.
sure you receive all updates, set a recurring
schedule and connect to Wi-Fi. See 3. Use the controls to set the time and
Connected Vehicle (page 409). Updates day of the update.
may take longer if not connected to Wi-Fi, 4. Save the schedule.
or may not download at all. Multiple
connections may be required to complete Note: You can set the updates to occur at
a download. any time.
Using the Status Bar Icon

Enabling Over-the-Air Updates
When an update is available, tap
Press the settings option on the the notification icon and follow
E327785
feature bar. the prompts on the screen.
E280315
Additional Over-the-Air Update icons may
1. Press the System Update tile. appear on the status bar. See Status Bar
(page 425).
2. Switch Automatic Updates on.
Note: Over-the Air Updates are enabled by
Applying an Over-the-Air Update
default.
Note: If you do not want to receive You can see the progress of the update on
Over-the-Air Updates you can turn them the touchscreen. An update cannot be
off. You will not be notified of new updates. canceled once it has been started.
During scheduled updates you will not be
Scheduling an Update able to drive your vehicle, start the vehicle,
Scheduling an update allows you to set a use remote controls to lock and unlock the
convenient time for the update to vehicle. The alarm, central locks, and door
complete. We recommend updating tones are disabled. The electronic door
overnight when your vehicle is not in use. lock will not function during an update. You
Ensure Vehicle Connectivity and Automatic can open the doors using the mechanical
Over-the-Air Updates are enabled. Once latch if child locks are not on. Pull the
you complete these steps, your schedule handle until it stops to use the mechanical
will be saved for future updates. As long latch. Some updates may not allow you to
as an update is not in process you can use your vehicle during the update process.
adjust your schedule. Note: Some updates can complete in the
Note: Some updates may be applied background, but more complex updates can
outside of your set schedule. Information take up to 45 minutes.
about the unscheduled update appears on Note: Double locking is switched off and
the touchscreen after it is applied. central locking is switched on during and
after an update.
443
Vehicle System Updates
Note: If your vehicle is plugged in, charging

will stop during an update and resume when
the update is complete.
Over-the-Air Update Requirements

If these requirements are not met during a
scheduled update the update will be
postponed. You can update your schedule
if you want to retry the update sooner.
• Your vehicle is not running.
• Your vehicle is stopped.
• Your vehicle is parked.
• The hazard indicators are switched off.
• The alarm is not sounding.
• The doors are closed.
• The parking lights are switched off.
• You are not pressing the brake pedal.
• An emergency call is not in progress.
• The Stop Safely lamp is not
illuminated. See Instrument Cluster
Warning Lamps (page 108).
Viewing Update Information

If an update is successful, the touchscreen
will provide additional details or statuses
about the update. You can also access this
information under the System Update tile.
If an update is not successful, follow the
prompt that appears on the touchscreen.
PERFORMING A MASTER
RESET
Press the settings option on the
feature bar.
E280315
1. Press the Reset tile.

2. Press Master Reset.
3. Follow the prompts on the screen to
complete the reset.
444
Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories Most Ford Performance Parts are sold with
that are available for your vehicle, please no warranty, unless otherwise indicated.
contact your authorized dealer or visit the Check the Ford Performance Part website:
online store web site: www.performanceparts.ford.com or
contact the Ford Performance Parts
Web Address (United States) tech-line at (800) FORD788 for the latest
limited warranty information on specific
www.Accessories.Ford.com products.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
Web Address (Canada) the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
www.Accessories.Ford.ca vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
We will repair or replace any properly passengers and luggage to your
authorized dealer-installed Ford Original vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
Accessory found to be defective in capacity of the vehicle or of the front
factory-supplied materials or workmanship or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
during the warranty period, as well as any indicated on the Safety Compliance
component damaged by the defective Certification label). Ask an authorized
accessories. dealer for specific weight information.
We will warrant your Ford Original • The Federal Communications
Accessory through the warranty that Commission (FCC) and Canadian
provides the greatest benefit: Radio Telecommunications
• 24 months, unlimited mileage. Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
• The remainder of your new vehicle that are equipped with radio
limited warranty. transmitters, for example two-way
Contact an authorized dealer for details radios, telephones and theft alarms.
and a copy of the warranty. Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Ford Licensed Accessories are the
Communications Commission (FCC)
accessory manufacturer's designs. The
and Canadian Radio
manufacturer develops and therefore
Telecommunications Commission
warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and
(CRTC) regulations and should be
does not design or test these accessories
installed only by an authorized dealer.
to Ford Motor Company engineering
requirements.
Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer’s limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
445
Accessories
• An authorized dealer needs to install

mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
446
Auxiliary Switches (If Equipped)
WHAT ARE THE AUXILIARY using the switches for an extended time or
when using higher current draw
SWITCHES accessories. When a switch is turned on,
the indicator light on the switch illuminates
The auxiliary switchboard on the overhead and the circuit provides power to the
console makes aftermarket customization device wired to that switch.
easier with six prewired switches
connected to the power distribution box.
Each circuit is individually fused for
connection of electrical accessories.
LOCATING THE AUXILIARY

SWITCHES
The switches are labeled AUX 1 through E220728
AUX 6. They only operate when the ignition
is in the on position or in the off position
when Delay Accessory is active, whether LOCATING THE AUXILIARY
the engine is running or not. We SWITCH WIRING
recommend that you leave the engine
running to maintain battery charge when There are six powered circuits and five
non-powered circuits.
447
E343821
A Circuits from under hood fuse box. See Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box
(page 310).
B Circuits to interior right-hand cowl side.
C Circuit to front grille.
D Circuit to right-hand visor.
E Circuit to right-hand rear quarter panel.
Additional information on fuse and relay

Circuits from the under hood fuse box (A)
locations is available. See Fuses (page
are powered. All other circuits (B-E) are
310). See your authorized dealer for service.
not connected at either end.
448
IDENTIFYING THE AUXILIARY SWITCH WIRING

The relays are coded as follows:
Power Distribution Wire Color Wire Size Fuse
Box
AUX 1 Yellow 1.5 mm² 30A

AUX 2 Green/Brown 1.5 mm² 15A
AUX 3 Violet/Green 0.75 mm² 10A
AUX 4 Brown 0.75 mm² 10A
AUX 5 Blue/Orange 0.75 mm² 10A
AUX 6 Yellow/Orange 0.75 mm² 10A
Non-powered circuits:
Note: The non-powered circuits correspond with the auxiliary switch wiring graphic. See
Locating the Auxiliary Switch Wiring (page 447).
Non-powered Circuit Location Wire Color Wire Size
B1 Passenger Compart- Brown/White 1.5 mm²

ment
B2 Passenger Compart- White 1.5 mm²
ment
C Front Grille Violet/Grey 1.5 mm²
D Right-hand Visor Grey/Orange 1.5 mm²
E Right-hand Rear White/Orange 1.5 mm²
Quarter Panel
449
Ford Protect
WHAT IS FORD PROTECT That means you get:

• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Protect yourself from the rising cost of Lincoln dealership.
vehicle repairs with a Ford Protect • Repairs performed by factory trained
extended service plan. technicians, using genuine parts.
Ford Protect Extended Service Rental Car Reimbursement
Plans - United States Only
First Day Rental Benefit
Ford Protect extended service plans mean
peace of mind. Extended service plans are If you bring your car into your dealer for
backed by Ford Motor Company, and service, we will give you a rental vehicle to
provide more protection beyond the New use for the day.
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, insist on the Ford Extended Rental Benefits
Protect extended service plan. If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
coverage, warranty repairs, and field
One trip to the service center could easily service actions.
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With the Ford Roadside Assistance
Protect extended service plan, you Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
minimize your risk for unexpected repair including:
bills and rising repair costs.
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle jump starts.
Components • Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
There are four mechanical Ford Protect • Travel expense reimbursement for
extended service plans with different levels lodging, meals and rental car.
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for • Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
details. coverage or other transportation.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over Transferable Coverage
1,000 covered components, this plan If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
is so complete it is probably easier to Protect extended service plan coverage
list what is not covered. expires, you can transfer any remaining
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, coverage to the new owner. This should
and includes many high-tech items. give you and your potential buyer peace of
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. mind.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the United States, Canada and Mexico.
450
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Ford Protect Extended Service

Vehicle Plan (Canada Only)
The Ford Protect extended service plan You can get more protection for your
also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
that covers all scheduled maintenance, extended service plan. Ford Protect
and selected wear items. The coverage is extended service plan is the only service
prepaid, so you never have to worry about contract backed by Ford Motor Company
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance. of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
Covered maintenance includes: you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Rental reimbursement.
• Spark plugs.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
wear items.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Protection against repair costs after
• Shock absorbers. your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Struts. Coverage expires.
• Engine belts. • Roadside Assistance benefits.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and There are several Ford Protect extended
o-rings. service plans available in various time,
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if distance and deductible combinations.
equipped). Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
• Cabin air filter replacement every and rental. When you purchase Ford
20,000 mi (32,000 km) for electric Protect extended service plan, you receive
vehicles only. added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Interest Free Finance Options
Mexico, provided by a network of
Just a 5% down payment provides you participating authorized Ford Motor
with an affordable, no interest, no fee Company dealers.
payment program allowing you all the Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
security and benefits Ford Protect and the United States are not eligible for
extended service plan has to offer while Ford Protect extended service plan
paying over time. You are pre-approved coverage.
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended This information is subject to change. Visit
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377. your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Protect
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan extended service plan that is right for you.
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
451
GENERAL MAINTENANCE Protecting Your Investment

INFORMATION Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
Why Maintain Your Vehicle? reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
Carefully following the maintenance vehicle and its emission control systems,
schedule helps protect against major repair make sure you have scheduled
expenses resulting from neglect or maintenance performed at the designated
inadequate maintenance and may help to intervals.
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for Your vehicle comes with the Intelligent
completed maintenance with your vehicle. Oil-Life Monitor system, a message
appears in the information display at the
It is important that you have your vehicle proper oil change interval. This interval
serviced at the proper times. These may be up to one year or 10,000 mi
intervals serve two purposes: first is to (16,000 km), hybrid vehicles could exceed
maintain the reliability of your vehicle and 10,000 mi (16,000 km).
the second is to keep the cost of owning
your vehicle down. When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
It is your responsibility to have all change. Make sure you perform the oil
scheduled maintenance performed and to change within two weeks or 500 mi
make sure that the materials used meet (800 km) of the message appearing. Make
the specifications identified in this owner's sure to reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
manual. See Capacities and after each oil change. See Resetting the
Specifications (page 393). Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 322).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance If your information display resets
and regularly inspect your vehicle may prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
result in vehicle damage not covered by should perform the oil change interval at
the vehicle Warranty. six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
Dealership? change intervals.
Our Genuine Replacement Parts You can drive high performance vehicles
in such a way that may lead to higher oil
Dealerships stock our parts and our
consumption including extended time at
authorized branded re-manufactured
high engine speeds, high loads, engine
replacement parts. These parts meet or
braking, hard cornering maneuvers, track
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
and off-road usage. Under these
at your dealership carry a nationwide
conditions, oil consumption of
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
approximately 1 quart per 500 miles (1 liter
parts and labor limited warranty.
per 800 km) is possible. Check the engine
If you do not use our authorized parts they oil level at every refueling and adjust to
may not meet our specifications and could maintain proper levels to avoid engine
affect emissions compliance. damage.
452
It is important to rely upon your dealership Make sure to change the vehicle’s oils and
to properly diagnose and repair your fluids at the specified intervals or in
vehicle. conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
We strongly recommend only using our viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
genuine or our authorized re-manufactured sub-systems during scheduled
replacement parts engineered for your maintenance. It is critical that systems are
vehicle. flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
Additives and Chemicals system or using our approved flushing
chemical.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of Owner Checks and Services
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information. Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. Have discolored fluids that also
show signs of overheating or foreign
material contamination checked
immediately.
Check Every Month

1
The air filter restriction gauge.
The engine oil level.
Function of all interior and the exterior lights.
The tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure.
The windshield washer fluid level.
1
The fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display.
1
The holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
1 Diesel vehicles only.
453
Check Every Six Months
The battery connections. Clean if necessary.

The body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
The cooling system fluid level and the coolant system strength.
The door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
The hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
The parking brake for proper operation.
The seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps, brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt for operation.
The washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
It is important to have the systems on your
vehicle regularly checked. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Accessory drive belt or belts Hazard warning system operation

Battery performance Horn operation
Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage
1
Fluid levels ; fill if necessary Tires including the spare for wear and
2
proper pressure
454
For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer.
2
If your vehicle has a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date
on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service

advisor or technician about the multi-point NORMAL SCHEDULED
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive MAINTENANCE
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you Oil Change Reminder
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle. Your vehicle comes with an oil change
reminder that determines when you should
change the engine oil based on how you
use your vehicle.
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Interval Vehicle Use and Example
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi Normal commuting with highway driving

(12,000–16,000 km) No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi Moderate to heavy load or towing

(8,000–12,000 km) Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi
(5,000–8,000 km) Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
455
Normal Maintenance Intervals
1
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
2
Change the engine oil and filter.
Rotate the tires, inspect tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level, if applicable with dipstick. Consult your
dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and the parking brake.
Inspect the engine coolant system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the front axle and U-joints. Lubricate grease fittings in applicable.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and the U-
joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
1
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2
Reset the oil change reminder after engine oil and filter changes. See Resetting the
Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 322).
1
Brake Fluid Maintenance
Every three Years 2

Change the brake fluid.
1 Perform this maintenance item every three years. Do not exceed the designated time
for the interval.
2 Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
456
1
Other Maintenance Items
Every 20,000 mi
Replace the cabin air filter.
(32,000 km)
Every 30,000 mi
Replace the engine air filter.
(48,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km) 2
Inspect the accessory drive belt(s).
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Change the manual transmission fluid.
Every 150,000 mi Change the front axle fluid.

(240,000 km) Change the rear axle fluid.
Change the transfer case fluid.
Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
At 200,000 mi Change the engine coolant.
3
(322,000 km)
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and
filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
3
Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (322,000 km), then every 5 years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).
Perform the services shown in the

following tables when specified or within
SPECIAL OPERATING 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the oil change
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED required message appearing in the
MAINTENANCE information display.
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any

of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
457
• Example 1: The message comes on at • Example 2: The message has not come
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic (48,000 km), for example, the oil
transmission fluid replacement. change reminder was reset at
25,000 mi (40,000 km). Perform the
engine air filter replacement.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the

information display and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service Inspect and lubricate the U-joints.
as required
See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 60,000 mi Replace the spark plugs.
(96,000 km)
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use,
such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery
As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the

information display and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service Replace the engine air filter.
as required
Every 60,000 mi Replace the spark plugs.
(96,000 km)
458
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions, such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
Inspect frequently, service Replace the engine air filter.

as required
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate the tires, inspect tires for wear and measure the
tread depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change the engine oil and filter.1
or six months
1
Reset your oil change reminder after each engine oil and filter change. See Resetting
the Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 322).
Off-road Operation
Inspect frequently, service Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints and the U-joints.
as required Lubricate grease fittings, if applicable.
Replace the engine air filter.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change the engine oil and filter.1
or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate the tires, inspect tires for wear and the measure
the tread depth.
1
Reset your oil change reminder after each engine oil and filter change. See Resetting
the Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 322).
Exclusive Use of E85 - Flex Fuel Vehicles Only
Every oil change interval If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.
459
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance

Axle(s) and transfer case, four-wheel drive
vehicles, fluid changes or level checks are
not required unless a leak is suspected or
the assembly has been submerged in
water. Contact an authorized dealer for
service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement

If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals

Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an oil
that meets our specification or has an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil, the normal oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter.
460
Customer Information
ROLLOVER WARNING OUR SUSTAINABILITY

REPORT
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a You should play your part in protecting the
significantly higher rollover rate than environment. Correct vehicle usage and
other types of vehicles. the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher steps toward this aim.
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel For additional information about our
drive vehicles) handle differently than sustainability progress and initiatives, visit
vehicles with a lower center of gravity www.sustainability.ford.com.
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously THE BETTER BUSINESS
increases the risk of losing control of your BUREAU AUTO LINE
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. PROGRAM - UNITED STATES
OF AMERICA
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more Your satisfaction is important to Ford
likely to die than a person wearing a Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
seatbelt. warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
WARNING: Do not become earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel Services you need section, you may be
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
drive vehicle may accelerate better than LINE program.
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive two parts – mediation and arbitration.
at a safe speed. During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
differently than passenger cars in the
during mediation or you do not want to
various driving conditions that are
participate in mediation, and if your claim
encountered on streets, highways and
is eligible, you may participate in the
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
designed for cornering at speeds as high
will be scheduled so that you can present
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
your case in an informal setting before an
sports cars are designed to perform
impartial person. The arbitrator considers
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
the testimony provided and makes a
decision after the hearing.
461
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE THE MEDIATION AND

program are usually decided within 40
days after you file your claim with the BBB. ARBITRATION PROGRAM -
You are not bound by the decision, and CANADA
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto For vehicles delivered to authorized
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible Canadian dealers. In those cases where
in the court action. Should you choose to you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to
is then bound by the decision, and must resolve a factory-related vehicle service
comply with the decision within 30 days concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
of receipt of your acceptance letter. Canada participates in an impartial third
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the party mediation/arbitration program
information that follows, please call or administered by the Canadian Motor
write to request a program application. Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
You will be asked for your name and The CAMVAP program is a straightforward
address, general information about your and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
new vehicle, information about your a disagreement when all other efforts to
warranty concerns, and any steps you have produce a settlement have failed. This
already taken to try to resolve them. A procedure is without cost to you and is
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
needs to be completed, signed and and expensive legal proceedings.
returned to the BBB along with proof of
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB reviews
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
the claim for eligibility under the Program
mutually convenient times and places in
Summary Guidelines.
an informal environment. These impartial
You can get more information by arbitrators review the positions of the
calling BBB AUTO LINE at parties, make decisions and, when
1-800-955-5100, or writing to: appropriate, render awards to resolve
BBB AUTO LINE a Division of BBB disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
National Programs, Inc. and final as the arbitrator’s award is
1676 International Drive, Suite 550 binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
McLean, VA 22102 CAMVAP services are available in all
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be Canadian territories and provinces. For
requested by calling the Ford Motor more information, without charge or
Company Customer Relationship Center obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
at 1-800-392-3673. Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
For additional information, refer to the
Better Business Bureau website.
ORDERING A CANADIAN
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify FRENCH OWNER'S MANUAL
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without You can obtain a French owner's manual
obligation. from an authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, LLC at:
462
HELM, LLC To contact NHTSA, you may call

47911 Halyard Drive, Suite 200 the Vehicle Safety Hotline
Plymouth, Michigan 48170 toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
Attention: Customer Service
1-800-424-9153); go to
Call toll free: 1-800-782-4356 www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Administrator
For additional information, visit
www.helminc.com. 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Washington, D.C. 20590
IN THE UNITED STATES You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
If you believe that your vehicle has safety from www.safercar.gov.
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
inform the National Highway IN CANADA
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
Ford Motor Company. injury or death, you should immediately
If NHTSA receives similar inform Transport Canada and Ford of
complaints, it may open an Canada.
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
Transport Canada Contact Information
Website http://tc.canada.ca/recalls
Website http://tc.canada.ca/rappels
Phone 1-800-333-0510
463
Ford of Canada Contact Information
Website www.ford.ca
Phone 1-800-565-3673
Belarus
RADIO FREQUENCY
CERTIFICATION LABELS

SYSTEM SENSORS E253816
Argentina
Brazil
E340204
Canada
E340516
Short Range Radar Sensor SRR3-B
IC ID: 4135A-SRR3B
464
E351800
Djibouti European Union EU
E310043
E340826
465
Ghana Mauritania
E269695 E353342
Jamaica Mexico
E340517
Malaysia
E353300
Moldova
E269697 E337971
RALM/24A/0715/S(15-2272)
466
Pakistan Serbia
E352429 E340200
Paraguay Singapore
E337181 E339940
Russia South Africa
E253816
E269696
467
South Korea
E351001
Taiwan, China
E340203
468
Ukraine
E356737
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority
E338020
to operate the equipment.
United States of America
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
469
Vietnam Brazil
E340499
Ghana
E353397
Zambia
E341433
Jamaica
E340205
BODY CONTROL MODULE

Argentina
E340500
E338547
470
Moldova Serbia
E337971
Morocco
E341434
Singapore
E340501
Paraguay
E339940
South Africa
E339812
2019-01-I-000076
E340510
471
Ukraine This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
interference, and
operation.
Vietnam
E269682
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E278262
Zambia
E341432
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
specifications were met. E340511
FCC ID: M3NA2C766336

IC: 7812A-A2C766336
472
GARAGE DOOR OPENER

WARNING: Changes or
E340119
FCC ID: NZLSAHL5E

IC: 4112A-SAHL5E
interference, and
2. This device must accept any E339844
operation.
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS

Argentina
E342143
E340316
473
Brazil This device complies with Part 15 of the

interference, and
E340121 interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Djibouti
E340120
Canada and United States of

America
E343017
WARNING: Changes or
that Industry Canada technical E340306
Ghana
FCC ID: M3N-A2C931426
FCC ID: M3N-A2C931423
IC: 7812A-A2C931426
IC: 7812A-A2C913423
E340317
474
Malaysia
E340307
Jamaica
E340318 E339836
F17000176
Mauritania
E340308
E340487
E340219
E340310
E340215
475
Moldova Pakistan
E337971
Morocco
E337974
Paraguay
E343018
E339812
NR: 2016-9-I-000222
NR: 2016-9-I-000220
NR: 2016-9-I-000223
E340311
476
Serbia
TA-2016/2012
E340313
E269681
South Korea
Singapore
E339675
E339940 MSIP-CRM-TAL-A2C97102000
South Africa Taiwan, China
E343025 E340216
477
E340217 E340314
Ukraine Vietnam
E278262
E269682
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) Zambia
E340486 E343026
478
Djibouti
E340642
E340643
E340315
Ghana
RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE

Argentina
E340644
E340645
Mauritania
E339077
Brazil
E340530
10693-20-12270
E342393
479
South Africa
E340531
Morocco E340649
E340648
E340647
Pakistan
E342392 E340218
480
United States and Canada SYNC

Argentina
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: L2C0082R

FCC ID: L2C0083TR
IC: 342A-0083TR E338546

interference, and
operation.
E338545
Zambia
Brazil
E340646
E342398
481
European Union EU
E310043
E342510
Ghana
Djibouti
E338082
E342399
E338203
Jamaica
E342511 E342400
482
E342512 E342513
Malaysia Moldova
E337971
Morocco
E339836
SQASI/TA/19/4047
SQASI/TA/19/4046
Mauritania
E338085
E342401
483
Serbia
E338205
E342403
Pakistan
Singapore
2019
E342402
E339940
Paraguay
South Africa
TA-2019/2465
E339812
2020-03-I-00192 E342404
2020-03-I-00193
484
E342514 E342515
South Korea Ukraine
E338087
E338206
E269682
Taiwan United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E342405
E338088
485
Zambia
E338088
E342406
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: KMH-SYNCG4

E342516
FCC ID: KMH-SYNCG4L
IC: 1422A-SYNCG4
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT
IC: 1422A-SYNCG4L
interference, and
operation.
E340527
486
United States and Canada Brazil
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: KMH-14H074-NA1

E338010
IC: 1422A-14H074NA1
This device complies with Part 15 of the Jamaica
interference, and
operation.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING E338213

SYSTEM SENSORS - VEHICLES
WITH: 315 MHZ SENSORS
Mexico
Argentina
E338212
E338008
487
Paraguay TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM SENSORS - VEHICLES
WITH: 433 MHZ SENSORS
Argentina
E338214

E338009
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved China
FCC ID: MRXFP3

IC: 2546A-FP3
and Economic Development Canada’s E338011
interference, and
operation.
488
Djibouti Mauritania
E338012 E337970
Ghana Moldova
E338016
Jordan
E337971
Nigeria
E338017
E337972
489
Oman Serbia
E337973
Pakistan
E338019
Singapore
E337974 E338051
Paraguay South Korea
E338023
Ukraine
E338018
E338024
490
United Arab Emirates Djibouti
E338025 E340823
European Union EU
WIRELESS ACCESSORY
CHARGING MODULE
Argentina
E310043
Ghana
E340521
Brazil
E340522
Jamaica
E340824
E340523
491
Jordan Moldova
E340657
Malaysia
E337971
Morocco
E339836
SQASI/TA/19/4129
Mauritania
E340525
Paraguay
E340524
E339812
2017-10-I-0000333
492
Serbia South Korea
E340200 E273475
Singapore Taiwan, China
E339940 E338220
South Africa Ukraine
TA-2017/3167
E340658 E269682
493
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) Vietnam
E278262
E340526
United States Zambia
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: L2C0066T

E340659
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
subject to the following two conditions: - UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
interference, and
2. This device must accept any WARNING: Operating,
interference received, including servicing and maintaining a
interference that may cause undesired passenger vehicle or
operation. off-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
494
birth defects or other REPLACEMENT PARTS

reproductive harm. To minimize RECOMMENDATION
exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
except as necessary, service your recommend that you demand the use of
vehicle in a well-ventilated area genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
and wear gloves or wash your whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
hands frequently when servicing maintenance or repair. You can clearly
your vehicle. For more identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
information go to by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/ Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
passenger-vehicle. packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and

WARNING: Battery posts, Mechanical Repairs
terminals and related
One of the best ways for you to make sure
accessories contain lead and that your vehicle provides years of service
lead compounds, chemicals is to have it maintained in line with our
known to the State of California recommendations and instructions using
to cause cancer and parts that conform to the original vehicle
reproductive harm. Wash your parts specification. Genuine Ford and
hands after handling. Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
PERCHLORATE Collision Repairs

We hope that you never experience a
Certain components in your vehicle such collision, but accidents do happen.
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
and remote control batteries may contain meet our stringent requirements for fit,
perchlorate material. Special handling finish, structural integrity, corrosion
may apply for service or vehicle end of life protection and dent resistance. During
disposal. vehicle development we validate that
For more information visit: these parts deliver the intended level of
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
495
Warranty on Replacement Parts END USER LICENSE

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement AGREEMENT
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
Warranty may not cover damage caused LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
to your vehicle because of failed non-Ford
parts. For extra information, refer to the • You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty. have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS include software licensed or owned by
EQUIPMENT Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
WARNING: Driving while distracted media, printed materials, and "online"
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash or electronic documentation
and injury. We strongly recommend that ("SOFTWARE") are protected by
you use extreme caution when using any international intellectual property laws
device that may take your focus off the and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
road. Your primary responsibility is the licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
recommend against the use of any • The SOFTWARE may interface with
hand-held device while driving and and/or communicate with, or may be
encourage the use of voice-operated later upgraded to interface with and/or
systems when possible. Make sure you communicate with additional software
are aware of all applicable local laws and/or systems provided by FORD
that may affect the use of electronic MOTOR COMPANY.
devices while driving. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
Using mobile communications equipment DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
is becoming increasingly important in the THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
conduct of business and personal affairs. SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
However, you must not compromise your LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
own or others’ safety when using such WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
equipment. Mobile communications can TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
enhance personal safety and security when ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
appropriately used, particularly in GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
emergency situations. Safety must be EULA grants you the following license:
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid • You may use the SOFTWARE as
negating these benefits. Mobile installed on the DEVICES and as
communication equipment includes, but otherwise interfacing with systems
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, and/or services provide by or through
portable email devices, text messaging FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
devices and portable two-way radios. party software and service providers.
496
Description of Other Rights and • Single EULA: The end user

Limitations. documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
• Speech Recognition: If the contain multiple EULAs, such as
SOFTWARE includes speech multiple translations and/or multiple
recognition component(s), you should media versions (e.g., in the user
understand that speech recognition is documentation and in the software).
an inherently statistical process and Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
that recognition errors are inherent in are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR the SOFTWARE.
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of • SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
errors in the speech recognition permanently transfer your rights under
process. It is your responsibility to this EULA only as part of a sale or
monitor any speech recognition transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
functions included in the system. retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering, parts, the media and printed materials,
Decompilation and Disassembly: any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
You may not reverse engineer, Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
decompile, translate, disassemble or recipient agrees to the terms of this
attempt to discover any source code EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the any transfer must include all prior
SOFTWARE nor permit others to versions of the SOFTWARE.
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except • Termination: Without prejudice to any
and only to the extent that such activity other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
is expressly permitted by applicable may terminate this EULA if you fail to
law notwithstanding this limitation or comply with the terms and conditions
to the extent as may be permitted by of this EULA.
the licensing terms governing use of • Internet-Based Services
any open source components included Components: The SOFTWARE may
with the SOFTWARE. contain components that enable and
• Limitations on Distributing, facilitate the use of certain
Copying, Modifying and Creating Internet-based services. You
Derivative Works: You may not acknowledge and agree that FORD
distribute, copy, make modifications MOTOR COMPANY, third party
to or create derivative works based on software and service suppliers, its
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the affiliates and/or its designated agent
extent that such activity is expressly may automatically check the version
permitted by applicable law of the SOFTWARE and/or its
notwithstanding this limitation or to components that you are utilizing and
the extent as may be permitted by the may provide upgrades or supplements
licensing terms governing use of any to the SOFTWARE that may be
open source components included with automatically downloaded to your
the SOFTWARE. DEVICES.
497
• Additional Software/Services: The • Links to Third Party Sites: The

SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR SOFTWARE may provide you with the
COMPANY, third party software and ability to link to third party sites. The
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or third party sites are not under the
its designated agent to provide or make control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
available to you SOFTWARE updates, its affiliates and/or its designated
supplements, add-on components, or agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
Internet-based services components COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
of the SOFTWARE after the date you designated agent are responsible for
obtain your initial copy of the (I) the contents of any third party sites,
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental any links contained in third party sites,
Components".) SOFTWARE updates or any changes or updates to third
may cause you to incur additional party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
charges from your wireless service other form of transmission received
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY from any third party sites. If the
or third party software and services SOFTWARE provides links to third
suppliers provide or make available to party sites, those links are provided to
you Supplemental Components and you only as a convenience, and the
no other EULA terms are provided inclusion of any link does not imply an
along with the Supplemental endorsement of the third party site by
Components, then the terms of this FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR and/or its designated agent.
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its • Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
designated agent reserve the right to You recognize your obligation to drive
discontinue without liability any responsibly and keep attention on the
Internet-based services provided to road. You will read and abide with the
you or made available to you through DEVICES operating instructions
the use of the SOFTWARE. particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
498
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant

All title and intellectual property rights in you any rights in connection with any
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not trademarks or service marks of FORD
limited to any images, photographs, MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
animations, video, audio, music, text and party software and service providers.
"applets" incorporated into the PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
materials, and any copies of the provided in the documentation for the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR DEVICES product support, such as the
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The vehicle owner guide.
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials Should you have any questions concerning
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
and intellectual property rights in and to MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
the content which may be accessed please refer to the address provided in the
through use of the SOFTWARE is the documentation for the DEVICES.
property of the respective content owner No Liability for Certain Damages:
and may be protected by applicable EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
copyright or other intellectual property MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
rights to use such content outside its AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
intended use. All rights not specifically LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
granted under this EULA are reserved by CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
and third party software and service CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
services which may be accessed through LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
respective terms of use relating to such PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
services. If this SOFTWARE contains OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
documentation that is provided only in EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
electronic form, you may print one copy of VEHICLE.
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is Information Read and follow
subject to U.S. and European Union export instructions:
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all • Before using your SYNC® system, read
applicable international and national laws and follow all instructions and safety
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including information provided in this end user
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
as well as end-user, end-use and following precautions found in the
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and Owner Guide can lead to an accident
other governments. or other serious injuries.
499
General Operation substitute for your personal judgment.

• Voice Command Control: Certain Any route suggestions made by this
functions within the SYNC® system system should never replace any local
may be accomplished using voice traffic regulations or your personal
commands. Using voice commands judgment or knowledge of safe driving
while driving helps you to operate the practices.
system without removing your hands • Route Safety: Do not follow the route
from the wheel or eyes from the road. suggestions if doing so would result in
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
access any function requiring a would be placed in an unsafe situation,
prolonged view of the screen while you or if you would be directed into an area
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal that you consider unsafe. The driver is
manner before attempting to access a ultimately responsible for the safe
function of the system requiring operation of the vehicle and therefore,
prolonged attention. must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume • Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
at a level where you can still hear used by this system may be inaccurate
outside traffic and emergency signals because of changes in roads, traffic
while driving. Driving while unable to controls or driving conditions. Always
hear these sounds could cause an use good judgment and common sense
accident. when following the suggested routes.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation • Emergency Services: Do not rely on
features included in the system are any navigation features included in the
intended to provide turn by turn system to route you to emergency
instructions to get you to a desired services. Ask local authorities or an
destination. Please make certain all emergency services operator for these
persons using this system carefully locations. Not all emergency services
read and follow instructions and safety such as police, fire stations, hospitals
information fully. and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features.
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
500
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Disclaimer of Warranty

Risk
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
• You agree to each of the following:(a) AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
Any use of the SOFTWARE while SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
driving an automobile or other vehicle THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
in violation of applicable law or SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
presents a significant risk of distracted ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
driving and should not be attempted TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
under any circumstances;(b) Use of BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
poses a significant risk of hearing THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
damage and should not be attempted "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
under any circumstances;(c) The FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
SOFTWARE may not be compatible ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
with new or different versions of an HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
operating system, third party software, AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
or third party services, and the THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
critical failure of an operating system, SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
third party software, or third party STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
service.(d) Any third party service LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
accessed by or third party software AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
charge an additional fee for access, (ii) QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
may not work correctly, on an ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
may change streaming formats or NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
adult, profane or offensive content; and NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
misleading traffic, weather, financial OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
or safety information or other content; SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
cause you to incur additional charges SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
from your wireless service provider WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
(WSP) and any data or minute THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
calculators that may be included in the SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
software program are for reference OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
only, are not warranted in any way and UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
should not be relied upon in anyway. OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
to be responsible for and assume the THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
entire risk to the items set forth in CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
Section (a) – (e) above. INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
501
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE Binding Arbitration and Class Action

SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, Waiver
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE (a) Application. This Section applies to
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR controversy between You and FORD
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING exceptions listed above, concerning the
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE legal or equitable basis.
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL. (b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
• The laws of the State of Michigan which is a written statement of the name,
govern this EULA and Your use of the address, and contact information of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to dispute, and the relief requested. You and
other local, state, national, or FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
international laws. Any litigation arising resolve any dispute through informal
out of or related to this EULA shall be negotiation within 60 days from the date
brought and maintained exclusively in the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
a court of the State of Michigan You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
located in Wayne County or in the commence arbitration.
United States District Court for the (c) Small claims court. You may also
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby litigate any dispute in small claims court
consent to submit to the personal in your county of residence or FORD
jurisdiction of a court in the State of MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
Michigan located in Wayne County and business, if the dispute meets all
the United States District Court for the requirements to be heard in the small
Eastern District of Michigan for any claims court. You may litigate in small
dispute arising out of or relating to this claims court whether or not You
EULA. negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
502
the right to litigate (or participate in as a may award the same damages to you
party or class member) all disputes in court individually as a court could. The arbitrator
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes may award declaratory or injunctive relief
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, only to you individually, and only to the
whose decision will be final except for a extent required to satisfy your individual
limited right of appeal under the Federal claim.
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award. • I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
forum will be conducted solely on an
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
COMPANY’S last written settlement
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
offer made before the arbitrator was
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
appointed (“last written offer”), your
attorney general action, or in any other
dispute goes all the way to an
proceeding in which any party acts or
arbitrator’s decision (called an
proposes to act in a representative
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
you more than the last written offer,
be combined with another without the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
prior written consent of all parties to all
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
arbitration will be conducted by the (3) reimburse any expenses (including
American Arbitration Association (the expert witness fees and costs) that
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration your attorney reasonably accrues for
Rules. If You are an individual and use the investigating, preparing, and pursuing
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or will determine the amounts.
less whether or not You are an individual • ii. Disputes involving more than
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA $75,000. The AAA rules will govern
Supplementary Procedures for payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
Consumer-Related Disputes will also and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for • iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may any arbitration you commence, FORD
request a telephonic or in-person hearing MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
good cause to hold an in-person hearing or brought for an improper purpose. In
instead. For more information, see adr.org any arbitration FORD MOTOR
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to COMPANY commences, it will pay all
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
503
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and 1. Safe and Lawful Use
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any You acknowledge that devoting attention
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
counted in determining how much a of injury or death to you and others in
dispute involves. situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed agree to comply with the following when
within one year. To the extent permitted using the TeleNav Software:
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
be filed within one year in small claims drive safely;
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section (b) use your own personal judgment while
d). The one-year period begins when the driving. If you feel that a route suggested
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
a claim or dispute is not filed within one perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
year, it is permanently barred. places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver you into an area that you consider to be
(Section e) is found to be illegal or unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
dispute, then that portion of Section e will manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
not apply to those parts. Instead, those your vehicle is stationary and parked;
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
or in any manner inconsistent with this
unenforceable, that provision will be
Agreement;
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect. (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software End User License TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
Agreement your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
Please read these terms and conditions
operation of any safety device (such as an
carefully before you use the TeleNav
airbag).
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
terms and conditions. If you do not accept harmless against all claims resulting from
these terms and conditions, do not break any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
the seal of the package, launch, or use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
otherwise use the TeleNav Software. vehicle, including as a result of your failure
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and to comply with the directions above.
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
504
2. Account Information distribute, sublicense or otherwise

transfer the TeleNav Software to
You agree: (a) when registering the others, except as part of your
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with permanent transfer of the TeleNav
true, accurate, current, and complete Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
information about yourself, and (b) to Software in any manner that
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true, I. infringes the intellectual property or
accurate, current and complete. proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
3. Software License
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
• Subject to your compliance with the regulation, including but not limited to laws
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav and regulations related to spamming,
hereby grants to you a personal, privacy, consumer and child protection,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license obscenity or defamation, or
(except as expressly permitted below iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
in connection with your permanent harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
transfer of the TeleNav Software obscene, libelous, or otherwise
license), without the right to objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
sublicense, to use the TeleNav otherwise permit unauthorized access by
Software (in object code form only) in third parties to the TeleNav Software
order to access and use the TeleNav without advanced written permission of
Software. This license shall terminate TeleNav.
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will 4. Disclaimers
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes, • To the fullest extent permissible
and not to provide commercial pursuant to applicable law, in no event
navigation services to other parties. will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
3.1 License Limitations foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile, else in reliance on the information
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
provided by the TeleNav Software.
or otherwise change the TeleNav
TeleNav also does not warrant the
Software or any part thereof; (b)
accuracy of the map or other data used
attempt to derive the source code,
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
audio library or structure of the
may not always reflect reality due to,
TeleNav Software without the prior
among other things, road closures,
express written consent of TeleNav;
construction, weather, new roads and
(c) remove from the TeleNav
other changing conditions. You are
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
responsible for the entire risk arising
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
out of your use of the TeleNav
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
Software. For example but without
other notices or markings; (d)
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
505
is dependent on the accuracy of REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,

navigation, as the maps or functionality WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
of the TeleNav Software are not REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
intended to support such high risk DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
applications, especially in more remote CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
geographical areas. NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT 6. Arbitration and Governing Law
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV • You agree that any dispute, claim or
SOFTWARE. controversy arising out of or relating to
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the this Agreement or the TeleNav
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this Software shall be settled by
limitation may not apply to you. independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
5. Limitation of Liability the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER The arbitrator shall apply the
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV American Arbitration Association, and
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS the judgment upon the award rendered
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD by the arbitrator may be entered by any
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, court having jurisdiction. Note that
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES proceeding and the decision of the
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT arbitrator shall be binding upon both
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE parties. You expressly agree to waive
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, and performance hereunder will be
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF governed by and construed in
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION accordance with the laws of the State
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE of California, without giving effect to
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE its conflict of law provisions. To the
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF extent judicial action is necessary in
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE connection with the binding arbitration,
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. both TeleNav and you agree to submit
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
506
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the conferred by implication, statute,

courts of the County of Santa Clara, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
California. The United Nations TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
Convention on Contracts for the hereby reserve all of their respective rights
International Sale of Goods shall not other than the licenses explicitly granted
apply. in this Agreement.
7. Assignment 8.3
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer By using the TeleNav Software, you
this Agreement or any of your rights or consent to receive from TeleNav all
obligations, except in totality, in communications, including notices,
connection with your permanent agreements, legally required disclosures
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and or other information in connection with the
expressly conditioned upon the new TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing electronically. TeleNav may provide such
to be bound by the terms and Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
conditions of this Agreement. Any such Website or by downloading such Notices
sale, assignment or transfer that is not to your wireless device. If you desire to
expressly permitted under this withdraw your consent to receive Notices
paragraph will result in immediate electronically, you must discontinue your
termination of this Agreement, without use of the TeleNav Software.
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately 8.4
cease all use of the TeleNav Software. TeleNav's or your failure to require
Notwithstanding the foregoing, performance of any provision shall not
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to affect that party's right to require
any other party at any time without performance at any time thereafter, nor
notice, provided the assignee remains shall a waiver of any breach or default of
bound by this Agreement. this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
8. Miscellaneous subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.1
8.5
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with If any provision herein is held
respect to the subject matter hereof. unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
8.2 parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
Except for the limited licenses expressly effect.
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
507
8.6 HERE holds a non-exclusive license from

the United States Postal Service® to
The headings in this Agreement are for
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, ©United States Postal Service® 2014.
and will not be referred to in connection Prices are not established, controlled or
with the construction or interpretation of approved by the United States Postal
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, Service®. The following trademarks and
the words "include" and "including" and registrations are owned by the USPS:
variations thereof, will not be deemed to United States Postal Service, USPS, and
be terms of limitation, but rather will be ZIP+4
deemed to be followed by the words The Data for Mexico includes certain data
"without limitation". from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions Geografía.
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
other data licensed to Telenav by third (Shanghai) Co., Ltd
party vendors for the benefit of you and The data (“Data”) is provided for your
other end users. This Agreement personal, internal use only and not for
includes end-user terms applicable to resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
these companies (included at the end subject to the following terms and
of this Agreement), and thus your use conditions which are agreed to by you, on
of the Telenav Software is also subject the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
to such terms. You agree to comply Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
with the following additional terms and their licensors and suppliers) on the other
conditions, which are applicable to hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors.
Terms and Conditions
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
The data (“Data”) is provided for your for the internal business and personal
personal, internal use only and not for purposes for which you were licensed, and
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is not for service bureau, time-sharing or
subject to the following terms and other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
conditions which are agreed to by you, on subject to the restrictions set forth in the
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and following paragraphs, you agree not to
its licensors (including their licensors and otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
suppliers) on the other hand. decompile, disassemble, create any
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
The Data for areas of Canada includes or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
information taken with permission from except to the extent permitted by
Canadian authorities, including: © Her mandatory laws.
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
508
Restrictions. Except where you have been PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR

specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
and without limiting the preceding Territories and Countries do not allow
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) certain warranty exclusions, so to that
with any products, systems, or applications extent the above exclusion may not apply
installed or otherwise connected to or in to you.
communication with vehicles, capable of Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
real time route guidance, fleet LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
management or similar applications; or (b) BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
with or in communication with any CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
positioning devices or any mobile or IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
wireless-connected electronic or computer CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
devices, including without limitation ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
computers, pagers, and personal digital MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
assistants or PDAs. POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
Warning. The Data may contain FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
inaccurate or incomplete information due CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
to the passage of time, changing OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
circumstances, sources used and the SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
nature of collecting comprehensive ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
geographic data, any of which may lead to INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
incorrect results. ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
guarantees, representations or warranties LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
of any kind, express or implied, arising by POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
law or otherwise, including but not limited States, Territories and Countries do not
to, content, quality, accuracy, allow certain liability exclusions or
completeness, effectiveness, reliability, damages limitations, so to that extent the
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, above may not apply to you.
use or results to be obtained from this Export Control. You shall not export from
Data, or that the Data or server will be anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
uninterrupted or error-free. product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
required under, applicable export laws,
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
rules and regulations, including but not
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
administered by the Office of Foreign
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
509
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit

HERE from complying with any of its NOTICE OF USE
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
excused and shall not constitute a breach SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
of this Agreement.
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
Entire Agreement. These terms and SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
conditions constitute the entire agreement West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
between Telenav (and its licensors, 60606
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, This Data is a commercial item as
and supersedes in their entirety any and defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
all written or oral agreements previously these End-User Terms under which this
existing between us with respect to such Data was provided.
subject matter.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws If the Contracting Officer, federal
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” government agency, or any federal official
where European HERE Data is used], refuses to use the legend provided herein,
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of the Contracting Officer, federal
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations government agency, or any federal official
Convention for Contracts for the must notify HERE prior to seeking
International Sale of Goods, which is additional or alternative rights in the Data.
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European I. US/Canada Territory
HERE Data is used] for any and all A. United States Data. The End-User
disputes, claims and actions arising from Terms for any Application containing
or in connection with the Data provided to Data for the United States shall contain
you hereunder. the following notices:
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the “HERE holds a non-exclusive license
United States government or any other from the United States Postal
entity seeking or applying rights similar to Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
those customarily claimed by the United information.”
States government, this Data is a “©United States Postal Service®
“commercial item” as that term is defined 20XX. Prices are not established,
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in controlled or approved by the United
accordance with these End-User Terms, States Postal Service®. The following
and each copy of Data delivered or trademarks and registrations are
otherwise furnished shall be marked and owned by the USPS: United States
embedded as appropriate with the Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
510
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with

B. Canada Data. The following provi- each copy of all or any portion of the
sions apply to the Data for Canada, Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
which may include or reflect data from shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
third party licensors (“Third Party following copyright notice on at least
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen one of: (i) the label for the storage
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada for the copy; or (iii) other materials
Post”) and the Department of Natural packaged with the copy, such as user
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”): manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client taken with permission from Canadian
agrees that its use of the Third Party authorities, including © Her Majesty
Data is subject to the following provi- the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
sions: Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The Department of Natural Resources
licensors of such data, including Her Canada. All rights reserved.”
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, 3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
make no guarantees, representa- wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tions or warranties respecting such tion with the provision of any portion
data, either express or implied, of the Data for the Territory of Canada
arising by law or otherwise, including to End-Users as may be authorized
but not limited to, effectiveness, under the Agreement, Client shall
completeness, accuracy or fitness provide such End-Users, in a reason-
for a particular purpose. ably conspicuous manner, with terms
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third (set forth with other end user terms
Party Data licensors, including Her required to be provided under the
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Agreement, or as otherwise may be
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of provided, by Client) which shall include
any claim, demand or action, irre- the following provisions on behalf of
spective of the nature of the cause the Third Party Data licensors,
of the claim, demand or action including Her Majesty, Canada Post
alleging any loss, injury or damages, and NRCan:
direct or indirect, which may result The Data may include or reflect
from the use or possession of such data of licensors, including Her
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of Majesty the Queen in the Right of
revenues or contracts, or any other Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
consequential loss of any kind Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
resulting from any defect in the and the Department of Natural
Data. Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
511
either express or implied, arising by

law or otherwise, including but not II. Mexico. The following provision applies
limited to, effectiveness, complete- to the Data for Mexico, which includes
ness, accuracy or fitness for a certain data from the Instituto Nacional
particular purpose. The licensors, de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
respect of any claim, demand or packaging containing Data for Mexico
action, irrespective of the nature of shall contain the following notice:
the cause of the claim, demand or “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
action alleging any loss, injury or Estadística y Geografía)”
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses- III. Latin America Territory
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty, A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not of the Data and/or packaging relating
be liable in any way for loss of thereto shall include the respective Third
revenues or contracts, or any other Party Notices set forth below and used
consequential loss of any kind as described below corresponding to
resulting from any defect in the data the Territory (or portion thereof)
or the Data. included in such copy:
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her Territory Notice
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Argen- IGN “INSTITUTO
and their officers, employees and tina GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
agents from and against any claim, ARGENTINO”
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim, Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
demand or action, alleging loss, MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
costs, expenses, damages or injuries AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
(including injuries resulting in death) 2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
arising out of the use or possession ENERO DE 2011”
of the data or the Data. “source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi- Guade-
tion to all of the rights and obligations loupe,
of the parties under the Agreement. French
To the extent that any of the provi- Guiana
sions of this Section are inconsistent and
with, or conflict with, any other provi- Marti- “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
sions of the Agreement, the provisions nique Nacional de Estadística y
of this Section shall prevail. Mexico Geografía)”
IV. Middle East Territory
512
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies

of the Data and/or packaging relating V. Europe Territory
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
as described below corresponding to 1. General Restrictions Applicable to
the Territory (or portion thereof) Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
included in such copy: and agrees that in certain countries of
Country Notice the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
Jordan “© Royal Jordanian party RDS-TMC code providers to
Geographic Centre”. The receive and use the Traffic Codes in
foregoing notice requirement the Data and to deliver to End-Users
for Jordan Data is a material Transactions in any way derived from
term of the Agreement. If or based on such Traffic Codes. For
Client or any of its permitted such countries, HERE shall deliver the
sublicensees (if any) fail to Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
meet such requirement, Client only after receiving certification
HERE shall have the right to from Client of its having obtained such
terminate Client’s license rights.
with respect to the Jordan
Data. 2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted each Transaction that uses Traffic
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from Codes for Belgium, provide the
licensing and/or otherwise distributing following notice to the End-User:
HERE’s database for the country of “Traffic Codes for Belgium are
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter- provided by the Ministerie van de
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. Transports.”
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
restricted from using the Jordan Data in license granted to Client relating to
Enterprise Applications if such party is making, selling or distributing paper
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a paper-like medium): (a) such license
Jordan-based customer. For purposes with respect to Data for the Territory of
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica- Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic- entering into and complying with a
ations, GIS applications, mobile business separate written agreement with the
asset management applications, call Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
center applications, telematics applica- sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
tions, public organization Internet OS any and all applicable paper map
applications or for providing geocoding royalties, and Client’s complying with
services. the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
513
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior Austria “© Bundesamt für Eich-

written consent from Kartografie a.s.; und Vermessungswesen”
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of Croatia
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s Cyprus,
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Estonia,
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Latvia,
Client is restricted from using Data for Lithuania,
the Territory of France to create paper Moldova,
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and Poland,
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted Slovenia
from using any Data to create, sell or and/or
distribute paper maps that are the same Ukraine “© EuroGeographics”
or substantially similar, in terms of data France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD
content and specific use of color, TOPO ®”
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national Germany “Die Grundlagendaten
mapping agencies, including without wurden mit Genehmigung
limitation, Landervermessungämter of der zuständigen Behörden
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the entnommen”
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Great Britain “Contains Ordnance
Landestopografie of Switzerland, Survey data © Crown
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung- copyright and database
swesen of Austria, and the National right 2010 Contains Royal
Land Survey of Sweden. Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting right 2010”
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Greece “Copyright Geomatics
Client acknowledges and agrees that Ltd.”
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring Hungary “Copyright © 2003; Top-
a direct action against Client to enforce Map Ltd.”
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è
map requirements (see Section IV(B) stata prodotta usando
above) contained in this Agreement. quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies al tratto prodotta e fornita
of the Data and/or packaging relating dalla Regione Toscana.”
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used Norway “Copyright © 2000;
as described below corresponding to Norwegian Mapping
the Territory (or portion thereof) Authority”
included in such copy:
Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
Country(ies) Notice
514
Spain “Información geográfica Product incorporates data which is ©

propiedad del CNIG” 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Sweden “Based upon electronic Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.” B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Switzerland “Topografische Terms for any Application containing
Grundlage: © Bundesamt RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
für Landestopographie. shall contain the following notice:
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client “Product incorporates traffic location
acknowledges that HERE has not codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
received approvals to distribute map tion Limited and its licensors.”
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus, AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan. Telematics Disclosure
HERE may update such list from time to
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
time. The license rights granted to Client
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
under this TL with respect to the Data
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
for such countries are contingent upon
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
Client’s compliance with all applicable
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
laws and regulations, including, without
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
limitation, any required licenses or
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
approvals to distribute the Application
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
incorporating such Data in such
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
respective countries.
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
VI. Australia Territory CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
of the Data and/or packaging relating PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
thereto shall include the respective Third AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
Party Notices set forth below and used UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
as described below corresponding to UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
the Territory (or portion thereof) UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
included in such copy: EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
Copyright. Based on data provided KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
under license from PSMA Australia REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
Limited (www.psma.com.au). ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
515
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR

HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE. LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY, TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT. USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT. HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
DEVICE. TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE CARRIER.
SERVICES
VII. China Territory
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL Personal Use Only
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END You agree to use this Data together with
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE [insert name of Client Application] for the
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT solely personal, non-commercial purposes
GUARANTEE ANY END USER for which you were licensed, and not for
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR service bureau, time-sharing or other
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS to the restrictions set forth in the following
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER as necessary for your personal use to (i)
516
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you Customer Remedies
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
reverse engineer any portion of this Data, paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
and may not transfer or distribute it in any the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
form, for any purpose, except to the extent Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
permitted by mandatory laws. with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
Restrictions resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
Except where you have been specifically be warranted for the remainder of the
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
not (a) use this Data with any products, nor any product support services offered
systems, or applications installed or by NAV2 are available without proof of
otherwise connected to or in purchase from an authorized international
communication with vehicles, capable of source.
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet No Other Warranty:
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
positioning devices or any mobile or SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
wireless-connected electronic or computer PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
devices, including without limitation AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
computers, pagers, and personal digital ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
using this Data if you fail to comply with MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
these terms and conditions. PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
Limited Warranty exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will exclusion may not apply to you.
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a Limited Liability:
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
described in applicable written materials LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
support engineers will make commercially BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
reasonable efforts to solve any problem CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
issues. IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
517
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, Governing Law.

CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, The above terms and conditions shall be
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES governed by the laws of the People’s
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR Republic of China, without giving effect to
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR United Nations Convention for Contracts
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR for the International Sale of Goods, which
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A from or in connection with the Data
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS provided to you hereunder shall be
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE submitted to the Shanghai International
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER Economic and Trade Arbitration
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR Commission for arbitration.
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER Gracenote® Copyright
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under CD and music-related data from
applicable law, so to that extent the above Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
exclusion may not apply to you.
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Export Control Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
You agree not to export to anywhere any practice one or more of the following U.S.
part of the Data provided to you or any Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
direct product thereof except in 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
compliance with, and with all licenses and 6,330,593 and other patents issued or
approvals required under, applicable pending. Some services supplied under
export laws, rules and regulations. license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
IP Protection
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
suppliers and are protected by applicable logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
copyright and other intellectual property Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
law and treaties. The Data are provided Gracenote.
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale. Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
Entire Agreement
This device contains software from
These terms and conditions constitute the Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
entire agreement between NAV2(and its Emeryville, California 94608
licensors, including their licensors and ("Gracenote").
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their The software from Gracenote (the
entirety any and all written or oral "Gracenote Software") enables this device
agreements previously existing between to do disc and music file identification and
us with respect to such subject matter. obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
518
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform including any copyrighted material or

other functions. You may use Gracenote music file information. You agree that
Data only by means of the intended End Gracenote may enforce its respective
User functions of this device. This device rights, collectively or separately, under this
may contain content belonging to agreement against you, directly in each
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the company's own name.
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
queries for statistical purposes. The
content and such content providers shall
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
be entitled to all of the benefits and
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
protections set forth herein that are
queries without knowing anything about
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
who you are. For more information, see the
will use the content from Gracenote
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
non-commercial use only. You agree not OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
associated with a music file) to any third WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
HEREIN. TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
Gracenote Servers.
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
Gracenote Content, including all ownership OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
rights. Under no circumstances will either ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
Gracenote become liable for any payment THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
to you for any information that you provide, PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
519
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A AND CONDITIONS
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER By activating, using and/or accessing the
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE other content or material provided by
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL and/or Services), you must accept
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY certain terms and conditions. The following
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL is a brief summary of the terms and
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS conditions that apply to you. To view the
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON full terms and conditions relevant to your
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007. use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
Taiwan Territory
Website
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
radiation motors: ditions/
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models, 1. Acceptance
companies, firms or users must not alter
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
the frequency, increase the power or
you will be deemed to have accepted and
change the characteristics and functions
agreed to be bound by the terms and
of the original design without authorization.
conditions fully detailed at:
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect Website
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
be detected, immediately stop using the ditions/
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any 2. Intellectual Property
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless SUNA Products and/or Services are for
telecommunication of the telco, the your personal use. You may not record, or
low-power radio frequency motor must be retransmit the content, nor use the content
able to tolerate legal limits of interference in association with any other traffic
from telecommunication, industrial, information or route guidance service or
scientific and radio wave equipment. device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
520
SUNA Products and/or Services are Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier

intended as an aid to personal motoring has been advised of the possibility of such
and travel planning, and do not provide damages. You also acknowledge that the
comprehensive or accurate information on neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
all occasions. On occasions, you may guarantees nor make any warranties that
experience additional delay as a result of relate to the availability, accuracy or
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You completeness of SUNA Products and/or
acknowledge that it is not intended, or Services, and to the extent which it is
suitable, for use in applications where time lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
of arrival or driving directions may impact Supplier excludes any warranties which
the safety of the public or yourself. might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
Products and/or Services.
while driving
7. Please Note
You, and other authorized drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or Great care has been taken in preparing this
Services are available or installed and manual. Constant product development
active, remain at all times responsible for may mean that some information is not
observing all relevant laws and codes of entirely up-to-date. The information in this
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only document is subject to change without
actively operate SUNA Products and/or notice.
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
EMISSION LAW
5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavors to WARNING: Do not remove or alter
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours the original equipment floor covering or
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic insulation between it and the metal floor
Channel may occasionally be unavailable of the vehicle. The floor covering and
for technical reasons or for planned insulation protect occupants of the
maintenance. We will try to perform vehicle from the engine and exhaust
maintenance at times when congestion is system heat and noise. On vehicles with
light. We reserve the right to withdraw no original equipment floor covering
SUNA Products and/or Services at any insulation, do not carry passengers in a
time. manner that permits prolonged skin
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted contact with the metal floor. Failure to
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel follow these instructions may result in
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location. fire or personal injury.
6. Limitation of Liability U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
the manufacturer of your device (the emission control system components.
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to Similar federal or provincial laws may
any third party for any damages either apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential vehicle modification without first
or otherwise arising out of the use of or determining applicable laws.
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
521
Tampering with emissions • A clogged fuel filter.

control systems including • Contaminated fuel.
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced • Air in the fuel system, due to loose
engine power and the illumination of the connections.
service engine soon light. • An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
Tampering With a Noise Control • Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
System
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
Federal laws prohibit the following acts: climactic conditions.
• Removal or rendering inoperative by Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
any person other than for purposes of filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
maintenance. Regular maintenance or replacement is not
• Repair or replacement of any device or needed.
element of the design incorporated into Note: If these checks do not help you
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise correct the concern, have your vehicle
control prior to its sale or delivery to checked as soon as possible.
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use. Noise Emissions Warranty,
• The use of the vehicle after any person Prohibited Tampering Acts and
removes or renders inoperative any Maintenance
device or element of the design. On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency became effective governing the noise
may presume to constitute tampering as emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
follows: (4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron (GVWR). The preceding statements
absorbers, fender apron barriers, concerning prohibited tampering acts and
underbody noise shields or acoustically maintenance, and the noise warranty
absorptive material. found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications. EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
For your particular global region, your
experiences a decrease in engine
vehicle may be equipped with features and
performance, experiences excess fuel
options that are different from the features
consumption or produces excessive
and options that are described in this
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet supplement may be supplied that
system hose. complements this book. By referring to the
• A plugged engine air filter element. market unique supplement, if provided,
• Water in the fuel filter and water you can properly identify those features,
separator. recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
522
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and

Canadian markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
523
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC Note: We test and certify your vehicle to

meet electromagnetic compatibility
COMPATIBILITY legislation. It is your responsibility to make
sure that any equipment an authorized
dealer installs on your vehicle complies with
WARNING: Do not place objects applicable local legislation and other
or mount equipment on or near the requirements. Installation of some
airbag cover, on the side of the front or aftermarket electronic devices could
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may degrade the performance of vehicle
come into contact with a deploying functions, which use radio frequency signals
airbag. Failure to follow these such as broadcast radio receiver, tire
instructions may increase the risk of pressure monitoring system, push button
personal injury in the event of a crash. start, Bluetooth® connectivity or satellite
navigation.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
cables to vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
brake pipes. telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
WARNING: Keep antenna and following illustrations and table. We do not
power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from provide any other special provisions or
any electronic modules and airbags. conditions for installations or use.
Car
E239120
524
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
525
Appendices
Frequency Band MHz Maximum Output Power Watt Antenna Positions

(Peak RMS)
1-30 50 1
50-54 50 2, 3
68-88 50 2, 3
142-176 50 2, 3
380-512 50 2, 3
806-870 10 2, 3
Note: After the installation of radio

frequency transmitters, check for
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
standby and transmit modes.
Check all electrical equipment:
• With the ignition ON.
• With the vehicle running.
• During a road test at various speeds.
Check that electromagnetic fields
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the
transmitter installed do not exceed
applicable human exposure requirements.
526
Index
3 Adaptive Cruise Control –

Troubleshooting........................................240
360 Degree Camera...................................229 Adaptive Cruise Control – Information
360 Degree Camera Settings.........................231 Messages.........................................................240
360 Degree Camera Guide Lines..........230 Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors..................105
360 Degree Camera Limitations...........229 Adjusting the Headlamps.........................329
360 Degree Camera Precautions..........229 Adjusting the Instrument Panel Lighting
360 Degree Camera Settings..................231 Brightness....................................................102
Switching the 360 Degree Camera On and Adjusting the Map......................................440
Off........................................................................231 Changing the Format of the Map...............440
Switching the 360 Degree Camera Zooming the Map In and Out.......................440
View.....................................................................231 Adjusting the Seatbelts During
Pregnancy......................................................54
4 Adjusting the Sound Settings..................415
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................89
4WD Adjusting the Volume.................................414
See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................182 Aid Mode..........................................................251
How Does Aid Mode Work...............................251
9 What Is Aid Mode................................................251
Airbag Precautions.........................................61
911 Assist...........................................................68 Airbags...............................................................59
Front Passenger Sensing System..................63
A Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
A/C Automatic Temperature Control...............117
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Automatic Temperature Control...............117 Temperature Control....................................122
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Temperature Control....................................122 Specification..............................................402
About This Publication..................................17 Air Filter
ABS See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............326
See: Brakes...........................................................194 Alert and Aid Mode......................................251
Accessing Apps.............................................437 How Does Alert and Aid Mode Work..........252
Accessing Navigation................................440 What Is Alert and Aid Mode............................251
Accessing the Passive Key Backup Alert Mode.....................................................250
Position.........................................................156 Adjusting the Steering Wheel Vibration
Accessories....................................................445 Intensity.............................................................251
Adaptive Cruise Control............................234 How Does Alert Mode Work...........................251
Adaptive Cruise Control – What Is Alert Mode...........................................250
Troubleshooting............................................240 AM/FM Radio.................................................416
Adaptive Cruise Control AM/FM Radio Limitations...............................416
Indicators.....................................................240 Selecting a Radio Station................................416
Adaptive Cruise Control Ambient Lighting..........................................102
Limitations...................................................235 Adjusting Ambient Lighting............................102
Adaptive Cruise Control Switching Ambient Lighting On and
Precautions.................................................234 Off.......................................................................102
527
Index
Anti-Lock Braking System........................194 Switching Automatic Engine Stop On and

Anti-Lock Braking System Off.......................................................................156
Limitations.......................................................194 What Is Automatic Engine Stop....................155
Appendices....................................................524 Automatic High Beam Control.................98
Applying the Electric Parking Automatic High Beam Control
Brake..............................................................198 Indicators...........................................................99
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an Automatic High Beam Control
Emergency...................................................198 Limitations.........................................................99
App Precautions...........................................437 Automatic High Beam Control
App Requirements......................................437 Precautions.......................................................98
Apps..................................................................437 Automatic High Beam Control
Audio System.................................................414 Requirements...................................................99
AM/FM Radio.......................................................416 How Does Automatic High Beam Control
Audio System – Troubleshooting.................421 Work.....................................................................98
Digital Radio..........................................................417 Overriding Automatic High Beam
Satellite Radio.....................................................418 Control................................................................99
Audio System Precautions.......................414 Switching Automatic High Beam Control
Audio System – Troubleshooting...........421 On and Off.........................................................99
Audio System – Information Automatic High Beam Control –
Messages..........................................................421 Troubleshooting........................................100
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror..................104 Automatic High Beam Control –
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror Information Messages................................100
Limitations.......................................................104 Automatic Locking Mode............................54
What Is the Auto-Dimming Interior Disengaging Automatic Locking Mode........54
Mirror..................................................................104 Engaging Automatic Locking Mode..............54
Autolamps........................................................95 What Is Automatic Locking Mode.................54
Autolamp Settings..............................................95 Automatic Transmission Audible
What Are Autolamps..........................................95 Warnings........................................................181
Autolock.............................................................79 Automatic Transmission............................178
Autolock Requirements.....................................79 Automatic Transmission Positions..............178
What Is Autolock..................................................79 Brake Shift Interlock..........................................180
Automatically Releasing the Electric Manually Shifting Gears..................................180
Parking Brake..............................................198 Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity
Automatic Crash Shutoff.........................302 and Specification.....................................403
Automatic Crash Shutoff Automatic Transmission Position
Precautions.....................................................303 Indicators......................................................179
Re-Enabling Your Vehicle...............................303 Automatic Transmission Positions........178
What Is Automatic Crash Shutoff...............302 Drive (D).................................................................178
Automatic Emergency Braking..............266 Manual (M)...........................................................179
Switching Automatic Emergency Braking Neutral (N)............................................................178
On and Off......................................................266 Park (P)..................................................................178
What Is Automatic Emergency Reverse (R)...........................................................178
Braking..............................................................266 Sport (S)................................................................179
Automatic Engine Stop..............................155 Automatic Transmission
How Does Automatic Engine Stop Precautions..................................................178
Work....................................................................155 Auto Mode........................................................119
Overriding Automatic Engine Stop..............156 Auto Mode Indicators.........................................119
Switching Auto Mode On and Off.................119
528
Index
Switching Dual Mode On and Off................120 Identifying the Fuses in the Body Control
Auto-Start-Stop............................................161 Module Fuse Box............................................315
Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting...........163 Locating the Body Control Module Fuse
Auto-Start-Stop Indicators......................163 Box.......................................................................314
Auto-Start-Stop Precautions - Bonnet Lock
Automatic Transmission..........................161 See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........318
Auto-Start-Stop Precautions - Manual Booster Seats..................................................48
Transmission................................................161 Brake Fluid Specification...........................195
Auto-Start-Stop – Brake Over Accelerator..............................194
Troubleshooting.........................................163 Brake Precautions........................................194
Auto-Start-Stop – Frequently Asked Brakes...............................................................194
Questions.........................................................165 Anti-Lock Braking System..............................194
Auto-Start-Stop – Information Brakes – Troubleshooting...............................195
Messages..........................................................163 Brake Shift Interlock...................................180
Autounlock........................................................78 Brake Shift Interlock Precautions................180
Autounlock Requirements................................78 Using Brake Shift Interlock.............................180
Switching Autounlock On and Off.................79 What Is Brake Shift Interlock.........................180
What Is Autounlock.............................................78 Brakes – Troubleshooting.........................195
Auxiliary Switches.......................................447 Brakes – Frequently Asked
Questions..........................................................197
B Brakes – Information Messages...................196
Brakes – Warning Lamps................................195
Battery Breaking-In.....................................................297
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................326
Beginning a Voice Interaction.................428
Blind Spot Information System.............256
C
Blind Spot Information System – Calculating Payload....................................274
Troubleshooting............................................258 Calculating the Load Limit.......................274
Blind Spot Information System California Proposition 65 - United States
Indicators.....................................................258 of America..................................................494
Blind Spot Information System Canceling the Set Speed.........................208
Limitations..................................................256 Capacities and Specifications................393
Blind Spot Information System Catalytic Converter.......................................173
Precautions.................................................256 Catalytic Converter –
Blind Spot Information System Troubleshooting..............................................173
Requirements - Automatic Catalytic Converter Precautions.............173
Transmission...............................................257 Catalytic Converter –
Blind Spot Information System Troubleshooting.........................................173
Requirements - Manual Catalytic Converter – Warning
Transmission..............................................256 Lamps.................................................................173
Blind Spot Information System – Center Console - Automatic
Troubleshooting........................................258 Transmission..................................................31
Blind Spot Information System – Center Console..............................................149
Information Messages................................258 Locking the Center Console...........................149
Bluetooth®....................................................436 Opening the Center Console..........................149
Body Control Module Fuse Box...............314 Center Console - Manual
Accessing the Body Control Module Fuse Transmission................................................30
Box.......................................................................314 Center Display Limitations.......................425
529
Index
Center Display Overview...........................425 Cleaning the Convertible Top........................362

Center Display Precautions.....................425 Cleaning the Engine Compartment.............361
Changing a Flat Tire....................................387 Cleaning the Exterior Precautions..............360
Changing a Road Wheel...........................387 Cleaning the Underbody.................................362
Changing the 12V Battery.........................326 Cleaning Wheels.................................................361
Changing the Engine Air Filter................326 Cleaning Windows and Wiper Blades........361
Changing the Fuel Filter............................326 Cleaning the Interior...................................362
Changing the Remote Control Cleaning Carpets and Floor Mats................363
Battery.............................................................70 Cleaning Displays and Screens....................363
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Cleaning Fabric Seats and
Name or Password....................................412 Headliners.......................................................363
Charging a Device.........................................143 Cleaning Leather and Vinyl............................363
Charging a Wireless Device......................148 Cleaning Plastic..................................................363
Checking MyKey System Status...............76 Cleaning Seatbelts...........................................364
Checking the Brake Fluid...........................194 Cleaning the Instrument Panel....................362
Checking the Clutch Fluid Level..............176 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................75
Checking the Coolant.................................322 Clearing the Garage Door Opener.........140
Checking the Manual Transmission Fluid Climate Control...............................................117
Level................................................................176 Auto Mode..............................................................119
Checking the Seatbelts...............................56 Climate Control Hints.................................120
Checking the Tire Pressures....................379 Closing the Tailgate......................................84
Checking the Wiper Blades.........................91 Closing the Tailgate From Outside Your
Children and Airbags....................................62 Vehicle.................................................................84
Child Restraint Anchor Points....................41 Clutch Fluid Capacity and
Locating the Child Restraint Lower Anchor Specification................................................176
Points....................................................................41 Cold Weather Precautions.......................297
Locating the Child Restraint Top Tether Connected Vehicle.....................................409
Anchor Points...................................................42 Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
What Are the Child Restraint Anchor Network...........................................................409
Points....................................................................41 Connected Vehicle Data..............................24
Child Restraints...............................................42 Connected Vehicle Limitations.............409
Child Restraint Position Information.............42 Connected Vehicle Requirements........409
Child Restraints Recommendation...............44 Connected Vehicle –
Child Safety......................................................40 Troubleshooting........................................410
Child Restraint Anchor Points..........................41 Connecting a Bluetooth® Device..........436
Child Restraints.....................................................42 Connecting a Trailer.....................................281
Installing Child Restraints.................................44 Connecting a Trailer –
Child Safety Locks.........................................50 Troubleshooting............................................282
Child Safety Precautions............................40 Connecting a Trailer Precautions...........281
Cleaning Products......................................360 Connecting a Trailer –
Cleaning the Exterior.................................360 Troubleshooting........................................282
Cleaning Camera Lenses and Connecting a Trailer – Information
Sensors.............................................................362 Messages.........................................................282
Cleaning Chrome, Aluminium or Stainless Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Steel....................................................................361 Network.......................................................409
Cleaning Headlamps and Rear Connecting FordPass to the Modem........409
Lamps................................................................361 Enabling and Disabling the Modem..........409
Cleaning Stripes or Graphics.........................362 What Is the Modem.........................................409
530
Index
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Disposing of Airbags.....................................67

Network.......................................................409 Distance Indication.....................................264
Connecting Your Phone.............................431 Distance Indication Indicator........................266
Contacting Us...................................................15 Switching Distance Indication On and
Cooling System Capacity and Off......................................................................266
Specification - 2.3L EcoBoost™........400 What Is Distance Indication..........................264
Cooling System Capacity and Doors and Locks.............................................78
Specification - 2.7L EcoBoost™..........401 Autolock...................................................................79
Crash and Breakdown Autounlock..............................................................78
Information.................................................299 Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting.............79
Automatic Crash Shutoff...............................302 Mislock......................................................................79
Jump Starting the Vehicle.............................300 Operating the Doors From Inside Your
Post-Crash Alert System................................302 Vehicle.................................................................78
Recovery Towing................................................303 Operating the Doors From Outside Your
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......66 Vehicle.................................................................78
Crawler Gear...................................................174 Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting.......79
Using Crawler Gear.............................................174 Doors and Locks – Frequently Asked
What Is Crawler Gear.........................................174 Questions............................................................81
Creating a MyKey............................................75 Doors and Locks – Information
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot...........412 Messages...........................................................80
Cross Traffic Alert........................................259 Doors and Locks – Warning Lamps..............79
Cross Traffic Alert – Troubleshooting.........261 Drive Belt Routing - 2.3L
Cross Traffic Alert Indicators..................260 EcoBoost™.................................................332
Cross Traffic Alert Limitations................259 Drive Belt Routing - 2.7L
Cross Traffic Alert Precautions...............259 EcoBoost™.................................................333
Cross Traffic Alert – Driver Alert.....................................................269
Troubleshooting.........................................261 Driver Alert – Troubleshooting......................270
Cross Traffic Alert – Information Driver Alert Indicators.................................270
Messages..........................................................261 Driver Alert Limitations.............................269
Cruise Control................................................232 Driver Alert Precautions............................269
Cruise Control Indicators...........................233 Driver Alert – Troubleshooting................270
Customer Information................................461 Driver Alert – Information Messages..........270
Radio Frequency Certification Driving Economically..................................297
Labels...............................................................464 Driving Hints..................................................289
Off-Road Driving................................................289
D
Data Privacy......................................................22
E
Department of Transportation Uniform Electric Parking Brake Audible
Tire Quality Grades..................................368 Warning.........................................................199
Digital Radio....................................................417 Electric Parking Brake.................................198
Digital Radio Indicators....................................418 Electric Parking Brake –
Digital Radio Limitations..................................417 Troubleshooting.............................................199
How Does Digital Radio Work........................417 Electric Parking Brake –
Switching Digital Radio Reception On and Troubleshooting........................................199
Off........................................................................417 Electric Parking Brake – Information
What Is Digital Radio.........................................417 Messages........................................................200
Directing the Flow of Air..............................118
531
Index
Electric Parking Brake – Warning Evasive Steering Assist.............................266

Lamps................................................................199 Evasive Steering Assist Limitations............267
Electric Power Steering..............................219 Switching Evasive Steering Assist On and
Electric Power Steering Precautions...........219 Off.......................................................................267
How Does Electric Power Steering What Is Evasive Steering Assist...................266
Work....................................................................219 Event Data.........................................................23
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............524 Export Unique Options..............................522
Electronic Locking Differential................190 Exterior Bulbs................................................330
Electronic Locking Differential – Changing a Rear Lamp Bulb..........................332
Troubleshooting.............................................192 Exterior Bulb Specification Chart................330
Electronic Locking Differential Removing a Rear Lamp Assembly...............331
Indicators.......................................................191 Exterior Lamps................................................95
Electronic Locking Differential – Exterior Lamp Audible Warning......................97
Troubleshooting.........................................192 Exterior Lamp Indicators...................................96
Electronic Locking Differential – Switching the Daytime Running Lamps On
Information Messages.................................192 and Off................................................................95
Emergency Call Limitations.......................68 Switching the Front Fog Lamps On and
Emergency Call Requirements.................68 Off.........................................................................96
Emergency Call System Data....................25 Switching the Spot Lamps On and
Emergency Towing.....................................309 Off.........................................................................96
Emission Law.................................................521 Switching the Turn Signal Lamps On and
Enabling Apps on an Android Off.........................................................................95
Device............................................................437 Exterior Lighting Control.............................94
Enabling Apps on an iOS Device............437 Exterior Lighting.............................................94
Enabling Remote Start................................114 Autolamps..............................................................95
End User License Agreement.................496 Automatic High Beam Control.......................98
Engine Block Heater....................................153 Automatic High Beam Control –
Engine Block Heater Precautions.................153 Troubleshooting............................................100
How Does the Engine Block Heater Exterior Lamps......................................................95
Work....................................................................153 Exterior Zone Lighting.........................................97
Using the Engine Block Heater......................154 Headlamps.............................................................94
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Headlamps – Troubleshooting.......................94
2.3L EcoBoost™........................................397 Exterior Mirrors..............................................105
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Exterior Zone Lighting...................................97
2.7L EcoBoost™........................................398 Exterior Zone Lighting Settings.......................97
Engine Oil.........................................................321 Using the Exterior Zone Lighting.....................97
Adding Engine Oil................................................321 What Is Exterior Zone Lighting........................97
Checking the Engine Oil Level........................321
Engine Oil Capacity and
Specification...................................................322
F
Engine Oil Dipstick Overview..........................321 Fastening and Unfastening the
Resetting the Engine Oil Change Seatbelts........................................................53
Reminder..........................................................322 Feature Bar....................................................426
Engine Specifications - 2.3L Fender Anchor Points.................................279
EcoBoost™.................................................393 Fender Anchor Point Load
Engine Specifications - 2.7L Capacities........................................................279
EcoBoost™.................................................394 Locating the Fender Anchor Points............279
532
Index
Flat Tire Fuel and Refueling.......................................166

See: Changing a Flat Tire................................387 Fuel and Refueling – Troubleshooting.........171
Floor Mats......................................................298 Fuel Quality...........................................................167
Folding the Exterior Mirrors......................105 Refueling................................................................169
Ford Protect..................................................450 Running Out of Fuel..........................................168
Four-Wheel Drive.........................................182 Fuel and Refueling Precautions.............166
Four-Wheel Drive Modes................................186 Fuel and Refueling –
Four-Wheel Drive – Troubleshooting..........187 Troubleshooting..........................................171
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators.....................187 Fuel and Refueling – Information
Four-Wheel Drive Limitations.................183 Messages............................................................171
Four-Wheel Drive Modes..........................186 Fuel and Refueling – Warning Lamps..........171
Four-Wheel Drive Auto.....................................187 Fuel Gauge......................................................106
Four-Wheel Drive High.....................................187 Fuel Gauge Limitations.....................................107
Four-Wheel Drive Low......................................187 Locating the Fuel Filler Door...........................107
Two-Wheel Drive High.....................................186 What Is Distance to Empty.............................107
Four-Wheel Drive Precautions................182 What Is the Fuel Gauge...................................106
Four-Wheel Drive – What Is the Low Fuel Reminder....................107
Troubleshooting.........................................187 Fuel Quality.....................................................167
Four-Wheel Drive – Information Selecting the Correct Fuel...............................167
Messages..........................................................188 Fuel Tank Capacity........................................171
Four-Wheel Drive – Warning Lamps...........187 Fuse Precautions..........................................310
Front Axle Fluid Capacity and Fuses.................................................................310
Specification..............................................405 Body Control Module Fuse Box.....................314
Front Exterior - 2-Door.................................34 Fuses – Troubleshooting..................................317
Front Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With: Under Hood Fuse Box.......................................310
Hard Top.........................................................35 Fuses – Troubleshooting............................317
Front Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With: Fuses – Frequently Asked Questions..........317
Soft Top..........................................................36
Front Parking Aid..........................................223
Front Parking Aid Audible Warnings...........224
G
Front Parking Aid Limitations........................224 G.O.A.T. Mode Control................................242
Locating the Front Parking Aid G.O.A.T. Mode Control –
Sensors.............................................................224 Troubleshooting............................................246
What is the Front Parking Aid........................223 G.O.A.T. Modes....................................................243
Front Passenger Sensing System............63 G.O.A.T. Mode Control –
Front Passenger Sensing System Troubleshooting........................................246
Indicators............................................................65 G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Frequently Asked
Front Passenger Sensing System Questions........................................................248
Precautions.......................................................65 G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Information
How Does the Front Passenger Sensing Messages.........................................................246
System Work.....................................................63 G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Warning
What Is the Front Passenger Sensing Lamps...............................................................246
System................................................................63 G.O.A.T. Modes..............................................243
Front Seat Precautions..............................126 Baja.........................................................................243
Front Seats......................................................126 Eco...........................................................................243
Heated Seats........................................................132 Mud/Ruts..............................................................243
Manual Seats........................................................127 Normal...................................................................244
Power Seats..........................................................129 Rock Crawl...........................................................244
533
Index
Sand.......................................................................244 Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting........201

Slippery..................................................................245 Hill Start Assist – Information
Sport.......................................................................245 Messages..........................................................201
Garage Door Opener...................................138 Hood Lock
Garage Door Opener Limitations...........138 See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........318
Garage Door Opener Precautions..........138 Horn....................................................................89
Garage Door Opener Radio How Does Adaptive Cruise Control
Frequencies..................................................141 Work...............................................................234
General Maintenance Information........452 How Does Blind Spot Information
Glasses Holder..............................................150 System Work..............................................256
Locating the Glasses Holder..........................150 How Does Cross Traffic Alert
Glossary of Tire Terminology...................374 Work..............................................................259
Glove Compartment...................................149 How Does Driver Alert Work....................269
Locking the Glove Compartment.................149 How Does Four-Wheel Drive Work - 4x4
Opening the Glove Compartment...............149 with Part Time Engagement.................182
How Does Four-Wheel Drive Work -
H Advanced 4x4 with 4A Mode...............182
How Does G.O.A.T. Mode Control
Headlamp Adjusting Work...............................................................242
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................329 How Does Hill Descent Control
Headlamps.......................................................94 Work................................................................217
Headlamp Indicators..........................................94 How Does Hill Start Assist Work............201
Using the High Beam Headlamps.................94 How Does Pre-Collision Assist
Headlamps – Troubleshooting.................94 Work...............................................................262
Headlamps – Frequently Asked How Does Stability Control Work.........204
Questions...........................................................94 How Does the 360 Degree Camera
Heated Seats..................................................132 Work...............................................................229
Heated Seat Precautions.................................132 How Does the Garage Door Opener
Switching the Heated Seats On and Work...............................................................138
Off........................................................................132 How Does the Lane Keeping System
Heating Work..............................................................249
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: How Does the Personal Safety System
Automatic Temperature Control...............117 Work.................................................................58
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
Temperature Control....................................122 System Work...............................................136
Hill Descent Control.....................................217 How Does the Safety Canopy™
Hill Descent Control – Work................................................................60
Troubleshooting.............................................218 How Does Traction Control Work..........202
Hill Descent Control Indicator..................217 How Does Trailer Sway Control
Hill Descent Control Precautions............217 Work..............................................................288
Hill Descent Control – How Do the Front Airbags Work...............59
Troubleshooting.........................................218 How Do the Side Airbags Work................59
Hill Descent Control – Information
Messages..........................................................218
Hill Start Assist..............................................201
I
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting..............201 Identifying Fuse Types................................317
Hill Start Assist Precautions....................201 Identifying the Audio Unit........................424
534
Index
Identifying the Auxiliary Switch Introduction.......................................................17

Wiring............................................................449
Identifying the Climate Control Unit.......117
Inflating the Tires.........................................379
J
Information On Demand Screen - Jump Starting the Vehicle.......................300
Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Screen............427 Jump Starting Precautions............................300
Information on the Tire Sidewall..........369 Jump Starting the Vehicle...............................301
Inspecting the Tire for Damage.............380 Preparing the Vehicle........................................301
Inspecting the Tire for Wear....................380
Inspecting the Wheel Valve Stems........381
Installing Child Restraints...........................44
K
Combining the Seatbelt and Lower Anchors Keyless Entry....................................................82
for Attaching Child Restraints.....................47 Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting....................83
Installing a Child Restraint in a Center Keyless Entry Limitations............................82
Seat.......................................................................47 Keyless Entry Settings..................................82
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting.............83
Children...............................................................46 Keyless Entry – Frequently Asked
Using Seatbelts....................................................44 Questions...........................................................83
Using Tether Straps............................................48 Keys and Remote Controls........................69
Instrument Cluster Display........................112 Keys and Remote Controls –
Personalized Settings........................................113 Troubleshooting...............................................73
Trip Computer.......................................................113 Keys and Remote Controls –
Instrument Cluster Display Main Troubleshooting...........................................73
Menu................................................................112 Keys and Remote Controls – Information
Instrument Cluster Indicators.................109 Messages............................................................73
Instrument Cluster......................................106
Fuel Gauge............................................................106
Instrument Cluster Overview..................106
L
Instrument Cluster Warning Lane Keeping System Indicators...........252
Lamps...........................................................108 Lane Keeping System................................249
Instrument Panel...........................................29 Aid Mode................................................................251
Interior Air Quality.........................................125 Alert and Aid Mode............................................251
Interior Bulbs.................................................332 Alert Mode...........................................................250
Interior Bulb Specification Chart..................332 Lane Keeping System –
Interior Lamp Function................................101 Troubleshooting............................................253
Switching the Interior Lamp Function On Lane Keeping System Limitations........249
and Off...............................................................101 Lane Keeping System
What Is the Interior Lamp Function.............101 Precautions.................................................249
Interior Lighting..............................................101 Lane Keeping System –
Ambient Lighting................................................102 Troubleshooting........................................253
Interior Lamp Function......................................101 Lane Keeping System – Frequently Asked
Interior Lighting – Troubleshooting.............102 Questions........................................................254
Interior Lighting – Troubleshooting.......102 Lane Keeping System – Information
Interior Lighting – Frequently Asked Messages.........................................................253
Questions.........................................................102 Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Interior Mirror.................................................104 Personal Watercraft................................285
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror........................104 Live Traffic.....................................................440
Interior Mirror Precautions........................104 Switching Live Traffic On and Off...............440
535
Index
What Is Live Traffic...........................................440 Manually Shifting Gears............................180

Load Carrying..................................................271 Shifting Using the Buttons on the Selector
Fender Anchor Points.......................................279 Lever...................................................................180
Roof Rack..............................................................276 Manual Seats..................................................127
Load Carrying Precautions........................271 Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................127
Loading Your Trailer....................................284 Adjusting the Seat Backrest...........................129
Locating the 360 Degree Folding the Seats................................................134
Cameras.......................................................230 Head Restraint Components..........................127
Locating the Auxiliary Switches.............447 Installing the Head Restraint.........................128
Locating the Auxiliary Switch Moving the Seat Backward and
Wiring............................................................447 Forward.............................................................128
Locating the Blind Spot Information Removing the Head Restraint........................128
System Sensors.........................................257 Unfolding the Seats...........................................135
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir - 2.3L Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity and
EcoBoost™..................................................194 Specification................................................176
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir - 2.7L Manual Transmission..................................174
EcoBoost™..................................................194 Crawler Gear.........................................................174
Locating the Cross Traffic Alert Manual Transmission –
Sensors........................................................260 Troubleshooting..............................................177
Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel.................167 Manual Transmission Precautions.........174
Locating the Power Outlet........................144 Manual Transmission –
Locating the Pre-Collision Assist Troubleshooting..........................................177
Sensors.........................................................264 Manual Transmission – Frequently Asked
Locating the Rear View Camera............226 Questions..........................................................177
Locating the Safety Compliance Map Pocket.....................................................150
Certification Labels..................................272 Locating the Map Pocket................................150
Locating the Tire label...............................368 Mislock................................................................79
Locating the USB Ports..............................142 Mislock Limitations..............................................79
Locating the Wireless Accessory Switching Mislock On and Off.........................79
Charger...........................................................147 What Is Mislock.....................................................79
Locating Your Vehicle...................................70 Mobile Communications
Locking and Unlocking the Tailgate........84 Equipment..................................................496
Locking the Rear Window Controls.......103 Mobile Device Data........................................25
Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L
M EcoBoost™.................................................395
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L
Maintenance..................................................318 EcoBoost™.................................................396
Engine Oil...............................................................321 Muting the Audio..........................................415
Exterior Bulbs......................................................330 MyKey Settings................................................74
Interior Bulbs.......................................................332 Configurable MyKey Settings...........................74
Maintenance Precautions.........................318 Non-Configurable MyKey Settings................74
Making and Receiving a Phone MyKey – Troubleshooting...........................76
Call.................................................................433 MyKey – Frequently Asked Questions..........77
Manually Dimming the Interior MyKey – Information Messages......................76
Mirror..............................................................104 MyKey™.............................................................74
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking MyKey Settings......................................................74
Brake..............................................................198 MyKey – Troubleshooting..................................76
536
Index
N Parking Aids – Troubleshooting...................225

Rear Parking Aid.................................................223
Navigation Map Updates.........................440 Parking Aids – Troubleshooting.............225
Navigation.....................................................440 Parking Aids – Information
Adjusting the Map............................................440 Messages.........................................................225
Live Traffic...........................................................440 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................87
Route Guidance..................................................441 How Does the Passive Anti-Theft System
Setting a Destination.......................................440 Work.....................................................................87
Waypoints.............................................................441 What Is the Passive Anti-Theft
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........455 System.................................................................87
Perchlorate....................................................495
O Performing a Master Reset......................444
Personalized Settings..................................113
Off-Road Driving.........................................289 Changing the Instrument Cluster Display
After Driving Your Vehicle Off-Road...........295 Language...........................................................113
Basic Off-Road Driving Techniques...........289 Changing the Measure Unit.............................113
Driving Off-Road...............................................290 Changing the Temperature Unit.....................113
Driving Through Water Limitations.............294 Changing the Tire Pressure Unit....................113
Driving Your Vehicle at High Speeds..........296 Personal Safety System
Off-Road Driving Aids......................................294 Components.................................................58
Off-Road Driving Precautions......................289 Personal Safety System™..........................58
What Is Off-Road Driving...............................289 Phone Menu...................................................431
Opening and Closing the Hood...............318 Phone................................................................431
Opening and Closing the Windows.......103 Phone Precautions.......................................431
Opening the Tailgate....................................84 Playing Media Using Bluetooth®..........436
Opening the Tailgate From Outside Your Playing Media Using the USB Port.........142
Vehicle.................................................................84 Playing or Pausing the Audio
Operating the Doors From Inside Your Source............................................................414
Vehicle.............................................................78 Post-Crash Alert System..........................302
Individually Unlocking and Locking the How Does the Post-Crash Alert System
Doors Using the Locking Button................78 Work..................................................................302
Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the Post-Crash Alert System Limitations........302
Central Locking................................................78 Switching the Post-Crash Alert System
Operating the Doors From Outside Your Off......................................................................302
Vehicle.............................................................78 What Is the Post-Crash Alert
Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the System..............................................................302
Remote Control................................................78 Power Outlet Indicators.............................144
Ordering a Canadian French Owner's Power Outlet..................................................144
Manual..........................................................462 Power Outlet Precautions.........................144
Our Sustainability Report..........................461 Power Seats....................................................129
Overriding the Set Speed.........................239 Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................129
Adjusting the Lumbar Support.......................131
P Adjusting the Seat Backrest............................131
Adjusting the Seat Cushion..............................131
Parking Aid Indicators................................225 Adjusting the Seat Height.................................131
Parking Aid Precautions............................222 Head Restraint Components.........................129
Parking Aids...................................................222 Installing the Head Restraint.........................130
Front Parking Aid................................................223
537
Index
Moving the Seat Backward and Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Forward.............................................................130 Sensors.............................................................487
Removing the Head Restraint.......................130 Wireless Accessory Charging Module.........491
Pre-Collision Assist Limitations.............263 Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and
Pre-Collision Assist Precautions............262 Specification..............................................406
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................262 Rear Cargo Area Anchor Points.............280
Automatic Emergency Braking....................266 Locating the Rear Cargo Area Anchor
Distance Indication...........................................264 Points................................................................280
Evasive Steering Assist....................................266 Rear Cargo Area Anchor Point Load
Pre-Collision Assist – Capacities.......................................................280
Troubleshooting............................................267 Rear Cargo Area Anchor Point
Pre-Collision Assist – Precautions....................................................280
Troubleshooting........................................267 Rear Cargo Area...........................................280
Pre-Collision Assist – Frequently Asked Rear Cargo Area Anchor Points...................280
Questions........................................................268 Rear Exterior - 2-Door...................................37
Pre-Collision Assist – Information Rear Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With:
Messages..........................................................267 Hard Top.........................................................38
Pre-Collision Assist – Warning Rear Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With:
Lamps................................................................267 Soft Top..........................................................39
Preparing Your Vehicle for Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Storage.........................................................366 Warnings........................................................137
Programming a MyKey.................................75 Rear Occupant Alert System
Programming the Garage Door Opener Indicators.......................................................137
to Your Garage Door Opener Rear Occupant Alert System
Motor..............................................................139 Limitations...................................................136
Programming the Garage Door Opener Rear Occupant Alert System
to Your Gate Opener Motor...................140 Precautions..................................................136
Programming the Garage Door Opener Rear Occupant Alert System...................136
to Your Hand-Held Transmitter...........139 Rear Parking Aid...........................................223
Programming the Remote Control..........72 Locating the Rear Parking Aid
Properly Adjusting the Driver and Front Sensors.............................................................223
Passenger Seats..........................................62 Rear Parking Aid Audible Warnings.............223
Puncture Rear Parking Aid Limitations.........................223
See: Changing a Flat Tire................................387 What is the Rear Parking Aid.........................223
Push Button Ignition Switch......................151 Rear Seats.......................................................133
Manual Seats.......................................................133
R Rear View Camera Guide Lines..............226
Rear View Camera Object Distance
Radio Frequency Certification Indicators......................................................227
Labels...........................................................464 Rear View Camera Precautions.............226
Blind Spot Information System Rear View Camera.......................................226
Sensors............................................................464 Rear View Camera Settings............................227
Body Control Module.......................................470 Rear View Camera Settings.....................227
Garage Door Opener.........................................473 Switching Rear View Camera Delay On and
Keys and Remote Controls.............................473 Off.......................................................................228
Radio Transceiver Module..............................479 Zooming the Rear View Camera In and
SYNC.......................................................................481 Out......................................................................227
Telematics Control Unit..................................486 Recommended Shift Speeds...................175
538
Index
Recovery Towing..........................................303 Removing and Installing the Front Roof

Accessing the Front Towing Point...............303 Panel..................................................................343
Accessing the Rear Towing Point................304 Removing and Installing the Rear Roof
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle - Panel.................................................................344
Automatic Transmission........................307 Removable Soft Top..................................348
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle - Opening and Closing the Soft Top.............348
Manual Transmission.............................306 Removing and Installing the Soft
Refueling.........................................................169 Top.....................................................................350
Manually Opening the Fuel Filler Removable Vehicle Components..........334
Door....................................................................170 Removable Doors..............................................339
Refueling System Overview...........................169 Removable Fenders...........................................351
Refueling Your Vehicle......................................169 Removable Hard Top........................................347
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if Removable Roof Panels..................................343
the Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of Removable Soft Top........................................348
Charge...........................................................199 Removable Windows.......................................334
Remote Control Limitations......................69 Removable Windows.................................334
Remotely Starting and Stopping the Removable Windows Precautions..............334
Vehicle............................................................114 Removing and Installing the Rear Quarter
Remote Start Limitations...........................114 Windows..........................................................334
Remote Start Precautions.........................114 Removing and Installing the Rear
Remote Start Remote Control Window.............................................................337
Indicators.......................................................115 Removing the Key Blade.............................70
Remote Start...................................................114 Removing Your Vehicle From
Remote Start Settings.......................................115 Storage..........................................................367
Remote Start Settings.................................115 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............364
Setting the Remote Start Duration...............116 Replacement Parts
Switching Climate Control Auto Mode On Recommendation....................................495
and Off................................................................115 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Switching Climate Control Last Settings Control..............................................................71
On and Off.........................................................115 Replacing the Cabin Air Filter...................125
Switching the Heated Seat Settings On and Replacing the Front Wiper Blades............91
Off.........................................................................115 Replacing the Rear Wiper Blades............92
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel Reporting Safety Defects in
Settings On and Off.......................................115 Canada.........................................................463
Removable Doors........................................339 Reporting Safety Defects in the United
Doors and Locks Audible Warnings............343 States............................................................463
Removing and Installing the Doors............339 Reprogramming the Garage Door
Removable Fenders.....................................351 Opener............................................................141
Removable Fender Precautions....................351 Restarting the Engine - Automatic
Removing the Fender Flares...........................351 Transmission...............................................163
Removable Hard Top..................................347 Restarting the Engine - Manual
Removing and Installing the Hard Transmission...............................................162
Top......................................................................347 Resuming the Set Speed..........................233
Removable Roof Panels...........................343 Reverse Wipe..................................................90
Removable Roof Panel Precautions..........343 Reverse Wipe Settings.......................................90
Removing and Installing the Center Roof What Is Reverse Wipe........................................90
Panel.................................................................344 Roadside Assistance..................................299
Rollover Warning..........................................461
539
Index
Roof Rack........................................................276 Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode - 4x4

Adjusting a Roof Rack Crossbar...................278 with Part Time Engagement.................185
Removing and Installing the Roof Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode -
Rack....................................................................276 Advanced 4x4 with 4A Mode...............186
Roof Rack Load Capacities............................278 Selecting a G.O.A.T. Mode.........................242
Roof Rack Precautions....................................276 Selecting the Audio Source......................414
Route Guidance............................................441 Sending and Receiving a Text
Adjusting the Guidance Prompt Message.......................................................434
Volume..............................................................441 Sensitive Locking Mode...............................53
Canceling Route Guidance............................442 How Does Sensitive Locking Mode
Repeating an Instruction.................................441 Work.....................................................................53
Route Guidance Settings................................442 What is Sensitive Locking Mode.....................53
Running-In Service Data.....................................................23
See: Breaking-In.................................................297 Setting a Destination.................................440
Running Out of Fuel....................................168 Setting a Destination Using a Point of
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Interest..............................................................441
Container..........................................................168 Setting a Destination Using a Predictive
Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................168 Destination.......................................................441
Setting a Destination Using a Recent
S Destination.......................................................441
Setting a Destination Using a Saved
Satellite Radio...............................................418 Destination.......................................................441
Locating the Satellite Radio Identification Setting a Destination Using the Map
Number.............................................................418 Screen................................................................441
Satellite Radio Limitations.............................418 Setting a Destination Using the Text Entry
Satellite Radio Settings...................................419 Screen..............................................................440
Selecting a Channel..........................................419 Setting a Memory Preset...........................415
What Is Satellite Radio....................................418 Settings Data...................................................24
Scheduled Maintenance...........................452 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Seatbelt Extensions.......................................57 Gap.................................................................238
Seatbelt Precautions....................................52 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Seatbelt Reminder........................................54 Speed.............................................................237
How Does the Seatbelt Reminder Setting the Blower Motor Speed.............118
Work.....................................................................54 Setting the Clock and Date.......................415
Seatbelt Reminder Indicators.........................55 Setting the Cruise Control Speed..........232
Switching the Seatbelt Reminder On and Setting the Hill Descent Speed................217
Off.........................................................................56 Setting the Temperature............................118
Seatbelts...........................................................52 Setting the Trail Control Speed..............207
Automatic Locking Mode..................................54 Setting the Wake Word.............................428
Seatbelt Reminder..............................................54 Shifting Into Reverse....................................174
Sensitive Locking Mode.....................................53 Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear................179
Security..............................................................87 Sitting in the Correct Position..................126
Passive Anti-Theft System...............................87 Sounding the Panic Alarm..........................70
Security – Troubleshooting..............................87 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Security – Troubleshooting........................87 Maintenance...............................................457
Security – Frequently Asked Speed Control
Questions...........................................................88 See: Cruise Control............................................232
Security – Information Messages..................87 Stability Control Indicator........................206
540
Index
Stability Control...........................................204 Steering – Troubleshooting.....................220

Stabilizer Bar Disconnect Steering – Frequently Asked
Indicators......................................................215 Questions..........................................................221
Stabilizer Bar Disconnect Steering – Information Messages...............220
Precautions..................................................214 Steering Wheel...............................................89
Stabilizer Bar Disconnect..........................214 Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Stabilizer Bar Disconnect – Cruise Control................................................27
Troubleshooting.............................................215 Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Cruise
Stabilizer Bar Disconnect – Control, Vehicles Without: Lane
Troubleshooting.........................................215 Keeping Aid....................................................26
Stabilizer Bar Disconnect – Frequently Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Cruise
Asked Questions............................................216 Control/Lane Keeping Aid.......................28
Stabilizer Bar Disconnect – Information Stopping the Engine - Automatic
Messages..........................................................215 Transmission...............................................162
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Stopping the Engine - Manual
Precautions...................................................151 Transmission................................................161
Starting and Stopping the Engine...........151 Stopping the Engine....................................154
Automatic Engine Stop....................................155 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Engine Block Heater..........................................153 Moving...............................................................154
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Troubleshooting.............................................156 Stationary.........................................................154
Starting the Engine............................................152 Storage.............................................................149
Stopping the Engine..........................................154 Center Console....................................................149
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Glasses Holder....................................................150
Troubleshooting.........................................156 Glove Compartment.........................................149
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Map Pocket...........................................................150
Frequently Asked Questions.....................158 Under Floor Storage..........................................150
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Storing the Doors and the Roof Panels
Information Messages..................................157 - 4-Door........................................................352
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Storing the Roof Panels - 2-Door..........359
Warning Lamps..............................................156 Storing Your Vehicle...................................366
Start in Gear Limitations...........................159 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
Start in Gear Precautions..........................159 and Off..........................................................237
Start in Gear...................................................159 Switching Air Conditioning On and
Start in Gear – Troubleshooting...................160 Off.....................................................................117
Start in Gear – Troubleshooting.............160 Switching All of the Interior Lamps On
Start in Gear – Frequently Asked and Off...........................................................101
Questions.........................................................160 Switching Android Auto On and
Start in Gear – Information Off..................................................................438
Messages.........................................................160 Switching Apple CarPlay On and
Starting the Engine......................................152 Off..................................................................438
Restarting the Engine After Stopping Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and
it............................................................................152 Off....................................................................161
Starting a Gasoline Engine..............................152 Switching Blind Spot Information
Status Bar.......................................................425 System On and Off...................................257
Steering............................................................219 Switching Climate Control On and
Electric Power Steering....................................219 Off.....................................................................117
Steering – Troubleshooting...........................220
541
Index
Switching Cross Traffic Alert On and Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
Off..................................................................259 On and Off.....................................................89
Switching Cruise Control On and Switching the Lane Keeping System
Off...................................................................232 Mode.............................................................250
Switching Driver Alert On and Off.........270 Switching the Lane Keeping System On
Switching Four-Wheel Drive On and and Off.........................................................250
Off...................................................................184 Switching the Rear Interior Lamps On
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control and Off...........................................................101
to Cruise Control.......................................240 Switching the Rear Window Wiper On
Switching Hill Descent Control On and and Off............................................................90
Off....................................................................217 Switching the Stabilizer Bar Disconnect
Switching Hill Start Assist On and Off - On and Off....................................................214
Automatic Transmission........................201 Switching Traction Control On and
Switching Hill Start Assist On and Off - Off..................................................................202
Manual Transmission...............................201 Switching Trail Control On and
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off...................................................................207
Off.....................................................................117 Switching Trailer Sway Control On and
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off..................................................................288
Off.....................................................................117 Switching Trail Turn Assist On and
Switching Parking Aid On and Off.........222 Off....................................................................212
Switching Pre-Collision Assist On and Symbols Glossary...........................................19
Off..................................................................264 Symbols Used on Your Vehicle..................19
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
On and Off...................................................136
Switching Recirculated Air On and
T
Off.....................................................................117 Tailgate..............................................................84
Switching Repeat Mode On and Closing the Tailgate.............................................84
Off...................................................................415 Opening the Tailgate..........................................84
Switching Shuffle Mode On and Tailgate – Troubleshooting..............................86
Off...................................................................415 Tailgate – Troubleshooting........................86
Switching Stability Control On and Tailgate – Information Messages..................86
Off..................................................................205 Tailgate – Warning Lamps...............................86
Switching Text Message Notification On Technical Specifications
and Off.........................................................435 See: Capacities and Specifications............393
Switching the Audio Unit On and The Better Business Bureau Auto Line
Off...................................................................414 Program - United States of
Switching the Display On and Off..........417 America.........................................................461
Switching the Electronic Locking The Mediation and Arbitration Program
Differential On and Off...........................190 - Canada......................................................462
Switching the Front Interior Lamps On Tire Care..........................................................379
and Off...........................................................101 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Switching the Hazard Flashers On and Limitations..................................................384
Off..................................................................300 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Overview......................................................383
Off....................................................................118 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Switching the Heated Rear Window On Precautions................................................384
and Off...........................................................118
542
Index
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........383 Trail Control – Troubleshooting...............211

Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Trail Control – Information Messages..........211
Troubleshooting............................................385 Trailer Brake Precautions..........................283
Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Trailer Sway Control Precautions..........288
Troubleshooting........................................385 Trailer Sway Control...................................288
Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Trailer Towing Hints....................................284
Information Messages................................386 Trail One Pedal Drive.................................208
Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Warning Switching Trail One Pedal Drive On and
Lamps...............................................................385 Off......................................................................209
Tire Replacement Requirements...........375 Trail One Pedal Drive Indicators..................209
Tire Rotation...................................................381 Trail One Pedal Drive Limitations................208
Towing a Trailer Limitations....................284 Trail One Pedal Drive Precautions..............208
Towing a Trailer Precautions...................283 What Is Trail One Pedal Drive.......................208
Towing a Trailer............................................283 Trail One Pedal Drive –
Towing a Trailer – Troubleshooting.............287 Troubleshooting.........................................210
Towing Weights and Dimensions................286 Trail One Pedal Drive – Information
Towing a Trailer – Messages..........................................................210
Troubleshooting........................................287 Trail Turn Assist Indicators........................212
Towing a Trailer – Information Trail Turn Assist Limitations......................212
Messages.........................................................287 Trail Turn Assist Precautions....................212
Towing Weights and Dimensions..........286 Trail Turn Assist.............................................212
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer Trail Turn Assist – Troubleshooting.............213
Weight for Your Vehicle..............................287 Trail Turn Assist –
Recommended Towing Weights.................286 Troubleshooting.........................................213
What Is the Maximum Loaded Trailer Trail Turn Assist – Frequently Asked
Weight...............................................................287 Questions..........................................................213
Towing Your Vehicle Precautions..........306 Trail Turn Assist – Information
Towing Your Vehicle...................................306 Messages..........................................................213
Towing Your Vehicle – Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and
Troubleshooting...........................................309 Specification................................................187
Towing Your Vehicle – Transporting the Vehicle..........................305
Troubleshooting.......................................309 Trip Computer.................................................113
Towing Your Vehicle – Information Accessing the Trip Computer..........................113
Messages........................................................309 Resetting the Individual Trip Values.............113
Traction Control Indicator........................202 Resetting the Trip Computer...........................113
Traction Control...........................................202
Traction Control – Troubleshooting...........203
Traction Control –
U
Troubleshooting........................................203 Under Floor Storage....................................150
Traction Control – Information Locating the Luggage Compartment Under
Messages.........................................................203 Floor Storage...................................................150
Trail Control Indicators..............................208 Under Hood Fuse Box.................................310
Trail Control Limitations............................207 Accessing the Under Hood Fuse Box..........310
Trail Control....................................................207 Identifying the Fuses in the Under Hood
Trail Control – Troubleshooting......................211 Fuse Box.............................................................311
Trail One Pedal Drive.......................................208 Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box............310
Trail One Pedal Drive – Under Hood Overview - 2.3L
Troubleshooting.............................................210 EcoBoost™..................................................319
543
Index
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L Using the Rear Window Washer.....................93

EcoBoost™.................................................320 Using the Windshield Washer.........................92
Updating the Vehicle Systems Washer Fluid Specification...............................93
Wirelessly....................................................443 Washer Precautions............................................92
USB Ports........................................................142 Washers
Using Keyless Entry.......................................82 See: Wipers and Washers.................................90
Using MyKey With Remote Start Waxing Your Vehicle...................................364
Systems..........................................................76 Waypoints.......................................................441
Using Snow Chains......................................377 Adding a Waypoint............................................441
Using Start in Gear.......................................159 Editing Waypoints..............................................441
Using the Instrument Cluster Display What Are the Auxiliary Switches...........447
Controls..........................................................112 What Are the Instrument Cluster
Using the Remote Control..........................69 Indicators.....................................................109
Using This Publication..................................18 What Are the Instrument Cluster
Warning Lamps..........................................107
V What Is 911 Assist..........................................68
What Is a Connected Vehicle.................409
Vehicle Care..................................................360 What Is Auto-Start-Stop............................161
Cleaning the Exterior.......................................360 What Is Blind Spot Information
Cleaning the Interior.........................................362 System..........................................................256
Vehicle Identification Number...............408 What Is Cross Traffic Alert.......................259
Locating the Vehicle Identification What Is Cruise Control...............................232
Number............................................................408 What Is Driver Alert.....................................269
Vehicle Identification Number What Is Ford Protect..................................450
Overview.........................................................408 What Is G.O.A.T. Mode Control................242
Vehicle Identification.................................408 What Is Hill Descent Control.....................217
Vehicle Identification Number.....................408 What Is Hill Start Assist.............................201
Vehicle Interior - 2-Door...............................32 What Is MyKey.................................................74
Vehicle Interior - 4-Door..............................33 What Is Pre-Collision Assist....................262
Vehicle System Updates..........................443 What Is Remote Start..................................114
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.................................412 What Is Start in Gear...................................159
Ventilation What Is the 360 Degree Camera...........229
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: What Is the Cabin Air Filter.......................125
Automatic Temperature Control...............117 What Is the Catalytic Converter..............173
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual What Is the Electric Parking Brake........198
Temperature Control....................................122 What Is the Electronic Locking
Viewing the Tire Pressures.......................385 Differential...................................................190
Visual Search...................................................26 What Is the Engine Coolant Temperature
Voice Interaction Examples.....................428 Gauge.............................................................107
Voice Interaction..........................................428 What Is the Garage Door Opener...........138
What Is the Gross Axle Weight
W Rating.............................................................272
What Is the Gross Combined Weight
Washer Fluid Specification......................402 Rating.............................................................272
Washers.............................................................92 What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight
Adding Washer Fluid...........................................93 Rating.............................................................272
Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and What Is the Information Bar.....................107
Off.........................................................................93 What Is the Lane Keeping System........249
544
Index
What Is the Maximum Loaded Trailer Wipers and Washers –

Weight...........................................................272 Troubleshooting..............................................93
What Is the Personal Safety Wipers................................................................90
System............................................................58 Switching Windshield Wipers On and
What Is the Power Outlet..........................144 Off.........................................................................90
What is the Rear Occupant Alert Wiper Precautions...............................................90
System...........................................................136 Wireless Accessory Charger
What Is the Rear View Camera..............226 Precautions..................................................147
What Is the Speedometer........................106 Wireless Accessory Charger –
What Is the Stabilizer Bar Troubleshooting.........................................148
Disconnect...................................................214 Wireless Accessory Charger – Information
What Is the Tachometer............................106 Messages..........................................................148
What Is the Tire Pressure Monitoring Wireless Accessory Charger......................147
System..........................................................383 Wireless Accessory Charger –
What Is the Transmission Fluid Troubleshooting.............................................148
Temperature Gauge..................................107
What Is the Turbo Boost Gauge - 2.3L
EcoBoost™..................................................107
What Is the Wireless Accessory
Charger...........................................................147
What Is Traction Control...........................202
What Is Trail Control...................................207
What Is Trail Turn Assist.............................212
What is Voice Interaction.........................428
Wheel and Tire Information....................368
Wheel Nuts....................................................392
Wi Fi
See: Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password........................................412
See: Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network...........................................................409
See: Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.......412
See: Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.............................412
Window Bounce-Back...............................103
Overriding Window Bounce-Back................103
What Is Window Bounce-Back.....................103
Windows..........................................................103
Window Bounce-Back.....................................103
Wipers and Washers –
Troubleshooting..........................................93
Wipers and Washers – Frequently Asked
Questions...........................................................93
Wipers and Washers – Warning
Lamps..................................................................93
Wipers and Washers....................................90
Reverse Wipe........................................................90
Washers...................................................................92
Wipers......................................................................90
545
546
, Edition date: 202101

2021 Ford Bronco

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 Ford Bronco

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 Ford Bronco

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 FORD BRONCO Owner's Manual

All rights reserved.

WARNING: Operating, servicing and

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and

Contacting Us Rear Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With:

Front Passenger Sensing System ...........63 Mislock ...............................................................79

911 Assist Keyless Entry

Headlamps ......................................................94 Fuel Gauge .....................................................106

Exterior Mirrors Climate Control - Vehicles

Switching Air Conditioning On and Off Front Seats

Reprogramming the Garage Door Opener Starting and Stopping the

Fuel and Refueling Automatic Transmission Audible

Brake Fluid Specification ..........................195 Stability Control Indicator .......................206

Steering Adaptive Cruise Control

What Is the Maximum Loaded Trailer Floor Mats .....................................................298

Changing the 12V Battery ........................326 Tire Care

Removable Vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring

Storing Your Vehicle Engine Specifications - 2.3L EcoBoost™

Fuel Tank Capacity .....................................401 Playing or Pausing the Audio Source

Bluetooth® Ford Protect

If you require assistance or clarification on China - Imported Vehicle

North Africa For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for

Ford Credit - US Only

ABOUT THIS PUBLICATION Our digital resources include a

Thank you for choosing Ford. We Illustrations

USING THIS PUBLICATION

SYMBOLS USED ON YOUR Child seat tether anchor

Air conditioning system Do not open when hot

Air conditioning system lubricant Electric Parking brake

Anti-lock braking system Engine air filter

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Engine coolant

Battery acid Engine oil

Brake fluid - non petroleum Explosive gas

Brake system Fan warning

Brake system Fasten seatbelt

Check fuel cap Airbag

Child seat lower anchor Fuel pump reset

Fuse compartment Passenger airbag deactivated

Hazard flashers Power steering fluid

Heated rear window Power windows front/rear

Windshield defrosting system Power window lockout

Interior luggage compartment Requires registered technician

Jack Safety alert

Keep out of reach of children See Owner's Manual

Lighting control See Service Manual

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Shield the eyes

Windshield wash and wipe

• Events or errors in essential systems,

SERVICE DATA you, where permitted by law. For Canada

Note: Event data recorder data is recorded Entertainment Data

STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: CRUISE CONTROL,

A See Setting the Cruise Control Speed (page 232).

STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE

A See Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Speed (page 237).

STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: CRUISE CONTROL/LANE

A See Setting the Cruise Control Speed (page 232).

A See Exterior Lighting Control (page 94).

CENTER CONSOLE - MANUAL TRANSMISSION

A See Locating the Power Outlet (page 146).